Field Fitter

Field Fitter

Pick your material first
Start with what you're running. Each material has its own book — its own cut rule, its own tables, its own gotchas. Nothing from the other materials shows up in it. Below that is the stuff that's the same no matter what's in your hands.
Pick your material
Works on everything
Your accountsettings · billing · terms
Nothing by that name. Try a size (2"), a word (rolling, torque), or a number (1.414).

Every table in the book, one tap away. If you already know what you're doing and just need the number, start here and skip the reading.

Every daythe ones you'll open most
Weld Pipesection 1
Screw Pipesection 2
Coppersection 3
PVC & CPVCsection 4
Cast Ironsection 6
Math & Layoutsection 7
Offsetssection 8
Supports & Hangerssection 9
Riggingsection 25
Sprinkler Fittingsection 27
Welding & Cert Prepsection 28
Pipelinesection 29
Flanges & Bolt-upsection 10
Testing & Startupsection 11
Job Sensesection 12
Conduit Bendingsection 14
Layout & Fabricationsection 15
Shop Tablessection 16
Conversions & Trigsection 17
Math, Step by Stepsection 18
Tools & Measuringsection 19
Plumbingsection 23

This list is built from the book itself every time it is published, so a new table shows up here on its own.

Or let the book do it

Thirteen calculators sit in 13.1 — offsets, cut lengths, fractions, conversions, weights, flow, volume, grade, triangles, circumference, expansion, sling loads and pressure. Every one of them shows the math underneath, so you can check it by hand.

A table in this book gives you a number fast. Knowing what kind of number it is — and what beats it — is what keeps it from costing you a joint.

Working the table itself

  • Find your size down the left. The first column is frozen on the wide tables, so it stays put while the rest scrolls.
  • Wide tables scroll sideways. If a table looks like it stops at the edge of your screen, drag it left — there are more columns.
  • Copper numbers are the ones worth noticing. Anywhere a figure is printed in copper it is either the one people use most or the one that breaks the pattern.
  • Every dimension in this book is in inches unless the column head says otherwise. Millimetres are in 17.4.

What kind of number you are looking at

KindWhat it means and what beats it
Nominal per a standardFitting and flange dimensions, pipe walls, thread data. The entry names the standard — B16.9, B16.5, B36.10M and so on. The standard itself is the authority, and real fittings are allowed a tolerance around it.
ComputedOrdinates, trig, conversions, offset constants. These come out of the geometry and they are exact — you can check any of them with the formula printed beside the table.
Typical working figureGrooved take-outs, olet heights, torque, torch pressures, valve lengths. These vary by maker. The catalogue or the card in the box governs, always.
Common maximumHanger spacing, grade, drainage. Local code governs and it differs by jurisdiction. Where two tables disagree, the tighter one wins.
Safe working loadRope and rigging. Already divided by the design factor — do not divide it again. The tag on the sling beats every table there is.
What beats this book

Your job spec and drawings, the code or standard the job is built to, and the maker's data for the fitting in your hand all outrank this book. When any of them disagree with a number on this page, they win and the book is wrong for your job.

That is not modesty. A book cannot know your class, your service, your temperature or which shop made the fitting on your rack.

Which of those wins over the others depends on the job, the contract and the jurisdiction — it is not a fixed order. If the spec, the drawing, the code and the maker's data disagree with each other, do not pick one yourself. Stop and ask your foreman or the engineer.

Between two rows

Most of these tables step in whole sizes, half degrees or hundredths. When your number falls between two rows, take the difference between them and split it by how far along you are.

Worked — a tangent between rows You need tan 32.7°. The table has 32° at .6249 and 33° at .6494.
Step per degree: .6494 − .6249 = .0245
You are .7 of the way: .6249 + (.7 × .0245) = .6421
The calculator says .6420. A ten-thousandth apart, on a number you are about to round to the nearest sixteenth anyway.

Interpolating works on anything that changes smoothly — trig, ordinates, conversions. It does not work on fitting dimensions. A 5" take-out is not halfway between the 4" and the 6", and pipe schedules do not interpolate at all.

Round once, at the end

Carry the decimals all the way through the math and convert to a fraction only when you have the final number. Round at three steps in one offset and you will be an eighth out with no idea where it went.

Measure the first one out of every box

Patterns vary between makers, reconditioned fittings drift, and imported fittings may not be to the standard at all. Check the first fitting from each box against the table. If they agree, trust the table for the rest of that box. If they do not, trust the fitting in your hand and write the real number on the lid.

Weld pipe is the simplest material in this book to figure and the least forgiving to get wrong. There is no thread to back off and no socket to slide in — the pipe stops at the face of the fitting and the welder closes the gap. Get the number right and it fits. Get it wrong and you cut a new piece.

Everything in this section follows one joint from the print to the finished weld, in the order you actually do it. This page is the vocabulary you need before any of the rest of it makes sense.

Centre to centre: the most common dimension on prints

ONE DIMENSION, THREE PIECES OF IT FACE FACE working point THE PIECE YOU CUT T.O. T.O. CENTRE TO CENTRE — what the print says working point to working point blue = the root gap the welder needs at each end
The print gives you one number: centre to centre. Inside it sit two take-outs, two root gaps and the pipe you actually cut. Learning to see those four things in one dimension is most of what this section teaches.

The most common measurement in the pipe world is centre to centre (C-TO-C or CTC), and it is the centreline of one fitting to the centreline of the next. Not the outside of one fitting to the outside of the next. Not face to face. The centre of one fitting to the centre of the next.

It is measured that way because the centreline is the only thing that does not change. Faces move when you swap a long radius elbow for a short one; the point where the two centrelines cross does not care what fitting you hang there. That crossing point is the working point, and it sits out in mid-air where there is no metal at all — which is exactly why you cannot hook a tape on it and why take-outs exist.

Take-out, in detail

WORKING POINT FACE FACE TAKE-OUT LR 90 TAKE-OUT 1.5 × SIZE 6" pipe → 9" 8" pipe → 12" 12" pipe → 18" 45 LR runs about .625 × SIZE Full table in 1.11. WHAT A TAKE-OUT ACTUALLY IS
Take-out is the distance from the working point to the face of the fitting — the length the fitting occupies along one leg of the dimension. Subtract one at each end of your C-to-C and what is left is pipe. The working point is where the two centrelines cross — there is no metal there.

Take-out is not the size of the fitting. It is how much of your dimension the fitting eats. Every elbow and tee has one, it is published in a standard, and it is a fixed nominal figure for a given size and pattern — which is what makes the math reliable. (The fitting in your hand can still be off by its tolerance; 1.11h.)

TAKE-OUT = WORKING POINT → FACE OF FITTING

You will also hear it called centre to face or centre to end. Same number, three names. Where it comes from geometrically is the bend radius times the tangent of half the turn — worked through in 18.16 if you want it — but on the job you read it off 1.11 or, on a long radius 90, you do 1.5 times the size in your head.

The words, and what each one points at

TOP — top of pipe CL — centreline BOP — bottom of pipe outside the pipe, not the bore FACE OF FLANGE the raised face the gasket sits on, and what a flange runs to FACE OF FLANGE TO WHATEVER SAME PIPE, FOUR DIFFERENT ANSWERS Which one the print means is the whole question.
A 12" line called at TOP and the same line called at BOP are more than a foot apart. Read which one the drawing is dimensioning to before you hang anything.
C-to-C
Centre to centre. Working point to working point. How prints dimension.
Working point
Where two centrelines cross. A point in mid-air with no metal at it.
Take-out
Working point to the face of the fitting. What you subtract.
Face of fitting
The flat, prepped end of an elbow, tee or reducer, where your pipe stops.
Face of pipe
The cut and bevelled end of the pipe itself. On a butt weld joint the two faces sit a gap apart — they never touch.
Face of flange
The gasket surface. Flange dimensions and valve face-to-face figures run to it, and it is what lands against the mating flange.
TOP / BOP
Top of pipe and bottom of pipe — the outside, not the bore. BOP is what sits on the steel, so it is what racks get set to.
Invert
The inside bottom. Drainage grade is set to invert, and it differs from BOP by one wall thickness.
TOS
Top of steel. The beam, not the pipe.
Cut length
The raw piece of pipe, end to end, before it is bevelled. What you write on the cut list.
Root gap
The space between the two faces that the welder needs to get the root in. Usually 1/16" to 1/8".
Bevel
The angle ground or cut on the end of the pipe or fitting so the weld can reach the full wall. Standard is 37-1/2° off square (± 2-1/2°, ASME B16.25), so two bevelled ends make a 75° groove.
Land / root face
The flat strip left at the bore when you bevel — about 1/16".
Spool
Pipe with fittings already welded on, built at the bench and set as one piece.
Field weld
A joint deliberately left open so the spool can be adjusted in place. Marked FW on the iso.

The full trade glossary is 12.9, and the parts of a fitting are drawn and labelled in 19.1.

Why weld pipe has no add-back

The habit that ruins weld pipe

Threaded pipe screws into its fitting and copper slides into a socket, so on both of those you get some length back. Butt weld does not. The pipe stops at the face, nothing goes inside, and nothing comes back.

If you ever catch yourself adding a number back on a butt weld joint, you have carried a habit over from another material. Take-outs come off. That is all.

What you measure and mark with

  • 25 ft tapeOne tape for the whole job, and do not lend it. Two tapes can disagree a sixteenth over ten feet and both be in tolerance. Reading one properly is 19.2.
  • Wrap-aroundThe single most useful thing in your bags on weld pipe. Squares a line all the way round a pipe, which nothing else will do. Full page at 1.4.
  • Soapstone and a holderMarks on hot, oily, scaled steel where a marker will not. Keep it sharpened flat, not pointed.
  • Silver streak or paint penFor marks that have to survive handling. Keep paint off anything about to be welded.
  • Framing square and a combination squareChecking a face, marking square across, and finding the centre of a pipe end (19.7).
  • Torpedo level and a 2 ft levelThe torpedo lives in your bags; the 2 ft is the one you trust on a run. Reverse-check both (19.3).
  • Centre punchA soapstone line disappears the first time somebody handles the pipe. A punch mark does not.
  • Hi-lo gaugeCheap, small, and the only way to know what the bores are doing once the outsides are lined up.
  • Contour markerA washer with a soapstone through it. Scribes a fishmouth around anything round, faster than any layout.

The full weld-pipe kit — cutting, bevelling, fit-up and rigging — is 1.10.

The order this section runs in

Measure it (1.2), figure it (1.3), wrap and mark it (1.4), cut it (1.5), prep it (1.6), fit it (1.7), weld it (1.8), and check it again (1.9). If you are new, read them in that order once. After that you will only ever open the one you need.

The math is the easy part. Getting a good measurement to run it on is what gets people, because there’s usually nothing at the working point to hook a tape to.

Where the tape actually goes

1 — OFF A SQUARE END Hook the end. Only works if that end is genuinely square — check it first (1.6a). 2 — TO A FLANGE FACE The gasket face is a real surface you can butt a tape to. Best field reference there is. 3 — TO A FITTING FACE what you measure + T.O. You can reach the face. You cannot reach the dot. So measure to the face and add the take-out on paper. Write down which one you did. “38 inches” means nothing on its own.
Three references that exist in the real world, and one — the working point — that does not. Everything you measure in the field is one of the first three plus math.

Measuring off a square end

A square end is the most useful thing on a piece of pipe, because it is the only end you can hook a tape to and trust. Every layout in this section starts from one.

  1. Check it is actually square before you measure anything off it. A wrap-around laid round the end will show you in five seconds — if the edges of the wrap line up with each other but not with the pipe end, that end is out. Full check in 1.6a.
  2. If it is not square, make it square first. Cutting a piece to a perfect dimension off a crooked end gives you a perfectly wrong piece.
  3. Hook the tape on the end and pull your dimension. The hook slides by its own thickness so it reads true both pushing and pulling — that slop is not wear (19.2).
  4. Mark with a wrap line, not a tick. A tick tells you where. A wrap line tells you where and square, and it is the line you are going to cut to.
Burning an inch — optional

You don't have to burn an inch. If your hook is straight and tight, hooking the end is fine, and it is what most fitters do day to day. Burning an inch is just something you can do when you don't trust the hook — it's bent, it's loose, the end won't take it — or on a long or critical pull where you want the hook out of the picture.

How: line the 1" mark up with the end instead of the hook, read the tape, then take 1" off what you read.

It doesn't have to be an inch. You can burn any number you want — 1", 2", 10", whatever lines up easy on the end. It works the same way as long as you know what you burned and take that same amount back off. A round number like 10" makes the math easy: burn 10", read 52-3/8", your measurement is 42-3/8".

If you do burn an inch, these are the two ways it goes wrong:

  1. Forgetting to take it back off. Burn an inch, forget to subtract it, and your piece comes out an inch long — burn 10" and forget, and it's 10" long. Same thing if your partner burned it and never told you. So say it out loud — “burning an inch,” “burning ten” — to whoever is on the other end of the tape.
  2. Not doing it the same way every time. If you burn an inch on one measurement and hook the next one — or burn 1" one time and 2" the next — your numbers won't match and you won't know which is right. Pick one way and stick with it for the whole run.

Taking a field weld measurement

The common job: two spools are hung, there is a gap between them, and you have to make the piece that closes it.

  1. Get both ends supported and where they will finally sit. A spool resting on a come-along is not where it will be tomorrow.
  2. Measure face to face — the actual gap between the two prepped ends, not centre to centre. This is the one place in weld pipe where face-to-face is the number you want.
  3. Take off the two root gaps the welder is going to hold. Your piece has to be shorter than the opening by two gaps.
  4. Take it in two places, 90° apart around the pipe, and take the same measurement twice. If the two readings differ, something is out of square or out of line — find out which before you cut.
  5. Write it on the pipe along with the line number and which end is which.
FIELD PIECE = GAP MEASURED − GAPA − GAPB
Worked — closing an opening in 6" Face to face between the two prepped ends: 41-3/8"
Welder is holding 1/8" gaps: 41-3/8 − 1/8 − 1/8 = 41-1/8"
Cut it at 41-1/8", bevel both ends, and it drops in with the gap he asked for.
Cut the closing piece long

On a field weld that has to close between two fixed ends, leave 1/2" to 1" on it and trim to fit. Everything upstream of that joint has been accumulating error all day — hanger positions, weld shrink, a spool that pulled. The closing piece is where all of it lands.

A piece cut an inch long takes five minutes to trim. A piece cut a quarter short is scrap.

Habits that keep field measurements honest

  • Pull everything from one benchmark, not from the last thing you set. Chained measurements stack their errors, and on a long rack that is how the far end ends up two inches out with every individual measurement correct. String lines and how to use them: 19.5.
  • Measure it twice, and the second time act like you have not seen the first number. Reading what you expect to read is the commonest error in the trade.
  • Both people say the number out loud. "Forty-one and an eighth" beats a thumbs-up across a bay every time.
  • Photograph anything you are about to cover up, with a tape in the shot.
  • Check the print against the field before you cut, not after. When they disagree, that is a foreman question — 12.7.
The four field measurementsTape hooked on a square end, tape butted to a flange face, tape to a fitting face with the take-out being added on a note, and a two-man pull across a bay with both men reading. PHOTO
From the Trade

“Simple run: measure it all up front. Tight or complex: piece by piece.” — Seth Edstrom. His full tip: 21.3.

One subtraction per end, and then whatever else sits in the joint. Most of the math on a weld spool starts here, and when a spool comes out long or short, this is usually where it went wrong.

CUT = C-to-C − TAKE-OUTA − TAKE-OUTB − GAPA − GAPB

What comes off, in order

Comes offHow much
Take-outsOff 1.11, or 1.5 × size for an LR 90 in your head. One at each end, and they can be different if the two fittings are different.
Root gaps1/16" to 1/8" at every welded end — whatever your welder is holding. Only if your shop cuts to true dimensions; see below.
Gaskets1/16" or 1/8" at every bolted joint. Only where a flange pair is inside your dimension.
Nothing for the bevelBevelling takes metal off the wall, not off the length. The pipe does not get shorter when you grind the prep on it.
Worked — 6" line, 90 to 90, 8'-4" C-to-C 8'-4" = (8 × 12) + 4 = 100"
6" LR 90 take-out = 9.00 each end → 100 − 9 − 9 = 82.00"
Welder holds 1/8" gaps, shop cuts true: 82 − 1/8 − 1/8 = 81-3/4"
Cut length, 90 to 90

Step through it

6" LR 906" LR 90 WPWP 8'-4" C-to-C (8 × 12) + 4 = 100" 9.009.00 100 − 9 − 9 = 82.00" take-out = 1.5 × 6 = 9" 1/8" gap1/8" gap 82 − .125 − .125 = 81.75" CUT 81-3/4" CHECK BEFORE YOU CUT 81-3/4 is shorter than 100 — good 18-1/4 off = 2 take-outs + 2 gaps
Worked — a flange on one end 4" line, 90 on one end and a 150# weld neck on the other, 60" centre of elbow to face of flange.
4" LR 90 take-out = 6.00 → comes off the elbow end
A weld neck's length-through-hub is 3.00" (1.11f) → comes off the flange end
60 − 6.00 − 3.00 = 51.00" − two 1/8" gaps = 50.75" = 50-3/4"
The gasket is not in this one — it sits on the far side of that flange face, outside your dimension.

The gap question — ask on day one

Take the gap off every welded end

Cut to true dimensions — subtract the gap at every welded end, and the spool measures dead on with the gaps open.

Ask the welder what gap they are holding before you cut the first piece, and take that same gap off for the whole job.

Why it matters on a long spool Six joints, an eighth of an inch a joint:
6 × 1/8" = 3/4"
Nobody notices one gap. Everybody notices three quarters of an inch at a nozzle that will not move.

Welder preference — gap and land

The gap and the land are not yours to pick alone. They belong to the welder and to the procedure he is running, and they change the math and the fit-up both.

SettingWhat it does to you
GapUsually 3/32" or 1/8" for an open root on carbon steel — tighter on light wall, sometimes zero behind a consumable insert. This is the one that touches your math: it is what you subtract per welded end and what you hold at fit-up. Set it with the rod he is rooting with and you cannot get it wrong (1.6e).
LandUsually about 1/16" — a knife edge on a TIG root, heavier behind wire. It does not change your cut length. It changes your bevel, and getting it wrong means he either blows the root out or cannot get penetration.
Bevel37½° off square is standard. A compound bevel or a J-prep turns up on heavy wall. Changes how you prep, not what you cut.
Ask once, write it on the bench

"What gap and what land do you want?" is a thirty second conversation at the start of a job that saves both of you a week of arguing over fit-ups. Write the two numbers in soapstone on the bench and use them on every joint.

If there is a WPS on the job, it governs and neither of you gets a vote. The procedure is the law (1.8).

Check the answer before you cut it

  • Is the cut shorter than the C-to-C? It has to be. On weld pipe, always.
  • Is what came off roughly right? Two LR 90s on 6" take off 18". If your math took off 9" or 36", you used one take-out or doubled one.
  • Did you convert once, at the end? Do the whole thing in decimal inches and go to a fraction on the final number only.
  • Is it a negative number? Then the fittings are longer than the dimension and no pipe goes between them. That is a real answer — see the shortest-offset tables in 18.18 — and it means the print needs a different fitting or a different route.
From the Trade

“On a straight run with several welds, the gaps add up. Take them off.” — Seth Edstrom. His full tip: 21.3.

A wrap-around is a flat strip of stiff, bendable material — usually roofing felt, heavy paper or a bought canvas or plastic wrap — that you wrap around the outside of the pipe until it overlaps itself. You run soapstone along its edge to mark a line all the way round. It is the cheapest tool in your bags and the only one that will put a truly square line around a pipe — which is the line you cut to, bevel to and measure from.

A wrap-around is not a string line

A wrap-around goes around the pipe at one spot, to mark a square line for a cut or a layout. A string line is pulled tight along a run, from one point to another, to check things line up or to measure off. Different tool, different job. String lines are 19.5.

Why it works

EDGES LINED UP with each other, not with the pipe = SQUARE RIGHT EDGES OFF by even a little and the line spirals = A CROOKED CUT WRONG
The whole trick is that a wrap-around squares itself. Lap the strip over itself and slide it until the two edges sit exactly on top of one another — at that point the edge you scribe against is perpendicular to the pipe axis, whatever the pipe is doing.

A pipe end is almost never square, and a pipe is almost never perfectly round. Neither matters. A wrap-around references the pipe against itself, so as long as the two edges of the strip line up with each other, the line you scribe is square to the axis. That is not true of a square laid on the side, a tick mark by eye, or a line snapped along the top.

Marking a square line

  1. Pull your dimension and mark it with a tick, anywhere on the pipe.
  2. Lay the wrap on the pipe with its edge at the tick and roll it round until it laps itself.
  3. Slide the lap until the two edges are dead on top of each other. Look down the lap, not across it. This is the step that decides whether the cut is square.
  4. Hold it tight to the pipe — a wrap standing off the surface on scale or a weld seam walks the line sideways.
  5. Scribe all the way round in one pass, keeping the soapstone flat against the wrap edge and tipped the same way the whole time.
  6. Check it closes. Come back to where you started. If the line does not meet itself, your edges were not lined up — slide and do it again.

Everything else it does

JobHow
Square cut lineThe everyday one. Mark, wrap, scribe, cut to it (1.5).
Checking an end for squareWrap right at the end. If the pipe end follows the wrap edge all the way round, it is square. Where it runs away from the edge, that is your high side and that is how much has to come off (1.6a).
Measuring circumferenceWrap it, mark where the strip laps itself, take it off and measure the lap to the edge. Divide by 3.1416 and you have the OD of a pipe you cannot get calipers on (18.24).
Finding top dead centreWrap, mark the lap, fold the strip in half and half again. Four folds gives you 16 equal stations; two gives you quarters. Quarter marks are where your tacks go (1.8a).
Rolling a fitting to a clock positionDegrees round a pipe are just a distance along the circumference: OD × 3.1416 × degrees ÷ 360. Wrap it and step it off — no protractor (18.22).
Miter and saddle layoutThe wrap becomes the template. Stations along it, ordinates measured back from the line, connect and cut. All of section 15 runs on this.
Transferring a line past an obstructionTwo wrap lines a known distance apart carry a square reference along a pipe you cannot get all the way round in one place.

What to use

Bought wrap-around
Heavy rubberised canvas or plastic, straight edges, a few feet longer than your biggest pipe's circumference. The right answer if you run big bore.
Roofing felt
The shop standard for generations. Stiff enough to hold an edge, cheap enough to cut up for templates.
Heavy paper or banner
Fine for small bore and for one-off templates you are going to mark on.
Ratchet strap
Works in a pinch on big pipe. Watch that it does not stretch unevenly — check the line closes.
What will not work

A tape measure wrapped round a pipe does not lie flat and its edge is not straight. A level or a framing square laid on the side of a pipe reads a tangent on a curve, not the axis. A line snapped along the top is square to nothing. All three get used, and all three produce cuts you grind for an hour.

Keep one for every size you run

Cut a strip for each common size, write the size on it in paint pen, and roll them together in your bags. A wrap that is the right length for the pipe laps once and cleanly — one that is four feet too long is a nuisance every time you use it.

And keep a second set marked up as templates once you have laid out a miter or a saddle you are going to repeat. That layout is worth keeping.

Lined up and notClose on the lap of a wrap-around with the two edges dead on top of each other, then the same wrap a quarter inch out with the resulting line spiralling off. Then the finished square line scribed all the way round. PHOTO
From the Trade

“No wrap-around? Tape, sticky side rubbed on the ground so it won’t stick.” — Seth Edstrom. His full tip: 21.3.

Every method below cuts the same line. The line is the job — get it square and marked, then pick the tool that suits the size, the material and where you're standing.

Marking the line first

WRAP-AROUND KEEP WASTE kerf lives here
The scribe follows the keep edge of the wrap. The kerf comes out of the waste side, not out of your dimension.
  1. Pull your length and put one mark on the pipe. One mark, on the keep side. Don't ring the pipe by eye.
  2. Lay the wrap on so its edge splits your mark. Roll it around until the two edges of the wrap lap over each other and line up dead even — that overlap is what makes the line square.
  3. Look at the overlap before you scribe. If the edges step or spiral, the wrap is crooked and so is your line. Reset it.
  4. Mark the full way around with soapstone, a paint marker or a scribe, holding the tip tight to the wrap edge the whole trip.
  5. X the waste side so the kerf goes there and not into your piece.
  6. Take the wrap off and check. Measure from the square end to the line at four places around the pipe. All four the same means you're square.
Marking stainless and alloy

No carbon-steel scribe, no ordinary soapstone, no regular marker on stainless, nickel alloy or aluminum. Iron picked up off a shared tool rusts in service, and the sulfur and chloride in some markers crack the weld. Use stainless-only scribes and a marker rated low-halogen / low-sulfur, and keep them in a separate bag.

Picking the method

MethodWhere it shines · face you get · watch for
Oxy-fuel torchCarbon steel, any size, in the field. Rough face that needs grinding — but it will cut the bevel in the same pass. Carbon steel only, and it brings heat, slag and a fire watch with it.
PlasmaStainless, alloy, aluminum and thin wall. Cleaner face than a torch, still wants dressing. Needs power and dry air, and it makes fume.
Portable bandsawUp to about 4" and it goes to the pipe. Square and cold — the best cut you can make in the field. Watch blade wander and feed pressure.
Horizontal bandsawBench work, cut lists, repeat lengths. Square and cold. Shop tool — the pipe has to come to it.
Abrasive chop sawSmall bore, fast and dirty. Burnt, burred face that drifts out of square on heavy wall. Sparks everywhere; check the wheel rating.
Cold sawShop, high volume, tight tolerance. Near machine-finish square. Blade cost, coolant, and it does not travel.
Grinder + cut-off wheelSmall bore and trimming anywhere. As square as your hand is. Watch pinching, side-loading and the wheel RPM.
Machines — track, clamshell, bevelerBig bore, code work, no HAZ, in-service. Machined face and bevel in one go. Pay for it in setup time, rigging and cost.
Nothing gets cut until it's dead

No torch, no grinder, no saw on any line, vessel, drum or tank until it is isolated, drained, purged and gas-tested, and the hot work permit is in your hand. A line that "only ever had water in it" is the one that goes off.

Pick one:

Kerf

Every method eats metal. A cut-off wheel takes about 1/16", a bandsaw 1/16" or less, a torch 1/8" or more on heavy wall. Cut on the waste side of the line every time and the kerf never enters your math.

A cutting torch does not melt steel. It heats one spot until the steel is hot enough to burn, then blows a jet of pure oxygen at it — and the steel catches and burns, fast, giving off its own heat as it goes. The stream blows the molten oxide out the bottom and the torch walks the fire along your line.

That is the whole trick, and it is why the torch only works on carbon steel. It is also why a torch will cut 6" plate its flame alone could never melt through — that much steel soaks the heat away faster than the flame puts it in. Once the steel lights, the steel is doing the burning and the flame is only keeping up.

PREHEAT (about 1,800°F, bright cherry) → PRESS THE LEVER → THE STEEL BURNS

The rig

OXYGEN green FUEL red CHAINED FA FA FLASHBACK ARRESTOR + CHECK VALVE ON BOTH LINES handle + cutting attachment two preheat knobs, one lever CUTTING LEVER
The whole rig, in the order the gas travels. Both arrestors go in — one on each line, at the regulator, with a reverse-flow check valve. Cylinders stand up, capped when they are not in use, and chained to something that will not move.
Oxygen
Green bottle, tall and thin, and under very high pressure when it is full — a couple of thousand psi. It does the cutting.
Fuel gas
Acetylene is the common one — red bottle, shorter and fatter, packed with a porous filler soaked in acetone. Propane and propylene also cut, but they need their own tips.
Regulators
One per bottle. The high gauge reads what is left in the bottle; the low gauge reads what you are sending down the hose.
Arrestors
A flashback arrestor and a reverse-flow check valve on each line, at the regulator. This is the part people leave off, and it is the part that saves the bottle.
Torch
Handle, plus a cutting attachment with two preheat knobs and the oxygen lever. The lever is a separate circuit — it is the cut.
Arrestors and check valves are two different things, and you want both

A reverse-flow check valve stops one gas pushing back up the other hose. A flashback arrestor stops a flame that has already run back up inside the hose from reaching the regulator and the bottle. Different jobs. A good outfit has both, on both lines.

If the torch pops with a sharp crack and goes out, that is a backfire — annoying. If it screams or squeals and keeps burning inside the torch, that is a flashback: shut the oxygen off first, then the fuel, and do not light it again until somebody has been through the whole outfit.

Acetylene never goes over 15 psi. Not once, not briefly.

Above 15 psig acetylene becomes unstable and can decompose on its own — no oxygen, no leak, no spark needed. That is why the regulator is scaled the way it is and why the gauge face carries a red band. OSHA writes it as a near-flat prohibition in 1910.253 (the only exception is an approved cylinder manifold): acetylene is not to be generated, piped or used above 15 psig.

If you find yourself reaching for more pressure to make a cut go, you have the wrong tip, a plugged tip, or a bottle that cannot keep up. Fix that instead.

Oxygen is not air, and it is not for blowing yourself off

Pure oxygen does not burn — it makes everything else burn, violently, including things you do not think of as flammable. Oil and grease can ignite on contact with it. Never let oil, grease or a greasy glove near a fitting, a regulator or a valve, and never lubricate any of it.

And never use it to cool off, blow dust off your clothes, ventilate a space or run an air tool. Oxygen soaks into cloth and hair and stays there. A man in an oxygen-soaked shirt who walks past a spark does not get a burn — he gets a fire that will not go out.

Handling the bottles

  • Cap on whenever a bottle is not hooked up, and never lift a bottle by the cap.
  • Stand them up and secure them — chained, strapped or in a cart. A cylinder that goes over and snaps its valve off becomes a rocket.
  • Never use a bottle as a roller, a support or a ground. An arc strike on a cylinder wall condemns it.
  • Acetylene stands up, in use and in storage. It is full of acetone and lying it down lets the acetone find the valve. If a bottle has been down, stand it up for at least an hour before you use it.
  • In storage, oxygen and fuel get separated — 20 ft apart, or a noncombustible barrier at least 5 ft high with a half-hour fire rating between them (OSHA 1910.253).
  • A bottle that has been in a fire, or has a hot or frosted valve, gets left alone and reported. Clear the area.
Do not pull harder on the bottle than it can give

Acetylene comes out of a liquid it is dissolved in. Pull too hard for too long and you start dragging acetone out with it — which ruins the flame, wrecks hose and regulator diaphragms, and takes away the very thing keeping the gas stable.

The old rule is one seventh of the bottle's capacity per hour; plenty of suppliers now say a tenth for intermittent work and a fifteenth for continuous. The field version: if the bottle is sweating or frosting, or the flame goes soft and lazy after ten minutes of heavy cutting, you are pulling too hard. Get a bigger bottle, or manifold two together.

Worked — will one bottle keep up? A common mid-size acetylene cylinder holds about 145 cu ft (big ones run 300–390).
Old rule: 145 ÷ 7 = 20.7 cu ft/hr continuous, maximum.
Tighter modern guidance: 145 ÷ 10 = 14.5 intermittent  ·  145 ÷ 15 = 9.7 continuous.
Your tip chart gives the draw for the tip you are running. If that number is above what the bottle can give, the answer is a bigger bottle or two manifolded — never more pressure.
Propane and propylene are not a drop-in

They cut, and on heavy sections and long production burns they cut well and cheap. But they burn cooler and wider than acetylene and they will not light on an acetylene tip — alternate fuels need their own tips, usually a two-piece tip with separate preheat ports, and their own hose. Propane through an acetylene tip gets you a sputtering flame, a slow preheat and a tip that overheats.

One more: propane is heavier than air. A leak settles into the trench, the pit, the sump and the bottom of the vessel, and sits there.

Hot work does not start with the torch

Before any of this — permit, fire watch, and thirty-five feet swept of anything that will burn. That has its own page: 12.4. Setting the outfit up and lighting it is 1.5b; cutting with it is 1.5c.

The outfit, laid out and labelledBoth bottles chained upright with caps on, regulators and gauges readable, arrestors at the regulators, hose coiled off the floor, torch and a handful of tips. One clean overall shot, and one close on the arrestor so an apprentice knows what he is looking for. PHOTO
A condemned bottleAn arc strike on a cylinder wall, a gouged collar, a bottle with no cap. What gets a bottle taken out of service, next to a good one. PHOTO

Same order, every time, cold outfit to cutting. It takes about three minutes and every step in it is there because somebody skipped it once.

Setting it up

  1. Stand the bottles up and secure them before the caps come off. Chained, strapped or in a cart — something that will not tip.
  2. Crack each cylinder valve for an instant, pointed away from you and from anything that could ignite, to blow dirt out of the seat before the regulator goes on.
  3. Back the adjusting screw all the way out on both regulators so they are closed, then fit them.
  4. Open the oxygen valve slowly, all the way up until it seats at the top. Slowly — a fast open slams the regulator, and that has started fires.
  5. Open the fuel valve about three-quarters of a turn, no more than one and a half, and leave the wrench on the stem so anyone can shut it in one motion.
  6. Set the working pressures with the gas flowing — open the torch valve, set the regulator, close it. A pressure set on a dead line reads high and drops the moment you cut.
  7. Purge each hose separately, then leak test every joint with soapy water. Never with a flame.

Typical starting pressures and tip sizes

TipSteelCutting O₂AcetyleneKerf
0001/8"20–25 psi3–5 psi.04"
001/4"20–25 psi3–5 psi.05"
03/8"25–30 psi3–5 psi.06"
01/2"30–35 psi3–5 psi.06"
13/4"30–35 psi3–5 psi.07"
21"35–40 psi3–6 psi.09"
32"40–45 psi4–8 psi.11"
43"40–50 psi5–11 psi.12"
54"45–55 psi6–13 psi.15"
66"45–55 psi8–14 psi.15"

Typical published figures for one common one-piece acetylene tip series, read at the regulator. The chart that came with your torch governs — tip series differ, propane and propylene tips differ more, and hose length and diameter move the numbers. Start in the middle of the range and trim by what the flame and the cut are doing. The kerf column is the one you need for a cut sheet: see 1.5c.

The flame

CARBURIZING Too much fuel. A white feather off the cone. Adds carbon. feather NEUTRAL Feather just pulled back into the cone. About 5,600°F. This is the one you cut with. no feather OXIDIZING Too much oxygen. Short, sharp, loud cone. Burns the cut. short + harsh
Set it by the cone. Open the fuel until the smoke stops, add oxygen until the white feather pulls right back into the cone, and stop there — that is neutral. Then press the lever and re-trim, because the lever changes it.
  1. Open the fuel valve on the torch about a quarter turn and light it with a striker — never a lighter, never a cigarette, never somebody else's cut.
  2. Open the fuel until the smoke stops and the flame just stops jumping away from the tip.
  3. Open the preheat oxygen until the white feather pulls right back into a sharp cone. That is neutral, and it is what you cut with.
  4. Press the cutting lever and look again. The lever pulls oxygen and will usually push the flame carburizing. Re-trim with the lever held down, so it is neutral while it is actually cutting.

Shutting down

  1. Cutting oxygen off, then preheat oxygen, then fuel — oxygen first at the torch, so you never leave a fuel-rich flame crawling back.
  2. Done for the day: close both cylinder valves, bleed each line at the torch until both gauges read zero, then back both adjusting screws out.
  3. Coil the hose off the floor and put the caps back on the bottles.

Leaving a regulator loaded overnight is how a diaphragm creeps and how a hose is found soft in the morning. Thirty seconds now.

Soap it, do not sniff it

A leak test is soapy water on every joint with the gas up and the torch valves shut — bottle valve, regulator connection, hose ends, torch connection. Bubbles anywhere and the outfit does not get lit. You will not smell a slow oxygen leak at all, and an oxygen leak into a confined space is its own kind of dangerous.

The three flames, side by sideSame tip, same distance, three frames: carburizing with the feather out, neutral with the feather just gone, oxidizing short and angry. Shot dark so the cone reads. PHOTO
Setting up and lighting a torch

Field video

Real footage, filmed on the jobCracking the valves, setting pressures with the gas flowing, soaping the joints, and trimming the flame neutral with the lever held down. SOON

Start to finish on a cold outfit, at working speed, with the leak test left in.

Everything about a good burn comes down to two things: how far the cone is off the steel, and how fast you walk. Get those right and the torch does the rest. Get them wrong and you spend twice as long grinding as you spent cutting.

KERF metal that is gone drag lines split the line and the kerf eats scrap RIGHT lines near vertical TOO FAST lines rake backward TOO SLOW top edge melted
The face tells you what your hand was doing. Near-vertical drag lines and a top edge still square is a good cut. Lines raking backward means you were travelling faster than the steel could burn; a rounded, melted top edge means you were too slow or too close.

Starting at an edge

  1. Hold the inner cone about 1/16" off the steel — close, but not touching. Touching pops the tip and loads it with slag.
  2. Preheat the corner until it is a bright cherry red, and be patient. Nearly every bad cut starts with a lever pressed too early.
  3. Press the lever smoothly — all the way, in one motion. Feather it and the cut starts wandering.
  4. When the sparks blow out the underside, you are through. Now start moving.
  5. Walk at the speed the sparks tell you. A clean cut throws its spark stream nearly straight down out the bottom. If the sparks come back up at you, you are going too fast and it has not gone through.

Piercing a hole in the middle of a plate

  1. Preheat one spot to bright cherry, then lift the tip another 1/4" or so.
  2. Crack the lever slowly while you tip the torch off vertical, so the first blast throws slag sideways and away instead of straight back up into the tip.
  3. Once it blows through, bring the torch upright, come back down to height, and go where you are going.

Piercing is where tips get ruined and where people get burned. Slow lever, tilted torch, and nothing of yours directly above the hole.

What the face is telling you

  • Near-vertical drag lines, square top edge, slag knocks off with a tap. That is a good cut. Do exactly that again.
  • Lines rake hard backward and the bottom edge is still hanging on. Too fast — the cut never got all the way through. Slow down.
  • Top edge rounded and melted, kerf wide. Too slow, or the cone is too close. Pick up the pace and lift about 1/16".
  • Hard slag welded to the underside that will not knock off. Too slow, or the cutting oxygen is low. Speed up, and re-check the pressure with the gas flowing.
  • The cut wanders off the line. Freehand with nothing to rest on. Brace both hands, or use a guide or a track.
  • Top edge blown wide and ragged. Oxygen pressure too high for the tip. Back it off, or go up a tip size.
  • The cut keeps going out. Plugged tip, or the steel is not hot enough. Clean the tip with a tip cleaner, never a drill bit, and preheat longer.
  • Popping and spitting at the tip. Tip overheated, held too close, or slag in the orifice. Shut down, cool it, clean it.
Split the line, and remember the kerf

The kerf is metal that is gone — anywhere from .04" on a tiny tip to .15" on a big one (the column is in 1.5b). On a single cut nobody cares. On a cut sheet where you are taking six pieces out of one joint, six kerfs at 1/8" is three quarters of an inch you never accounted for.

The habit that fixes it: burn on the waste side and grind back to the line. Then the kerf only ever eats scrap.

Worked — six pieces out of one joint 21'-0" joint = 252"
Six pieces at 40" → 6 × 40 = 240"
Six cuts at a .11" kerf (#3 tip) = 6 × .11 = 0.66"
240 + 0.66 = 240.66" used → 252 − 240.66 = 11.34" left, not 12.
Nobody misses one kerf. Everybody misses six.

Cutting pipe

  • Wrap it and mark it. A freehand line around a pipe is never square and you will chase it all the way round. Wrap template, soapstone, then cut. Layout is 15.1 onward.
  • Aim at the centreline of the pipe, not straight down — you want the stream pointing at the middle so the cut stays square through the wall as you roll around.
  • Roll the pipe if you can. Cutting at 12 o'clock with the pipe turning under you beats crawling around it, and the slag falls away instead of onto the cut.
  • Burn inside the line and grind out to it on anything that has to be welded. The torch gets you close; the grinder gets you the fit.
  • Over about 4", use a track or a pipe cutting machine for anything that has to be square and bevelled. See 1.5h.

Bevelling with the torch

  • Tip the torch to the bevel angle — 37½° from the pipe end for a standard V — and hold it there the whole way round. A guide or a bevelling attachment is worth its weight.
  • A torch bevel is a rough bevel. It always needs the grinder afterwards to true the angle, clean the oxide off the face, and leave the root face (land), which the torch cannot produce.
  • Grind the oxide scale off before anybody welds on it. A weld laid over torch scale is a weld with slag rolled into the root.
What a torch will not cut — and why it matters

Oxy-fuel works on carbon and low-alloy steel, and essentially nothing else you will meet on a pipe job. Stainless and aluminum form an oxide that melts higher than the metal underneath, so the moment you press the lever a crust forms, the stream stops, and all you do is melt and splatter a mess you cannot weld to.

MaterialTorch?Use instead
Carbon, low alloyYes—
StainlessNoPlasma, abrasive wheel, saw
Alum, copper, brassNoSaw, wheel, plasma on alum.
Cast ironBadlySnap cutter or wheel — 6.2
GalvanizedYes, butStrip the zinc back, ventilate

And never put a torch on a plastic, lined or jacketed pipe to see what happens. Some of them give off gas that will put you down.

Never burn a closed vessel, drum or line until somebody proves what was in it

A drum that held something flammable is a bomb whether it is full or empty — an empty one is usually worse, because it is full of vapour and air in the right proportions. Same for any tank, any line, any vessel that has been in service.

It gets emptied, isolated, cleaned, purged and gas tested by somebody qualified, and vented so pressure cannot build while you heat it. "It has been empty for years" is not a gas test. This is on the short list of things that kill whole crews.

Dress for it, and look where the slag is going

Shaded goggles or a shade 5 lens, leathers, gloves, boots, trousers over the boots and no cuffs. Slag finds a cuff every time.

Before you press the lever, look at where the sparks will land and what is underneath you — molten slag rolls, bounces and drops through grating. And what is on the pipe matters as much as what is in it: galvanize, paint, primer and old coatings all put off something you should not be breathing. Both of those are 12.4.

Three cut faces on one plateOne piece of 1/2" plate with three cuts in it — right, too fast, too slow — laid so the drag lines read. Then the same three with the slag knocked off. PHOTO
Piercing a holeThe tilt at the start, the slag going sideways, and the finished hole. Slow enough to see the lever come on. PHOTO
A torch bevel before and after the grinderPipe end torch-cut at 37½°, then the same end dressed with the land left on it. Side by side so the difference is obvious. PHOTO

An arc squeezed through a small hole and blown by gas. It melts the metal and the jet blows it out the back. It doesn't care whether the steel will oxidize, so it cuts everything a torch can't: stainless, nickel alloy, aluminum, copper, cast.

Amperage against wall

MachineClean cut toSever toTypical pipe
25–30 A1/4"3/8"Sch 10 up to 4", tubing, sheet
45 A1/2"3/4"Sch 40 to 6", Sch 10 anything
65 A3/4"1-1/4"Sch 40 to 12", Sch 80 mid sizes
85–105 A1"–1-1/4"1-1/2"–2"Heavy wall, big bore, plate

"Clean cut" is the number that matters. Sever capacity means the machine will part the metal and leave you a face you'd be ashamed of. Size the machine to your heaviest wall at the clean-cut rating, not the sever rating.

Air is half the machine

  • Dry. Water in the line eats electrodes and wanders the arc. A desiccant dryer or a coalescing filter at the machine, not just at the compressor.
  • Clean. No compressor oil. Oil carbons the nozzle and, on stainless, contaminates the weld prep.
  • Enough of it. Check the machine's CFM at pressure. A small compressor that keeps up with an impact gun will starve a 65 A torch, and a starved torch double-arcs and burns consumables in minutes.
  • Bottled gas — nitrogen or argon/hydrogen — gives a better face on stainless and aluminum if the work is worth it.

Consumables, and how they fail

PartJobWorn out when
ElectrodeCarries the arcThe hafnium pit is over about 0.040" deep
Nozzle / tipSqueezes the jetThe hole goes oval or bells out
Swirl ringSpins the gas so the arc stays centredCracked or blocked — cut goes bevelled one way
Shield / retaining capKeeps spatter off the nozzleSlag welded to it, or holes plugged

Change the electrode and nozzle as a set. A new nozzle on a dished electrode will be a dished nozzle by lunch.

Cutting

  1. Ground clamp on clean bare metal, close to the cut. Paint and rust make the arc hunt.
  2. Drag tip or standoff. A drag tip rides the pipe — steadier, easier around a line you're following. A standoff tip sits about 1/8" off and gives a squarer face.
  3. Pierce at an angle. Start the arc tipped 30–45° away from you so the blow-back goes past the nozzle, then roll upright once you're through. Piercing straight down blows molten metal back into the tip.
  4. Start off the pipe where you can — edge starts are easier on consumables than pierces.
  5. Follow the line, don't chase it. One steady walk around, rolling the pipe or walking yourself around it. Stopping mid-cut leaves a notch you'll be grinding out.
  6. Cut to the waste side. Plasma kerf is about 1/16" to 1/8" depending on amperage.

Reading the cut

  • Dross stuck along the bottom, soft and rolled — too slow, or too much amperage. Speed up.
  • Hard dross welded to the bottom edge — too fast, or the arc isn't getting through. Slow down or turn it up.
  • Cut face bevelled the same way all the way round — worn swirl ring, or the torch isn't perpendicular.
  • Wandering, sputtering, won't pierce — electrode, air pressure, or a bad ground, in that order.
Fume

Plasma on stainless throws hexavalent chromium. On galvanized it throws zinc. Ventilate, get a fume extractor on it or get upwind, and wear the right respirator — a dust mask does nothing. In a tank or a pit this is a supplied-air job, not a judgement call.

Prep after plasma

The cut edge is hardened and oxidized, and on stainless the heat-tinted band goes back from the edge further than you'd think. Grind the face back to bright metal before you bevel — see 1.6.

The best cut you can make on a jobsite. Cold, square, no slag, no heat-affected zone worth arguing about, and on stainless and alloy it's often the only cut the spec will let you make.

Blade teeth

Three teeth in the wall at all times. That's the whole rule. Fewer and a tooth straddles the wall and snaps off; more and the gullets pack up and the blade rubs instead of cutting.

Wall thicknessTPITypical
Under 1/8"24Tubing, Sch 5/10 small bore, conduit
1/8" – 1/4"18Sch 10 and Sch 40 up to 3"
1/4" – 1/2"14Sch 40 mid sizes, Sch 80 small bore
Over 1/2"10 – 14Heavy wall, solid bar
Mixed / unknown10–14 or 14–18 variableThe blade to leave on the saw

Bi-metal, not carbon. A bi-metal blade costs twice as much and lasts five times as long, and it's the only thing that will stay sharp in stainless.

Blade speed

MaterialSurface feet per minute
Carbon steel200 – 250
Stainless (304 / 316)100 – 150
Nickel alloy, duplex60 – 100
Aluminum, copper, brass300 – 500

On a variable-speed portaband that's the dial: top speed for aluminum, mid for carbon, slow for stainless. Running stainless fast work-hardens it under the tooth and the blade stops cutting and starts polishing.

Making the cut

  1. Break a new blade in. First two cuts at half your normal feed pressure. It knocks the burr off the fresh teeth and doubles blade life.
  2. Clamp the pipe so it cannot roll. A vee block, a chain vise, a pipe stand with a dog, or a portaband jig. A pipe that rotates mid-cut ruins the blade and the cut together.
  3. Let the weight of the saw feed it. Steady pressure, no leaning. If it isn't cutting, the blade or the speed is wrong, not the pressure.
  4. Watch the chip. Tight curls of solid swarf means you're right. Powder means too fast or too much speed. Thick blue chips mean you're forcing it.
  5. Support the drop. The last 1/4" is where the offcut hangs and binds the blade. Have a hand or a stand on it.
  6. Don't back up in the kerf with the blade running. Stop it, then pull out.

Horizontal saw at the bench

  • Square the vise once at the start of the day against a known square and re-check after any angle cut. Every out-of-square piece for the rest of the day comes from here.
  • Stop block for repeat lengths, and measure the first one out of the box before you run twenty.
  • Coolant on for stainless and alloy. Dry-cutting stainless on a big saw is how blades die.
  • Dedicate a blade to stainless so you're not dragging carbon particles into a stainless prep.

Going wrong

  • Cut comes out out-of-square across the wall — blade guides worn or loose, or blade tension low.
  • Blade wanders out the back of the pipe — dull blade, or too much feed pressure.
  • Teeth stripped in a row — too coarse for the wall, or the pipe moved.
  • Blade breaking at the weld — wheel diameter too small for that blade, or over-tensioned.

Two machines that look alike and are nothing alike. One is fast and rough, one is slow and dead accurate.

Abrasive chop saw

A spinning abrasive wheel that grinds its way through. Fast on small bore, cheap, and it will get you through a day — but it burns the end, throws a heavy burr inside and out, and drifts out of square the thicker the wall gets.

  • Check the wheel RPM rating against the saw before it goes on. Over-speeding a wheel is how it comes apart.
  • Look the wheel over every time. Chips, cracks, a soaked wheel that's been left in the rain — all of them go in the bin.
  • Clamp both sides of the cut. A chop saw grabs, and an unclamped pipe becomes a projectile.
  • Let it cut, don't lean on it. Pressure glazes the wheel and bows the cut.
  • Fire watch. The spark stream carries 20 feet and lands where you're not looking. Screens, an extinguisher, and somebody watching for at least 60 minutes after you stop, per NFPA 51B (full hot-work rules in 12.4).
  • Never a carbon-steel wheel on stainless. Separate wheels, marked, kept apart.
  • Expect to dress the end. Plan on grinding the face back to square and deburring both sides before it's fit to prep.
Out of square adds up

A chop saw on 1/2" wall can walk 1/32" out of square without looking wrong. Two ends on one nipple, two joints on a spool, and you're 1/8" out with a root gap that closes on one side and gaps on the other. Check square before you bevel — 1.6.

Cold saw

A toothed carbide or HSS blade turning slowly with coolant on it. Shop machine, bench-mounted, and the cut comes off square, bright and nearly burr-free — ready to prep with almost no dressing.

  • Slow RPM, heavy feed. It should make chips you can pick up, not sparks.
  • Coolant every cut. Dry cutting kills a blade that costs more than the saw's day rate.
  • Match the blade to the material — carbon-steel blade, stainless blade, aluminum blade. They are not interchangeable and the tooth geometry is the reason.
  • Clamp tight and short. Vibration chips teeth, and one chipped tooth starts a chain.
  • Worth it when you're cutting a list of repeat lengths, working in stainless or alloy, or the spec won't take a heat-affected edge.
Which one

Chop saw for the quick and the throwaway. Cold saw or bandsaw for anything that gets welded to a code, gets measured twice, or is made of something other than carbon steel.

The tool that's always on your belt. It'll cut anything up to about 3" cleanly if you work the line instead of attacking it, and it's the fastest way to trim a quarter inch off a piece that's long.

Working the line

  1. Score the whole way around first, about a third of the way through the wall, keeping the wheel on the waste side of the line. One trip around, light.
  2. Second trip around, deeper. The groove you already cut steers the wheel and keeps it square.
  3. Third trip through. Roll the pipe toward you so you're always cutting at a comfortable angle instead of reaching over the top.
  4. Support the drop before the last bit of wall goes. A falling offcut pinches the wheel and the wheel goes wherever it wants.
  5. Wheel square to the pipe, not to you. Watch the wheel against the pipe wall, not the sparks.

Going all the way through in one place first is what puts a cut out of square. The wheel starts leaning the moment it's buried, and by the time you're round the far side you're an eighth off.

Wheels

WheelWhat it's forRule
Type 1 (flat) cut-off, 1/16"Cutting onlyNever side-load it. No grinding with the face
Type 27 (depressed centre) grinding, 1/4"Grinding and dressingNot a cutting wheel — don't part metal with it
Type 27 thin cut-offCut and light dressRead the label — only some are rated for both
Flap discBlending, deburring, bevel dressingLight pressure, let the grit work
  • Wheel RPM rating must be equal to or higher than the grinder's max RPM. Every time, before it goes on.
  • Guard stays on. A guard is what stands between you and a wheel that lets go at 11,000 rpm.
  • Dedicated stainless wheels, contaminant-free (marked "Fe/S/Cl free"), and never used on carbon steel. Iron embedded in a stainless prep rusts and cracks.
  • Store wheels flat and dry. A wheel that's been rattling loose in the bottom of a gang box is a wheel you throw away.
How this one hurts people

Pinching is the big one — the kerf closes on the wheel, the wheel grabs, and the grinder comes back at your face at full speed. Support the offcut, keep the guard between you and the wheel, stand out of the plane of the disc, and never let go of the second handle. Full face shield over safety glasses, not instead of them.

When you can't get a wrap on it

In a rack or against a wall where a wrap won't go, cut oversize by half an inch with the grinder, then square the face properly on the bench or with a beveling machine. A bad cut you plan to fix beats a bad cut you hoped was square.

When the pipe is too big, the tolerance too tight, or the job won't allow a spark, the cut stops being handwork and becomes a machine setup. These cost time to rig and pay it back in a face you don't have to fix.

What's out there

MachineWhat it doesReach for it when
Track burner (“bug”)Drives a cutting torch around a band clamped to the pipeCarbon steel 8" and up, straight or bevelled, repeatable
Clamshell / split-frameSplits around the pipe, cuts and bevels with tool bits — no heatIn-service lines, alloy, no-HAZ specs, tight access
Portable pipe bevelerMandrels into the bore and machines the end prepBevelling to a WPS angle and land, repeatably
Mag-base / OD-mount bevelerRides the OD and cuts the bevelBig bore where nothing fits inside
Guillotine / chain saw cutterChain-driven blade around a clamped frameVery large bore, in-ditch, cold cut
Hole saw / pipe notcherCuts the branch hole and the saddle profileOlets, branch connections, saddle fits

Why cold cutting gets specified

  • No heat-affected zone. Duplex, nickel alloy and some stainless grades change properties when you heat them. Machining doesn't.
  • No ignition source. In a live unit, a spark is the whole argument.
  • No cross-contamination. Tool bits and a clean setup instead of grinding dust and slag in the bore.
  • The face comes off machined. Square, the right bevel angle, the right land, every joint the same — which is what the CWI is going to ask for.
  • Repeatability. Forty joints on a tie-in and every one identical beats forty joints ground by five different hands.

Setting one up

  1. Mark and check the line first exactly as you would by hand. The machine cuts where you clamp it, square or not.
  2. Clamp off a good reference. Out-of-round pipe, a dented OD or scale under the jaws throws the whole cut.
  3. Dial it in. Most machines let you sweep an indicator around before you commit. Do it — it's five minutes against re-prepping a 24" joint.
  4. Support both sides before you break through. The drop on big bore is a rigging job, not a catch.
  5. Check the prep against the WPS when it comes off — angle, land, and square — before the fitter behind you starts pulling to it.
When to ask for one

If you're about to spend an afternoon grinding a 16" bevel by hand, or the spec says "machine cut only", or you're working on a line that never got shut down — that's the call to make to the foreman before you start, not after.

The cut got you close. The prep is what the welder actually welds. Four things have to be true before the joint is fit to tack: square, clean, the right bevel, and the right land.

as cut rough squared 90° check bevelled 37.5° cleaned land + bright
Cut, square, bevel, clean. Skip one and the welder finds it for you.
Prep in one pass, not in three visits

Square it, bevel it, deburr it, clean it — while the piece is still on the stand and the grinder is still in your hand. Going back to a joint that's already in the rack costs four times as long.

From the Trade

“Prep what you can weld today. Bare bevels rust overnight.” — Seth Edstrom. His full tip: 21.3.

An end that isn't square gives you a root gap that's wide at 12 and shut at 6, and the welder will be fighting it for the whole joint. Check it before you bevel, not after.

Three ways, quickest first

  1. Wrap-around. Wrap it round the pipe right at the end, lap the edges even, and slide it until the edge just touches the longest point of the cut. Now look down the wrap edge. Daylight between the edge and the pipe end means it's out. The daylight is on the short side, and the widest gap is the whole error.
  2. Framing square or a combination square. Sit the blade along the pipe and the head across the face. Check it at 12, 3, 6 and 9. Good on small bore; a big square on a big pipe reads the crown, not the face.
  3. Four-point measure. Measure from a known-square reference (the far end, or a scribed ring) to the cut end at 12, 3, 6 and 9. Four readings the same is the only proof that works on any size.
WRAP EDGE long point short side DAYLIGHT = out of square widest gap is the whole error check at 12, 3, 6 and 9
Wrap edge touching the long point of the cut. The daylight opens toward the short side, and the widest gap is the full out-of-square across the pipe — not half of it.

How much is too much

Pipe sizeSquareness you can live withFix it if
Up to 2"1/32" across the faceYou can see daylight under the square
3" – 6"1/32" – 1/16"The four-point readings spread more than 1/16"
8" and up1/16", or per the WPSAnything the hi-lo won't take up

The spec beats the table. Most codes and shop WPSs call out squareness and root-gap tolerance directly. Where one exists, that's the number.

When it's out

  • A little out — take it off with a flap disc or a grinder, working the long side and checking as you go. Re-check all four points.
  • Badly out — re-cut. Take a new square line 1/4" back and start over. Chasing a bad face with a grinder wastes more pipe than a clean recut.
  • Out because the saw is out — stop and square the vise. Every piece behind it is wrong too, and they're all still in the rack.
  • Out and there's no length left — tell the foreman now. A short piece found at fit-up is a problem; a short piece found at the weld-out is an incident report.
Square, then bevel

Never bevel an end you haven't checked. The bevel hides the error — once the land is cut you can't see that the face was skewed, and it shows up as a gap you can't close at fit-up.

From the Trade

“Short leg of the square on the pipe, long leg across the face, checked in quarters.” — Seth Edstrom. His full tip: 21.3.

The fitter owns the joint before the welder strikes an arc. A perfect weld on a bad fit-up is still a bad joint.

Bevel angle
37-1/2° ± 2-1/2° per side — 75° included on a standard V-groove
Root face
1/16" ± 1/32", flat and even the whole way around
Root gap
3/32" to 1/8" for a stick root — match the rod they're rooting with. TIG runs tighter (1.6e)
Hi-lo
1/16" max internal misalignment is the usual limit — B31.1 sets it (127.3), B31.3 leaves it to the WPS. Gauge it, don't thumb it.
Squareness
About 1/32" across the end on small bore, up to about 1/16" on 8" and up — table in 1.6a
Old trick, still the best one

Gap it with the rod you'll root with. Rooting with 1/8" 6010? Lay a 1/8" rod in the gap as a spacer and tack around it. The gap is right by definition and it's identical all the way around.

Getting the bevel

  • Bevelling machine or a torch on a track for anything over 4" (the torch: 1.5a to 1.5c). Freehand torch work on big bore costs more in grinding than the machine costs to set up.
  • Grind the bevel before you fit, never after you tack.
  • Dress the inside — knock the burr and any slag off the ID. It ends up in the root otherwise.
  • Wire-wheel the prep clean for an inch back on both faces. Mill scale, paint and oil all end up as porosity.
  • Stainless gets its own wheels and brushes. A carbon-contaminated stainless weld rusts from the inside. Keep the tools separate and marked.

Clean means clean

Most porosity is not the welder. It is something that was on the steel when he struck the arc, and it came from the fitter.

  • Back an inch, inside and out, both pieces. Bright metal — not "mostly bright", not "clean enough".
  • What has to come off: mill scale, rust, paint, primer, galvanize, cutting oil, marker, grease, moisture, and the soapstone you laid the line out with.
  • Torch-cut ends carry oxide scale. The torch leaves a hard glassy layer on the face that a wire wheel will not touch — it has to be ground off (1.5c).
  • Grind, then wipe. Grinding drives contamination around as much as it removes it. A rag and solvent afterwards on anything critical, and let it flash off before you strike.
  • Galvanize gets ground back a couple of inches, not just to the edge. Zinc vaporises ahead of the arc and gets into the weld anyway — and into the welder (12.4).
  • Moisture counts. A cold pipe brought into a warm shop sweats. Condensation in a bevel is hydrogen in the weld, and on heavy wall that is how you get cracking a day later.
  • Cap the ends between prep and fit. An open bevel in a shop collects grinding dust, and an open bevel outdoors collects rain.
Wall thickness matters

Light wall (Sch 10 and thinner) usually gets a smaller root face and a tighter gap, and often a different process entirely. Under B16.25, a wall of 0.12" or less isn't bevelled at all — it's cut square or lightly chamfered. Don't carry your Sch 40 habits onto Sch 10 — you'll blow the root out.

Heavy wall goes the other way. Over 7/8" wall the B16.25 end is a compound bevel: 37.5° for the first 3/4" up off the bore, then 10° out to the OD, so the groove doesn't turn into a canyon to fill.

Beveling and end prep

Field video

Real footage, filmed on the jobWalking the grinder around the pipe, the land left at the bore, and gauging hi-lo from the inside. SOON

Shot on real pipe, at working speed, with the mistakes left in. The step-through walkthrough below is built into the book and works with no signal at all.

Now see it in section

OD — OUTSIDE ID — THE BORE WALL SQUARE, CLEAN, NO BURR GRIND THIS OFF 37½° 1/16" ROOT FACE (the land) 75° INCLUDED ROOT GAP 1/8" 1/8" ROD IN THE GAP HI-LO — 1/16" MAX gauge it from inside ROOT PASS FILL + CAP
A finished bevel, and a bad one37-1/2° land at the bore on a 6" joint, next to one ground away to nothing. Same shot with a hi-lo gauge sat in the joint. PHOTO

The target is a 37.5° face and a land of about 1/16" unless the WPS says different. How you get there depends on what's in the truck.

The tools

ToolGood forTrade-off
Angle grinder, Type 27 wheelAnything, anywhereAngle is only as good as your eye and your wrist
Flap discDressing a bevel, blending, cleanupSlow to hog a fresh bevel from square
Cutting torch with a bevel guideCarbon steel, big bore, fastCarbon only, needs grinding after, HAZ
Pneumatic / electric pipe bevelerRepeat joints to a set angle and landSetup time, one machine per size range
Clamshell / split-frameMachined prep, alloy, in-serviceRigging and cost — see 1.5h
Half-round fileThe land, the last thou, the bore burrHand work — and the reason it's right

Bevelling with a grinder

  1. Set your angle once and hold it. Rest the guard on the pipe so the wheel sits at the angle, and let the pipe roll under it rather than swinging the grinder around the pipe.
  2. Work in trips, not in one spot. Go all the way round light, then all the way round again. Digging one section deep is how you get a bevel that's 30° at 12 and 45° at 6.
  3. Leave the land alone until the end. Bevel down to about 1/8" of land, then take the last bit off deliberately with the edge of the wheel or a file.
  4. Check with a gauge, not a thumb. A bevel gauge or a Hi-Lo welding gauge every quarter turn.
  5. Look at the land in the light. It should be an even bright ring the whole way round. A land that's 1/8" at 12 and a knife edge at 6 will burn through at 6.
37½° EACH FACE 75° INCLUDED root gap the land
One straight face, all the way from the outside of the pipe down to the land — no step, no second angle, no rounded shoulder. Two of them facing each other open the 75° included angle the welder needs to get a rod down into the root.
Bevel both ends before anything goes in the rack

A stack of squared-but-unbevelled pipe looks finished and isn't. Bevel, land, deburr and mark each piece as it comes off the saw, and put a soapstone tick on the prepped end so nobody has to guess.

Stainless and alloy

Stainless-dedicated discs only, and don't let a carbon-steel grinder near it. Keep the heat down — blue on stainless means you cooked the chromium out of the surface, and that band has to come off before it's welded.

From the Trade

“Steady pressure, and go all the way round in one swoop.” — Seth Edstrom. His full tip: 21.3.

Clean means bright metal, inside and out, at least an inch back from the bevel. Everything else — scale, rust, paint, oil, cutting fluid, marker — ends up in the weld as porosity or a crack.

The inside burr

Cutting rolls a lip of metal into the bore. Leave it and it does three things: it stands proud into the root so the welder can't see the joint, it breaks off later and travels down the line into a pump or a valve seat, and on a flow-critical line it throws off the hydraulics.

  1. Feel it with a finger (carefully — it's sharp) or run a rag round the bore and see what catches.
  2. Take it off with a half-round file, a deburring tool or a flap wheel, working from inside out so the swarf falls out of the pipe, not into it.
  3. Chamfer the bore edge lightly — a slight break, not a second bevel. You're removing the lip, not machining the ID.
  4. Blow it out or swab it. Every filing you left in the bore is a filing in the root of the weld.
  5. Cap or tape the end if the piece is going to sit. Debris and rain in an open bore costs you the prep you just did.
Back-boring

When two pipes of the same nominal size have different actual IDs — different mills, different schedules, or a fitting against a pipe — the spec may call for a back-bore: taper the heavier bore out to match so the root has no ledge. The taper can be no steeper than 30° (B31.1 Fig. 127.3, B31.3 Fig. 328.4.3), and you can't take the wall below its minimum. Check the WPS before you start filing.

What "clean" means

On the pipeTake it offWhy
Mill scale1" back, OD and ID, to brightTraps gas — porosity and slag inclusions
RustTo bright metalCarries moisture — hydrogen cracking
Paint / primerAll of it, plus an inchBurns to gas and to toxic fume
Galvanizing2" back minimum, and ventilateZinc fume fever, and it wrecks the weld
Oil, grease, cutting fluidSolvent first, then abrasiveGrinding it just drives it in
Soapstone, marker, tape residueWipe and abradeSoapstone leaves inclusions; chlorides and sulfur in ordinary markers and tapes crack stainless — use low-chloride markers
Moisture / condensationDry it, preheat if it's coldHydrogen in the weld metal

Brushes and wheels

  • Stainless-bristle brushes for stainless, carbon for carbon, and never the same brush on both. A carbon brush leaves iron in a stainless prep and it will rust in service.
  • Mark your brushes and keep them in separate bags. This is the single most common contamination failure on a stainless job.
  • Solvent before abrasive, every time, when there's oil involved.
  • Don't burnish. A wire wheel that polishes instead of cutting is smearing contamination flat, not removing it.
Order matters

Clean, then bevel, then deburr, then clean again. Grinding through paint or scale carries it into the fresh face you just cut.

From the Trade

“Stainless tools stay away from carbon tools and pipe.” — Seth Edstrom. His full tip: 21.3.

The gap and the land are the two numbers that decide whether the root pass goes in easy or turns into a fight. They belong to the welder, not to you — ask before you prep the second joint.

Starting points by process

Root processRoot gapLandNotes
GTAW open root (TIG)1/16" – 3/32"1/16" – 3/32"Tight and even. Gap often set to the filler wire diameter
GTAW with consumable insertPer insert — usually 0Per the insertFaces pulled tight onto the ring
SMAW open root, E6010/60113/32" – 1/8"1/16" or knife-edgeWider — the rod has to key into the gap
SMAW, E7018 root1/8" – 5/32"1/16"Low-hydrogen roots want more room
GMAW short circuit / STT root1/16" – 3/32"1/16" – 1/8"Machine-dependent — ask
FCAW over a backing / insertPer the WPSPer the WPSRarely an open root
Socket weld1/16" set-back—Pull off the bottom — see 2
The WPS is the law

On any coded job the gap, land, angle and tolerance are written down. The table above is where to start a conversation on non-code work, and nothing more. If there's a WPS, read it and prep to it.

The questions to ask, once, at the start of the job

  • What gap do you want?And is that the same on the 2" as it is on the 8"?
  • How much land?Knife edge, 1/16", or heavier?
  • Bevel angle — standard 37.5°, or do you want it opened up?Some hands want 40°+ on heavy wall to get a rod in.
  • Do you want it bridged or open?Some welders want tacks only; some want bridge tacks they'll grind off.
  • Do you want the tacks feathered, or will you grind them?Settle it once instead of arguing per joint.
  • Purging — who does it, and do you need a dam?If it's stainless or alloy, this changes your fit sequence.
  • How clean, how far back?An inch is the default; some want two.

Why the numbers are what they are

  • Too tight a gap and the root doesn't fuse through — lack of penetration, and it's a repair that means grinding the whole root out.
  • Too wide a gap and the root falls through or burns back — excess penetration, icicles, and a bore full of suck-back.
  • Too heavy a land and the arc can't melt all the way through it — incomplete penetration, the unmelted land left as a line straight down the middle of the root.
  • Knife-edge land and it melts away before the puddle establishes — blow-through and a hole to fix.
  • Uneven gap round the joint — the welder changes technique four times in one pass. This is the one that's your fault, and it comes from an end that wasn't square.
Write it on the rack

Once you've got the answer, put it on a piece of tape on the pipe stand: GAP 3/32 · LAND 1/16 · 37.5°. Every fitter on the crew preps the same and the welder stops having to check.

From the Trade

“6010: 3/32 gap and land. TIG: knife edge, gap to fit the wire. Your welder decides.” — Seth Edstrom. His full tip: 21.3.

Fit-up is where the cut list becomes a spool. Everything here is about holding two prepped ends in the right relationship long enough to tack them, and then proving you still have the dimension you started with.

Setting the root gap

  1. Bring the faces together dry first and look at the gap the whole way round. If it opens and closes, one end isn't square — go back to 1.6a before you tack anything.
  2. Set the gap with something you can measure. A piece of filler wire of the right diameter, a cut nail, a spacer wedge, or a Hi-Lo gauge. Never by eye.
  3. Check hi-lo all the way round. The two IDs have to line up, not the two ODs — wall thickness varies. A Hi-Lo gauge reads it directly; a straightedge across the OD lies to you.
  4. Pull it in with alignment tools if it fights: a cage clamp, a chain clamp, a spider, or a lug-and-wedge on big bore. Don't force a joint closed with a tack — it'll crack.
  5. Get the spacers out before the last tack goes in. A cut nail welded into the root is a hard inclusion and a repair.
root gap hi-lo line up the ID, not the OD 1 2 4 3 TACK ORDER 12, then 6, then 3, then 9 — across the joint, never around it
Same OD, heavier wall on the right — so the outsides agree and the bores do not. That difference is the hi-lo, and it is why you gauge from the inside. Gap set with a spacer, tacks going in across the joint, never around it.

Tacking

  • Three tacks on 2" and under, four at 12, 3, 6 and 9 up to 6", and more above that — sizes and lengths in 1.8a. On a fixed joint, ask the welder where he wants them: many want them off 6 o'clock, where the root starts (1.8m).
  • Tack opposite, never in sequence. 12, then 6, then 3, then 9. Going around the circle pulls the joint closed on one side.
  • Tacks about 1/2" to 3/4" long on most pipe (1.8a has them by size), full penetration, and feather both ends so the root pass ties in and runs over them.
  • A tack is a weld. Same rod, same preheat, same procedure, same welder qualification. Cracked tacks get ground out, not welded over.
  • Bridge tacks on light wall if the joint wants to close — but grind them off before the root, don't weld through them.
  • Purge before you tack on stainless and alloy. Once four tacks are in, getting a dam past them is a different job.

Keeping it straight

  • Sight down every spool. Hold one end up, close an eye, look through it. A dogleg you can see is 1/4" or more.
  • Set the level on plain pipe, clear of the long seam and the weld caps. Either one will rock the level and lie to you.
  • Two fittings on one nipple: set them in plane with a straightedge or a framing square across both faces before you tack the second. Out of plane is the hardest error to find and the most expensive to fix.
  • Check alignment after tacking and again after the root. Welds pull.

Seam orientation

  • Roll the longitudinal seam up where you can see and inspect it.
  • Keep it out of the bottom third of a horizontal line.
  • Stagger seams joint to joint so they don't line up across a weld.
  • Never put a seam where a branch or an olet is landing.

Rechecking before it goes to the welder

  • Centre to centre against the cut listTape on it, not memory. Both directions if it's a two-fitting piece.
  • Gap even all the way roundSame feeler, same wire, four places.
  • Hi-lo inside toleranceGauge it, don't eyeball the OD.
  • Flange bolt holes two-holedStraddling the centreline unless told otherwise.
  • Fittings in planeSquare or straightedge across both faces.
  • Sighted through for doglegBoth ends, both ways.
  • Spacers and clamps removedNothing left in the root.
  • Prep still cleanIt's been handled since you cleaned it. Wipe it again.
Measure again after welding

A joint can pull 1/16" shorter as it cools. On a six-joint spool that's 3/8" you didn't plan for. Measure the finished spool against the cut list before it leaves the bench — and see 1.9.

Four tacks, feathered12, 3, 6 and 9 on a 6" joint, each one ground back at both ends so the root runs over it. PHOTO
From the Trade

“If you can’t put an X-ray weld in it, reject the fit-up. Prep is 80% of the job.” — Seth Edstrom. His full tip: 21.3.

The joint is fit and tacked. What follows is the welder's work — but you're the one holding the pipe, checking the dimension and answering to the inspector, so it pays to know what's happening in there and why the hand in the hood keeps asking you for things.

root hot pass fills cap
Root, hot pass, fills, cap. Every one of them has to tie into the one under it and into both sidewalls, and the cap laps about 1/16" past each bevel edge.
Read the WPS, not this

Everything in 1.8 is field knowledge and starting points. On any coded job the process, the filler, the amperage range, the preheat, the interpass temperature and the acceptance criteria are written in a qualified procedure. That document wins every argument.

A tack is a weld. Same filler, same preheat, same procedure, same qualified welder — and it stays in the joint forever, because the root pass runs straight over it.

Before the first tack

  • Prep clean and brightAn inch back, OD and ID. Re-wipe it — it's been handled.
  • Gap and hi-lo checkedEven all the way round, IDs lined up.
  • Purge in and flowingStainless, duplex, nickel, chrome-moly. After the tacks it's much harder.
  • Preheat to the WPSHeavy wall, chrome-moly and cold weather. Check with a temp stick, not a hand.
  • Ground clamped close and cleanNot through a chain fall, not through a bearing.
  • Rod out of the oven, wire cleanLow-hydrogen out of the oven is good for 4 hours on E7018 (AWS D1.1), less on higher-strength rods — not a shift. See 1.8f.

Size and spacing

PipeNumber of tacksTack length
Up to 2"3 — at 12, 4 and 83/8" – 1/2"
2-1/2" – 6"4 — at 12, 3, 6, 91/2" – 3/4"
8" – 12"6 to 8, evenly around3/4" – 1"
Over 12"Every 4" to 6" of circumference1"

Tack opposite, never around. 12, then 6, then 3, then 9. Working around the circle walks the gap closed on one side and open on the other, and once it's tacked you own it.

On a fixed joint, ask first. The root starts at 6, and a lot of welders don't want to start on a tack. They'll ask for 10, 2, 4 and 8 instead — same rule, still opposite pairs.

Tack prep

  1. Full penetration. A tack that only sits on the bevel faces is a cold lap waiting to be found by RT.
  2. Feather both ends with a grinder or a file — taper them down to nothing so the root pass can run up onto the tack and fuse it instead of bridging over it.
  3. Take the crown off. If the tack stands proud into the groove the root pass will ride over it and leave lack of fusion underneath.
  4. Clean each tack — chip the slag, wire brush it, and look at it before you go to the next one.
  5. Any crack, any porosity — grind it out completely and tack again. Welding over a cracked tack propagates the crack into the root.

Bridge tacks and spacers

  • Bridge tacks sit across the top of the groove on light wall to stop the gap closing. They are temporary — grind them off before the root, and dress the base metal where they sat.
  • Spacers (wire, cut nails, wedges) come out before the last tack. Nothing gets welded into the root that isn't filler metal.
  • Never tack a clamp, lug or dog to a code line without checking — the removal and dressing of those attachments is usually specified, and on some materials it needs NDE afterwards.
  • Arc strikes outside the joint are rejectable. Strike in the groove, not on the pipe.
Tack with the root process

If the root is going in with TIG, tack it with TIG. If it's an open-root 6010, tack it with 6010. Mixing filler metals in a joint is a procedure problem, and the tacks are part of the weld.

From the Trade

“Top, check level. Bottom. Then square the sides and tack.” — Seth Edstrom. His full tip: 21.3.

The root is the pass that gets x-rayed, the pass that leaks, and the pass everything else sits on. On a fixed joint you can't turn, it gets run in quarters.

Quartering out

On a fixed horizontal pipe (5G) the welder can't reach all the way round in one go, and the position changes from overhead at the bottom, to vertical up the sides, to flat at the top. So the joint is broken into quarters and each quarter is run as its own weld:

12 — flat 3 6 — overhead 9 1st 2nd 3rd 4th uphill 6 → 12
Uphill: start at 6, run up to 3, then 6 up to 9, then 3 to 12, then 9 to 12. Every quarter starts and stops on a prepared tie-in.
  • Uphill (6 to 12) is the usual direction for a code root — more penetration, more control, slower.
  • Downhill (12 to 6) is used on pipeline work and thin wall with 6010 — fast and shallow. The WPS has to call for it and the welder has to be qualified downhill; an uphill ticket doesn't cover it.
  • Balance the halves. Running one whole side before the other pulls the joint out of round and out of line. Alternate sides.
  • 2G (pipe vertical, weld horizontal) is run all the way round in one direction; 6G (45° fixed) is the test position because it hits every one of these at once.

Starts, stops and tie-ins

  1. Grind every stop to a taper before you restart on it. A square crater is a lack-of-fusion notch and a crack starter.
  2. Restart back on the good weld, not in the crater, and walk forward into it.
  3. Feather the tacks as you come to them — the root has to fuse through the tack, not ride over it.
  4. Break the keyhole cleanly. Fill the crater, don't just snap the arc off — a crater crack in the root is the most common RT reject there is.
  5. Clean each quarter before the next — slag on a tie-in is an inclusion on the film.

The keyhole is the little hole out ahead of the puddle that tells an open-root welder they've got full penetration. Too big and the root falls through; gone and the root isn't tying in. Even, consistent keyhole = even, consistent root — and that only happens if your gap was even to start with.

Root prep and purging

  • Carbon steel open root — no purge; the root oxidizes and that's accepted.
  • Stainless, duplex, nickel alloys and titanium — purge or it sugars. A sugared root is scale on the inside of the bore and it is a reject, not a cosmetic issue. Higher chrome-moly (P91, and P22 on many specs) gets a purge on a TIG root too — check the WPS.
  • Purge gas is argon (or nitrogen on some austenitics). Dam both sides, fill from the bottom, vent at the top, and get the oxygen down — typically below 0.1% (1000 ppm), tighter for titanium.
  • Leave the purge running through the root and the hot pass at minimum.
  • Water-soluble dams dissolve on hydrotest; tape and cardboard dams have to come out. Know which you used and write it down.

Hot pass

The second pass, run hot and fast right on top of the root. It burns out any small slag or porosity in the root, ties the root into the sidewalls, and gives the fill passes something solid to sit on. On a 6010 root it's not optional — grind the root first, then hot-pass it before it cools if the procedure allows.

Suck-back and icicles

Too hot, too slow or too wide a gap and the root drops through as icicles inside the bore. Suck-back is the root setting up hollow — concave, below the inside surface of the pipe. It happens mostly overhead, from too much heat or too wide a gap, or on TIG from too much purge pressure pushing it back. Too cold is a different defect: the root doesn't come through at all (incomplete penetration). All of them are inside where you can't see them, all show on RT, and past the code limit they mean grinding out to the root or cutting the joint out. This is why the gap you set in 1.7 matters.

Fill is where a good joint is quietly won or lost. Two things decide it: everything is clean before the next bead goes on, and every bead ties into the one beside it and the sidewall behind it.

Keeping it clean

  • Chip and brush every pass, every time. Not the good passes — every pass. Slag left in a corner becomes an inclusion on the film that nobody can see from the outside.
  • Get into the toes. Slag hides where the bead meets the sidewall, which is exactly where the next bead has to fuse.
  • Grind out anything that looks wrong as soon as you see it. Ten seconds now against gouging out four passes later.
  • Wire brush the right brush. Stainless brush on stainless, carbon on carbon, and never swap.
  • Watch for a slag trap — a bead that leaves a deep notch beside it. Flatten it or grind the notch out before you weld beside it.

Interpass temperature

MaterialTypical preheatMax interpass
Carbon steel, thin wallWarm it to 50°F minUsually not limited
Carbon steel, heavy wall175°F over 1" wall
B31.3 over 1"; B31.1 over 1" when the carbon is over 0.30%. Many WPSs run 200.
500°F typical
Chrome-moly (P11, P22)250°F (P11) – 400°F (P22)600°F typical
Austenitic stainlessNone — and don't350°F – keep it cool
Duplex stainlessNone300°F (150°C) on 2205, about 210°F (100°C) on super duplex (2507) — strictly held

These are typical field numbers — the WPS governs. Check with a temp stick or a contact pyrometer an inch from the groove, and check before each pass, not once at the start.

Bead placement

  • Stringers over weave on most pipe work, and on nearly all stainless and alloy. Weaving puts too much heat in and widens the heat-affected zone.
  • Stack them against the sidewall first, then work across. Each bead should overlap the one before by roughly a third to a half.
  • Watch the toe angle. A bead that piles up steep against the sidewall leaves a notch the next pass can't reach — that's where lack of fusion comes from.
  • Undercut along the sidewall gets fixed now, not at the cap. Once it's buried it's a rejectable notch nobody can see.
  • Keep the groove flat as it fills. A humped fill leaves the cap nowhere to go and the welder ends up with excess reinforcement.

Roughly how many passes

WallRoot + hotFillsCap
Sch 10, up to 0.15"10 – 11
Sch 40, 2"–4" (0.15"–0.24")21 – 21
Sch 40, 6"–8" (0.28"–0.32")22 – 31 – 2
Sch 80, 6"–8" (0.43"–0.50")24 – 62 – 3
Over 0.75"28+3+
Tied in means fused, not covered

The eye can't tell fusion from coverage — that's what the film is for. Anything you can see that looks like a lap, a notch or a shadow at a toe, grind it and re-run it. Nobody has ever been sorry they ground out one pass.

The cap is the only pass the world ever sees, and it's the one the inspector measures. It also can't fix anything underneath it.

Prepping for the cap

  1. Stop the fill about 1/16" below flush with the pipe surface. Fill flush and the cap has to sit entirely proud — that's how you end up over the reinforcement limit.
  2. Flatten the fill. Grind out any hump, any deep valley between beads, any slag trap.
  3. Clean the toes back onto base metal so the cap has bright steel to fuse to at both edges, about 1/8" past where the cap will land.
  4. Check the groove is even the whole way round — a groove that's deep at 6 and shallow at 12 gives a cap that's high at 6 and thin at 12.
  5. Check interpass temperature one more time before you strike.

Running it

  • Stringers, overlapping by about half, working the same direction in each quarter as the rest of the joint.
  • Cap width = groove width plus about 1/16" each side. Wide enough to tie in past the toes, no wider — extra width is heat you didn't need to put in.
  • Pause at the toes just long enough to fill them. Undercut at the cap toe is the single most common visual reject.
  • Keep the crown low and even. A cap you can run a gloved hand over and feel as a smooth ridge is right; a stack of separate ropes is not.
  • Fill every crater. Craters crack.
  • Clean it and look at it in good light before you call it done — wire brush, then walk the whole circumference with a light held low across the weld so it throws shadows.

Reinforcement limits

Wall thicknessMax cap height or root protrusion (B31.3 normal fluid service)
Up to 1/4"1/16"
Over 1/4" to 1/2"1/8"
Over 1/2" to 1"5/32"
Over 1"3/16"

Check the code that applies to your job. B31.1, B31.3, B31.9, API 1104 (pipelines under B31.4 and B31.8) and AWS D1.1 all set these differently, and a client spec can be tighter than any of them. B31.1 also changes the limit with design temperature.

Mark it

Most jobs want the welder's ID next to each weld — paint pen, low-stress stamp, or a weld map. Low-stress (round-nose) stamps only, and never on thin wall or on stainless unless it's specifically allowed. Get it on before the joint goes in the rack and the number gets lost.

Grinding the cap

Dressing a cap to make it look better is fine where it's allowed — but grinding below the base metal surface is removing wall thickness, and that's a repair, not a cleanup. Never grind a cap on a joint that's already been accepted without going back through the inspector.

A discontinuity is anything that interrupts the weld. It becomes a defect when it's outside what the code allows — and then the joint gets repaired or cut out.

What gets found, and where it came from

DefectWhat it looks likeUsual cause
PorosityRound holes, scattered or in a lineDirty prep, moisture, lost gas shield, wind
Slag inclusionDark irregular lines on film, usually at a toeNot cleaning between passes; slag trap
UndercutGroove melted into base metal at the toeToo hot, wrong angle, travelling too fast
Lack of fusionStraight tight line on film, no fusion at sidewallToo cold, wrong angle, bead riding over a notch
Incomplete penetrationStraight line down the centre of the rootGap too tight, land too heavy, too little heat
Burn-through / iciclesMetal dropped into the boreGap too wide, too much heat, too slow
Suck-back (root concavity)Root sits hollow, below the inside surface of the pipeToo much heat or gap overhead, too little filler, too much purge pressure
CracksAny crack — crater, toe, root, longitudinalRestraint, hydrogen, cooling too fast, dirty steel
Excess reinforcementCap too high or too wideGroove filled flush before capping
Arc strikeSmall burn mark on base metalStriking outside the groove
Hi-lo mismatchStep at the ID on the filmFit-up — yours
Misalignment / doglegJoint out of lineFit-up — also yours

Cracks are rejectable in any amount under B31.1, B31.3 and AWS D1.1. Pipeline work under API 1104 tolerates only tiny crater cracks. Treat every crack as a reject. Everything else has a limit written somewhere.

What a CWI looks at

Most inspection is visual, and a lot of it happens before anybody strikes an arc:

  • Before weldingMaterial and heat numbers, prep angle and land, cleanliness, gap, hi-lo, alignment, preheat, welder qualification, filler metal and its storage.
  • During weldingProcess and parameters against the WPS, interpass cleaning and temperature, purge, bead sequence.
  • After weldingReinforcement height and width with a fillet/weld gauge, undercut depth, toes, craters, arc strikes, spatter, root condition where visible, weld ID.

Test methods

MethodFindsNotes
VT — visualSurface: profile, undercut, cracks, arc strikesCheapest, catches most rejects. Gauges and a light
PT — dye penetrantSurface-breaking cracks and porosityAny material. Clean, penetrant, dwell, remove, developer
MT — magnetic particleSurface and just-below-surface flawsFerromagnetic only — no austenitic stainless
RT — radiographyInternal: slag, porosity, LOF, LOP, root problemsFilm or digital. Area has to be cleared and roped off
UT — ultrasonicInternal, especially planar flaws and LOFShear wave and PAUT. No radiation exclusion zone
ET — eddy currentSurface flaws, tube inspectionSpecialist work
Hydrostatic testLeaks, strengthWater, typically 1.5× design. The usual system test
Pneumatic testLeaks where water can't be usedStored energy — exclusion zones and a written plan
Hardness testProper heat treatmentAfter PWHT on chrome-moly and similar
Ferrite checkFerrite number in duplex and austenitic weldsFerritescope on the cap and root
PMIThat the alloy is what the drawing saysHandheld XRF, on materials and on filler
Radiography on site

When RT is shooting, the exclusion zone is real and it is not a suggestion. Barricades, signs, a radiation safety officer, and nobody inside the rope — including you walking through to get a tool. Dose is cumulative and you don't feel it.

The fitter's share of the rejects

Hi-lo, misalignment, incomplete penetration from a tight gap, burn-through from a wide one, and porosity from a dirty prep. Five of the most common rejects on any job start at fit-up, not at the arc.

A coated rod carrying the current and making its own shielding gas and slag as it burns. Portable, wind-tolerant, works on dirty steel, and still the backbone of field pipe work.

Amperage by rod

Electrode3/32"1/8"5/32"3/16"Polarity
E601050–8575–135100–175140–225DCEP
E601150–8575–125110–165140–215AC or DCEP
E601345–9080–130105–180150–230AC, DCEP or DCEN
E701870–11090–160130–210180–300AC or DCEP
E7024—115–165180–220240–290AC, DCEP or DCEN
E308L-16 / E316L-1640–7070–10595–140—DCEP (-16 also AC)
E7018-A1 (C-Mo) / E8018-B2 (Cr-Mo)70–11090–150130–200—DCEP

Start in the middle of the range and adjust to the puddle. Overhead and vertical-up run 10–15% under flat. Open root runs lower than fill. The box lid has the manufacturer's numbers and they beat this table.

What each rod is for

  • E6010 — the open-root rod. Deep digging arc, fast-freezing, cuts through mill scale and light rust. DC only. Cellulose coating, runs with a whip.
  • E6011 — the AC version of a 6010. For buzz boxes and engine drives without DC.
  • E7018 — low-hydrogen fill and cap. Smooth, strong, low crack risk, but it wants clean metal and it must stay dry.
  • E7024 — flat and horizontal only, high deposition. Not a pipe rod.
  • E308L / E316L — austenitic stainless. Run cool, keep the arc short, chip the heavy slag.

Low-hydrogen storage

  • 7018 comes out of a sealed can or a hot oven at 250–300°F and goes into a portable rod caddy.
  • Exposure limit under AWS D1.1 is 4 hours for E7018, 2 hours for E8018 (8018-B2), 1 hour for E9018 (9018-B3), 1/2 hour for E100 and E110 rods. Your spec can be tighter. Past that they get re-baked the way the maker says, or binned.
  • A rod that's been in a puddle, a pocket or the bottom of a gang box overnight is scrap. Moisture in the flux is hydrogen in the weld, and hydrogen cracks show up days later.
  • Never re-bake cellulose rods (6010/6011) — they need their moisture. Different rod, opposite rule.

Running it

  • Arc length roughly the diameter of the core wire. Long arc = porosity and spatter; too short = sticking and a rod that freezes in.
  • Drag angle 5–15° for 7018, pushed slightly for 6010 uphill.
  • Whip and pause for a 6010 root; steady drag for 7018 fill.
  • Chip and brush every pass. 7018 slag peels if the bead is right — slag that fights you is telling you the bead is wrong.
  • Machine set to DC+ for both 6010 and 7018 on almost every pipe job. Check the lead polarity if the arc is harsh and won't stabilize.

A non-consumable tungsten electrode, an inert gas shield and filler added by hand. The cleanest root you can put in a pipe, and the only practical answer on thin-wall stainless and alloy.

Polarity by material

MaterialPolarityWhy
Carbon steelDCEN (straight)Heat into the work, narrow deep puddle
Stainless, duplexDCENSame — keep it cool and fast
Nickel alloy, chrome-molyDCENSame
TitaniumDCEN + trailing shieldExtreme shielding needed
Aluminum, magnesiumACThe reverse half-cycle breaks the oxide skin
Copper, brassDCENOften with helium for heat

Tungsten

Tungsten dia.DCEN ampsAC ampsTypical filler
0.040"15–8015–600.045" / 1/16"
1/16"70–15050–1001/16"
3/32"140–25090–1601/16" / 3/32"
1/8"225–400150–2103/32" / 1/8"
  • 2% lanthanated (blue) or 2% ceriated (grey — orange on older stock) for everything, AC and DC. This is the modern default.
  • 2% thoriated (red) still common on DC steel work — it's mildly radioactive, so grind it with extraction and don't breathe the dust.
  • Pure (green) / zirconiated (brown) older AC aluminum choices — they ball rather than point.
  • Grind lengthwise, never across. Grinding marks running around the tip make the arc wander. Point length about 2–2.5× the diameter, with a small flat on the tip.
  • Dedicated tungsten grinder or wheel. Grinding tungsten on a carbon-steel wheel contaminates both.
  • Stick-out about the diameter of the cup — more for an inside corner, less in a groove.

Gas

UseGasFlow
Torch, general steel and stainless100% argon15–20 CFH
Torch, aluminum / heavy sectionsArgon, or Ar/He 75/25 to 50/5020–30 CFH
Torch, austenitic stainless (mechanized)Ar + 2–5% H₂15–25 CFH
Backing purge, stainless / nickelArgon (nitrogen on some austenitics)Fill slow, then 5–15 CFH
Backing purge, duplexArgon or Ar/N₂5–15 CFH
Never CO₂ or a mix with CO₂ or oxygen on TIG

Anything reactive eats the tungsten instantly. And never hydrogen mixes on carbon steel, duplex, martensitic or titanium — austenitic stainless and some nickel alloys only.

Setting up and running

  • Rule of thumb: about 1 amp per 0.001" of thickness on steel and stainless, less on stainless if it's running hot. That's a ceiling for sheet and fillets, not a root setting: the rule says 154 A for a 0.154" wall (2" Sch 40), but an open root there runs more like 90–120 A. Adjust to the puddle.
  • Gas lens if you can get one — better coverage, more stick-out, fewer sugared roots.
  • Pre-flow 0.2–0.5 s, post-flow about 1 second per 10 amps. Pulling the torch away while the metal is still bright is how you get a black tip and a contaminated end.
  • Keep the filler inside the gas. Dipping in and out of the shield oxidizes the wire and drags it into the puddle.
  • Touch the tungsten to the puddle and stop. Regrind it — a contaminated tungsten will never run right and will drop inclusions into the weld.
  • Walking the cup is the standard pipe technique where it's allowed — rock the cup on the bevel faces for a rhythm you can hold all the way round. Some specs ban it on thin wall.
  • Amperage control — foot pedal in the shop, thumb wheel or fingertip control on pipe in a rack.

Solid wire fed continuously through a gun with a gas shield. Fast, easy to learn, and fussy about wind and cleanliness — which is why it's a shop process more than a field one.

Transfer modes

ModeHow it movesUse
Short circuitWire touches, shorts, pinches offThin material, all positions. Low heat — cold-lap risk
GlobularBig irregular dropsNobody picks this — it's the gap between the other two
SprayFine stream of dropletsFlat and horizontal, heavy deposition, 80%+ argon needed
Pulsed spraySpray, pulsed on and offAll positions with spray quality. Needs a pulse machine
STT / RMD / controlled shortWaveform-controlled short circuitOpen-root pipe. This is how MIG gets on code pipe
Plain short-circuit MIG on code pipe

Conventional short-circuit GMAW can look perfect and have no fusion at the sidewall (cold lap), so it's fenced in: ASME IX limits how much thickness a short-circuit procedure qualifies (QW-403.10), AWS D1.1 won't prequalify it, and a lot of owner specs ban it on pressure piping. Controlled-waveform processes (STT, RMD and similar) exist to solve this, and they still run under their own qualified procedure.

Gas by material

MaterialGasNotes
Carbon steel, short circuit75% Ar / 25% CO₂ (“C25”)The general-purpose mix
Carbon steel, deeper pen / dirty100% CO₂More spatter, more penetration, cheaper
Carbon steel, spray90/10 or 95/5 Ar/CO₂, or 98/2 Ar/O₂Needs 80%+ argon to spray
StainlessTri-mix: 90% He / 7.5% Ar / 2.5% CO₂Short circuit. Or 98/2 Ar/CO₂ for spray
Aluminum100% argon (Ar/He for thick)Spool gun or push-pull — wire is soft
Nickel alloyAr with small He and CO₂ additionsPer the filler maker

Polarity is DCEP for all solid-wire GMAW. Flow 25–35 CFH, more in a draft, and get a screen up — a 5 mph breeze strips the shield.

Starting numbers — carbon steel, short circuit, C25 (last row: spray on 90/10)

WireMaterialVoltsWire feed (IPM)Amps (approx)
0.030"1/8"17–19200–25090–130
0.035"1/8" – 3/16"18–21200–280120–180
0.035"1/4"20–23280–340160–210
0.045"1/4" +22–26250–350200–300
0.045" spray, 90/103/8" +26–30350–450280–350

Running it

  • Stick-out 3/8" to 1/2" and hold it. Stick-out changes amperage more than the dial does.
  • Push on carbon steel for a flatter, wider bead with less penetration; drag for deeper penetration and a narrower bead. Always push on stainless and aluminum.
  • Listen for bacon frying. A steady sizzle is right. Popping means volts too low or feed too fast; a hissing crackle with a long arc means volts too high.
  • Clean base metal. MIG has no flux — whatever's on the steel ends up in the weld.
  • Common wires: ER70S-6 (carbon steel, most tolerant), ER70S-2 (TIG root wire), ER308LSi / ER316LSi (stainless), ER4043 / ER5356 (aluminum).

Tubular wire with flux inside it. Deposits fast, runs out of position, and tolerates the field — which is why it owns structural work and heavy fabrication.

The two families

Self-shielded (FCAW-S)Gas-shielded (FCAW-G, “dual shield”)
ShieldingThe flux makes it — no bottleFlux plus CO₂ or 75/25
PolarityUsually DCENUsually DCEP
WindHandles it — outdoor processNeeds a screen, same as MIG
Typical wiresE71T-11, E71T-GS, E71T-8E71T-1, E70T-1, E81T1-Ni1
Weld qualityGood; more fume and spatterCleaner, better mechanicals, smoother bead
WhereField structural, ironwork, tackingShop fab, heavy plate, pipe fill and cap

Get the polarity right. Running a self-shielded wire on DCEP or a dual-shield on DCEN gives a filthy arc, huge spatter and a bad weld — and it's the first thing to check when a flux-core machine "won't run".

Starting numbers — E71T-1, CO₂ or 75/25

WirePositionVoltsWire feed (IPM)Amps (approx)
0.035"All22–25200–300140–200
0.045"All23–27180–280170–240
0.045"Flat / horizontal26–30280–400230–320
1/16"Flat / horizontal26–32150–300250–400

Gas flow 35–45 CFH on gas-shielded. Stick-out is longer than MIG — 3/4" to 1" — and it matters just as much.

Reading the designation

  • E71T-1 — E electrode, 7 = 70 ksi tensile, 1 = all positions (0 would be flat and horizontal only), T = tubular, -1 = the usage/shielding class.
  • -1, -9, -12 gas-shielded, the common shop wires. All-position when the digit after the 7 is a 1 (E71T-1), flat and horizontal when it's a 0 (E70T-1).
  • -5 gas-shielded, better toughness, flat and horizontal.
  • -8, -11, -GS self-shielded. -GS is single-pass only — not for pipe.
  • Metal-cored (E70C-6M) looks like flux core but behaves like high-deposition MIG, with almost no slag.

Running it

  • Drag angle, 10–20°, always. Pushing flux core traps slag ahead of the puddle.
  • Vertical up on all-position wire. Down only if the wire and the procedure both say so.
  • Chip and brush every pass. The slag is heavier than stick slag and it hides in the toes.
  • Keep the wire dry. Flux core absorbs moisture the same as a low-hydrogen rod — opened spools go in a heated cabinet or a sealed bag with desiccant.
  • Fume. Self-shielded especially. Ventilation or a fume gun, and a respirator in a confined space.
  • Check the drive rolls — knurled rolls for tubular wire, not the smooth V-rolls you use for solid wire, and don't over-tension or you crush the wire flat.

Starting points, not gospel. Every one of these gets tuned by ear and by the puddle — but you have to start somewhere, and starting 60 amps off wastes a rod and a coupon.

Stick — amperage by rod and size

Rod3/32"1/8"5/32"Current
E601050–8575–135100–175DCEP
E601150–8575–125110–165AC or DCEP
E601345–9080–130105–180AC or DC
E701870–11090–160130–210AC or DCEP
E7024—115–165180–220AC or DC
ROUGH START: AMPS ≈ ROD DIAMETER IN THOUSANDTHS
Which is to say 1/8" = .125" → start around 125 amps and tune from there.
Overhead and vertical up, back off 10 to 15%. Flat, you can push it.

TIG

ROUGH START: 1 AMP PER .001" OF MATERIAL THICKNESS — AN OPEN ROOT RUNS UNDER IT
Steel & stainless
DCEN. Sharp point on the tungsten, 2½ times the electrode diameter long.
Aluminum
AC. Balled or lightly truncated tip. Set AC balance to about 70% electrode-negative (penetration), 30% electrode-positive (cleaning) to start, and add cleaning only if the oxide won't break up.
Argon flow
15–20 cfh on a standard cup. More is not better — too much flow turns turbulent and pulls air in.
Purge
Stainless and alloy roots need argon inside the pipe. Low, steady flow until the air is displaced, then just enough to hold it.
Tungsten
3/32" 2% lanthanated covers most of what you will touch.
TungstenBandCurrentUse
2% lanthanatedBlueAC or DCThe modern general-purpose choice.
1.5% lanthanatedGoldAC or DCSame idea, slightly different arc.
2% ceriatedGrey (older stock orange)AC or DCEasy starts at low amps. Thin wall and small parts.
2% thoriatedRedDCThe old standard. Mildly radioactive — do not breathe the grinding dust.
PureGreenACOld-school aluminum. Balls up nicely, otherwise superseded.
ZirconiatedBrownACAluminum where contamination cannot be tolerated.

Band colors follow AWS A5.12, which moved ceriated from orange to grey in 2009, and suppliers still vary. Read the class printed on the electrode, not just the colour on the end.

Wire

MIG on carbon, short circuit
DCEP, 75/25 argon-CO2 at 25–35 cfh. .035" wire, roughly 18–22 volts to start.
MIG spray transfer
Needs an argon-rich mix (90/10 or richer) and more voltage. Will not spray on straight CO2.
Flux core, gas shielded
DCEP. Straight CO2 or 75/25.
Flux core, self-shielded
DCEN, no gas. The outdoor answer.
Stickout
Short for short circuit, longer for flux core. Wrong stickout ruins a bead faster than wrong amperage.
Wind kills gas

Anything over about 5 mph across the joint strips the shielding gas off the puddle and you get porosity you cannot see until it is cut out. Screen it, or change to a process that carries its own shielding.

Preheat is not optional when it is specified

Heavy wall and chrome-moly get preheated before the first pass and held between passes. If the WPS calls for it and the spool goes in cold because somebody was in a hurry, the joint cracks — and it usually cracks after the X-ray, not before.

The machine, dialled inClose-up of a welder's display at a working setting, and beside it the rod's own stamped amperage range on the box lid. Shoot the same rod at too-low and too-high for the comparison. PHOTO

Every number on a rod or a spool means something specific. Once you can read it you can walk into any gang box and know what you are holding.

Decoding a stick electrode

Step through it

AWS A5.1 CARBON STEEL STICK ELECTRODE E 70 1 8 ELECTRODEthat is all it means 70,000 PSIminimum tensile strength ALL POSITIONS2 would be flat and horizontal only LOW HYDROGEN, IRON POWDERruns AC or DCEP 70 KSI · ALL POSITION · LOW HYDROGEN the fill and cap rod on carbon steel pipe keep it in the oven — it drinks moisture E6010 SAME SYSTEM, DIFFERENT ROD 60 ksi · all position · cellulose sodium DCEP only — digs deep, that is why it roots

Stick — E XX Y Z

PartMeans
EElectrode
First two (or three)Tensile strength in thousands of psi. 60 = 60,000. 70 = 70,000.
Next digitPosition. 1 = all positions. 2 = flat and horizontal only. 4 = flat, horizontal, overhead and vertical down — not vertical up.
Last digitCoating and current. Read it with the position digit in front of it (the 18 in 7018) — see below.
Alloy suffix-A1 carbon-½Mo (E7018-A1). -B2 1¼Cr-½Mo (E8018-B2, for P11). -B3 2¼Cr-1Mo (E9018-B3, for P22).
Other suffixes-1 (E7018-1) = better impact toughness. H4 / H8 / H16 = max diffusible hydrogen, mL per 100 g of weld. R = moisture-resistant coating.
Last two digitsCoatingCurrentWhat it is for
10Cellulose sodiumDCEP onlyDeep dig. The open root on carbon pipe.
11Cellulose potassiumAC or DCEPThe 6010 that runs on a buzz box.
12Titania sodiumAC or DCENGeneral, shallow.
13Titania potassiumAC or DC eitherEasy, pretty, thin material.
14Iron powder titaniaAC or DC eitherFaster fill than 13.
15Low hydrogen sodiumDCEP onlyLow-hy, DC machines.
16Low hydrogen potassiumAC or DCEPLow-hy that will run on AC.
18Low hydrogen iron powderAC or DCEPThe fill and cap rod. Most used rod on the job.
24Iron powder titania (heavy)AC or DC eitherHigh deposition, flat and horizontal only.
28Low hydrogen iron powderAC or DCEPLow-hy production fill, flat and horizontal.
Low hydrogen means keep it dry

Anything ending 15, 16, 18 or 28 is low hydrogen and the coating pulls moisture out of the air. Moisture in the coating puts hydrogen in the weld, and hydrogen cracks it — sometimes days later. Sealed can or a rod oven, and once it has been out too long it is scrap, not "probably fine".

Wire and TIG rod

ER70S-6
ER electrode or rod · 70 70,000 psi · S solid · 6 the chemistry. The 6 carries extra manganese and silicon, so it handles mill scale better. The most common carbon steel TIG and MIG wire there is.
ER70S-2
Triple deoxidized. What you reach for on a root that is not as clean as it should be.
E71T-1
7 70 ksi · 1 all position · T tubular (flux cored) · -1 gas shielded, rutile, DCEP. A 0 in the position slot means flat and horizontal only. Current labels add the gas on the end: E71T-1C is classified on CO₂, E71T-1M on 75–80% argon. Run it on the gas it's classified for.
E71T-8
Self-shielded, all position, DCEN. No gas bottle, works in wind.
ER308L
Stainless for 304 base. L is low carbon — it resists the carbide precipitation that wrecks corrosion resistance at the weld. ER308LSi adds silicon so the puddle wets out better on MIG.
E308L-16
The stick version (AWS A5.4). E electrode · 308 the stainless grade · L low carbon, 0.04% max · -16 the coating: -15 is DCEP only, -16 and -17 run AC or DCEP.
ER309L
The transition rod. Carbon steel to stainless, and the first (buttering) layer on carbon steel before you put 308L over it.
ER316L
For 316 base. Molybdenum for chloride service.
Match the filler to the base, not to what is open on the bench

The rule of thumb is that filler matches or slightly overmatches the base metal strength. The WPS settles it in writing. If the rod in your hand does not match what the procedure names, it is the wrong rod, however close the number looks.

You are not the welder. But the man who knows what is about to happen to his joint fits it better, and the day somebody asks you to run a bead you will not be starting from zero.

ProcessPolarityShieldingWhere it lives on pipe
SMAW stickDCEP mostlyThe flux coatingField carbon steel. 6010 root, 7018 fill and cap.
GTAW TIGDCENArgon, plus a purge insideRoots on stainless, alloy and thin wall. Slow, clean, unforgiving.
GMAW MIGDCEP75/25 or argon-rich mixShop work, fill on big bore. Hates wind.
FCAW wireDCEP gas-shielded
DCEN self-shielded
Gas, or the flux core aloneFast fill. Self-shielded goes outside where wind kills MIG.

Polarity, once, properly

DCEP
Electrode positive, "reverse polarity". On stick and wire it gives the deepest penetration and the steadiest arc — that's why they live here. On TIG it would put most of the heat into the tungsten and melt it.
DCEN
Electrode negative, "straight polarity". On TIG most of the heat goes into the work — TIG on steel lives here. So does self-shielded flux core. On stick, DCEN melts the rod faster with shallower penetration.
AC
Alternates. TIG on aluminum needs it — the electrode-positive half of the cycle blasts the oxide skin off. On stick it also cuts down arc blow.
The two that get mixed up constantly

TIG on steel and stainless is DCEN. TIG on aluminum is AC. Run DCEN on aluminum and the oxide skin never breaks — the puddle won't wet and the filler balls up on top. Hook the torch up DCEP by mistake and the tungsten melts into the puddle inside a few seconds.

Self-shielded is not MIG with different wire

Gas-shielded flux core runs DCEP. Self-shielded (the stuff that works in wind) runs DCEN. Same machine, same gun, opposite polarity. Swapping wire without swapping the leads is one of the most common bad-weld calls on a job site.

The four arcs, side by sideSame coupon welded four ways — stick, TIG, MIG, flux core — laid in a row so the bead profile and spatter of each can be compared at a glance. PHOTO

You don't have to weld it, but knowing what happens after you hand it off will make you a better fitter.

SMAW (stick)
6010 for the root, 7018 for fill and cap. The workhorse on carbon steel pipe.
GTAW (TIG)
Root pass on stainless, alloy, thin wall and anything critical. Slow, clean, unforgiving of bad fit-up.
Combo
TIG root, stick or wire fill. Very common on process work.
FCAW / GMAW
Wire. Fast fill on big bore in the shop.

What a bad fit-up costs the welder

  • Uneven gap — burn-through on the wide side, incomplete penetration on the tight side.
  • Hi-lo — the root can't tie both sides, and it shows on the X-ray.
  • Dirty prep — porosity all the way through the root.
  • Wrong root face — too thick and it won't penetrate, too thin and it melts away.

Purging

Stainless and most alloys need argon inside the pipe for the root pass or the back of the weld sugars and is worthless. That means purge dams, and somebody has to fit them, vent them, and remember to pull out the ones that don't dissolve. If you're setting a purge, tell the welder where the vent is.

Preheat and interpass

Heavy wall and alloy pipe gets preheated before the first pass and held between passes. If there's a preheat on the WPS, the spool doesn't get welded cold because it's faster — that's how you crack a joint.

The part nobody writes down — giving him a joint he can actually weld

A fit-up can be geometrically perfect and still be a miserable joint, because of where you put it. This is the difference between a fitter people ask for and one they work around.

  • Leave him room to swing. He needs a hand, a rod or a torch, a hood, and enough clearance to get all the way round. A joint 4" off a wall means the back of it gets welded blind, by feel, badly.
  • Never put a weld in a corner, against steel, or behind something else. If you can move it a foot along the run and it is still within tolerance, move it. That foot costs you nothing and saves him an hour.
  • Roll it if you possibly can. A joint that turns on rollers is welded flat, fast and sound. The same joint fixed in position is a 5G or a 6G — slower, harder, and a lot more likely to be repaired. Ask before you tack whether it is going out rolled or fixed.
  • Get it off the ground. Flat on the deck means he welds the bottom lying in it. Horses, dunnage, anything.
  • Tack where it helps. Feathered, ground at both ends, and not sitting at 6 o'clock where he has to start his root.
  • Point the seam away from him and away from the bottom of the joint.
  • Support the spool so it cannot move. A joint that shifts under him as he welds it is a cracked root.
  • Tell him what you know. Which end is fixed, where the purge vent is, what the spool has to pull to, and whether the far end is already tied in. He cannot see any of that from the joint.
Fit it the way you would want to weld it

Before you tack, get down where the welder will be and look at the joint from there. If you cannot see all the way round it, or you cannot imagine getting a rod into it at 6 o'clock, he cannot either.

Ten seconds of that, every joint. It is the single cheapest habit in the trade and it is most of what "good fitter" means when a welder says it.

What it actually costs to hand off a bad joint

A weld that fails inspection does not just get rewelded. It gets ground all the way out, re-prepped, re-fit, re-welded and re-shot — and on code work it goes on a repair log with somebody's stamp on it. That is most of a day and an X-ray, for a gap you could have fixed with thirty seconds and a grinder.

And the welder wears it, not you, unless you are the kind of hand who says so. Be that kind of hand.

The WPS is the law

Every code weld runs to a written procedure — process, rod, gap, preheat, passes. The fitter's job is to hand over a joint the procedure can actually be run on.

What a welder wants to see when he walks upA fit-up ready to go: gap even all the way round, land consistent, four tacks feathered, rod oven and machine in frame, and the WPS on a clipboard hanging off the rack. PHOTO

There are seven places a weld pipe dimension can go wrong and only one place anybody finds out. Check at every one of them and the last check is a formality.

The checkpoints

WhenWhat you're checkingCost if you miss it
Before the cutC-to-C, take-outs, gaps subtracted; the cut length written downNothing — you fix it on paper
After the cutActual length, and square at four pointsOne recut
After the bevelLength again — squaring up and dressing the land take length offOne recut
At fit-up, dryGap even, hi-lo, fittings in plane, C-to-C to the listRe-fit, no weld lost
After tackingC-to-C, alignment, sighted for doglegGrind four tacks
After the rootIt pulled. Check before the fills lock itCut one root out
After weld-outFinished spool against the cut list, both waysCut the joint out
At installationAgainst the actual field dimension, not the drawingThe whole spool, and a day

Weld shrinkage is real

  • A butt joint pulls roughly 1/16" as it cools on common sizes — more on heavy wall, more with a wide gap, more with high heat input.
  • It's cumulative. Six joints on a spool is 3/8". Nobody notices until the last flange won't reach.
  • It pulls angular too. A joint that welds hotter on one side cocks the pipe out of line — that's what balanced quartering is for.
  • Where it matters, hold one end long and trim the closing piece after the rest of the spool is welded out.
Measure after welding, not just before

The dimension the fabricator is paid for is the dimension after the welds cooled. Put the tape on the finished spool before it leaves the bench, every time.

Measuring discipline

  • One datum. Measure everything on a spool from the same reference point. Chaining measurement to measurement stacks every small error into one big one.
  • One tape per crew where you can. Two tapes with different hooks on the same spool will disagree by a sixteenth and you'll never find out which one was right.
  • Check your hook. The sliding hook on a tape is supposed to float by exactly its own thickness. Bent, loose or worn, and every reading off the hook is wrong — hooked over an edge or pushed against a face. Check it both ways against a steel rule: hooked on, then butted against a stop. Both should read the same.
  • Write it down. Cut list on paper or on the pipe. A number carried in your head across a lunch break is a number you'll get wrong.
  • Mark the pipe, not just the list. Piece number, cut length, which end is prepped.
  • Read the tape square on. Reading a tape at an angle on big bore will cost you an eighth all by itself.

When it's wrong

  1. Stop and measure it again from the datum before you touch anything. Half of "wrong" is a misread.
  2. Find out where it went wrong, not just by how much. If the saw is out of square, everything behind it is wrong too.
  3. Long is fixable, short is not. If it's long, trim. If it's short, you're adding a piece or remaking the spool — say so now.
  4. Tell somebody before it goes in the rack. A mistake found at the bench is a rework; the same mistake found at the tie-in is a crane, a permit and a crew standing around.
The two-minute habit

Tape in hand at every checkpoint. It adds maybe ten minutes across a whole spool and it is the difference between a fitter people want on their crew and one they don't.

What actually comes out of the gang box on a weld pipe job. Tick what you've got before you walk to the rack, not after.

Measuring and marking
  • 25' tapeAnd know your hook is true — see 1.9.
  • Wrap-aroundOne sized for your pipe range. See 1.4.
  • Framing square and combination squareChecking square and setting fittings in plane.
  • Torpedo level and a magnetic levelPlus a protractor or digital angle finder for rolled work.
  • Soapstone, paint markers, scribeSeparate stainless-safe set, kept in its own bag.
  • Centre punch and a small hammer
  • Chalk lineLong runs, layout on big bore.
  • Take-out card and a calculatorOr this book — see the charts at the top of the home screen.
Cutting
  • Torch outfitTips to suit, striker, tip cleaners, spare flints, flashback arrestors.
  • Portable bandsaw and spare bladesTwo TPI ranges. Bi-metal.
  • Cut-off wheelsMore than you think. Separate stainless wheels.
  • Pipe stands and vee blocksTwo minimum, three if the piece is long.
  • Chain vise or a portaband jig
Prep and grinding
  • 4-1/2" grinderTwo if you can — one set up for cutting, one for grinding.
  • Grinding wheels and flap discsType 27, 40/60/80 grit flaps.
  • Half-round file and a deburring toolThe land and the bore burr.
  • Wire brushes — carbon and stainless, marked
  • Bevel gauge / Hi-Lo welding gaugeAngle, land, gap and hi-lo in one tool.
  • Solvent and ragsBefore the abrasive, not after.
Fit-up
  • Cage clamp or chain clampSized for the pipe you're on.
  • Spacer wire / cut nails / gap wedgesWhatever the welder's gap calls for.
  • Two-hole pins and a flange spreaderPins line up the bolt holes; the spreader opens a flange joint to get a gasket in or out.
  • Come-along, chain fall, ratchet strapsPulling a spool in without forcing a tack.
  • Wedges, dogs and lugsCheck first whether you're allowed to tack them on.
  • StraightedgeFittings in plane.
Welding support
  • Ground clamp and leadClean jaws. Not through a bearing or a chain fall.
  • Rod caddy / heated quiverIf you're running low-hydrogen.
  • Purge kitDams, tape, hose, flow meter, oxygen analyzer if the spec wants one.
  • Temp sticks or a contact pyrometerPreheat and interpass.
  • Chipping hammer and slag brush
  • Welding blankets and a fire extinguisherPlus a fire watch who stays at least an hour after the last spark (NFPA 51B) — see 12.4.
PPE
  • Safety glasses and a full face shieldShield over glasses, never instead of.
  • Cutting goggles, shade 5And a hood if you're near an arc.
  • Leathers, gloves, sleevesCutting gloves and welding gloves are different gloves.
  • Hearing protection
  • Respirator rated for the fumeGalvanized, stainless or a confined space changes this.
  • Hard hat, boots, fall protection as required
Paperwork
  • Iso or spool drawingThe current revision, not the one in your truck since Tuesday.
  • Cut listWritten, with piece marks.
  • WPSGap, land, angle, preheat, interpass, filler, acceptance.
  • Hot work permitSigned, current, and in your pocket.
  • Weld map / weld logJoint numbers and who welded them.
  • Material heat numbersTransfer them before you cut the stencil off the pipe.
Transfer the heat number before you cut

The mill stencil is printed once, in one place. Cut the pipe in the middle and half your material has no identification. Write the heat number on both pieces with a paint marker before the saw goes in.

A take-out is how much of your centre-to-centre dimension the fitting eats. Every elbow and tee has one — reducers, caps and stub ends are measured end to end instead — and this is where they all live — with how to measure for each, and how to get the number off a fitting nobody gave you a number for.

TAKE-OUT 90° ELBOW RUN BRANCH TEE
Extend the centrelines until they cross. That crossing is the working point — the spot the print dimensions to — and the take-out is the distance from it out to the weld face. Everything on this page is that one measurement, on a different shape.
CUT = CENTRE-TO-CENTRE − TAKE-OUTA − TAKE-OUTB

Three kinds of number, and they are not interchangeable

1Take-out centre to face

Elbows, tees, crosses, laterals, returns.

From the working point — where the centrelines cross — out to the weld face. This is the one you subtract from a C-to-C dimension, once for each end that has a fitting on it.

6" LR 90 → 9.00" comes off that end

2End to end face to face

Reducers, swages, spools, nipples.

There is no centre and no working point — the fitting is just a length sitting in the middle of the run, so it comes off whole, one time.

6" × 4" reducer → 5.50" comes off once

3Face to back weld face to far outside

Caps, stub ends, the K on a return.

From the weld face to the far outside of the fitting. It tells you how much room the thing needs, not what to subtract from a C-to-C.

6" cap → 3.50" of room past the weld

Subtracting the wrong kind is the classic bad cut

A reducer's 5-1/2" is an end-to-end, so it comes off once, whole. An elbow's 9" is a take-out, so it comes off at that end only. Treat an end-to-end like a take-out and you will subtract it twice; forget that a take-out only comes off its own end and you will take it off both. Either way you are holding a piece of pipe that is wrong by inches.

The five you will use every day

Centre of fitting to face, in inches, nominal per ASME B16.9 (short radius used to be B16.28; it moved into B16.9 in 2001). Each column is its own fitting: the 90 columns are for a 90, the 45 column is for a 45, and the Tee number is the same to all three ends. The Cap column is face to back, not a take-out — see 1.11e.

Size90 LR90 SR45 LRTeeCap
1/2"1.50—0.621.001.00
3/4"1.50—0.751.121.00
1"1.501.000.881.501.50
1-1/4"1.881.251.001.881.50
1-1/2"2.251.501.122.251.50
2"3.002.001.382.501.50
2-1/2"3.752.501.753.001.50
3"4.503.002.003.382.00
3-1/2"5.253.502.253.752.50
4"6.004.002.504.122.50
5"7.505.003.124.883.00
6"9.006.003.755.623.50
8"12.008.005.007.004.00
10"15.0010.006.258.505.00
12"18.0012.007.5010.006.00
14"21.0014.008.7511.006.50
16"24.0016.0010.0012.007.00
18"27.0018.0011.2513.508.00
20"30.0020.0012.5015.009.00
24"36.0024.0015.0017.0010.50

Tap a size to open it in the cut length calculator.

Every fitting, one page each

The rule of thumb, and exactly where it quits

90 LR = 1.5 × the size. 90 SR = the size. Those two hold from 1" up and they are worth knowing cold — an 8" LR 90 is 12", a 12" is 18", and you never open the book.

45 LR = 5/8 × the size only holds from 4" up. Below that the standard rounds the 45 up: a 2" is 1.38, not 1.25, and a 1" is 0.88, not 0.62. Use the table.

Below 1" the 90 rule breaks too. The 1/2", 3/4" and 1" LR 90s are all 1.50. Some older catalogue sheets still show the 3/4" at 1-1/8" — if yours does, measure the fitting.

A tee has no rule of thumb like the LR 90's size × 1.5. A 6" tee is 5.62", not 9". Read tees off the table every time.

These are nominal. The fitting in your hand governs.

B16.9 dimensions are nominal, and makers work to a tolerance around them. Olet and grooved-fitting dimensions are not B16.9 at all — they are whatever that maker builds. Valves are face to face per B16.10, and stub ends come in two B16.9 lengths (long and short pattern), so know which one you have. Check the first fitting out of every box against the number you are about to cut to, and if they disagree, the fitting wins. How to check one is 1.11h.

Every elbow take-out in the trade comes out of one piece of geometry: the centreline radius of the bend and half the angle it turns. Learn that and you can work out an elbow nobody has a table for.

R = 1.5 × size on an LR R = 1 × size on an SR R 45° take-out T working point
The take-out is not the radius. It is the distance from the working point back to where the bend starts — and that is R × the tangent of half the turn. On a 90 the two happen to be equal, which is why everybody thinks take-out and radius are the same thing. On anything else they are not.
1 · The take-outTAKE-OUT = R × tan(ANGLE ÷ 2)
2 · R on a long radius elbowR = 1.5 × SIZE
3 · R on a short radius elbowR = 1 × SIZE

Work out R first from line 2 or line 3, then put it into line 1. ANGLE is how far the elbow turns — 90 for a 90, 45 for a 45.

The table

Centre of fitting to face, in inches, nominal per ASME B16.9 — long radius, short radius (formerly B16.28) and 3R. The 45 SR column is not a standard fitting; see the note under the table.

Size90 LR90 SR90 3R45 LR45 SR
1/2"1.50——0.62—
3/4"1.50——0.75—
1"1.501.003.000.880.41
1-1/4"1.881.253.751.000.52
1-1/2"2.251.504.501.120.62
2"3.002.006.001.380.83
2-1/2"3.752.507.501.751.04
3"4.503.009.002.001.24
3-1/2"5.253.5010.502.251.45
4"6.004.0012.002.501.66
5"7.505.0015.003.122.07
6"9.006.0018.003.752.49
8"12.008.0024.005.003.31
10"15.0010.0030.006.254.14
12"18.0012.0036.007.504.97
14"21.0014.0042.008.755.80
16"24.0016.0048.0010.006.63
18"27.0018.0054.0011.257.46
20"30.0020.0060.0012.508.28
24"36.0024.0072.0015.009.94

Tap a size to open it in the cut length calculator.

3R means the bend radius is 3 × the size, so a 3R 90 takes out 3 × the size — a long sweeping turn used where flow or pigging matters. 45 SR is not a B16.9 fitting; the column is the formula (size × tan 22½°) for a 45 cut from an SR 90, so check it against the fitting before you cut to it.

Elbows that turn some other angle

Stock butt weld elbows come as 90s and 45s. When the job needs a 60°, 30°, 22½° or 11¼°, you cut that piece out of a 90 (15.18) — and its take-out is not the 90's number or the 45's number. It is smaller, because the piece turns less. You do not need the formula to get it. Use this table:

  1. Find how far your elbow turns in the left column.
  2. Take the number beside it — long radius or short radius column, whichever elbow you cut it from.
  3. Multiply that number by the pipe size. The answer is the take-out at each end of that elbow.
TurnLR × sizeSR × size6" LR
90°1.5001.0009.00
60°0.8660.5775.20
45°0.6210.4143.73*
30°0.4020.2682.41
22½°0.2980.1991.79
11¼°0.1480.0980.89
Worked — a 30° out of a 6" LR 90 Turn 30°, long radius column: 0.402
0.402 × 6 = 2.41" — call it 2-7/16" off each end of that piece.
Same cut from a 6" short radius 90: 0.268 × 6 = 1.61".

Where the numbers come from: each one is the formula above with R already put in — 1.5 × tan(half the turn) for long radius, 1 × tan(half the turn) for short. *A stock 6" LR 45 is 3.75", not 3.73: B16.9 rounds its stock 45s, so for a bought 90 or 45 use the table above. These multipliers are for the pieces you cut yourself.

Worked the long way, with the formula — a 30° cut from an 8" LR 90 R = 1.5 × 8 = 12"
T = 12 × tan(30 ÷ 2) = 12 × tan 15° = 12 × 0.2679 = 3.21"
So each end of that cut elbow takes off 3.21" — call it 3-3/16" — instead of the 12" the whole 90 would have.
How to mark the 90 and cut it: see 15.18.

Reducing elbows

Both ends use the larger size

A 6" × 4" reducing 90 has a centre-to-face of 9.00" on both ends — 1.5 × 6, the large size, not 6.00" on the small end. The fitting reduces inside the bend, and the geometry stays on the big size's radius.

Take 6.00 off the small end instead and that piece comes out 3" too long — and it is never obvious until the spool will not go together.

Measuring an elbow you are holding

  1. Framing square. Lay the elbow flat on the bench with one face tight against a blade of the square. Measure square off that blade to the centre of the other opening — that is the take-out. Flip it and do the other face; on an equal elbow the two readings must match.
  2. Stand it on the bench. Stand the elbow on one face on a flat bench, so the other opening faces sideways. Hold the tape plumb and measure from the bench up to the centre of that opening. That is the take-out.
  3. For a 45 or any odd angle, trace it. Lay it on paper or on the bench, mark both faces, draw a line square off the centre of each face, and where those two lines cross is your working point. Measure from there. That method works on anything — full detail in 1.11h.
  4. Sanity check against the rule. A 6" LR 90 should read 9". If your tape says 6", somebody sent you short radius.
SR and LR look the same in a rack

The two get mixed in the same bin constantly, and on a 6" the difference is 3" per end — 6" on a piece with one at each end. Before you cut a run of them, stand one up and measure it. Short radius is also usually stamped, but the stamp is on the side you cannot see.

A 180° return turns the line back on itself; a long bend sweeps it round without a fitting at all. Neither one has a take-out you can subtract the usual way, which is exactly why they catch people.

your pipe weld faces O K R
O is centre to centre — how far apart the two legs of your line end up. K is back to face — how much room the return needs past the end of your pipe. Neither is a take-out: you do not subtract them from a C-to-C, you lay the line out to them.

180° returns

LONG RADIUS  O = 3 × SIZE  K = (1.5 × SIZE) + OD÷2
SHORT RADIUS  O = 2 × SIZE  K = SIZE + OD÷2

Inches, nominal per ASME B16.9. A return is two 90° bends back to back, so O is simply twice the bend radius. The K formula lands within 1/16" of the table; the table is the standard's number.

SizeLR OLR KSR OSR K
1"3.002.192.001.62
1-1/4"3.752.752.502.06
1-1/2"4.503.253.002.44
2"6.004.194.003.19
2-1/2"7.505.195.003.94
3"9.006.256.004.75
4"12.008.258.006.25
5"15.0010.3110.007.75
6"18.0012.3112.009.31
8"24.0016.3116.0012.31
10"30.0020.3820.0015.38
12"36.0024.3824.0018.38
Worked — a 4" LR return on a hairpin The print wants two 4" runs on 12" centres, tied together at the far end.
A 4" LR return is O = 12.00" ✓ — the fitting sets the spacing, so the centres are not yours to choose.
It needs K = 8.25" of clear room past the end of your pipe. Steel at 8" past the end and the return will not go in.
Neither number comes off your cut length. The pipe runs to the face and stops. The exception: if the iso dimensions a leg to the back of the return instead of its face, K comes off that leg.
If the centres do not match a stock return

Two 90s with a piece of pipe between them will make any spacing you like. C-to-C between the two elbow working points = your leg spacing, so the piece between them is spacing − 2 take-outs — ordinary math. Shops do this constantly rather than chase an odd return.

Long bends — 3D, 5D, 10D

An induction or pulled bend has no fitting and no weld in the turn. It is specified by radius in pipe diameters, so a 5D bend on 8" pipe has a 40" centreline radius. That is how most shops mean it; some pipeline specs take D as the actual OD (5 × 8.625 = 43.1"), so check the PO. Take-out works exactly like an elbow, because a bend is an elbow with a big radius.

TAKE-OUT = (R × tan(ANGLE÷2)) + TANGENT  ·  ARC = 0.01745 × R × DEGREES

R is on the centreline, in inches: R = n × nominal size. The arc is how much pipe the turn itself eats — you need it to work out material, not cut length.

Size3D R5D R10D R3D 90° arc
2"6.0010.0020.009.42
3"9.0015.0030.0014.14
4"12.0020.0040.0018.85
6"18.0030.0060.0028.27
8"24.0040.0080.0037.70
10"30.0050.00100.0047.12
12"36.0060.00120.0056.55
16"48.0080.00160.0075.40
20"60.00100.00200.0094.25
24"72.00120.00240.00113.10
The tangent is not optional and it is not standard

Most bends are supplied with a straight tangent on each end — commonly 6" or 12", but it is whatever the purchase order said. That tangent is part of the take-out, and two bends with the same radius and different tangents will give you two different cut lengths.

Measure the tangent on the bend in front of you before you work out a single cut. There is no table for it.

Measuring a return or a bend

  1. A return: lay it flat and measure face to face across the two legs — that is O plus nothing, because the faces are at the tangent points. Then measure from the face plane to the outside of the U for K. Put a straightedge across both faces to get the plane honest.
  2. A bend, tangent to tangent: find where the straight stops and the curve starts by running a straightedge along the tangent — the point it lifts off is the start of the bend. Mark both, and the straight length from each mark to the end is your tangent.
  3. A bend's radius, from a chord: lay a straightedge across the inside of the curve (the throat) so both ends touch the pipe. Measure between the two touching points for c and the biggest gap in the middle for h. Then R = (c² ÷ 8h) + (h ÷ 2) is the throat radius — add half the OD to get to the centreline.
  4. Working point: extend both tangents with a string or a chalk line until they cross. That crossing is the working point on a bend exactly as it is on an elbow, and the distance from it to the end of the pipe is what you subtract.
Worked — radius off a chord on an 8" bend Straightedge c = 24" across the throat, biggest gap under it h = 3".
R = (24² ÷ (8 × 3)) + (3 ÷ 2) = (576 ÷ 24) + 1.5 = 25.5" at the throat
Plus half the OD: 25.5 + 4.31 = 29.8" on the centreline
Read h carefully — 1/8" off on h moves R by nearly an inch here.
8" pipe at 3D would be 24", at 5D 40". This one is neither — somebody bent it in the field, and no table was ever going to tell you that.

A tee has two take-outs from one working point — one out the run, one down the branch — and on a straight tee they are the same number. On a reducing tee and on a lateral they are not, and that is where the cuts go wrong.

Straight tees and crosses

Centre to end, inches, nominal per ASME B16.9. On a straight tee the run number C and the branch number M are equal, and a cross uses the same number on all four ends.

SizeC = MSizeC = M
1/2"1.005"4.88
3/4"1.126"5.62
1"1.508"7.00
1-1/4"1.8810"8.50
1-1/2"2.2512"10.00
2"2.5014"11.00
2-1/2"3.0016"12.00
3"3.3818"13.50
3-1/2"3.7520"15.00
4"4.1224"17.00

Tap a size to open it in the cut length calculator.

A tee has no rule of thumb like the LR 90's size × 1.5

1.5 × the size works on long radius 90s and it is wrong on every tee. A 6" tee is 5.62", not 9". A 12" tee is 10.00", not 18". People who have the elbow rule burned in reach for it without thinking and take off 3-3/8" too much on both ends of a 6" tee.

Reducing tees

The run is certain. The branch is its own number.

Both run ends use the C of the run size — the bigger one. A 6" × 6" × 4" tee is 5.62" out each end of the run, the same as a straight 6" tee, because the body is a 6" body.

The branch M is listed separately for each combination in B16.9, and it sits between the two: shorter than the run's C, longer than the small size's own tee. An 8" × 8" × 6" is 6.62; an 8" × 8" × 4" is 6.12. Only a handful of combinations keep M equal to C — 16" × 16" × 14" is 12.00 both ways — and plenty of big one-size reductions still come up short (14" × 14" × 12" is 11.00 and 10.62). Look it up or measure it — never use the small size's own tee number.

Worked — 8" header with a 4" branch Fitting: 8" × 8" × 4" reducing tee.
Run ends: 8" tee C = 7.00" each, so an 8" piece into it loses 7".
Branch: B16.9 lists M = 6.12" for an 8" × 8" × 4". A 4" straight tee is 4.12", but this outlet is on an 8" body — it is not 4.12". Take off 4.12 instead of 6.12 and the branch piece comes out 2" too long.
Stand the fitting up, check the run centreline to the branch face against 6.12, and write it on the fitting in soapstone.

Laterals and wyes

45° A C M
A lateral has one working point and three numbers off it, and none of them match. Extend the branch centreline until it crosses the run centreline — that crossing is what the print dimensions to, and it sits well back from where the branch physically meets the run.

A 45° lateral is a tee with the branch swung round so it points the way the flow is already going — less turbulence, less pressure drop, which is why they turn up on pump headers, flare lines and big drainage.

  • Three different take-outs. A is short (the branch leans away from that end); C and M are long. They change with size, combination and maker, and there is no clean multiplier — never guess a lateral.
  • The working point is not on the fitting. On a lateral the centrelines cross inside the body, and on a reducing lateral they cross somewhere you cannot put a tape at all. You get to it by extending lines, not by measuring to it.
  • There is no B16.9 lateral. The standard leaves laterals out as pipe fabrication, so every butt-weld lateral is built to its maker's drawing. Get that drawing, or measure the one you were sent.
  • Fabricating one instead of buying it — the layout, the ordinates and the cut — is 15.10, and a true Y is 15.6.
Rolling a lateral out of plumb is the classic

A lateral only works if the branch lies in the plane the print says. Tack the run first, get the branch clocked with a level or a wrap, and check it again after the root — a 45° branch pulls harder than a 90 because the weld is longer on one side than the other.

Measuring a tee, cross or lateral

  1. The run, both ends: measure face to face straight across the run and halve it. On a straight or reducing tee that gives you C, and both ends are the same.
  2. The branch: measure from the branch face to the far outside of the run, then subtract half the run's OD. That gives you M without having to find the centreline.
  3. A lateral: lay it on the bench, chalk or scribe the run centreline on the bench using the two run faces, then scribe the branch centreline square off the branch face. Where the two scribes cross is the working point — now measure to all three faces.
  4. Write it on the fitting. Soapstone the three numbers on the body before it leaves the bench. Nobody wants to do that layout twice.
Worked — branch take-out off a 10" tee Branch face to the far outside of the run reads 13-3/4".
10" pipe OD = 10.750, so half is 5.375".
M = 13.75 − 5.375 = 8.375" — call it 8-3/8", and the table says 8.50 for a straight 10" tee.
An eighth out on a fitting is normal tolerance. Use what you measured, not what the table said.

A reducer is the odd one out. It has no working point and no take-out — it is a length in the middle of the run, and it comes off your dimension once, whole.

TOTAL PIPE, BOTH SIDES = C-to-C − TAKE-OUTA − TAKE-OUTB − REDUCER END-TO-END

End-to-end, concentric and eccentric

Inches, nominal per ASME B16.9. Listed by the large end — a 6"×4" and a 6"×3" are both 5.50" long. Concentric and eccentric are the same length.

Large endLengthLarge endLength
3/4"1.506"5.50
1" & 1-1/4"2.008"6.00
1-1/2"2.5010"7.00
2"3.0012"8.00
2-1/2" & 3"3.5014"13.00
3-1/2" & 4"4.0016"14.00
5"5.0018"15.00
20" – 24"20.00
Watch the jump at 14"

Reducer length climbs gently to 12" and then jumps — a 12" is 8", a 14" is 13" — and jumps again at 20", where it is 20". No rule of thumb survives both jumps. Read it off the table.

The eccentric — and the offset it puts in your line

OFFSET FLAT SIDE — STAYS ON THE LINE END TO END
An eccentric keeps one side flat and moves the whole centreline across by half the difference in outside diameters. Your line steps over at that fitting — if the print carries a centreline elevation past it, that step has to be in your math.
OFFSET = (LARGE OD − SMALL OD) ÷ 2
ReductionOffsetReductionOffset
2 × 1-1/20.248 × 61.00
3 × 20.568 × 42.06
4 × 30.5010 × 81.06
4 × 21.0612 × 101.00
6 × 41.0612 × 82.06
6 × 31.5616 × 121.62
Which way the flat goes, and why

Flat on top at a pump suction and anywhere air must not pocket. A concentric there traps an air pocket in the crown that feeds air into the pump — noise, lost prime, a pump that never makes its numbers — and nobody will ever see it.

Flat on the bottom on steam, on condensate, and anywhere the invert has to hold for drainage — the bottom of the pipe stays on grade through the fitting.

Mark FLAT TOP or FLAT BOTTOM on the spool in soapstone before it leaves the bench. It is a 180° mistake that looks completely normal in a rack and costs a cut-out in the field.

Worked — BOP held through an 8" × 6" eccentric Flat on the bottom, so the bottom of pipe does not move and your BOP elevation carries straight through.
But the centreline drops: offset = (8.625 − 6.625) ÷ 2 = 1.00"
So the centreline elevation on the 6" side is 1" lower than on the 8" side. If the print dimensions to centreline on both sides and you ignored the step, every hanger downstream is an inch out.

Swage nipples

  • A swage does the same job in small bore — a solid forged piece, concentric or eccentric, to MSS SP-95.
  • Ends come BE (bevelled, for butt weld), PE (plain, for socket weld or slip-on) or TE (threaded), and you can have one of each on the same piece.
  • MSS SP-95 sets the length by the large end — a 1" is 3-1/2", a 2" is 6-1/2", a 4" is 9". It is a length, like a reducer — measure the one you have and subtract it whole.
  • A bushing or a reducing insert is not a butt weld fitting and does not belong in a welded line unless the spec calls for it. Reducing inserts in particular are banned on plenty of jobs.

Measuring a reducer

  1. Length: face to face, straight down the side. That is the whole number — there is nothing to halve and nothing to add.
  2. Is it eccentric? Stand it on its large end and hold a square up the side. An eccentric has one side that runs dead straight up — the flat. A concentric slopes in all the way round.
  3. Offset: lay it flat side down on the bench and measure from the bench to the top of each end. Subtract, then halve it — the difference is the whole change in OD, and the centreline only moves half of that.
  4. Check the wall at both ends. Each end has to match the schedule of the pipe it welds to. Compare each bore to your pipe's ID, or read the stamp, before you tack it in — a mismatch is hi-lo on the inside of the root.

Fittings with a weld on one end only. The dimension does not pass through them — it stops at them, and that changes what you subtract.

Caps

A cap closes the end of a line. Its number E is face to back: from the weld face to the outside of the dome.

Inches, nominal per ASME B16.9. E is for walls up to extra strong (XS). Heavier than XS and the cap is longer — that is E1.

SizeEE1SizeEE1
1/2"1.001.005"3.003.50
3/4"1.001.006"3.504.00
1"1.501.508"4.005.00
1-1/4"1.501.5010"5.006.00
1-1/2"1.501.5012"6.007.00
2"1.501.7514"6.507.50
2-1/2"1.502.0016"7.008.00
3"2.002.5018"8.009.00
3-1/2"2.503.0020"9.0010.00
4"2.503.0024"10.5012.00

Tap a size to open it in the cut length calculator.

You usually do not subtract a cap at all

If the print dimensions to the end of the pipe, cut to that and the cap hangs past it — E tells you how much room it needs, not what to take off. If the print dimensions to the outside of the cap (common on a vessel nozzle or a dead leg), then E comes off your cut. Read which one the print means before you cut it.

Note the flat spot in the E column: 1", 1-1/4", 1-1/2", 2" and 2-1/2" caps are all 1.50". It is not a misprint.

Stub ends and lap joint flanges

your pipe lap joint flange butt weld lap face seals here flange floats and spins stub end F
The flange never touches your pipe. It rides loose on the stub end and spins, which is the whole point of the joint — you can clock the bolt holes to match whatever you are landing on, after the welding is done. The take-out is F, from the lap face back to your butt weld.

F, inches, per ASME B16.9, which lists two lengths: long pattern and short pattern (the short one is also the MSS SP-43 length, common on stainless). The PO has to say which. Type A, B and C describe the shape of the lap, not the length.

SizeLongShortSizeLongShort
1/2"3.002.005"8.003.00
3/4"3.002.006"8.003.50
1"4.002.008"8.004.00
1-1/4"4.002.0010"10.005.00
1-1/2"4.002.0012"10.006.00
2"6.002.5014"12.006.00
2-1/2"6.002.5016"12.006.00
3"6.002.5018"12.006.00
3-1/2"6.003.0020"12.006.00
4"6.003.0024"12.006.00
Get the flange on before you weld the stub end

The lap is bigger than the flange bore. Weld the stub end on with the flange still in the box and the only way to fix it is to cut the stub end off again. Every hand does this once.

Slide it on, then tack. And on a spool with a lap joint each end, count the flanges twice — two on, facing the right way, before a single tack goes in.

Worked — 6" spool, LR 90 one end, lap joint the other Print: 4'-6" from the elbow working point to the face of the flange.
4'-6" = 54"
Less the 6" LR 90 take-out: 54 − 9.00 = 45.00"
Less the stub end F (long pattern): 45.00 − 8.00 = 37.00" — with a short pattern (3.50) it would be 41.50"
The lap face is the flange face — the lap sits between the flange and the mating gasket, so the flange thickness is not in this sum at all.
Why anybody uses them

Bolt holes that will not line up. The flange spins, so you weld the spool without worrying about clocking, then turn the flange to suit. Worth its weight on a tie-in to something already in the ground.

Expensive alloy, cheap flange. Only the stub end has to be the alloy — the backing flange can be plain carbon because it never touches the product. On stainless and nickel work that is most of why they exist.

Measuring these

  1. Cap: stand it on a flat bench on its weld face and measure straight up to the top of the dome. That is E. Mind the little flat some caps have — measure to the highest point.
  2. Stub end: lay a straightedge across the lap face and measure back to the bevelled weld end. That is F. Do not measure to the back of the lap — the lap has thickness, and the face is what seals.
  3. Lap diameter: measure across the lap. It has to be bigger than the flange bore (that is what the flange pulls on), clear the bolts, and cover the gasket on whatever you are bolting to.
  4. Test fit the flange over the shaft before anything gets welded. A stub end from one maker and a flange from another will occasionally not pass.

A flange is a take-out like anything else, and the number you subtract depends entirely on which kind of flange it is. Two of them even give length back.

your pipe face butt weld Y — length through hub
On a weld neck the dimension point is the flange face, and your pipe stops at the end of the hub. Y is the whole distance between those two, so Y is the take-out — and on a raised face flange the 1/16" raised face is already inside it.

Weld neck — length through hub Y

Inches, nominal per ASME B16.5, raised face included. Full flange data — OD, bolt circle, hole count, stud lengths — is 10.1 and 10.2.

SizeCl 150Cl 300SizeCl 150Cl 300
1/2"1.882.066"3.503.88
3/4"2.062.258"4.004.38
1"2.192.4410"4.004.62
1-1/4"2.252.5612"4.505.12
1-1/2"2.442.6914"5.005.62
2"2.502.7516"5.005.75
2-1/2"2.753.0018"5.506.25
3"2.753.1220"5.696.38
4"3.003.3824"6.006.62
5"3.503.88

Tap a size to open it in the cut length calculator.

Class changes the number

A 6" Class 150 weld neck is 3.50" through the hub; the Class 300 is 3.88". Cut to the wrong one and you are 3/8" out on a joint that has to land on bolt holes somebody else already set. Read the class off the flange edge — it is stamped there — not off the box.

Every flange type — and the two that give length back

FlangeWhat it does to your cut
Weld neckSubtract Y. Butt weld, full bore, and the only one that belongs on high pressure or cyclic service. The pipe never enters the flange.
Slip-onAdds length back. The pipe slides into the flange and stops about one wall thickness plus 1/16" short of the face, then gets two fillet welds — one inside, one outside. So your pipe runs almost all the way to the face: subtract only the setback — about one wall thickness plus 1/16" (1.13), enough room for the inside fillet without it running onto the face. Your spec or WPS may set it. Not the flange thickness.
Socket weldAdds length back, minus the gap. The pipe bottoms in the socket, then you pull it back 1/16" before welding so the weld is not restrained when it shrinks. What comes off your cut is the distance from the flange face back to the bottom of the socket, plus that 1/16". Small bore only.
Lap jointSubtract the stub end's F, not the flange. The flange floats and never touches your pipe — see 1.11e.
BlindNo pipe at all. It bolts to a flange face and closes the line. It has thickness but no take-out.
The 1/16" on a socket weld is not optional

Bottom the pipe out hard in the socket and weld it and the weld has nowhere to shrink to — it cracks, sometimes months later. Pull it back 1/16". A scribed mark on the pipe or a wire wrapped round it gets it right every time.

Gaskets between two flange faces

When your dimension runs face to face across a bolted joint, the gasket is in that dimension and the pipe has to give up its thickness.

FACE-TO-FACE DIMENSION − GASKET = STEEL FACE TO STEEL FACE
  • 1/16" — compressed sheet, the usual on raised face 150 and 300.
  • 1/8" — heavier sheet, full face on flat face flanges.
  • Spiral wound — nominally 0.175" uncompressed, seating down to about 0.130". Where it matters, ask which number the spec holds you to.
  • Ring joint — the ring seats in the groove and the faces close up; that is its own math and the flange data governs. See 10.3.
Worked — 6" spool, weld neck each end, 8'-0" face to face 8'-0" = 96.00"
Two 6" Class 150 weld necks: 96.00 − 3.50 − 3.50 = 89.00"
Shop holds true dimensions, so take two root gaps at 1/8": 89 − 1/4 = 88-3/4"
If the 8'-0" was gasket face to gasket face across two joints, take another 1/16" off each end as well: 88-3/4 − 1/8 = 88-5/8". Ask which one the print means.

Measuring a flange

  1. Weld neck: stand it face down on a flat bench and measure to the bevelled weld end. That is Y — raised face and all.
  2. Socket weld: stand it face down and measure to the top of the hub. Then drop a rule into the socket until it stops on the shoulder — that is the socket depth. The first minus the second is how far the socket bottom sits back from the face. Slip-on: nothing to measure but the setback you hold.
  3. Which class: the class is stamped on the outside edge along with the size, material and maker. If it is illegible, count the bolt holes and measure the bolt circle against 10.1 and 10.2.
  4. Which face: run your thumb across it. Raised face has a step and a serrated finish; flat face is flat to the edge; ring joint has a groove you cannot miss. They do not bolt to each other.

An outlet fitting sits on the run instead of in it, so its catalogue number is measured from the outside of the run pipe — and the number the print wants is measured from the centreline. Nobody prints the second one. You work it out.

run centreline H take-out the hole cut in the run is its own number — see 16.3
H is what the catalogue gives you: outside of the run to the branch face. The print dimensions to the run centreline, so the take-out is H plus half the run's outside diameter. Leave that half-OD out on a 12" header and every branch is 6-3/8" long.
TAKE-OUT FROM RUN CENTRELINE = (RUN OD ÷ 2) + H
Worked — 2" weldolet on an 8" header 8" pipe OD = 8.625", so half is 4.31"
2" standard weight weldolet, catalogue height H = 1.50" (Bonney Forge — check yours, it varies by maker and by weight)
Take-out from the run centreline = 4.31 + 1.50 = 5.81"
Print says the branch face is 6'-0" off the header centreline → 72.00 − 5.81 = 66-3/16" of 2" pipe.
Use the 1.50 on its own and you are 4-5/16" long, every time, on every branch.

The family

FittingWhat it is, and where it goes
WeldoletButt weld branch. The workhorse for a branch two or more sizes down from the run. Self-reinforcing, so no pad.
SockoletSocket weld branch. Small bore — 2" and under. Remember the 1/16" pull-back before you weld.
ThredoletThreaded branch. Instruments, vents, drains, gauge connections.
ElboletContoured to sit on the back of a long radius elbow. Thermowells and vents on a turn.
LatroletA 45° outlet — the branch leans with the flow instead of standing square to it.
SweepoletA contoured butt weld outlet with a long, low profile. Low stress, easy to inspect — pipeline and cyclic service.
NipoletAn outlet with the nipple already forged on. Vents and drains where a threaded nipple would be the weak point.
FlangeoletAn outlet with a flange face on it. One fitting instead of an olet plus a nipple plus a flange.
Insert weldoletSits in the hole rather than on it, flush with the bore. Used where the branch has to be full bore and smooth inside.

Heights and hole sizes by size and run are in 16.3. Weldolet, Sockolet, Thredolet, Elbolet, Latrolet and Nipolet are registered trade marks of Bonney Forge — used here because that is what people say on the job (see 20.9). The generic term is branch outlet fitting.

The catalogue height is not one number

Each olet is made for a range of run sizes, with the base contoured to suit, and extra strong outlets stand taller than standard weight on the bigger sizes. Bonney Forge prints one height per outlet size and weight; other makers may print it per run size. Read the page for the fitting you actually have.

If you have the fitting and not the catalogue page, measure it — that beats any table, and it is the only honest number for a fitting whose maker you cannot identify.

Measuring and setting one

  1. Height: sit the olet on the actual run pipe — not on the bench, because the base is curved. Lay a straightedge across the branch face and measure down to the run's outside surface at the centre of the olet.
  2. Take-out: add half the run OD. Pipe ODs are in 1.12.
  3. The hole: the olet has its own bore and the hole in the run has to match it — not the branch's nominal size. Get it off 16.3 or off the fitting, mark it with a wrap and a template, and cut inside the line so you can dress out to it.
  4. Square to the run: set it with a square off the run's centreline in two directions before tacking, and check it again after the root. An olet that leans 1° puts the branch about 1-1/4" out of place six feet away; 2° is 2-1/2".
  5. Clock it off the print. Top dead centre, 45° up, horizontal — a vent has to be at the top and a drain at the bottom, and there is no fixing it afterwards.
Where the branch is close to the run size

Olets are for stepping well down from the run. Once the branch gets within a size or two of the run, a reducing tee is usually the right fitting and often the cheaper one — and whether a branch connection needs reinforcement at all is an engineering call, not a fitter's (20.8).

Sooner or later you get handed something with no stamp, no box and no catalogue — a used fitting out of a laydown yard, an import, a shop-made elbow, an odd angle somebody cut last year. Every one of them will tell you its take-out if you ask it properly.

Draw a line square off the centre of each face. Where they cross is the working point. working point take-out
This works on anything — a 90, a 45, a 22½, a lateral, a shop-made bend. A weld face is always square to its own centreline, so a line drawn square off the centre of the face is that centreline. Two of them cross once, and that crossing is the point the print dimensions to.

Four methods, fastest first

  1. Framing square — 90° elbows only. Lay the elbow on the bench with one face tight against a blade. Measure square off that blade to the centre of the other opening. Flip it and do the other face. Ten seconds, and on an equal elbow the two readings must match.
  2. Stand it on the bench — elbows and tees. Stand the fitting on one face on a flat bench. Hold the tape plumb (a torpedo against it helps) and measure from the bench up to the centre of the opening that faces sideways. On a tee, measure the run face to face and halve it for C; stand it on the branch face and measure up to the run centre for M.
  3. Trace it — any angle, any fitting. The method in the figure. Lay it on paper, cardboard or a clean bench, mark both faces, draw a line square off the centre of each, and measure from where they cross. Slower, and it is the only one that never lies.
  4. Far side minus half the OD — tees, branches and olets. When you cannot get to the centreline, measure to the far outside of the run and subtract half the run's outside diameter. Pipe ODs are in 1.12.

The check that catches the rest

Two fittings and a known piece

Tack your fitting to each end of a piece of pipe you cut to a number you are sure of — say exactly 12". Turn both elbows the same way and measure centre to centre across the two open ends — that is working point to working point. Subtract the 12" and halve what is left, and you have the take-out, confirmed on the real joint with the real gaps in it.

Slower than a tape on a single fitting, and it is what you do before you cut forty of something.

What to do with the number

  • Write it on the fitting in soapstone or paint pen, the moment you have it. Nobody wants to do that layout twice, and the next hand will not know you did it.
  • Write it on the cut sheet too, next to the number it replaced, so the paperwork says what you actually built.
  • Tell the foreman if it is off. One fitting out of tolerance is a fitting. A whole pallet out of tolerance is a purchasing problem and somebody needs to hear about it before the spools are welded.

How far off is too far off

You measuredWhat it means
Within about 1/16"Normal. Fittings are made to a tolerance and the table is nominal. Use your number and carry on.
1/8" to 1/4" outWorth a second measurement and a look at the stamp. Then use your number, not the table's, and check the next one out of the box.
About two-thirds of the table valueYou have a short radius where you expected long (SR is 1 × size, LR 1.5 ×). Stop and count the rest of the pallet.
Nothing like itWrong schedule, wrong standard, or a metric fitting. Do not cut to it — find out what it actually is first.
The fitting in your hand always wins

Every table in this book is nominal. When the steel and the table disagree, the steel is what you are welding. Measure the first one out of every box, and measure again when the box changes — two pallets of the same fitting from two makers on the same job is completely normal, and they will not be identical.

OD never changes with schedule. Only the wall thickens and the ID shrinks — which is why a 2" socket-weld or slip-on fitting fits 2" pipe of any schedule (threads and cut grooves still need enough wall to cut into). A butt-weld fitting has to match the wall as well, or you get hi-lo inside the joint.

Dimensions nominal per ASME B36.10M. The standard governs; this is the working subset.

Schedule 40 — the standard

Sch 40 and STD (standard weight) are the same wall through 10". At 12" they split: 12" STD is .375, Sch 40 is .406. Sch 80 and XS match through 8"; 10" and 12" XS are .500. Fittings are often ordered STD or XS, so check which one the spec means.

SizeODWallIDlb/ft+watergal/ft
1/2"0.840.1090.6220.850.13.016
3/4"1.050.1130.8241.130.23.028
1"1.315.1331.0491.680.37.045
1-1/4"1.660.1401.3802.270.65.078
1-1/2"1.900.1451.6102.720.88.106
2"2.375.1542.0673.661.45.174
2-1/2"2.875.2032.4695.802.07.249
3"3.500.2163.0687.583.20.384
4"4.500.2374.02610.805.51.661
5"5.563.2585.04714.638.661.039
6"6.625.2806.06518.9912.511.501
8"8.625.3227.98128.5821.682.599
10"10.750.36510.02040.5234.164.096
12"12.750.40611.93853.5748.505.815

lb/ft is empty pipe. +water is what the water adds. Add them for the hanging weight of a running line.

Schedule 80 — heavy wall

SizeWallIDlb/ft
1/2".1470.5461.09
3/4".1540.7421.47
1".1790.9572.17
1-1/4".1911.2783.00
1-1/2".2001.5003.63
2".2181.9395.03
2-1/2".2762.3237.67
3".3002.90010.26
4".3373.82615.00
6".4325.76128.60
8".5007.62543.43
10".5949.56264.49
12".68811.37488.71

Schedule 10 — light wall

Common on grooved systems and stainless. Sprinkler Sch 10 (ASTM A135/A795) is heavier from 8" up — .188". Too thin to thread.

SizeWallSizeWall
1"–2".1095"–6".134
2-1/2"–4".1208".148
10".16512".180
lb/ft = 10.69 × (OD − WALL) × WALL
Any steel pipe, any schedule 6" Sch 40: 10.69 × 6.345 × .280 = 18.99 lb/ft
6" Sch 80: 10.69 × 6.193 × .432 = 28.60 lb/ft
What the columns mean — 6" schedule 40 OD 6.625"  ·  wall .280"  ·  ID 6.065"
ID = OD − two walls: 6.625 − (2 × .280) = 6.065 ✓
The OD never changes with schedule. Going to schedule 80 thickens the wall inward and shrinks the bore — it does not change what fits over the outside.
Which number you actually need Cutting a wrap or a saddle → OD
Working out flow or fill → ID
Picking a bevel or a root gap → wall
Ordering → nominal size and schedule, never the OD
Weld neck
Butt-welded like any fitting, tapered hub matches the pipe bore. The one for pressure, cycling and anything critical.
Slip-on
Slides over the pipe, welded inside and out. Same class rating as a weld neck but a fraction of its fatigue life — cheaper and easier to fit, not for cyclic or severe service.
Socket weld
Small bore. Pipe bottoms in the socket, then gets pulled back.
Lap joint
Over a stub end. Rotates freely — the answer when bolt holes have to line up with something fixed.
Blind
Caps the end. Rated the same as the flange class.
SLIP-ON SET BACK = WALL THICKNESS + 1/16", minimum
Socket weld gap

Bottom the pipe in the socket, then pull it back 1/16" before you weld. That gap is what keeps the weld from cracking as it shrinks. Leaving it out is a code violation, not a shortcut.

Two-holing

Unless the print says otherwise, bolt holes straddle the vertical centerline — no bolt at top dead center. Same on the horizontal. Get it wrong on a welded flange and it's a cut-out, not an adjustment. Mark top dead center on the pipe before you slide the flange on.

Checking a flange for square

Spool on a flat level bench. Level on the flange face — not the pipe — checked in two directions 90° apart. Then a framing square from the bench up to the face. If it rocks, fix it before the welder locks it in.

Weld neck take-out

It's the length through hub (Y) — flange face to weld end, with the 1/16" raised face already in it on Class 150 and 300 — and it changes with class. Check the catalog for the class you're running, or measure the first one — face of flange to the weld end.

Size150# LTH300# LTH
2"2.502.75
3"2.753.12
4"3.003.38
6"3.503.88
8"4.004.38
10"4.004.62
12"4.505.12

Length through hub, raised face included. Nominal — confirm against the flange in your hand.

The three welded flanges side by sideWeld neck, slip-on and socket weld on a bench, plus a close-up of the size, class and schedule stamped on the rim. PHOTO
Butt weld outlet
Butt weld branch. For anything the branch has to be full strength. Weldolet®
Socket weld outlet
Socket weld branch, small bore. Sockolet®
Threaded outlet
Threaded branch — gauges, vents, drains. Thredolet®
Elbow outlet
Off the back of an elbow. Thermowells and vents. Elbolet®
45° outlet
Angled branch. Latrolet®

Everybody on the job says "olet", and the names in the right-hand column are what you will hear. Those are registered trademarks of Bonney Forge Corporation — other makers sell the same fittings under their own names. Order by what the fitting does and any supply house will get you the right thing.

  • Olets save a tee and a lot of layout — but cut the hole to the olet's bore, dress it, and make sure the olet sits down with full contact. Don't bridge a bad hole with weld.
  • Lay the hole out with a wrap template, not by eye. Cut inside your line and grind out to it.
  • Hole for a full-size branch is roughly the branch ID plus room for the root. Get the contour right — a saddle that rocks will never weld sound.
  • 45° laterals flow better and are required on some drainage and process lines. They eat a lot more room than a tee — check the space before you order.
  • Branch direction on a horizontal main: vapor and steam off the top, liquid drains off the bottom, general water branches top or side so they don't collect debris.
  • Keep the olet off the seam and off any other weld. Minimum weld-to-weld spacing is usually in the spec.
Reinforcing pads

Whether you need one is the engineer's call. If one is specified, its vent hole must be open — trapped air will blow the weld apart on preheat, and the pad has no way to prove itself sound if it's sealed.

The olet family on a benchButt weld, socket weld, threaded, elbow and 45° outlets laid out together so the shapes can be told apart at a glance. PHOTO

Everything past take-outs and fittings out of a box. When the angle, the size or the schedule doesn't come off the shelf, you make the fitting out of pipe: miters, cut elbows, branches, laterals, Ys and orange peels.

MITERBRANCHLATERALYORANGE PEEL
What this part of the book covers: fittings you make out of pipe when there is none in the box.
Before you build any of it

Check the spec. On a lot of pressure work a fabricated fitting needs the engineer's sign-off, a reinforcement calculation or a weld procedure of its own, and some specs don't allow them at all. A forged fitting is usually cheaper than the labour of making one. Fabricate when the size, the angle or the schedule doesn't come in a box.

Weld pipe advanced fab

The full layout pages

Section 15 has the ordinate tables and the geometry behind all of this, for every material. These are the ones weld pipe uses most.

When there's no fitting, or the bore's too big to buy one, you make it out of pipe. The cut line around a pipe is a curve, and you lay it out with ordinates.

  1. Cut angle = total turn ÷ number of mitred ends. Count every cut end. A two-piece 90 has two, so each is 45°. A three-piece 90 has four — one on each end piece, two on the middle piece — so each is 22-1/2° and the middle piece is a 45° wedge.
  2. D = OD × tan(cut angle) — the difference between the long side and the short side.
  3. Step 16 stations around with circumference ÷ 16 — the outside circumference, OD × 3.1416.
  4. Square a line round the pipe through the long point. Mark each cut-back back from that line using the table below.
  5. Connect the marks with a flexible batten or a wrap, then cut and dress.
Worked — a 90° ell from two pieces of 6" pipe Cut angle = 90 ÷ 2 = 45°
D = 6.625 × 1.000 = 6.625" long side to short side
StationAroundCut-back
0 long0°0
122.5°.038 × D
245°.146 × D
367.5°.309 × D
490°.500 × D
5112.5°.691 × D
6135°.854 × D
7157.5°.962 × D
8 short180°1.000 × D

Stations 9 through 15 mirror 7 back down to 1.

bend centreBACKTHROATTHREE-PIECE 902 joints × 45° turneach cut 22-1/2°middle piece is awedge: cut both ends,short points180° apartjoint lines all runto the bend centre
A three-piece 90. Every joint line runs back to the bend centre, and each joint turns the line 45°, so each cut is half of that. The middle piece is the one people get wrong: its two cuts face opposite ways, so its long side (the back) is on the outside of the turn and its short side (the throat) on the inside.

Three, four and five pieces

CUT OFF SQUARE = TURN ÷ (2 × (PIECES − 1))
Turn2 pc3 pc4 pc5 pc
90°45°22.5°15°11.25°
60°30°15°10°7.5°
45°22.5°11.25°7.5°5.625°

Pick a centreline radius first. R = 1.5 × nominal matches a long radius elbow. Then every middle piece is the same length and the two end pieces are half of it plus any straight you want:

MIDDLE PIECE: BACK = (R + OD÷2) × 2 tan(CUT)  ·  THROAT = (R − OD÷2) × 2 tan(CUT)
Worked — 12" three-piece 90, R = 18" Cut = 90 ÷ 4 = 22-1/2° off square, tan = .4142
Spread on every cut = 12.75 × .4142 = 5-1/4"
Middle piece: back = (18 + 6.375) × 2 × .4142 = 20-3/16" · throat = (18 − 6.375) × .8284 = 9-5/8"
End pieces: back 10-1/8", throat 4-13/16", plus whatever straight you want on them
The middle piece's two cuts face opposite ways

Lay out the second cut on a middle piece with its short point 180° round from the first cut's short point. Get them on the same side and you have a straight piece of pipe with two scrap cuts in it. Chalk a line down the back of the whole assembly before you cut it apart. Full method in 15.5; the single cut in detail is 15.4.

More pieces, better flow

A three-piece miter turns smoother than a two-piece and a five-piece is smoother still. On big water lines that difference is real head loss. The spec usually tells you how many pieces.

Not everywhere

Plenty of specs and codes won't accept a mitered elbow at all on pressure service. Check before you build one.

Laying out a miter cut

Field video

Real footage, filmed on the jobWrapping and folding the template, stepping the sixteen stations, and burning to a fair line. SOON

Shot at the bench, start to finish, on one piece of pipe. The step-through walkthrough below is built into the book and works with no signal at all.

Now see the geometry

45° CUT 90 ÷ 2 CUTS = 45° EACH No fitting? Build one out of pipe. Cut angle = total turn ÷ number of cuts SHORT LONG D D = OD × tan(cut angle). At 45° the tangent is 1, so D is simply the outside diameter. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 = CIRCUMFERENCE ÷ 16 .146 D .500 D 1.000 D measured BACK from the long line UNROLL THE SKIN — THE CUT IS A CURVE THIS COMES OFF WRAP IT BACK ON connect the marks with a batten, then cut TACK 12 · 3 · 6 · 9 SWING IT UP AND YOU'VE MADE AN ELBOW sight the run before you weld it out

The print wants a 60° turn and the warehouse has 90s. Cut a long radius 90 through its bend centre and whatever is left is a true elbow of that angle, with its own take-out.

FACE YOU KEEPBACK MARKTHROAT MARK60°drop: a 30°CUT TO 60°T.O. = Rb × tan 30°BACK =(Rb + OD/2) × sin 60THROAT =(Rb − OD/2) × sin 60
The cut runs through the bend centre, so what you keep is a true elbow of that angle. Both marks are measured straight along from the face you keep, square off it, not round the curve. What falls off is an elbow too: a 90 cut at 60° leaves a 30°.
NEW TAKE-OUT = Rb × tan(ANGLE ÷ 2)
BACK MARK = (Rb + OD÷2) × sin(ANGLE)  ·  THROAT MARK = (Rb − OD÷2) × sin(ANGLE)

Rb is the bend radius: 1.5 × nominal on a long radius elbow from 1" up, 1.0 × nominal on a short radius. Both marks are measured from the face you keep, straight along the pipe, square off that face. The full table for every size is in 15.18.

Worked — a 60° out of an 8" LR 90

8" LR 90, Rb = 12", OD 8.625 New take-out = 12 × tan 30° = 12 × .5774 = 6.93" → 6-15/16"
Back mark = (12 + 4.3125) × sin 60° = 16.3125 × .8660 = 14-1/8" from the face
Throat mark = (12 − 4.3125) × .8660 = 6-11/16" from the face
What falls off is a 30° elbow with a take-out of 12 × tan 15° = 3-3/16". Tag it and put it on the rack.

Worked — trimming a 90 down to 75°

6" LR 90, Rb = 9", OD 6.625 New take-out = 9 × tan 37.5° = 9 × .7673 = 6-7/8"
Back mark = (9 + 3.3125) × sin 75° = 12.3125 × .9659 = 11-7/8"
Throat mark = (9 − 3.3125) × .9659 = 5-1/2"
The drop is a 15° sliver. It is scrap unless you need a 15.

Marking and cutting

  1. Stand the elbow on the face you are keeping, on a flat bench. That face is your datum for everything.
  2. Mark the back and the throat with a square off the bench, then carry the line round both sides with a wrap. The wrap finds the cut plane on its own if the two marks are right.
  3. Check the two side marks are the same height off the bench. They have to be — the cut is symmetrical about the plane of the bend.
  4. Cut on the waste side of the line, square to the cut plane, and dress to the line. Then bevel.
  5. Check the new angle with a protractor or a bevel square off the kept face before it goes near the spool.

Two 45s out of one 90

Cut exactly through the middle and both halves are 45s with a take-out of 1.5 × nominal × .4142 = .6213 × nominal. A bought 45 is .625 × nominal, so the difference is a few hundredths even on 12". Use the cut number when four of them stack up in one run.

A cut elbow has no tangent

A bought elbow has a short straight at each end that lines up with the pipe. A cut end has none: it starts curving the moment it leaves the weld. That makes fit-up fussier and puts the weld in the bend, where the wall is thinnest on the back. Some specs don't allow cut elbows on pressure lines for exactly that reason. Check.

Don't cut a short radius or a reducing elbow

A short radius cuts the same way with Rb = 1.0 × nominal, but the wall is thinner at the throat and the numbers get tight. A reducing elbow changes radius through the bend and the formula stops working. Buy those.

A branch made from pipe instead of a tee. The branch end is cut to a saddle so it sits down on the header, a hole is cut in the header, and the joint is welded all round. There are two ways to set it, and they are not interchangeable.

SET-ON hole = branch bore SET-IN hole = branch OD
Set-on: the branch sits on the outside of the header and the weld is a groove weld on the branch. Set-in: the branch goes through the header wall and ends flush with the bore, and the weld is on the header. Your spec or the drawing says which.

Set-on or set-in

TypeHow it goes together
Set-onBranch end cut to the header's outside. Header hole cut to the branch bore. Bevel on the branch. The usual one for small branches, and the only one you can do off a finished header without getting inside it.
Set-inHeader hole cut to the branch OD. The branch slides in and its end is trimmed flush with the header bore. Bevel on the header. Takes more fitting, but the weld is easier to inspect from outside.

The saddle cut — one formula

CUT-BACK = R − √(R² − (r × sinφ)²)

R is the header radius (OD ÷ 2), r the branch radius, and φ how far round the branch you are from the crotch. The base line goes round the branch through the two crotches (in line with the header). Every other station is measured back from it toward the end of the branch; the horns, at the sides, are the deepest.

12345678910111213141516CROTCHHORNCROTCHHORNBASE LINE through the crotches · cut-back measured down6" ON 12" — THE BRANCH UNROLLED
The branch end unrolled flat. The saddle cut is a wave: zero at the two crotches (in line with the header) and deepest at the two horns (at the sides), 15/16" on a 6" branch on a 12" header. Drawn to scale, 16 stations round the branch.
Branch on headerStn 1 & 9
crotch
2, 83, 74, 65
horn
4" on 6"01/87/163/47/8
4" on 12"01/163/163/87/16
6" on 12"01/87/1613/1615/16
12" on 12"01/21-7/83-15/166-3/8

Inches, set-on, laid out on the branch OD against the header OD. Stations 10 to 16 mirror 8 back to 2 (16 stations round the branch). Every other ratio is in 15.7, and extra strong wall in 15.8.

Worked — 6" branch set on a 12" header R = 12.75 ÷ 2 = 6.375 · r = 6.625 ÷ 2 = 3.3125
Horn (φ = 90°): 6.375 − √(40.64 − 10.97) = 6.375 − 5.447 = .93" → 15/16"
Station 3 (φ = 45°): r × sin 45 = 2.342 → 6.375 − √(40.64 − 5.49) = .45" → 7/16"
Hole in the header (set-on) = branch bore, 6.065" for Sch 40, scribed round the fitted branch.

Cutting the hole

  1. Fit the branch first. Stand it on the header where it goes, plumb both ways, and check it sits down with no rock and an even gap all round.
  2. Scribe round the inside of the branch for a set-on, or the outside for a set-in, with a soapstone flat to the header.
  3. Burn inside the line and grind out to it. Keep the torch pointed at the centre of the header, not straight down, or the hole bells out on the sides.
  4. Knock the slag out of the header before the branch goes on. You will not reach it afterwards.

Reinforcing pads

  • A pad (repad) is a saddle-shaped ring of plate welded round the branch to put back the metal the hole took out. Whether you need one, and how big, is the engineer's calculation (ASME B31.1 / B31.3 branch reinforcement), never the fitter's guess.
  • Typical pad: same thickness as the header wall, outside diameter about twice the branch OD. The drawing sets the real numbers.
  • Every pad gets a tell-tale (vent) hole, drilled and tapped 1/8" or 1/4" NPT, usually. It lets air out on preheat and is where the pad gets leak-tested. Leave it open after the test.
  • Lay the pad out by wrapping it round the header like a saddle. Cut its inside to fit the branch, then fit it before the branch weld is capped.
Branch spacing and seams

Keep branches off the header's long seam and away from other welds. The spec sets the minimum distance between welds, and branches too close together share the same reinforcement zone and need the engineer to look again.

Olets (bought branch fittings) are in 1.14. A branch off to one side of the header centreline is 15.9.

A branch that comes into the header at an angle instead of square. The 45° is the common one, but the same formula lays out a 30 or a 60, full size or reduced.

crossingθ = 60°CROTCHacute, upstreamTOEobtuse, downstreamFLOWWITH THE FLOWevery ordinate isworked from thecrossing point
A branch coming into the header at 60°. It points with the flow, so the crotch (the tight, acute side) is upstream and the toe is downstream. Every dimension is worked from the crossing, where the two centrelines meet.
s = (√(R² − (r sinφ)²) − r cosφ cosθ) ÷ sinθ

θ is the angle between the branch and the header, R the header radius, r the branch radius, φ the angle round the branch from the toe (the obtuse side, downstream). Work it out at every station, take the smallest value, and subtract it from all of them. What's left are your ordinates from a base line through the shortest point.

Worked — 4" branch into a 6" header at 60°

Station1 toe23456789 crotch
Ordinate1/161/1601/163/81-1/161-13/162-7/162-11/16

R = 3.3125, r = 2.25, θ = 60°. Stations 10 to 16 mirror 8 back to 2. On a reduced lateral the shortest point is not always at the toe; here it sits at station 3, which is why you work every station and don't assume.

Worked — full size 6" at 45°

Station1 toe2345 horn6789 crotch
Ordinate1-3/81-1/411/203-1/165-5/87-3/88

On a full-size lateral the horns come right down to the header centreline, so the base line goes through them. Toe = .414 × r and crotch = 2.414 × r, the same numbers as 15.10, which has the full layout and the header hole.

Fitting it

  1. Mark the crossing (where the two centrelines meet) on the header and on the branch. Every dimension is measured from it.
  2. Cut the branch first, then set it on the header at the angle, braced, and scribe the hole from it. Do not develop the header hole flat and roll it on unless you have to.
  3. Check the angle with a protractor or a bevel square before you tack, and again after the first tacks.
  4. Tack the toe and the crotch first, then the horns.
The crotch is the problem

On a 45 the crotch is a knife edge with almost no room for the rod, and it is the part of the weld most likely to be rejected. Open the gap there a little, and ask the welder how they want it before you tack. Big laterals on pressure lines often need a pad or a crotch plate; that is on the drawing.

Point it with the flow

A lateral joins with the flow, the acute side upstream. Fitted backwards it becomes a scoop that fights the header.

Three pipes meeting at one point. When all three are the same size and the same angle apart it is a true Y, and all three cuts are identical.

120°TRUE Y3 legs, same size,120° aparteach half-cut30° off squarecopper = the threeseams, all meetingat the centre
A true Y from above. Each leg ends in a V where it meets the other two, and all three Vs are the same cut, 30° off square on each half. The three seams run out from the centre, and the centre is the hardest part of the fitting to weld.
CUT OFF SQUARE = (180° − ANGLE BETWEEN LEGS) ÷ 2
Angle between legsEach half-cut off squareSpread × radius
120° (true Y)30°.5774
90°45°1.0000
60°60°1.7321

Each leg meets two others, so each leg gets a V: two half-cuts that meet at a point. Spread is the radius times the tangent of the half-cut, measured from the short points (facing the other legs) to the long points (the tip of the V). The full layout is 15.6.

Worked — 6" true Y Half-cut = (180 − 120) ÷ 2 = 30° off square
Spread = 3.3125 × .5774 = 1.91" → 1-15/16"
Ordinates from the short points: 0, 5/32, 9/16, 1-3/16, 1-15/16 at the tip, then back down. Cut all three legs from the same layout.

Building one

  1. Lay out and cut one leg. Check it, then use it as the template for the other two.
  2. Snap the three centrelines on a flat bench, 120° apart, crossing at one point.
  3. Set the three legs on their lines with the tips of the Vs meeting over the centre. Tack the tips first, then work out along each seam.
  4. Check all three angles before you weld, and again after the root. A Y pulls toward whichever seam gets welded first.

When it isn't a true Y

  • Legs different sizes, or at different angles: it's two laterals sharing a crotch. Lay each branch out against the main with 1.15d and accept that the cuts are different.
  • Run straight through, branch off at 45: that is a lateral, not a Y.
  • Two branches off one inlet like a pair of trousers (breeches): two laterals set back to back on the main, or two cut elbows set heel to heel with a saddle onto the inlet. Draw it full size on the bench and scribe it; the numbers get ugly and a full-size drawing is faster.
The middle of a Y

Three weld preps meet at one point with nothing behind them. It is the hardest weld on the fitting and the first place it leaks. On anything under pressure, a gusset or wrapper plate over the crotch is common, and a forged or cast wye is usually the better buy. Check the spec before you build one for pressure.

Cut the end of a pipe into petals, heat them and pull them in, and weld the seams. Pulled all the way in it closes the end into a dome; pulled part way it makes a reducer. It's an old field trick for when there's no cap or reducer on the job.

BASE LINE — square round the pipe PETAL LENGTH = OD × .7854 for a full dome
The pipe end unrolled flat. Six petals, each one circumference ÷ 6 wide at the base, curving to a point. Cut out the notches between them, heat the petals and bend them in, and their edges meet.
CAPpetals closed inbaselinecap discLREDUCERpetals pulled part way
Pulled all the way in, the petals close the end into a dome, and stopping them short leaves a hole for a small cap disc. Pulled part way, over a length L, they make a reducer. The copper lines are the seams you weld.

Closing a pipe end — the dome

PETAL LENGTH = r × ANGLE (radians)  ·  HALF WIDTH = 3.1416 × r × cos(ANGLE) ÷ PETALS

r is the pipe's outside radius. Stations run from 0° at the base line up to 90° at the tip. A full dome is r × 1.5708 long, which is OD × .7854. Same geometry as a plate head (15.14), with the pipe's own radius.

Up from baseAlong petalHalf width, 6 petalsHalf width, 8 petals
0°0.5236 r.3927 r
15°.2618 r.5058 r.3793 r
30°.5236 r.4534 r.3401 r
45°.7854 r.3702 r.2777 r
60°1.0472 r.2618 r.1963 r
75°1.3090 r.1355 r.1016 r
90°1.5708 r00
Worked — closing a 6" end, 6 petals r = 6.625 ÷ 2 = 3.3125
Petal width at the base = circumference ÷ 6 = 20.81 ÷ 6 = 3-15/32" (half width 1.73")
Full dome length = 3.3125 × 1.5708 = 5-3/16"
At 45° up (2.60" along): half width = 3.3125 × .3702 = 1.23"
Stopping at 60° instead (3.47" along) leaves a hole 3.3125 × cos 60 × 2 = 3.31" across to cap with a disc. Much easier than six points meeting.

Orange peel reducer

Same idea, but the petals are pulled in to the smaller pipe instead of closed, so the notches are straight Vs.

NOTCH WIDTH AT THE TIP = 3.1416 × (D1 − D2) ÷ PETALS
PETAL LENGTH = √(L² + ((D1 − D2) ÷ 2)²)

D1 and D2 are the two ODs, L the length you want the reducer to be. The notch is zero at the base line and opens to its full width at the end of the pipe.

Worked — 8" down to 4", 6" long, 8 petals D1 − D2 = 8.625 − 4.5 = 4.125
Notch at the tip = 3.1416 × 4.125 ÷ 8 = 1-5/8", tapering to nothing at the base line
Petal length = √(36 + 2.0625²) = 6-3/8"
That is about a 19° half-angle. Steeper than about 30° and the petals won't pull in without buckling.

Doing it

  1. Square a base line round the pipe. Divide it into the petal count with a wrap (15.2).
  2. Lay out one petal on a paper or sheet-metal template, check it, and trace it round the pipe.
  3. Cut the notches out clean. Leave the petals a little fat; they stretch on the outside as they bend.
  4. Heat each petal along its root with a rosebud and bend it in a little at a time, working round the pipe, not one petal all the way.
  5. Trim the edges to meet, bevel, tack every seam, then weld the seams and the cap disc if there is one.
Not for pressure

An orange peel is a field closure for vents, drains, temporary ends, dummy legs and non-pressure work. It is not a code fitting. On anything under pressure, use a cap or a reducer out of the box unless the engineer has signed it off.

A fabricated fitting is all welds and no straight pipe to hold it. Every pass shrinks and pulls, so the order you tack and weld in decides whether it ends up on its angle.

1234TACK ORDER1 & 2 opposite,check the angle3 & 4 opposite,check it againthen fill in betweenon 6" and up
Tack in opposite pairs so each tack pulls against the one before it. Check the angle after every pair; a tack is thirty seconds to grind out and a welded joint is not.

Before the first tack

  • Build it on a flat table or level horses. Snap the centrelines on the table and set the pieces to them.
  • Mark a continuous line down the back of every piece before you break a layout apart. Miter segments and Y legs go back in the order they were cut.
  • Keep the drop. The piece that came off is a perfect template for the next cut.
  • Check the gap is even all round. A fabricated joint with a tight side and an open side will close up on the tight side and walk.

Tack order

  1. Tack at 12, then 6. Check the angle.
  2. Tack at 3, then 9. Check it again.
  3. Add tacks between them on anything 6" and up. On a Y, tack the tips of all three Vs first, then work outward along every seam a little at a time.
  4. Check the finished angle, plumb and level before the root goes in. A tack is thirty seconds to grind out.

Weld order

  • Balance it. Weld opposite quarters in turn, and on a multi-piece miter weld the joints alternately rather than finishing one before starting the next.
  • Two welders, opposite sides on big bore. It keeps the heat even and the shrink even.
  • Check after the root. The root pass pulls the most. If the angle has moved, deal with it now, before fill and cap lock it in.
  • Branches and laterals pull toward the weld. Brace the branch to the header with a strongback or a tacked strap until it is welded out.
Build in the pull

Once you have built one of something, you know which way it walks and by how much. Set the next one that much the other way before you tack. Write the number on the drawing for the next hand.

It is a pressure part

A fabricated elbow, branch or Y on a pressure line is inspected like any other weld and often more: NDE on every joint, sometimes a hydro of its own. Build it so every weld can be seen and reached. Welding and inspection are in 1.8 and 1.8e.

  • Adding thread engagement to a butt weld cut. There is no add-back on weld pipe. Take-outs only.
  • Using 1.5 × size below 1". The 1/2", 3/4" and 1" LR 90s are all 1.50" in B16.9. Some older sheets show the 3/4" at 1-1/8" — measure the box you have.
  • Grabbing a short radius when the print says long. They look alike in a rack. SR is exactly pipe size, LR is 1-1/2 times.
  • Forgetting the root gap on a tight dimension — or subtracting it when the shop doesn't.
  • Welding the eccentric reducer flat side wrong. Flat top on pump suction, flat bottom for drainage.
  • Bolt hole at top dead center. Two-hole every flange.
  • Not measuring the spool after welding. It pulled and you didn't know.
  • Seam in the wrong place — under a branch, in the bottom of a horizontal, or lined up across a joint.
  • A fitting or weld landing on a hanger. You solved for travel and never checked where the hangers fall.
  • Open ends left uncapped. Everything on the job ends up inside that pipe, and it all gets hydro-tested in there.
Five welds that got rejectedUndercut, lack of fusion at the root, a burn-through, a high-low mismatch, and a start that was never ground back. One frame each, with a dime or a tape for scale. PHOTO

The weld symbol is the welder's instruction and your prep list. It tells you which side of the joint to bevel, what angle, how much gap, and whether it gets welded in the shop or in the field — all in a shape the size of a thumbnail.

ABOVE THE LINE = OTHER SIDE the far side of the joint REFERENCE LINE GTAW BELOW THE LINE = ARROW SIDE the side the arrow touches TAIL — process, spec, WPS
One rule carries the whole system: below the line is the side the arrow is touching. Above the line is the other side. Get that backwards and you bevel the wrong face.

Read it in this order

  1. Follow the arrow. Whatever it lands on is the joint, and that face is the arrow side. On a pipe butt joint the arrow just points at the seam.
  2. Look below the line. That symbol is the weld on the arrow side, and it is the one that tells you how to prep the end in your hands.
  3. Look above the line. A symbol up there means a weld on the far side too. On pipe that is usually a back weld or a seal weld. Nothing above the line means nothing on the other side.
  4. Read the numbers. Left of the symbol is size. Right of it is length and pitch. Inside the V is the root opening, and the angle sits outside it. That is 1.17c.
  5. Check the kink. A flag means field weld. A circle means weld all around. Both live where the arrow meets the reference line.
  6. Read the tail. Process, WPS number, spec, or just TYP meaning every joint like this one on the drawing.
The reference line is always horizontal. The arrow is not.

The arrow can come off either end and point any direction it likes — up, down, left, right, broken with a jog in it. None of that changes the meaning. The reference line stays horizontal and the above/below rule never flips, no matter how the arrow is drawn.

On a joint where it matters which member gets the bevel, the arrow will have a deliberate break in it pointing at the member to be prepped. That break is not a drafting mistake.

What is inside

AWS and ISO draw it differently — know which you are holding

AWS A2.4 is what you will see on almost every American job: one solid reference line, arrow side below, other side above.

ISO 2553 can add a dashed identification line either above or below the solid one (its System A does; System B leaves it off and reads arrow-side-below, like AWS). On an ISO symbol, anything on the solid line is the arrow side and anything on the dashed line is the other side — so the dashed line can sit above or below and it still means the same thing.

If you see a dashed second reference line, stop reading it as AWS. It is a European or international drawing and the rules are not the same.

The symbol does not outrank the procedure

On a coded job the WPS sets the groove angle, the land, the gap, the filler, the preheat and the passes. The weld symbol tells you which joint and which side; it does not overrule a qualified procedure, and where the two disagree somebody needs to answer for it before anything gets ground.

Symbols per AWS A2.4. The print governs, and this page is here to help you read it — not to replace it.

The groove symbol is a little picture of the joint you are supposed to hand the welder. Read it as a cross-section and it tells you what to grind without anybody having to say a word.

SQUARE no bevel — just a gap V-GROOVE BOTH ends bevelled BEVEL ONE end only arrow picks it
Three symbols, three different jobs at the grinder. A V means you prep both members. A bevel means you prep one — and the one you prep is the one the broken arrow is pointing at.

The whole set

SymbolWhat it looks like, and what you grind
Square grooveTwo short parallel lines. No bevel at all — square both ends, set a gap and let the root fuse through. Thin wall and small bore only; on anything heavy the welder cannot reach the root.
V-grooveA V. Bevel both members, half the included angle each. This is the one on almost every pipe butt joint you will ever fit — two 37½° faces making a 75° included angle (1.6b).
Bevel grooveHalf a V — one straight line, one slanted, and the straight line is always on the left. Bevel one member only and leave the other square. Common where a pipe lands on a flat plate, a nozzle, or a heavier member.
U-grooveA U. A bevel with a radius in the bottom instead of a point. Heavy wall — it holds a narrow included angle so there is far less metal to fill, but it needs a machine or a proper J-prep tool to cut.
J-grooveHalf a U. Same idea as the bevel groove but with the radiused root, on one member only.
Flare-V / flare-bevelCurved lines. The groove is formed by the round surfaces themselves — two pipes laid together, or a pipe on a plate. You are not grinding a groove; the shape is already there.
The broken arrow is an instruction, not a drafting error

On a bevel or J groove it matters which member gets prepped, so the arrow gets a deliberate jog in it and points at that member. If you see an arrow with a kink partway along, it is not sloppy drawing — that jog is telling you which piece to take to the grinder.

A V or U groove needs no break, because both members get the same treatment.

Symbols on both sides of the line

  • Double-V (a V above and a V below) — bevel both members from both faces, weld from both sides. Heavy wall where you can get at the inside, which on pipe usually means big bore.
  • Double-bevel, double-U, double-J — same idea on the other groove types.
  • A groove below and a fillet above — the groove is the strength weld, the fillet on the other side is a cover or a reinforcement.
  • A small rectangle on the other side of the line from the groove — a backing bar or backing ring. It stays in unless there is an R inside the rectangle, which means remove it after welding — a whole extra operation (1.17c).

CJP and PJP

Complete and partial penetration

CJP — complete joint penetration. The weld goes the full wall thickness. The print may write CJP in the tail, or leave the groove symbol with no size dimension, which means the same thing. Every pressure-retaining butt weld on pipe is CJP.

PJP — partial joint penetration. The weld goes only part way through and the depth is called out as a number left of the symbol. Structural and attachment work, not pressure boundary.

If you cannot tell which you are looking at on a pressure line, assume CJP and ask before you prep — because the two want different lands and sometimes different angles.

What actually turns up on pipe

Ninety per cent of what a pipefitter sees is a single V-groove, arrow side, CJP, no size called out. That is the plain butt weld, and the prep is the standard 37½° face and 1/16" land from 1.6. The rest of the set is worth knowing so that the one time it is not the usual symbol, you notice.

Worked — what three symbols mean at the grinder V below the line, nothing above, nothing in the tail
→ Bevel both ends 37½°, 1/16" land, gap per the welder. The everyday joint.

Bevel below the line, arrow broken toward the pipe
→ Bevel the pipe only. The plate or nozzle it lands on stays square.

V below the line, V above the line
→ Double groove. Prep both faces of both members, and expect to weld from the inside as well.

A groove weld goes into the joint. A fillet weld sits in the corner of it. Different symbol, different number, and on pipe it turns up more often than people expect — every socket weld and every support that lands on a pipe is a fillet.

1/4 2–4 leg size 2" long, 4" centres FILLET leg one fillet — arrow side only
The triangle always has its upright leg on the left, however the joint is oriented on the drawing. The number to the left of it is the leg, not the throat — and that is what a fillet gauge reads.

Reading the fillet

  • The vertical leg is always on the left. That never changes and it is how you tell a fillet from a bevel groove at a glance.
  • One number on the left — both legs that size. 1/4 means a 1/4" leg each way.
  • Two numbers, like 1/4 × 3/8 — unequal legs, and the drawing has to show which leg goes which way.
  • Numbers on the right are length – pitch. 2–4 means 2" of weld every 4" of centre-to-centre. No number means continuous.
  • Triangles above and below, offset from each other — staggered intermittent fillets, one side landing in the gaps of the other.
  • A circle at the kink — weld all around. On a pipe support or a pipe-through-plate that is exactly what you want, and it is easy to miss.
Leg is not throat

The leg is the flat distance along each member. The throat is the short way through the middle of the weld, and it works out to about 0.7 × the leg on an ordinary flat-faced fillet.

Prints call out the leg. Some codes and some inspectors talk in throat. They are not the same number and confusing them either undersizes the weld or wastes a lot of rod.

Socket welds are fillet welds

The symbol looks like structural work. The joint is pipe.

A socket weld fitting gets a fillet symbol, because that is physically what the weld is — a corner weld between the pipe OD and the fitting face. Small bore, 2" and under, on threaded-and-socket systems.

The fit-up rule matters more than the symbol: bottom the pipe in the socket, then pull it back 1/16" before you tack. A pipe welded hard against the bottom of the socket has nowhere to shrink and the weld cracks — sometimes not for months. Full detail in 1.11f.

Where no size is called out, the usual minimum fillet is about 1.09 × the pipe wall, or the fitting's own socket wall, whichever is smaller (B31.3 Fig. 328.5.2C). Do not guess — that one is in the spec.

Seal welds

  • Written as SEAL WELD in the tail, or as a small fillet with a seal weld note.
  • It is not a strength weld. It is there to stop a leak path — almost always over a threaded joint on a service where a thread alone will weep.
  • The thread carries the load. The seal weld carries nothing, and the code will not let you count it as if it did.
  • All exposed threads get covered. A seal weld that stops short of the thread runout has not sealed anything.
  • No thread compound or tape under a joint that is going to be seal welded — it burns, it gasses, and it puts porosity straight through your weld.

Plug and slot welds

A hole in the top member filled with weld metal to tie it to the member underneath. Rare on pipe, common on pipe supports and shoes. The symbol is a rectangle, with the hole size on the left, the depth of fill inside, and the number of holes below it. Where you meet one, the number that matters is how much of the hole gets filled — it is often not all of it.

Measuring one

  1. Use a fillet gauge, not a tape. The set of stepped gauges reads the leg directly — slide them in until one sits flat against both members and touches the weld face.
  2. Check the smallest part of the weld, not the fattest. A fillet that is 3/8" at the start and 3/16" at the stop is a 3/16" fillet as far as an inspector is concerned.
  3. Convex or concave matters. A concave fillet with the right leg can still be short on throat. If the print calls a contour, it is calling it for a reason (1.17c).
  4. Undercut at the toe fails a fillet as fast as it fails a butt weld — see 1.8e.

Every number on a weld symbol has one place it is allowed to sit, and the place tells you what the number means. Learn the seven positions and you never have to guess whether 1/8 is a gap or a leg.

flag = field weld circle = all around 1/2 1/8 3–6 75° WPS size · root · angle · length–pitch — each one has its own spot
Read by position, not by guessing. The 1/2 is to the left so it is a size. The 1/8 is inside the V so it is the root opening. The 75° is outside it so it is the groove angle. The 3–6 is to the right so it is length and pitch.

Where each number lives

PositionWhat the number is
Left of the symbolSize. On a fillet it is the leg. On a groove it is the depth of preparation, and a second figure in brackets after it is the effective throat. No number at all on a groove weld means complete penetration — weld the full wall.
Inside the symbolRoot opening — the gap. On pipe this is the number you hold at fit-up, and it is what comes off your cut length on a true dimension (1.3).
Outside the symbolGroove angle. On a V it is the included angle, so 75° means 37½° ground on each member. On a single bevel it is the one face's angle.
Right of the symbolLength – pitch for intermittent welds. 2–5 is 2" of weld every 5" of centres. Nothing there means continuous.
On the face of the symbolContour and finish. A straight bar means flush, a bulge means convex, a dish means concave — with a letter for how you get there.
In the tailProcess, procedure or spec — GTAW, SMAW, a WPS number, or TYP meaning every joint like this one on the sheet.
At the kinkWhere the arrow meets the reference line. Flag = field weld. Circle = weld all around. Both can be there at once.

The supplementary symbols

SymbolWhat it tells you to do
Flag at the kinkField weld. This joint is made at the site, not on the bench. It is the single most important mark on the sheet for a fitter, because it is where your spool ends.
Circle at the kinkWeld all around. Carry the weld the full way round the joint with no stops at corners. Easy to miss and expensive to go back for.
Filled half-circle
opposite the weld symbol
Melt-through. The root has to fully penetrate with visible reinforcement showing on the far side — you will not be able to get in there to check it afterwards, so it is welded right the first time.
Rectangle on the other side of the lineBacking. A backing bar or backing ring stays in the joint. An R inside the rectangle means remove it after welding — take it out and dress the root afterwards, which is a whole extra operation nobody prices.
Square on the other sideConsumable insert. A ring of filler set in the root that melts into the weld. The class goes in the tail. Fit-up has to be dead even all the way round or it will not fuse.
Rectangle in the reference lineSpacer. A strip held in the root to set the gap, and it becomes part of the weld.
Bar, bulge or dish on the symbol faceContour — flush, convex or concave. A flush call on a pipe weld means the cap gets ground back level, which changes how much cap you leave.

Finish letters

A letter with the contour symbol says how to get that finish — not how smooth, but by what method.

LetterMethod
CChipping
GGrinding — by far the most common on pipe
MMachining
RRolling
HHammering
UUnspecified — any method that gets there
Three marks that change your day if you miss them

The field weld flag. Weld a flagged joint in the shop and you have built a spool that will not go in the building. It is a flag the size of a grain of rice and it decides where your piece ends.

Weld all around. One circle, and the difference between four tacks and a full circumferential weld.

Backing marked R. Removable backing means somebody has to get in and take it out, then dress and inspect the root. If the print says R and nobody planned for access, find out now rather than after the spool is closed.

Worked — the symbol in the figure, in plain words V-groove, arrow side, 1/2" deep, 1/8" root opening, 75° included, 3" of weld every 6", welded all around, in the field, to WPS.

For the fitter that means: bevel both ends to 37½°, hold an eighth gap, take that 1/8" off the cut if your shop holds true dimensions (1/4" on a piece with a gap at each end) — and do not weld it out on the bench, because the flag says it belongs to the field crew.

This one is loaded up to show every slot. On a real pipe butt you would never see a length–pitch — an intermittent weld on a pressure joint leaks — and "all around" with a 3–6 contradicts itself. If a print ever shows you that, ask.

Non-destructive examination uses the same arrow and reference line, with letters instead of a weld shape. It tells you which joints get looked at, how, and how many — which is really telling you which joints had better be right.

test all the way round RT 10% how much below the line = the side it is examined from
Same skeleton as a weld symbol, so it reads the same way. RT 10% on a line means one joint in ten gets shot — and on most jobs nobody tells you which ten per cent in advance, which is the point.

The letters

LettersWhat it is, and what it finds
VTVisual. A trained eye, a light and a gauge. Catches undercut, underfill, excess reinforcement, bad profile, arc strikes. Every weld gets it whether the print says so or not.
PTLiquid penetrant. Dye drawn into surface cracks and pulled back out by a developer. Surface breaking only, but it works on stainless and other non-magnetic material where MT cannot.
MTMagnetic particle. Iron powder gathering at a magnetic leak. Surface and just below it — magnetic steel only: carbon and low-alloy yes, austenitic (300-series) stainless no.
RTRadiographic. A film shot through the weld. Finds what is buried — porosity, slag, lack of fusion, incomplete penetration. This is the one that means the area gets roped off and cleared.
UTUltrasonic. Sound reflected off what is inside. No radiation, no clearing the area, and good on thick wall. Reads on a screen rather than a film.
ETEddy current. Surface and near-surface, on conductive material. Tube and heat exchanger work mostly.
LTLeak testing. The joint is proven not to leak — bubble, halide or helium, depending on the spec.

What each one actually catches, and what gets a weld rejected, is in 1.8e.

How they are drawn

  • Below the line — examine from the arrow side. Above the line — from the other side. Centred on the line — either side, the method chooses.
  • A circle at the kink means examine all the way round, which on a pipe butt is the normal call.
  • A percentage by the letters (or a note in the tail) — how much gets examined. 10%, random 5%, 100%. Under B31.3, random means that share of the joints in a lot, each one examined full round; the spec says what the lot is.
  • A number in brackets above or below the letters is the number of examinations, when it is a count rather than a percentage.
  • Two reference lines stacked on one arrow — the line nearest the arrow is the first job, usually the weld; the next line out is the examination. Read them from the arrow outward: make the weld, then test it.
  • More than one method gets written together — RT + PT, or one on each line.

Six real callouts, decoded

What you seeWhat it means for you
V below the line.
Nothing else.
The everyday pipe butt. Bevel both ends 37½°, 1/16" land, gap per the welder. No size called out means complete penetration. Weld it in the shop.
V below the line,
flag at the kink.
Same joint, but it is a field weld. Your spool ends here. Prep both ends, tack nothing, and get it on the shipping list as a loose end.
V below, 1/8 inside,
circle and flag.
Field butt weld, all the way round, 1/8" root gap. If your shop holds true dimensions, that gap comes off the cut — 1/8" at this end (1.3).
Bevel below the line,
arrow broken toward
the pipe.
Bevel the pipe only. Whatever it lands on — plate, nozzle, heavy member — stays square. The jog in the arrow is the instruction.
1/4 fillet below,
circle at the kink.
A 1/4" leg fillet all the way around. A pipe shoe, a support, a sleeve. Leg, not throat — and check it with a gauge, not a tape (1.17b).
V below on the lower line,
RT 100% on the upper,
TYP in the tail.
Full penetration butt, every one of them shot, and TYP means this applies to every joint of this kind on the sheet — not just the one the arrow touches. On a line like that, the root is the whole job.
100% RT changes how you fit, not just how they weld

A joint that is going to be filmed has no place to hide a bad fit. Hi-lo shows up on a radiograph as a hard line down the middle of the weld, and it gets called incomplete penetration or lack of fusion — and it is the fitter's mismatch, not the welder's technique.

On a 100% RT line, gauge the hi-lo from the inside on every joint and hold the gap even the whole way round. A repair on a shot weld costs a cut-out, a re-prep, a re-weld and a re-shoot.

If you cannot read it, say so

A weld symbol you are not sure of is worth one question. Every hand who has been in the trade a while has ground a bevel on the wrong member, or welded out a joint that had a flag on it. It is the cheapest question on the job and nobody who has done it will laugh at you for asking.

The fitting eats length, then the pipe screws back into it and gives some of that length back. The difference is called the net, and it's the only number you need.

CENTRE TO CENTRE TAKE-OUT ENGAGEMENT — you get this back CUT THIS NET = take-out − engagement
Screwed pipe is the one place where the fitting gives some of its take-out back. Subtract the take-out, add back the thread engagement — the net is all that comes off the pipe.
CUT = CENTER-TO-CENTER − NETA − NETB
NET = TAKE-OUT − THREAD ENGAGEMENT
Worked — 1" black iron, 90 to 90, 36" C-to-C 1" 90: take-out 1.50", engagement 0.69" → net 0.81"
36 − 0.81 − 0.81 = 34.38" = 34-3/8"
Cut that length, then thread both ends.
Learn two numbers and you're free

Whatever size you run most, memorize its net 90 and net 45. On 2" it's 1-1/2" and 15/16". On 1" it's 13/16" and 7/16". Then you cut straight off the print without touching a calculator.

Cut length is not thread length

The cut length above is the pipe, raw, before threading. Threading doesn't shorten it — the die cuts into the wall, not off the end. Cut, then thread.

150# malleable iron. Use the NET columns — that's what you subtract.

Take-outs are the ASME B16.3 centre-to-end figures. Engagement is the trade's wrench-tight make-up, not the B1.20.1 hand-tight figure, so NET is what a fitting actually eats in the field. Patterns vary between makers — check the first fitting out of every box.

Size90 T.O.45 T.O.EngageNET 90NET 45
1/8"0.69—0.250.44—
1/4"0.810.730.380.430.35
3/8"0.950.800.380.570.42
1/2"1.120.880.500.620.38
3/4"1.310.980.560.750.42
1"1.501.120.690.810.43
1-1/4"1.751.290.691.060.60
1-1/2"1.941.430.691.250.74
2"2.251.680.751.500.93
2-1/2"2.701.950.941.761.01
3"3.082.171.002.081.17
4"3.792.611.062.731.55

A tee take-out equals the 90 of the same size — run and branch both. Use the same net.

Couplings

A coupling has no centerline to work from, so the take-out idea doesn't apply. Work it out from lengths instead.

ASSEMBLED = PIPE1 + PIPE2 + COUPLING LENGTH − (2 × ENGAGEMENT)
In practice

A standard coupling adds roughly 1/4" to 3/8" over the two pipe lengths on small sizes. Thread a scrap into one and measure it once — then you know for that box.

Unions

Union dimensions vary more than any other threaded fitting — pattern, class and manufacturer all change them. Measure the one in your hand. A union is an in-line fitting, so measure it face to face — end to end, made up.

Typical ground-joint union, end to end 1/2" ~1-3/4"   3/4" ~1-15/16"   1" ~2-3/16"
1-1/4" ~2-1/2"   1-1/2" ~2-5/8"   2" ~3"
Verify before you cut a run around one.
Reading the table — 1/2" threaded 90 90 take-out 1.12, engagement 0.50, so NET 0.62.
Centre to centre 24" between two 1/2" 90s:
24 − 0.62 − 0.62 = 22.76" of pipe, measured end to end before threading.
Why the net, not the take-out The fitting eats 1.12" — but the pipe screws 0.50" back into it.
Subtract the whole take-out and you cut every piece an inch short over two fittings.
The net is the only number that comes off the tape.
NPT TAPER = 3/4" PER FOOT. THE TAPER IS WHAT SEALS.

Dope and tape are lubricant and gap filler. They let the taper pull up tight without galling. They do not seal a bad thread.

SizeThreads/inThread length
1/8"273/8"
1/4" – 3/8"185/8"
1/2" – 3/4"143/4"
1" – 2"11-1/215/16" – 1-1/16"
2-1/2" – 8"81-9/16" – 2-1/8"

Cutting a good thread

  • Cutting oil, always, and plenty of it. Dry threading tears the thread and destroys the dies. Oil is cheaper than dies.
  • Ream every cut before you thread. A burr on the ID is a permanent restriction.
  • Sharp dies, matched set. Mixed or dull dies give you a thread that won't pull up.
  • Let the die head trip on its own at the set length. Don't force it long — an over-long thread bottoms out and cracks the fitting.
  • Check the thread with a fitting, hand tight. It should go on about 4-1/2 turns by hand on 1/2"–1-1/2" (5 on 2"), give or take a turn. Runs on too far means the thread was cut too deep; stops short means it was cut too shallow.
  • Wire-brush the chips off before you dope it.
  • Support long pipe on a stand past the machine. An unsupported joint whipping in a threader is how people get hurt.
Schedule matters

You can't thread Schedule 10 — there isn't enough wall. Threading Sch 40 cuts away about half the wall at the root of the thread — a 1" Sch 40 threaded end has less metal left than Sch 10 pipe. That is why threaded joints are the weak point in a threaded system, and why threaded pressure piping is so often Sch 80.

A good thread and a torn oneTwo 1" threads under a raking light — one cut clean with oil, one cut dry. Include a fitting run on hand tight to show the engagement. PHOTO

How tight

  • Hand tight, then 2 to 3 wrench turns on 1/2" through 1".
  • 1-1/2 to 2 turns on the larger sizes.
  • Two or three threads showing past the fitting when you're done. All the threads buried means you went too far; six showing means it isn't made up.
Never back a joint off to line it up

Backing off breaks the seal — the taper has already set and it won't re-seat. Go forward to the next clock position, or cut a new nipple. Everybody learns this by chasing a weep for an hour.

Dope and tape

  • Male threads only. Dope inside a female fitting just ends up in the system.
  • Stay off the first thread so nothing gets pushed into the line.
  • Tape wraps with the thread — clockwise looking at the end of the pipe — or it unwinds as you make it up. Two to three wraps.
  • Tape and dope together is common practice: tape first, dope over it.
  • Match the sealant to the service. Gas, oxygen, steam and potable water all have their own approved compounds. Using the wrong one is a failed inspection at best.

Wrenching

  • Two wrenches, always — one to hold, one to turn. Otherwise you're unscrewing the joint behind you.
  • Back up on the fitting, not on a valve body or a gauge.
  • Don't wrench a close nipple — there's no shoulder and you'll wreck the threads. Use a nipple chuck.
  • Keep the wrench jaws sharp and clean. A slipping pipe wrench is how knuckles get opened up.
Tape on, and made upTape wrapped clockwise looking at the pipe end, then the finished joint with two or three threads showing past the fitting. PHOTO
Close nipple
Threaded end to end, no shoulder. Shortest possible connection.
Shoulder nipple
A short unthreaded band in the middle. Anything you might need a wrench on.
Street ell
Male one end, female the other. Saves a nipple and a lot of length.
Union
Comes apart without unscrewing the whole run. Put one wherever you'll need to break the line.
Think about takedown before you build up

A threaded run can only be assembled in one direction — you screw pipe in as you go. If both ends are fixed, you cannot close the loop without a union or a swing joint. Plan where it comes apart before you start, not when you're one nipple from done.

Swing joints

Two or three ells and short nipples that let a connection rotate into place and absorb a little movement. The standard way to drop to a piece of equipment, and the standard way to close a run that's fixed at both ends.

Street ell on street ell

Check the swing before you build it. Two street ells wrenched together will box you into a position you can't get a wrench back into.

Where threaded work stops

  • Most specs cap threaded pipe at 2". Above that it's welded or grooved.
  • Threaded joints are the weak point on vibration and thermal cycling. Pumps and compressors usually get a flex connector or welded pipe.
  • High pressure and high temperature service often bans threaded joints outright, or requires a seal weld over them.
Close nipple, shoulder nipple, street ell, unionAll four on a bench with a tape alongside, and a swing joint built up from them. PHOTO
  • Subtracting the take-out and forgetting the engagement. Every piece comes out short by two engagements — about an inch on 1/2", an inch and a half on 2". Use the net.
  • Backing a joint off to clock it. That joint will weep. Go forward or re-cut.
  • No union in a run that's fixed at both ends. Now it can't be closed and it can't be taken apart.
  • Threading dry. Torn threads, ruined dies, and a joint that won't seal.
  • Not reaming. Flow restriction you can never get back.
  • One wrench. You just loosened the joint behind the one you're tightening.
  • Dope in the female fitting. It ends up in the valve seat downstream.
  • Over-threading. A long thread bottoms out and splits the fitting — sometimes days later.
  • Threading Schedule 10. There's no wall there to thread.
  • Wrenching a close nipple. Nipple chuck, every time.
Screw pipe gone wrongA cracked fitting from over-tightening, a thread cut dry and torn, tape wrapped backwards, and a joint doped over a chip that never sealed. PHOTO

Same triangle as weld pipe, different subtraction. On threaded pipe the piece you cut is end of thread to end of thread, and part of each end disappears into the fitting — so you take the net off, not the take-out.

The rule

CUT = TRAVEL − NET − NET
NET = TAKE-OUT − THREAD ENGAGEMENT

Both numbers are in the tables on 2.2, and the net column is already worked out for you. Travel comes from the offset the same way as any other material (8.2).

Worked — 2" black pipe, 12" offset, two 45s

  1. Travel = 12 × 1.414 = 16.97" centre to centre.
  2. Net for a 2" 45: take-out 1.68 − engagement 0.75 = 0.93" per end.
  3. Cut = 16.97 − 0.93 − 0.93 = 15.11" → 15-1/8", thread to thread.
  4. Run = 12" (a 45 runs the same as it offsets). Check it against the space before you thread anything.
Same job, done wrong Take-outs only: 16.97 − 1.68 − 1.68 = 13.61" — 1-1/2" short. That is the mistake on 2.6, and it is why the net column exists.

When the fittings touch

A close nipple between two 45s is the shortest threaded offset there is. On 2" a close nipple is 2-1/2" long and loses 0.75" into each fitting, so the travel is 1.68 + (2.5 − 0.75 − 0.75) + 1.68 = 4.36", which is about a 3-1/16" offset. Anything smaller needs a street 45 (male one end, female the other), which threads straight into the first fitting and takes one net out of the picture.

Engagement is a make-up figure

The nets on 2.2 are based on the engagement you get wrenching to a normal make-up. Run the joint two turns further to clock a fitting and you have buried another 3/16" of pipe on that end (two turns at 11-1/2 threads per inch). If you know you will have to chase a clock, cut 3/16" long, not short — you can always take another turn.

Order the nipples, thread the rest

Anything under 12" long is faster and straighter as a bought nipple than as a hand-threaded piece. Work out the cut, round to the next stock nipple length, and adjust the run to suit.

Calculator: pick Screw pipe on the cut length tab in 13.1 and the engagement comes off for you.

Copper take-out already runs to the bottom of the socket — the point where the pipe stops. Subtract it once, from each end. There is no second "socket depth" step.

CENTRE TO CENTRE TAKE-OUT to the bottom of the socket CUT = C-to-C − TAKE-OUT − TAKE-OUT
Copper take-out already runs to the bottom of the socket, the point where the pipe stops. There is no separate socket-depth step like screwed pipe's thread engagement — subtract the take-out once, from each end.
CUT = CENTER-TO-CENTER − TAKE-OUTA − TAKE-OUTB
TAKE-OUT ALREADY RUNS TO THE SOCKET BOTTOM. NO SECOND STEP.
TAKE-OUTS VARY BY MAKER — CHECK THE FIRST FITTING (3.2).
Worked — 1/2" copper, 90 to 90, 42" C-to-C 1/2" 90 take-out: 0.50", to the bottom of the socket.
42 − 0.50 − 0.50 = 41" of tube, cut and reamed before you solder.
Don't subtract the socket depth again

The take-out in 3.2 already runs to the bottom of the socket — that is the whole net. Subtract it once, on 90s and 45s alike, and stop there. Subtracting a separate socket depth on top of it is the classic copper mistake, and it cuts every piece short by two socket depths — 1" on 1/2" tube, over 4" on 4".

Always bottom the pipe

All of this assumes the pipe goes all the way into the socket. If it doesn't bottom, your net is wrong and the joint is weak. Push it home and give it a quarter turn.

Wrot copper fittings. Each take-out below already runs to the bottom of the socket — that's the net, full stop. These are typical figures, and wrot copper varies more between makers than any other fitting in this book — a quarter inch or more on the same size is normal, and short-radius (close rough) ells run shorter than this table. Check the first fitting out of the box against a framing square before you cut a run.

Size90 take-out45 take-out
3/8"0.380.19
1/2"0.500.25
3/4"0.750.31
1"0.880.38
1-1/4"1.000.44
1-1/2"1.250.50
2"1.500.62
2-1/2"1.750.81
3"2.000.94
4"2.501.12

A tee runs about the same as the 90 of its size. Cast fittings run slightly different — measure the first one.

Fitting-to-fitting

Two fittings soldered straight together with no pipe between them still need a piece of pipe inside — that's what a close nipple's job is in copper too. Cut a stub equal to both socket depths and solder both at once.

Reading the table — 1/2" copper 90 Take-out 0.50", to the bottom of the socket.
Centre to centre 36" between two 1/2" 90s:
36 − 0.50 − 0.50 = 35" of tube, cut and reamed before you solder.
Reading the table — 3/4" copper 45 Take-out 0.31", to the bottom of the socket.
20" C-to-C between two 3/4" 45s:
20 − 0.31 − 0.31 = 19.38" = 19-3/8".
TYPE K thickest TYPE L usual above ground TYPE M thin, check first TYPE DWV drainage only SAME OUTSIDE, DIFFERENT INSIDE every type takes the same fitting
The outside diameter never changes, so a 1" fitting fits 1" K, L and M alike (DWV starts at 1-1/4"). What changes is the wall — and with it the bore, the pressure rating and how much heat the joint takes to make. Copper is also sized by its nominal size: 1" tube measures 1-1/8" across the outside.
The copper trap

Copper tube OD is always nominal size + 1/8". A "1 inch" copper is 1-1/8" OD; 1" steel pipe is 1.315" OD. Not the same pipe. No shared fittings, hangers or hole saws. Measure the OD when you're not sure what you're holding.

Type L — the commercial standard

SizeODWallIDlb/ftgal/ft
1/2"0.625.0400.5450.285.012
3/4"0.875.0450.7850.455.025
1"1.125.0501.0250.655.043
1-1/4"1.375.0551.2650.884.065
1-1/2"1.625.0601.5051.14.092
2"2.125.0701.9851.75.161
2-1/2"2.625.0802.4652.48.248
3"3.125.0902.9453.33.354
4"4.125.1103.9055.38.622

Which type

Type K
Thickest wall. Underground, severe service, some medical gas. Green marking.
Type L
Standard for commercial water and most mechanical work. Blue marking.
Type M
Thinnest pressure wall. Residential — and plenty of specs and codes won't allow it. Red marking.
DWV
Drain, waste, vent only. Thinner than M, not for pressure. Yellow marking.
ACR
Refrigeration. Sized by actual OD, cleaned and capped, nitrogen charged.

Same OD across K, L and M — only the wall changes, so fittings interchange. Hard drawn comes in straight lengths; soft (annealed) comes in coils and bends.

Solder is pulled into the joint by capillary action, not pushed in by you. Everything below is about letting that happen.

  1. Cut square and ream. A tubing cutter leaves a burr that blocks flow and disturbs the solder path.
  2. Clean both surfaces bright. Sand cloth on the pipe, fitting brush in the cup. Bright, not just shiny.
  3. Flux immediately, thin and even on both. Copper starts oxidizing again in minutes.
  4. Assemble, bottom it, quarter turn to spread the flux. Wipe the excess.
  5. Heat the fitting, not the joint line. Play the flame on the cup, moving.
  6. Touch the solder to the far side of the joint. When it melts on contact with the metal — not the flame — it's ready, and it will run around and in.
  7. Feed one full ring's worth, then stop. More isn't better.
  8. Wipe while plastic for a clean fillet. Let it cool on its own — no quenching.
The two things that kill a solder joint

Water in the line. One drop steals all your heat and you will never get the joint hot. Bread, a jet plug, a freeze plug, or open a faucet downhill — but get it dry.
Melting the solder with the flame. If the flame is melting it, the copper is cold and the solder is sitting in the joint instead of being drawn in. That joint will leak, maybe next year.

Solder and flux

  • Lead-free is required on potable water — 95/5 tin-antimony or a tin-silver alloy. 50/50 lead solder is for non-potable only and is banned outright in a lot of places.
  • Water-soluble flux on potable systems so it flushes out. Petroleum-based flux left in a line keeps corroding.
  • Don't over-flux. Excess flux runs into the pipe and eats at it.
Working near finished work

Flame protection cloth behind every joint, a spray bottle handy, and check behind the wall before and after. Most fires on a plumbing job start at a solder joint next to a stud.

A drawn joint and a cold oneA wiped fillet all the way round, beside a joint where the solder sat on top instead of being drawn in. Cut both in half if you can. PHOTO
BELOW 840°F = SOLDERING  |  ABOVE 840°F = BRAZING

Brazing makes a much stronger, much hotter-rated joint. Refrigeration, medical gas, fuel gas and high-pressure work all call for it.

BCuP
Copper-phosphorus. Needs no flux on copper-to-copper — the phosphorus does the work. Copper to brass or bronze takes it too, with flux. Never on steel or iron.
BAg
Silver alloy. Copper to brass, bronze or steel. Flux required. Buy the cadmium-free grades and check the rod, because some older BAg alloys carry cadmium and the fume off them is acutely toxic — it has killed brazers in a single shift in a small room. If the box does not say cadmium-free, do not light it up indoors.
  • More heat, bigger tip. Oxy-acetylene or air-acetylene with a turbo tip. A standard propane torch won't get there on anything but small sizes.
  • Heat the whole joint evenly and keep the flame moving. Overheating copper past dull red burns it.
  • Feed at the joint line once the base metal will melt the filler on its own.
  • Don't move it while it cools. A brazed joint disturbed while solidifying is cracked inside.
Nitrogen purge

Brazing copper without a nitrogen purge leaves a black scale inside the pipe. On refrigeration and medical gas that scale breaks loose and destroys compressors or fails the certification. Purge at a low, steady flow — just enough to displace air, not enough to blow the joint. Medical gas brazing is a certified, tested, inspected operation with its own rules; don't touch it unless you're qualified on it.

Purged and unpurgedTwo brazed copper joints cut open — one clean bore, one with black scale inside. This is the shot that sells the nitrogen purge. PHOTO

No flame, no flux, much faster. It's also completely unforgiving of a pipe that wasn't pushed all the way in — and unlike solder, you can't tell by looking once it's pressed.

  1. Cut square. Out-of-square cuts roll the O-ring.
  2. Deburr inside and out. A burr slices the O-ring on the way in. This is the single most common cause of a press joint leaking.
  3. Check the O-ring is in the fitting and undamaged before you assemble.
  4. Mark the insertion depth on the pipe with the gauge that came with the tool.
  5. Push to the mark, square the fitting up, confirm the mark is still at the fitting edge.
  6. Jaw square to the fitting, fully seated in the bead, then run the full cycle.
  7. Confirm the mark didn't move. If the pipe backed out, the joint is no good.
Things that ruin press joints

Oil or cutting fluid on the pipe — swells and degrades the O-ring.
Wrong O-ring for the service. EPDM for water, HNBR for fuel gas and oil, FKM for high temp. They're color-coded and they are not interchangeable.
Worn or dirty jaws. Clean them, and get the tool serviced on schedule.
Pressing over a mark you eyeballed. Use the gauge.

Leak-before-press

Most systems are designed so an unpressed joint leaks visibly at low pressure during test — that's how you find the one you missed. Don't skip that test thinking it's redundant. And know your system's pressure and temperature limits; press is not rated for everything solder is.

The insertion markDepth gauge on the tube, mark made, tube pushed home, jaw square on the bead — then the same mark after pressing, showing it did not move. PHOTO
  • Subtracting the socket depth on top of the take-out. The take-out in 3.2 already runs to the bottom of the socket. Subtract it once and stop — a second subtraction cuts every piece short by two socket depths — 1" on 1/2", over 4" on 4".
  • Not bottoming the pipe in the socket. Your dimension is wrong and the joint is weak.
  • Mixing up copper size and steel size. Copper OD is nominal + 1/8".
  • Copper hung on bare steel. Dielectric corrosion. Lined hangers or coated clevises where they touch.
  • Copper direct to steel pipe with no dielectric union or flange. Same problem, worse.
  • Wet line. You'll fight a joint for twenty minutes and it still won't take.
  • Over-velocity design. Above about 8 ft/s, copper erodes from the inside — worse on hot water and worse still at every elbow.
  • Heating the solder instead of the fitting. Cold joint that leaks later, not now.
  • No flame protection. The fire starts behind the wall where you can't see it.
  • Leaving flux inside potable pipe. Flush the system properly.
Copper gone wrongA joint soldered without cleaning, one overheated until the flux burned black, a kinked soft copper bend, and a dielectric union that was left out where it was needed. PHOTO

Copper offsets are the easiest ones in the book: the take-outs on 3.2 already run to the bottom of the cup, so you subtract them and nothing else. The trap is the fitting that does not match the table.

The rule

CUT = TRAVEL − TAKE-OUT − TAKE-OUT

No add-back. The socket depth is inside the take-out already (3.1).

Worked — 1" Type L, 10" offset, two 45s

  1. Travel = 10 × 1.414 = 14.14".
  2. Take-out, 1" wrot 45 = 0.38" per end, from 3.2.
  3. Cut = 14.14 − 0.38 − 0.38 = 13.38" → 13-3/8".
  4. Run = 10". A 45 offset in 1" copper barely eats anything — which is why you can tuck one almost anywhere.
The same offset in 2" Travel 14.14, take-out 0.62 each: 14.14 − 1.24 = 12.90" = 12-7/8". Bigger fitting, shorter piece, same triangle.

Press fittings are not solder fittings

A press 45 has a deeper cup with a sealing ring in it and a longer body, so its take-out is usually bigger than the wrot solder figure for the same size — and it differs between makers. Measure the first one out of the box, centre to bottom of the cup, and use that (3.6). The insertion depth is stamped on most press fittings; mark it on the tube so you can see it is home before you crimp.

Cut it square or the cup lies to you

A cut that is out of square bottoms on one side of the cup only. The take-out is right, the joint is wrong, and on a press fitting the ring may not seal. Tubing cutter, ream the burr, then check the tube sits in the cup with no rock.

Short offsets: bend the tube

Soft copper up to 1" makes a cleaner small offset with a spring or lever bender than two fittings do — no joints, no take-outs, no flux. The offset constants are the same as for fittings (8.3); the bender maker’s chart gives the gain for its own shoe.

Calculator: pick Copper on the cut length tab in 13.1.

Same idea as screw pipe — take-out minus what you get back — except here you measure both numbers yourself. Plastic fitting dimensions vary between manufacturers far more than metal does, so you verify them instead of trusting a table.

CENTRE TO CENTRE T.O. SOCKET you get it back CUT = C-to-C − 2 T.O. + 2 SOCKETS THE SOCKET IS DEEP — DO NOT LOSE IT
Plastic fittings have a deep socket, and the pipe bottoms out in it. That depth comes back to you: subtract the two take-outs, then add the two socket depths. Dry-fit first — a cemented joint is not coming apart. On 4" schedule 40 the socket is a full 2" deep. Forget both of them on a long run and you are the best part of four inches short.
CUT = CENTER-TO-CENTER − NETA − NETB
NET = TAKE-OUT − SOCKET DEPTH
Finding both numbers in ten seconds

Lay the fitting on a flat bench against a framing square. Butt one face to the blade and measure from the blade to the center of the other opening — that's the take-out. Then measure the socket depth inside the fitting, from the hub face to the shoulder, or read it off the table below. Write both on the box in marker and you're set for the whole job.

Socket depth — PVC Sch 40, nominal

SizeSocketSizeSocket
1/2"0.692"1.16
3/4"0.722-1/2"1.75
1"0.883"1.88
1-1/4"0.944"2.00
1-1/2"1.096"3.00
Dry fit sits shallow

A dry-fit socket only takes the pipe part way in. A good dry fit goes in a third to two-thirds of the way; with cement on it the pipe goes to the bottom, because the cement softens the material. Measure your socket depth in the fitting itself, not from a dry fit, and know the joint will close up a little more when you glue it.

PVC and CPVC use the same OD as steel pipe of the same nominal size, which is why the fittings look familiar. The pressure ratings do not behave like steel at all.

SizeODSch 40 wallSch 80 wallSch 40 psi
1/2"0.840.109.147600
3/4"1.050.113.154480
1"1.315.133.179450
1-1/4"1.660.140.191370
1-1/2"1.900.145.200330
2"2.375.154.218280
2-1/2"2.875.203.276300
3"3.500.216.300260
4"4.500.237.337220
6"6.625.280.432180
8"8.625.322.500160

Pressure ratings are for water at 73°F. They drop hard with temperature.

Temperature derating — this is the whole story on plastic

PVC at 110°F holds about half its rated pressure. At 140°F it's down around 22%, and PVC isn't rated above 140°F at all. CPVC carries to 200°F but is also derated as it goes up. A 280 psi 2" pipe is not a 280 psi pipe in a hot mechanical room.

Never compressed air in PVC

PVC fails by shattering, and compressed air stores enough energy to turn the pipe into shrapnel. It is banned for compressed air by OSHA in most applications and by every manufacturer. Don't do it, and don't pneumatic-test a PVC system.

PVC
Cold water, drainage, vent. To 140°F. White or grey.
CPVC
Hot water to 200°F. Tan (CTS) or light grey (Sch 80).
Sch 80
Grey, heavier wall, higher pressure. The only plastic you should ever thread.
Schedule 40 next to schedule 80Two 2" PVC ends sawn square and stood side by side so the wall difference is obvious, with the printed line on each barrel readable in the shot. PHOTO

Solvent cement doesn't glue the joint — it dissolves both surfaces so they fuse into one piece. That's why the technique matters and why a dry-looking joint fails.

  1. Cut square and deburr both inside and out. A ragged end plows the cement out of the socket ahead of itself.
  2. Dry fit. The pipe should go in a third to two-thirds of the way and get snug — not fall to the bottom, not stop at the lip.
  3. Primer on both surfaces, socket first then pipe. It should soften the surface, not just wet it.
  4. Cement while the primer is still wet. Heavy even coat on the pipe, lighter coat in the socket.
  5. Push it home with a quarter turn and bottom it.
  6. Hold 30 seconds. Plastic pushes itself back out of the socket if you let go.
  7. Wipe the bead. A full ring of cement squeeze-out all the way around means you had enough.
Purple primer isn't decoration

It's dyed so an inspector can see from across the room that you used it. Skipping primer on a job that requires it is a failed inspection and a cut-out, however good the joint is.

Cement types

Regular body
Up to 2"
Medium body
Up to 6"
Heavy body
6" and up, and any loose fit
CPVC cement
Orange. For CPVC only — PVC cement on CPVC is a failure waiting to happen.
Transition
Green. PVC to ABS only.
Cure time is real

Set time and full cure are two different things, and both stretch out badly in the cold. Pressure testing a joint before it's cured is how you blow a system apart. The can has a chart on it — read it, and in cold weather double what you think you need.

Ventilate. Primer and cement fumes are no joke in a trench, a crawl space or a closed mechanical room.

A full ring of squeeze-outA 4" PVC joint with cement beaded all the way round, next to one with a dry patch showing. PHOTO

This is the thing that separates a plastic job that lasts from one that comes back. PVC moves four to five times what steel does.

MaterialGrowth per 100 ft per 100°F
Carbon steel0.78"
Copper1.13"
PVC3.60"
CPVC4.10"
GROWTH (in) = FEET × °F CHANGE × FACTOR ÷ 10,000
Worked — 60 ft of CPVC hot water Installed at 60°F, running at 140°F. Change = 80°
60 × 80 × 4.10 ÷ 10,000 = 1.97" of movement
That's two inches that has to go somewhere.

Where it goes

  • Guide it, don't clamp it. Hangers should let the pipe slide through, not grip it. A tight strap every 4 ft turns growth into a snake in the ceiling.
  • Offsets and loops absorb it. A change of direction gives the pipe a leg that can flex.
  • Expansion joints on long straight hot runs.
  • Anchor at one point so you control which way it moves, then guide the rest. Where that anchor goes and how big the loop has to be is a design item on anything hot or long — take it off the drawing, not off the cuff.
  • Don't hard-anchor both ends of a long hot run. Something will break, usually a fitting.

Support spacing

SizePVC coldCPVC hot
1/2" – 1"4 ft3 ft
1-1/4" – 2"4 ft3 ft
2-1/2" – 4"4 ft4 ft
6" and up4 ft4 ft

IPC Table 308.5 and UPC Table 313.3 cap PVC at 4 ft at every size — the maker’s cold-water table may allow more, but the code wins. Hot lines sag between hangers. When in doubt, closer. Continuous support on anything that will run hot and horizontal.

A run that snakedHot CPVC strapped tight every four feet and gone wavy in the ceiling. The best argument for guides there is. PHOTO
Never thread Schedule 40 plastic

Threading cuts through roughly half the wall and leaves you with a joint rated for almost nothing. If a spec calls for threaded plastic it means Schedule 80. Otherwise use a molded threaded adapter.

Threaded plastic fittings

  • Hand tight plus one to two turns. That's all. Plastic female fittings split from over-tightening, sometimes weeks later.
  • PTFE tape — what everybody calls Teflon® tape — not pipe dope, unless the dope is specifically marked for plastic. Many petroleum-based dopes attack PVC and CPVC.
  • Plastic male into metal female is the good direction. Metal male into plastic female is how you split the fitting — the metal wins.
  • Never use a pipe wrench on a plastic fitting. Strap wrench, or a smooth-jaw.

Transitions

To copper or steel
Molded transition adapter or a flanged connection. On hot water, allow for the difference in movement between the two.
To cast iron drain
Shielded no-hub coupling or a proper transition fitting.
PVC to ABS
Green transition cement only, and plenty of jurisdictions don't allow it at all.
Unions
Plastic unions exist and are the right way to give yourself a takedown point. Don't over-tighten them either.
Hangers and sharp edges

Plastic is soft. A steel hanger edge will cut into it over a few years of thermal movement. Use wide, smooth supports or an insulating shield at every contact point.

Plastic to metal, done rightA male plastic thread into a female metal fitting — the correct direction — beside the reverse, which cracks. Include a transition union and a flanged connection. PHOTO
  • Compressed air in PVC. It shatters. Never, for any reason.
  • Strapping it tight everywhere. Now it has nowhere to grow and it snakes itself out of the hangers.
  • Pressure testing before it's cured. Read the can, and double it when it's cold.
  • PVC on hot water. That's CPVC's job. They look alike; check the printing on the pipe.
  • PVC cement on CPVC. Orange can for CPVC.
  • Skipping primer where the inspector requires it. Cut-out.
  • Threading Sch 40. Half the wall is gone.
  • Over-tightening a threaded adapter. Hand tight plus one to two turns.
  • Not deburring. The burr pushes the cement out ahead of the pipe.
  • Letting go before it sets. The pipe backs out of the socket and you just made a leak you can't see.
  • Assuming the pressure rating holds when it's hot. At 140°F PVC is down near a fifth of its cold rating.
PVC gone wrongA joint with a dry patch, one cemented without primer, a run strapped so tight it snaked, and a female plastic fitting split by a metal thread. PHOTO

PVC works like screw pipe in reverse: the pipe goes into the fitting, so the socket depth comes back to you. But the take-out itself is not in any standard — it is whatever the maker moulded — so one number comes off the table and the other comes off the fitting in your hand.

The rule

CUT = TRAVEL − NET − NET
NET = TAKE-OUT (measured) − SOCKET DEPTH (4.1)

Worked — 2" Sch 40, 18" offset, two 45s

  1. Travel = 18 × 1.4142 = 25.46".
  2. Take-out: lay the 45 on the bench and measure centre to the face of the hub. Suppose it reads 2-1/4". That is your number for that box of fittings.
  3. Socket depth for 2" is 1.16" (4.1). Net = 2.25 − 1.16 = 1.09".
  4. Cut = 25.46 − 1.09 − 1.09 = 23.28" → 23-1/4".
Why a 1/8" matters here more than on steel A cemented joint has to bottom in the socket to seal — the cement bonds the last third of the cup. Cut 1/8" long and the pipe stops short of the shoulder on both ends and the joint is weak in exactly the place you cannot see. Cut to the number, dry-fit, mark the depth, then cement.
Dry-fit before you cement, every offset

PVC fittings are not clocked until the cement sets, and a 45 offset with one fitting rolled a few degrees walks off the line. Dry-fit the whole offset, mark the pipe and fitting with a witness line across the joint, then cement and push to the marks. You get about ten seconds.

Same fittings, longer runs: mind the growth

An offset is where a hot PVC line puts its expansion. If the run is long or the line runs warm, read 4.4 before you fix the ends of it.

Calculator: pick PVC / CPVC on the cut length tab in 13.1; the socket depth fills in from the size. Pick a 90 or a tee and the take-out fills from the Spears Sch 40 catalogue; for other brands, and for 45s, type the take-out you measured.

Grooved works like weld pipe for the math — take-outs only, no add-back. The pipe ends butt up inside the coupling housing and the gasket bridges them.

CUT = CENTER-TO-CENTER − TAKE-OUTA − TAKE-OUTB − THE COUPLING GAPS
Take-outs are manufacturer-specific

Victaulic®, Anvil, Shurjoint and the rest all publish their own dimensions and they are not the same as butt weld take-outs. The catalog for the brand on your job is the authority. Don't substitute a B16.9 number.

Get the numbers once, on day one

Pull the take-outs for the sizes you're running off the manufacturer's sheet, write them on a card, tape it inside your toolbox lid. Grooved jobs run the same handful of sizes for weeks.

Coupling gap

A flexible coupling is designed with a gap between the pipe ends — that gap is what lets the joint move and it is part of the design, not sloppiness. A rigid coupling clamps the ends so they cannot move — there is still a small gap between them, and it is on the data sheet too. The manufacturer's allowable gap range is on the data sheet. Running the gap at the wide end of the range across a long run adds up to real length, so be consistent.

Worked — laying out a grooved run Pipe is cut to C-to-C minus both take-outs and the coupling gaps, the same way a welder’s root gap comes off.
A long straight run of ten couplings, each carrying 1/8" of gap, comes out 1-1/4" longer than a welded run of the same dimension. Account for it or make the last piece adjustable.
A groove and the coupling that lands on itPipe end with the groove cut, a groove gauge sitting in it, and the coupling and gasket laid out beside it unassembled so the parts can be named. PHOTO
Roll groove
Cold-formed with rollers. No metal removed, so the wall stays full thickness. Standard on Sch 10 and Sch 40.
Cut groove
Metal machined out. Only on heavier wall — it takes material away.

The end prep that matters

  • Square within about .030". An out-of-square end tips the gasket and it leaks.
  • No flare. Roll grooving raises a flare at the pipe end. Knock it down or the gasket rides over it going in.
  • Deburr inside and out. The gasket lip drags over that edge.
  • Gasket seat clean and smooth — that's the band between the pipe end and the groove. No paint, no scale, no weld spatter, no deep scratches running around it.
  • Groove depth and width gauged on the first joint off each roll set, and spot-checked after. Rollers wear and drift.
  • Don't groove over a weld seam if you can avoid it, and never groove a bell, a swage or a previously grooved end.
Wall thickness and groove type must match

Cut-grooving thin wall pipe removes wall it doesn't have and the pipe fails under pressure. Check the manufacturer's table for which groove goes on which schedule before you set the machine up.

Field cut ends

Abrasive saw or a roll cutter, square. A torch-cut end cannot be grooved — the heat-affected metal won't form right and the surface will never seal.

A good roll grooveFlare knocked down, gasket seat clean and unmarked, groove gauge sat in the groove. PHOTO
PADS METAL TO METAL a gap here means it is not seated No torque spec substitutes for closed pads.
The pads have to close metal to metal. A gap at one pad means the coupling is not seated: it will hold hydro and let go later under load or thermal movement, and there is no torque spec that substitutes for closed pads.
  1. Check the gasket — right grade for the service, no nicks, no debris.
  2. Lube it — a thin film of the manufacturer's lubricant all over, lips included. Dry gaskets roll and pinch.
  3. Slide it onto one pipe end, then bring the second end up and center the gasket across both. It should not be bunched or overhanging.
  4. Set the housings so the keys drop fully into the grooves on both pipes.
  5. Start both bolts, threads engaged, nuts finger tight.
  6. Tighten alternately, side to side, evenly, until the bolt pads are metal to metal.
  7. Look at the joint. Even pads, housings seated, no gasket pinched out.
Pads must touch

A gap left at one pad means the housing isn't seated in the groove. That joint will hold hydro and let go later under load or thermal movement. There is no torque spec that substitutes for metal-to-metal pads.

Gasket grades

EPDM
Water, hot water, some chemicals. Green stripe typically. Not for petroleum.
Nitrile
Petroleum, oil, air with oil vapor. Orange stripe typically.
Silicone / FKM
High temperature and special service.

Colors vary by maker — read the stripe and the grade letter, don't go by color alone.

Rigid vs flexible is not your choice

Rigid couplings make a joint that behaves like welded pipe and carries the load. Flexible ones allow deflection and are what go at pumps, across building joints and wherever expansion has to be absorbed. The engineer specified one of them. Substituting flexible for rigid takes the rigidity out of a system that was designed to have it — and substituting rigid for flexible transmits vibration straight into the building.

Pads closedA grooved coupling bolted up metal to metal, and beside it one left with a gap at one pad. PHOTO
  • Using butt weld take-outs on grooved fittings. Different numbers entirely. Get the brand's catalog.
  • Dry gasket. It rolls, pinches and leaks under test.
  • Bolt pads not closed. The most common grooved failure there is.
  • Flare left on a roll-grooved end. It shears the gasket lip on assembly.
  • Cut-grooving light wall pipe. There isn't the wall for it.
  • Torch-cut ends. They can't be grooved and they can't seal.
  • Wrong gasket grade for the service. EPDM in an oil line dissolves.
  • Rigid where flexible was specified — or the other way around.
  • No allowance for gap on a long run. Ten joints of 1/8" is 1-1/4".
  • Grooving over the weld seam. The groove won't form evenly there.
Grooved gone wrongPads not closed, a gasket pinched under a housing, a groove cut shallow, and a flare left standing that chewed the gasket. PHOTO

Grooved fittings have a take-out like weld fittings, plus one thing weld pipe does not: a gap at every coupling. The take-out comes out of the maker’s catalogue, not out of a standard, and the gap comes off the same page.

The rule

CUT = TRAVEL − TAKE-OUT − TAKE-OUT − GAP − GAP

The gap is the space the coupling holds between the two pipe ends. On a flexible coupling it can be a quarter inch; on a rigid one it is much less. The catalogue states it for each coupling and size.

Worked — 4" Sch 10, 24" offset, two grooved 45s

  1. Travel = 24 × 1.414 = 33.94".
  2. Take-out: read it off the catalogue page for that 45. Suppose it says 2.00" centre to end. Check it against a fitting from the box.
  3. Gap: suppose the rigid coupling you are using calls for 1/8".
  4. Cut = 33.94 − 2.00 − 2.00 − .125 − .125 = 29.69" → 29-11/16".
What the gap does on a long spool Eight couplings at 1/8" is a full inch. Ignore it and the last spool in a run will not go in. Count every coupling between the fixed points, not just the ones on the offset.
Groove after you cut, not before

The groove has to sit a set distance from the pipe end, and that distance is in the catalogue too. Cut to length first, then groove both ends. Grooving first and trimming after moves the groove and the coupling will not seat (5.2).

Flexible couplings let you roll it

A flexible coupling allows a few degrees of deflection at each joint. On a rolling offset that means the fittings do not have to be clocked perfectly — but it also means a grooved run can sag between hangers. Rigid couplings where the line has to stay straight, flexible where it has to move.

Calculator: pick Grooved on the cut length tab in 13.1 and type the take-out and the coupling gap from the catalogue.

Drainage pipe. Heavy, quiet, and it lasts — which is why it's still specified for soil and waste stacks in commercial buildings long after plastic took over everywhere else.

HUB AND SPIGOT gasket rolled in or lead and oakum NO-HUB shielded band torqued to the stamp
Two systems that look alike on a print. Hub and spigot needs a bell on one end and depends on the gasket; no-hub is plain-end pipe and depends entirely on the coupling torque. No-hub bands are not hand-tight items — the figure is stamped on the shield. Plain ends, square cuts, and the shield does the work.
No-hub
Plain ends, joined with shielded couplings. What you'll run most. Sizes 1-1/2" through 15".
Hub and spigot
Bell on one end, joined with a compression gasket (or, on old work, lead and oakum).
Service weight
Standard wall.
Extra heavy
Thicker wall, used underground and where it's specified.

Laying out cast iron

There's no take-out table the way there is for pressure fittings — you work from the fitting's laying length, which is in CISPI 301's fitting tables and the maker's catalog, and cast into most fittings. Measure the one in your hand against a square, the same way you'd measure a plastic fitting.

CUT = C-TO-C − LAYING LENGTHA − LAYING LENGTHB
Grade first, always

Cast iron is drainage. Every horizontal run is pitched, and the pitch governs the layout before any dimension does. See 7.7 for the fall math — 1/4" per foot on 2-1/2" and smaller, 1/8" per foot on 3" through 6".

Cutting

  • Snap cutter — chain around the pipe, squeeze, clean break. Fast and quiet. Support both sides so the drop doesn't bind.
  • Abrasive saw — cleaner and squarer, and the easiest on extra heavy (a snap cutter rated for it works too). Dusty, so respirator and eye protection.
  • Square ends matter — the coupling gasket seals on the outside of the pipe right at the end. A chewed or angled break won't seal.
  • Never cut near a hub or a fitting — the wall thickness changes there and it'll shatter wrong.

No-hub couplings

  1. Slide the shield onto one pipe. Push the gasket onto the other pipe end until the end seats against the gasket's center stop.
  2. Bring the second pipe (or fitting) into the gasket until it seats against the center stop from the other side. Both ends home, not one.
  3. Slide the shield over the gasket and center it.
  4. Tighten the clamp bands alternately to the torque marked on the coupling.
STANDARD NO-HUB: 60 IN-LB  |  HEAVY DUTY: 80 IN-LB
Use a torque wrench, and read the coupling

These are inch-pounds, not foot-pounds. 60 in-lb is 5 ft-lb — barely anything. Run it up with an impact and you'll strip the band or crush the gasket. Every coupling has its torque stamped on the shield; that number wins over this page.

Hub and spigot

  • Compression gasket into the hub, lubricate, then drive the spigot home with a puller or a wedge. It takes real force — that's normal.
  • Lead and oakum is repair work on existing systems. Oakum packed tight, molten lead poured, then caulked. Don't pour lead into a wet joint — it will explode.
Snap cutter and torque wrenchChain set on a 4" cast iron run ready to squeeze, then a torque wrench on a no-hub band with the stamped figure visible on the shield. PHOTO
EVERY JOINT and within 18" of it 5 FT MAX
Cast iron gets supported at every joint, not just every so many feet, and the coupling never carries load across a hanger. Where the line turns from horizontal to vertical it wants a brace or a thrust block — the weight of a full stack will push a no-hub joint straight off the pipe. A no-hub joint has no pull-out strength to speak of — the pipe does not span, it sits. Support it at every joint and every change of direction, and brace the thrust at every horizontal-to-vertical turn or it will walk itself apart.
The thing that puts cast iron on the floor

No-hub couplings are shear-type joints. They do not resist thrust and they do not hold the pipe in line by themselves. Every change of direction has to be restrained or braced, or the system walks itself apart under flow and weight.

Horizontal

  • Support at every joint, and within 18" of each coupling.
  • Maximum 5 ft between hangers — except 10 ft lengths, which many codes let you support at 10 ft with a hanger at every joint.
  • Support both sides of every fitting where the direction changes.
  • Sway bracing on long horizontal runs so the line can't swing.

Vertical

  • Riser clamp at the base of every stack and at every floor.
  • The base of a stack carries the whole weight above it — that support is structural, not incidental.
  • Restrain the transition at the bottom where the stack turns horizontal. That's the highest thrust point in a drainage system.
Weight adds up fast

Service weight 4" cast iron runs about 8 lb/ft empty. A 10 ft length is about 80 lb before a drop of water goes through it. Rig it and support it like it weighs what it weighs.

  • Impacting the coupling bands. 60 inch-pounds. Use the torque wrench.
  • No restraint at changes of direction. Shear couplings don't hold thrust.
  • One pipe end not bottomed on the gasket stop. Half a joint.
  • Forgetting the grade and laying it flat. Drainage doesn't run on hope.
  • Too much grade. Over about 1/2" per foot the water outruns the solids and the line plugs.
  • Cutting too close to a hub. Shatters wrong.
  • Missing cleanouts — at the base of stacks, at direction changes, and at the intervals your code requires.
  • Vent taken off the side or bottom. Vents come off the top of a horizontal drain, above the centerline, or they fill with waste.
  • Hanging it off plastic-rated hangers. It weighs nearly four times what PVC does.
  • Pouring lead into a wet joint. It flashes to steam and throws molten lead.
Cast iron gone wrongA no-hub band left hand tight, a joint hung so the coupling carries the load, an unbraced horizontal-to-vertical turn, and a cracked hub from a snap cutter set wrong. PHOTO

Cast iron fittings are named by the fraction of a circle they turn — a 1/4 bend is a 90, a 1/8 bend is a 45, a 1/16 bend is a 22-1/2 — and they are dimensioned by laying length, not take-out. The offset math is the same triangle as everything else.

The names

FittingTurns
1/4 bend90°
1/5 bend72° — rare, old stock
1/6 bend60°
1/8 bend45° — the one you offset with
1/16 bend22-1/2°

The rule

CUT = TRAVEL − LAYING LENGTH − LAYING LENGTH

On no-hub, the laying length is centre of the fitting to the end of the fitting, and the pipe butts to it inside the coupling. CISPI 301 lists it for every size and bend, and the maker’s chart repeats it.

Worked — 4" no-hub, 12" offset, two 1/8 bends

  1. Travel = 12 × 1.414 = 16.97".
  2. Laying length of a 4" 1/8 bend: read it from the chart on the box. Suppose it says 3" centre to end.
  3. Cut = 16.97 − 3 − 3 = 10.97" → 11". On drainage nobody cuts a sixteenth; round to the nearest 1/8".
  4. Run = 12" — and on a drain the run is not free: the line has to keep falling through it (7.7).
Grade through the offset At 1/8" per foot (6.1, for 3"–6") the 12" run in that offset needs 1/8" of fall inside it. The travel piece is on the slant anyway, so the fall goes into the run legs either side. Set the downstream fitting 1/8" lower than the upstream one and the offset carries the grade.
Hub and spigot is a different number

Hub-and-spigot pipe seats in the hub and the laying length is measured to the bottom of the hub, not to the end of the fitting. The chart says which. Use a no-hub figure on hub pipe and every piece is short by the hub depth.

Two 1/8 bends, or one 1/4 and a wye?

On sanitary work the offset is often not an offset at all — it is a change of direction with a branch coming in. A 1/4 bend and a combination wye do the job in two fittings and keep the flow sweeping. Look at what is downstream before you reach for the 1/8s.

Calculator: the cut length tab in 13.1 takes any take-out you type — put the laying length in both boxes and pick Weld pipe, which subtracts and adds nothing back.

Every offset, every brace and every grade problem is a right triangle. Learn this one shape and the rest is bookkeeping.

Taught from scratch

This page is the quick version. The sides are named one at a time in 18.8, the three ratios in 18.10, and solving the whole triangle from one side and one angle in 18.12.

90° A = the angle your fitting makes RUN the adjacent side OFFSET (opposite) TRAVEL (hypotenuse)
The copper side is always the one you cut. The other two tell you whether it fits where you are putting it.
c = √(a² + b²)

What the sides are called on the job

Opposite
the offset
Adjacent
the run
Hypotenuse
the travel
Worked Rise 14", roll 9"
√(196 + 81) = √277 = 16.64" = 16-5/8"
One shape, every problem

Step through it

the angle ADJACENT OPPOSITE HYPOTENUSE RUN OFFSET TRAVEL RUN FALL PIPE LENGTH BASE RISE BRACE 9" 14" 16.64" √(14² + 9²) = √277 = 16.64" = 16-5/8" on your tape sin = OPP ÷ HYP cos = ADJ ÷ HYP tan = OPP ÷ ADJ
The full table

Stock fitting angles only. Every half degree from 0 to 90, with cotangents, is 17.8; what the columns mean is 18.10.

sin = OPP÷HYP  cos = ADJ÷HYP  tan = OPP÷ADJ
Anglesincostan
11-1/4°.1951.9808.1989
15°.2588.9659.2679
22-1/2°.3827.9239.4142
30°.5000.8660.5774
45°.7071.70711.0000
60°.8660.50001.7321
67-1/2°.9239.38272.4142
72°.9511.30903.0777
Finding an unknown angle

Divide, then read the table backwards. Offset 12", run 20" → tan = .600, which sits between 30° and 45° — about 31°. If it isn't a stock fitting angle you roll the fitting or re-route. Don't make a 45 do a 31.

This is the field table — the stock angles and nothing else. The full run, every half degree from 0 to 90 with sin, cos, tan and cot, is in 17.8. All the formulas for solving a triangle are in 17.7.

Using the table — a 30° offset Look up 30°: sin .5000, cos .8660, tan .5774.
Offset is 14". Travel = 14 ÷ sin 30 = 14 ÷ .5000 = 28.00"
Run = 14 ÷ tan 30 = 14 ÷ .5774 = 24.25"
Divide to get to the bigger side, multiply to come back. This table carries the angles fittings actually come in — for anything in between, entry 17.8 goes in half degrees the whole way from 0 to 90.

To set a branch square off a main, or a base square to a wall: measure 3 one way, 4 the other. When the diagonal reads 5, it's square.

4 FT 3 FT 5 FT 3 — 4 — 5 and the corner is square. Any multiple works: 6-8-10   9-12-15 12-16-20   15-20-25 Bigger is more accurate. Use the longest that fits. Units do not matter, as long as all three match.
The oldest trick in the trade and still the fastest. Measure 3 one way, 4 the other, and when the diagonal reads exactly 5 the corner is 90°. Scale it up as far as the space allows — a 15-20-25 catches an error a 3-4-5 would hide.
3-4-5  |  6-8-10  |  9-12-15  |  12-16-20

Bigger multiples are more accurate. Use the biggest that fits.

Two more checks

  • Diagonal of a square = side × 1.414
  • A rectangle is square when both diagonals measure the same. Fastest check there is on a support frame or a pump base.
OD OD × 3.1416 the same length, flat YOUR WRAP 6" pipe is 6.625 OD → 6.625 × 3.1416 = 20.81" of wrap
A wrap is nothing but the circumference laid flat. Multiply the outside diameter by 3.1416 — not the nominal size, which on steel pipe is smaller than the real OD on everything up to 12". Cut it a whisker long and trim to fit rather than short. Cut the strip, wrap it, and where the ends meet is square. If they do not meet, your wrap is not square — not the pipe.
CIRCUMFERENCE = OD × 3.1416
AREA = 0.7854 × ID²
SizeODCirc÷4÷16
1/2"0.8402.640.660.165
3/4"1.0503.300.820.206
1"1.3154.131.030.258
1-1/4"1.6605.221.300.326
1-1/2"1.9005.971.490.373
2"2.3757.461.870.466
2-1/2"2.8759.032.260.565
3"3.50011.002.750.687
4"4.50014.143.530.884
6"6.62520.815.201.301
8"8.62527.106.771.694
10"10.75033.778.442.111
12"12.75040.0610.012.503
÷ 4
Quarter marks — four tacks, or clocking a flange.
÷ 16
Station spacing for miter and saddle layout.
Marking around a pipe

Wrap-around or a strip of heavy paper. Overlap the ends and line the edges up with each other before you scribe — that's what makes it square. Then check the line closes back on itself.

The full table

The sixteenths only. The whole tape to 64ths is 17.1, decimals of a foot are 17.2 and 17.3, and turning one into the other by hand is taught in 18.3 and 18.4.

FracDecFracDecFracDec
1/16.06253/8.37511/16.6875
1/8.1257/16.43753/4.750
3/16.18751/2.50013/16.8125
1/4.2509/16.56257/8.875
5/16.31255/8.62515/16.9375
DECIMAL → SIXTEENTHS: × 16, ROUND OFF
Worked .6875 × 16 = 11 → 11/16"
.42 × 16 = 6.7 → round to 7 → 7/16"

Inches to decimal of a foot

InFtInFtInFt
1".0835".4179".750
2".1676".50010".833
3".2507".58311".917
4".3338".66712"1.000

Fractions of a foot: 1/8" = .010', 1/4" = .021', 3/8" = .031', 1/2" = .042', 5/8" = .052', 3/4" = .063', 7/8" = .073'

The full set

Everything to 64ths is in 17.1. The whole decimal-of-a-foot grid is 17.2, and turning a decimal foot back into a mark on a tape — EL 112.79 into 112'-9 1/2" — is 17.3. Millimeters are 17.4.

Tape to calculator and back 9/16 on the tape → 9 ÷ 16 = .5625
.5625 × 16 = 9 → back to 9/16
A number that does not land clean: .59 × 16 = 9.44, so call it 9/16 and you are about 1/32" out — closer than you can cut.
Feet and inches into one number 14'-7-1/2" into inches: (14 × 12) + 7 + .5 = 175.5"
Back again: 175.5 ÷ 12 = 14.625 → 14 ft, and .625 × 12 = 7.5 → 14'-7-1/2"
Do the whole job in inches and convert once at the end. Mixing units mid-problem is where the mistakes live.

Prints run off a datum, usually finished floor called EL 100'-0". Everything else is above or below that.

TOP CL BOP FINISHED FLOOR — EL 100'-0" to CL to BOP THREE WAYS TO CALL THE SAME PIPE
An elevation is a height above a datum — usually the finished floor called 100'-0" so nothing ever goes negative. What it is measured to is the catch: centreline, bottom of pipe or top of steel. Get that wrong on a 12" line and you are half a foot out — and the print will not always tell you which BOP is the one you can actually measure to with a tape. On a sloped drain line BOP is the only one that means anything.
CENTERLINE = BOP + (OD ÷ 2)
Worked 6" pipe, BOP at EL 112'-4". OD 6.625, half = 3.31 = 3-5/16"
CL = EL 112'-7 5/16"

Feet-and-inch math

Don't fight it in feet. Turn it all into inches, do the math, turn it back.

(FEET × 12) + INCHES = TOTAL INCHES
Worked — distance between two elevations EL 12'-6 1/2" → (12×12) + 6.5 = 150.5"
EL 9'-11 3/4" → (9×12) + 11.75 = 119.75"
150.5 − 119.75 = 30.75" → 2'-6 3/4"
Insulated lines

If the print dimensions to the outside of insulation, add the insulation thickness to your OD before you work out the centerline. Two inches of insulation on a 6" line puts the outside at 10-5/8" — that's what has to clear the beam, not the 6.625.

FALL RUN FALL = RUN × GRADE grade in inches per foot 1/4" per ft on a 40 ft run = 10" of fall
Grade is how much the line drops for every foot it runs. Multiply it by the run and you have the total fall — do that first, at the far end, where the headroom runs out. Too little grade and it will not scour; too much and the water outruns the solids. Check clearance under the beam BEFORE you hang the first piece — a drain line that runs out of headroom at the far end is a re-do.
FALL = SLOPE (in/ft) × RUN (ft)
Worked 3" sanitary at 1/4" per ft, 38 ft run
0.25 × 38 = 9-1/2" of fall
Start invert EL 99'-6" → end invert EL 98'-8 1/2"
SlopePercentFall / 10 ft
1/16" / ft0.52%5/8"
1/8" / ft1.04%1-1/4"
1/4" / ft2.08%2-1/2"
1/2" / ft4.17%5"
1" / ft8.33%10"
Common drainage minimums

2-1/2" and smaller: 1/4" per ft. 3" to 6": 1/8" per ft. 8" and up: 1/16" per ft. Local code governs.

Too much grade plugs a line

Past about 1/2" per foot the water runs away and leaves the solids behind. More pitch is not better pitch on a sanitary line.

Steam: pitch mains with the flow, about 1" per 10 ft (specs run from 1/2" to 1-1/4" per 10 ft — check the job spec), with drip legs at every rise, ahead of every control valve, and every 150–200 ft on a straight run. Counterflow needs a lot more — check the spec.

Hot lines grow. Anchor both ends of a long hot run with nowhere for it to go and something gives — a nozzle, a hanger, or a weld.

ANCHOR ANCHOR GUIDE GUIDE THE LOOP TAKES THE GROWTH PIPE GROWS. GIVE IT SOMEWHERE TO GO.
Heat makes pipe longer and nothing stops it — a run held rigid at both ends will bow, tear a branch off, or push a pump out of alignment. Anchor it at a chosen point, guide it so it can only move along its own axis, and put a loop or an offset where the growth can be absorbed. Steel grows about .78" per 100 ft per 100°F. Copper half again as much. PVC about four and a half times steel and CPVC worse. Anchors decide WHERE it grows from. Guides keep it in line so it goes into the loop instead of buckling sideways.
GROWTH (in) = FEET × °F CHANGE × FACTOR ÷ 10,000
MaterialFactor
Carbon steel0.78
Stainless 304/3161.15
Copper1.13
PVC3.60
CPVC4.10
PEX~11

Factor = inches of growth per 100 ft per 100°F.

Worked 200 ft of carbon steel, installed 70°F, running 250°F. Change = 180°
200 × 180 × 0.78 ÷ 10,000 = 2.81" of growth
Where the anchors and guides go is not a field decision

Anchor locations, guide spacing and how big a loop has to be are a pipe stress calculation, and on anything hot, large or connected to rotating equipment they come off a drawing. This entry is here so you understand what you are installing, and so you can spot a run that has been built with nowhere to grow — not so you can lay one out.

Moving an anchor because it is inconvenient changes where all the growth goes, and the load lands on whatever is next in line: a nozzle, a hanger, or a weld.

Where it goes

Anchor
Holds the pipe still. Decides which direction growth travels.
Guide
Keeps the pipe in line but lets it slide through.
Loop
A rectangle of pipe that flexes. Cheap and maintenance-free.
Expansion joint
Bellows or slip type. Compact, but it's a device that can fail.
Cold spring
Pre-stressing the run at installation so it lands neutral when hot. An engineered item with code rules attached — done to a drawing, never by feel.
100 ft 43.3 psi 50 ft 21.7 psi 20 ft 8.7 psi HEAD a column of water HEIGHT PRESSURE FEET × .433 = PSI    PSI × 2.31 = FEET
Static pressure at the bottom of a column of water depends only on how tall the column is. That is why a gauge at the base of a 100 ft riser reads 43 psi with the pump off, and why you subtract the head when you work out what a pump has to make. It is the height that makes the pressure, not the width of the pipe — a 1" riser and a 12" riser of the same height read the same on a gauge at the bottom.
1 PSI = 2.31 FT OF WATER  |  1 FT = 0.433 PSI
Worked A riser 60 ft tall holds 60 × 0.433 = 26 psi at the bottom before the pump even runs.
VELOCITY (ft/s) = 0.408 × GPM ÷ ID²
GAL/FT = ID² × 0.0408
Worked — filling a system 400 ft of 6" Sch 40: 6.065² × .0408 = 1.50 gal/ft
→ 600 gallons = 5,000 lb. Every hanger in before you fill.
8.34 lb
one gallon of water
62.4 lb
one cubic foot of water
7.48 gal
in a cubic foot
231 in³
in a gallon
4–8 ft/s
normal water velocity in steel
5 ft/s max
pump suction, or you invite cavitation
8 ft/s max
copper, cold water — drops to 5 ft/s on hot lines and 2–3 ft/s above 140°F, or it erodes from the inside

An isometric is your pipe drawn on the flat with all three directions showing at once. Nothing on it is to scale. The picture shows you the shape and the order; the numbers are the only truth on the page.

6"-CS-1042-A1 3'-6" EL 112'-6" FIELD WELD 3 N
Every iso in the world carries these same six things: a line number, a north arrow, dimensions, elevations, item balloons tying to the bill of material, and marks showing which welds belong to the field. Find those and you can read a drawing you have never seen before.

Read it in this order, every time

  1. The north arrow. Before anything else. It is the only thing that tells you which way the drawing is pointing in the real building, and it is usually the smallest mark on the sheet.
  2. The line number. Size, service, sequence and spec, all in one string. It governs every fitting you are allowed to put in (7.10b).
  3. The elevations and the datum. Where vertical is measured from, and whether the numbers are to centreline, top or bottom of pipe.
  4. The spool breaks and field welds. Where your shop piece ends and somebody else's problem starts. Find these before you cut anything.
  5. The bill of material. Every balloon on the drawing ties to a line in it. Count the fittings against it before you go to the rack.
  6. The match lines. Where this sheet hands off to the next one, and what that next sheet is called.
Never scale an iso

It is not drawn to scale and it never was. A 40 ft run and a 4 ft run can be the same length on the paper. If a dimension is missing you get it from the other dimensions, or you ask — you do not put a rule on the drawing.

A dimension in a box, underlined, or marked NTS is the drafter telling you the same thing about that particular number.

What is inside

The iso is a cut list waiting to be worked out

Everything an iso gives you is centre to centre. Everything you cut is face to face. The whole job of reading one is turning the first into the second — take-outs off 1.11, gaps and gaskets off 1.3, and the math in 13.1.

An iso and the pipe it describesA real isometric on a clipboard held up in front of the run it draws, so the north arrow, the dimensions and the actual steel can be read together. The single best teaching shot in the book. PHOTO

An isometric is a trick for showing three directions on flat paper. Once you see the trick, every iso you pick up reads the same way.

Flat directions go on the 30° diagonals. Vertical stays vertical. N W S E UP DOWN
Four flat directions on the diagonals, up and down straight through the middle. This is the usual arrangement, not a law — plenty of shops run north the other way. The north arrow on your sheet is what decides it, which is why you find it first.

What that buys you

  • A line drawn up-and-right is horizontal in real life. It is not going uphill. Only a true vertical on the page is a real riser.
  • A 90° elbow looks like a 60° or a 120° corner on the paper. Every angle on an iso is distorted — that is the price of seeing three directions at once.
  • Two legs the same length on the page can be 4 ft and 40 ft. Length on the paper means nothing at all.
  • Equipment, steel and walls get drawn on the same three axes, usually in a lighter line weight, so you can see what your pipe is running past.

Offsets on an iso — the bit that looks wrong

A plain 45° offset in one plane draws cleanly: it sits on the same diagonals as everything else. A rolling offset does not, because it moves in two directions at once, and on an iso it comes out as a line that matches none of the standard axes.

  • It will normally be drawn with a box around it — the rise, the roll and the advance dimensioned as the three sides of a rectangular block, with the pipe as the diagonal through it.
  • That box is the whole problem, already set out for you. Rise and roll give the true offset; the advance is your run. The math is 8.4.
  • If the drawing gives you the travel directly, use it and check it against the box. If it only gives the box, you work the travel out — the calculator in 13.1 does it.
  • A rolled fitting is often called out with a degree off top dead centre instead, which is what you actually set with a wrap and a protractor.
Turn the page, not your head

If a run does not make sense, rotate the sheet until the north arrow points the way you are actually standing. Half of reading an iso is getting your own body lined up with the paper — experienced hands do it without noticing.

Iso north is not site north is not magnetic north

Plants routinely run a plant north that is nothing like true north, because the grid was laid out to suit the site. Everything on the drawings uses plant north, and every column line, gridline and nozzle orientation is stated in it.

Do not correct it with a compass app. Use the grid the job uses.

The line number is the whole identity of your pipe in one string, and the spec it points to is the document that actually decides what you are allowed to put in the ground.

Taking a line number apart

6" – CS – 1042 – A1 – H
PieceWhat it tells you
6"Nominal size. The one number everybody reads and nobody misreads.
CSService or fluid code. CS, CW, HS, IA, N2, P — every job has its own list and it is printed on the legend sheet. It tells you what is going down the pipe and therefore how much it matters.
1042Line sequence number. Unique to this line. It is how the line is tracked through design, fabrication, testing and turnover, and it is what you write on your test package.
A1The piping spec. The most important field on the sheet — see below.
HInsulation or tracing code. H for heat conservation, P for personnel protection, C for cold, T for traced. It changes clearances, hanger types and shoe heights, so it is a fitter's problem, not just an insulator's.

Every company orders these fields differently and some add more. The legend sheet decodes your job's format — find it once at the start and you can read every line number on the project.

The piping spec is the real authority

The spec outranks the drawing

The spec sheet behind that A1 sets the material, the pressure class, which fitting types are allowed at which sizes, valve types, bolting, gaskets, corrosion allowance and the branch table. When the iso and the spec disagree, the spec wins and the drawing gets corrected.

If you are about to put in a fitting the spec does not list — a threaded connection on a welded spec, a slip-on where it calls weld neck — stop. That is an RFI, not a judgement call.

The branch table

Buried in every spec is a grid with run sizes down one side and branch sizes across the top. Where they meet, it tells you what the connection is: a tee, a reducing tee, an olet, or a stub-in.

  • It is the answer to "do I buy a fitting or weld an olet on?" and it is not yours to decide.
  • It changes with size ratio — the same 2" branch may be a reducing tee off a 4" run and an olet off a 12" run.
  • Take-outs for all of them are in 1.11; olet geometry is 1.11g.

The title block

  1. Drawing number and sheet. "Sheet 2 of 4" means there are two more sheets of your line somewhere, and the match lines tell you where they join.
  2. Revision. The single most expensive thing to get wrong. Check the rev against the current issue before you cut — a superseded drawing looks exactly like a current one.
  3. Revision clouds and triangles. A cloud round part of the drawing with a numbered triangle marks what changed at that revision. Read those first on any reissued sheet — they are the only parts that are different.
  4. Scale. On an iso it will say NTS or nothing at all. Believe it.
  5. Approvals and status. "Issued for construction" is what you build from. "Issued for review", "preliminary", "for approval" or an unsigned block is not, however finished it looks.
Photograph the title block

Before you start, take a picture of the title block with your phone. If a question comes up three weeks later about which revision you built to, you have it — and that is worth more than your memory of a Tuesday.

The numbers on an iso are not cut lengths and were never meant to be. They are centre-to-centre distances between working points, and turning them into cut lengths is the job.

What the dimensions measure to

  • Centre to centre, always, unless the drawing says otherwise — working point to working point, the crossings you find by extending centrelines (1.11).
  • Face of flange is the exception, and it will be called out. A dimension to a flange normally lands on the gasket face, so both the flange and the gasket come off your pipe (1.11f).
  • To equipment, dimensions run to the nozzle face or to the equipment centreline — and equipment moves. Never cut a piece to a vessel until somebody has measured the vessel where it actually sits.
  • A boxed or underlined number is not to scale. Trust the number, ignore the picture.

Elevations

You seeIt means
CL or ₨Centreline of pipe. The default on most process piping.
BOPBottom of pipe. Standard on anything graded, on drainage, and wherever the pipe sits on a support. It is the number a fitter can actually measure to from steel.
TOPTop of pipe. Less common, used where headroom or a clash governs.
BOS / TOSBottom or top of steel — a structural elevation, not a pipe one. Your support height is the difference between the two.
EL 100'-0"The datum. Rarely real sea level — it is a made-up round number the whole site is measured from, and every other elevation hangs off it.
CL and BOP are not the same by half a pipe

An elevation given as CL and built to BOP is out by half the outside diameter — 4-5/16" on a 8" line, 6-3/8" on a 12". It is one of those errors that looks fine in the rack and shows up at a nozzle.

Read which one the sheet says, every time. The abbreviation is three letters and it is easy to skim past. Elevation math is 7.6.

Where your piece ends

  1. Find the field welds first. A flag on the weld symbol (1.17c), a pair of slashes across the pipe, or a note — every drafting office marks them differently and every one of them marks them. That is your spool boundary.
  2. Find the field fit pieces. Often marked FFL, FIELD FIT or a dimension in brackets. That piece ships long on purpose — usually by 6" to 12" — and gets cut to suit on site. Cutting an FFL piece to the printed dimension defeats the whole point.
  3. Find the match lines. Where your sheet stops and the next begins. Check the continuation number actually exists before you assume the run ends.
  4. Count the spools. Break the iso into the pieces that will physically get built, and check each one will fit through a door, onto a truck and round the corner it has to go round. A spool that cannot be delivered is scrap.

Chained dimensions and the overall

Add the chain up and check it against the overall

Most isos give you a string of dimensions along a run and an overall across the lot. Add the string. It must equal the overall.

When it does not, you have found a drawing error before it became a cut error, and that is an RFI worth writing (7.10e). Do this on every sheet — it takes a minute and it catches the expensive ones.

Worked — iso dimension to cut length Iso says 12'-4" centre to centre, 6" line, LR 90 at one end, weld neck flange at the other.
12'-4" = 148.00"
Less the 6" LR 90 take-out: 148.00 − 9.00 = 139.00"
Less the 6" Class 150 weld neck: 139.00 − 3.50 = 135.50"
Shop holds true dimensions, two 1/8" gaps: 135-1/2 − 1/4 = 135-1/4"
The iso never told you 135-1/4". It told you 12'-4", and everything after that was yours.

The iso tells you how to build one line. It does not tell you where that line sits in the building, what it does, or what it runs past. That is four other drawings, and each one answers a different question.

DrawingWhat it answers
PlanLooking straight down. Where things are in the footprint — column lines, equipment, the route your rack takes. Drawn to scale, so you can take rough distances off it when an iso will not tell you.
ElevationLooking horizontally. How high everything is — rack tiers, platform levels, nozzle heights, headroom.
SectionA slice through the plan, marked on the plan by a cut line with arrows. What it looks like at that one place — the drawing to reach for when a plan and an elevation still leave you guessing.
General arrangement (GA)The whole area at once, lightly detailed. Good for orientation and for finding which detail sheet you actually need.
P&IDWhat the system does. Every line, valve, instrument and piece of equipment, with the line numbers and the direction of flow. See below.
Equipment / nozzle orientationThe vendor's drawing of a vessel, pump or exchanger, with every nozzle's size, rating, projection and clock position. The only trustworthy source for where a nozzle actually points.
Structural steelWhat your supports land on. Member sizes, elevations, and whether you are allowed to weld to it — often you are not.

P&IDs — what they are and are not

A piping and instrumentation diagram is a schematic. It shows how the system is connected and what is in it, drawn in whatever arrangement fits the page.

  • It tells you: every line number and its service, every valve and its type, every instrument and its tag, every piece of equipment, direction of flow, where the spec changes along a line, and what is normally open or closed.
  • It does not tell you: where anything is, how long anything is, what elevation anything sits at, or what route the pipe takes. There is no geometry on a P&ID at all.
  • The spec break is worth finding — a small mark on the line where the piping spec changes, often at a flange. Fittings on one side of it are not allowed on the other.
  • Instrument bubbles carry a letter code and a tag number. The first letter is what it measures — P pressure, T temperature, F flow, L level — and the rest is what it does with it.
  • The legend sheet decodes every symbol on the job. It is usually P&ID sheet 1 and it is the most useful page in the set.
The P&ID is how you check your own work

Before a line goes in, run your finger along it on the P&ID and count the valves, the instruments and the reducers. Then count what is on your iso. They have to agree. When they do not, one of the two drawings is out of date and you have found it before it cost anybody a cut-out.

Which one to reach for

QuestionDrawing
How long do I cut this?Iso
Where does this line run?Plan
How high off the deck?Elevation, then the iso's EL
What does this valve do?P&ID
Which way does that nozzle face?Nozzle orientation drawing
Can I hang off this beam?Structural — and ask
Tee or olet on this branch?The piping spec's branch table (7.10b)

The drawing you were handed says what somebody intended. The drawing you turn in says what is actually in the ground. The gap between those two is the most valuable thing a fitter produces all day, and almost nobody records it properly.

Mark it up as you go, not at the end

  1. Red pen, on the paper, the moment it happens. Not at the end of the shift, not from memory in the truck. If you took a field dimension, it goes on the sheet before you cut to it.
  2. Write down every dimension you took yourself. Where the drawing was blank, or wrong, or you had to measure the real steel — that number is now the record.
  3. Cross out what changed and write what it became. Do not erase. Somebody needs to see that it changed, not just what it ended up as.
  4. Note where the spools actually broke. Field welds move. If you cut a piece somewhere the drawing did not show, that break is now real and it belongs on the sheet.
  5. Date and initial it. Every mark-up. It is thirty seconds and it is what makes the sheet evidence rather than graffiti.

What has to get recorded

  • Every field dimension you took and cut to.
  • Every deviation from the drawing, and who authorised it. "Foreman said" is not a record — get the name and the date on the paper.
  • Fittings added or left out, including anything substituted because the right one was not in the rack.
  • Valve orientations and handwheel positions where you set them, especially where you had to turn one to clear something.
  • Support locations that ended up somewhere other than the drawing showed.
  • Anything left incomplete — a joint not welded, a bolt-up not torqued, a piece waiting on material. That is the punch list, and it is cheaper to write it than to find it at turnover.

RFIs — when the drawing cannot be built

Ask in writing, and ask early

A request for information is what you raise when the drawing is wrong, contradictory, impossible, or clashes with something already in the ground. It is not a complaint and it is not an admission that you cannot read a print.

A good one is short and specific: the drawing number and revision, the line number, exactly what the conflict is, what you measured, and what you think the answer might be. A photograph attached settles most of them the same day.

Raise it before you cut, not after. An RFI on an uncut piece of pipe is a question. An RFI on a welded spool is a change order.

Do not fix a drawing error quietly

When something does not fit and you make it fit, the drawing is now wrong and nobody knows. The next crew tying into your line works off the same bad sheet, and the error compounds.

Two minutes of red pen prevents that. The drawing is only as good as the last person who told the truth on it.

Before you hand it in

  1. Photograph every marked-up sheet. Paper gets lost, rained on and thrown away. A photo on your phone has settled more arguments than any other habit in this book.
  2. Check the chain still adds up with your marked dimensions in it. If the mark-ups do not close, you have a second error somewhere.
  3. Turn it in to whoever owns the document control, not into a gang box. An as-built in a gang box is not an as-built.
  4. Keep your own copy until the line is tested and turned over.
Who this is really for

Somebody is going to tie into your line in five years, in the dark, on a shutdown, with the plant losing money every hour it is down. The only thing standing between that hand and a very bad night is whether you wrote down what you actually built.

It is the same reason you want a good as-built when you are the one on the shutdown. It goes around.

Three numbers that chase each other: how much water is moving, how fast it is going, and how big the pipe is. Fix any two and the third is settled. Engineers size pipe; a fitter needs to be able to sanity-check what he is handed and know when something looks wrong.

VELOCITY (ft/s) = 0.408 × GPM ÷ ID²
GPM = VELOCITY × ID² ÷ 0.408

ID in inches, and it is the real inside diameter off the pipe table in 1.12, not the nominal size. On 2" Sch 40 the difference between 2.000 and 2.067 is 7% of the answer.

Worked — is 150 gpm too much for a 3" line? 3" Sch 40 ID = 3.068"
3.068² = 9.41
0.408 × 150 = 61.2
61.2 ÷ 9.41 = 6.5 ft/s
Inside the normal 4–8 ft/s band, so yes — that works. On the high side, so expect to hear it.
Worked the other way — what will a 4" line carry? 4" Sch 40 ID = 4.026", so ID² = 16.21
At a comfortable 6 ft/s: 6 × 16.21 ÷ 0.408 = 238 gpm
At the 8 ft/s limit: 8 × 16.21 ÷ 0.408 = 318 gpm
So a 4" line is good for roughly 240 gpm all day, 320 if you are prepared to live with it.

Roughly what each size carries

SizeID4 ft/s6 ft/s8 ft/s
1/2"0.622468
3/4"0.82471013
1"1.049111622
1-1/4"1.380192837
1-1/2"1.610253851
2"2.067426384
2-1/2"2.4696090120
3"3.06892138185
4"4.026159238318
5"5.047250375499
6"6.065361541721
8"7.9816249371,249
10"10.0209841,4761,969
12"11.9381,3972,0962,794

GPM, schedule 40 steel, computed from the formula above — not a design table. Pipe sizing is the engineer's, and the numbers on your drawing govern. This is here so you can tell whether what you are installing is in the right ballpark.

The velocity limits, and why they exist

LimitWhy
4–8 ft/sNormal band for water in steel. Below 4 it will not carry air or dirt along; above 8 it gets loud and starts wearing the pipe.
5 ft/s maxPump suction. Go faster and the pressure at the eye of the impeller drops enough to flash the water to vapour — that is cavitation, and it destroys pumps.
8 ft/s maxCopper, cold. Faster than that and it erodes from the inside, thinning the wall at every elbow.
5 ft/s maxCopper, hot (2–3 ft/s above 140°F). Hot water is far more aggressive — this is why hot recirculation lines fail at the fittings first.
10 ft/sAbout the practical ceiling anywhere. Past this you get noise you can hear through a wall.
A size down is not a small change

Flow capacity goes with the square of the diameter, so dropping one size takes out far more than it looks. A 4" line at 6 ft/s carries 238 gpm; a 3" at the same speed carries 138. You just lost 42% of the flow to save an inch of pipe.

Push the same 238 gpm through that 3" and the velocity goes to 10.3 ft/s — noisy, erosive, and hard on everything downstream. If somebody asks you to substitute a size because that is what is on the truck, that is an engineering change, not a field call.

The sanity check you can do in your head

2" is about 60 gpm. 4" is about 240. 6" is about 540. Each of those is roughly the 6 ft/s figure. Doubling the size roughly quadruples the flow.

If a print has 500 gpm going through a 3" line, something is wrong with the print and you should ask before you hang it.

Head, static pressure and the psi-per-foot conversions are 7.9. Weights and gal/ft are 16.12.

How much is in it. You need this to fill a system, to flush it, to know what a test will weigh, to size a drain-down drum, and to tell a crane operator the truth about a vessel.

The whole thing in three formulas

PIPE: GAL/FT = ID² × 0.0408
CYLINDER: GAL = D² × L × 0.0034  (D, L in inches)
BOX: GAL = L × W × H ÷ 231  (all in inches)

Every one of these is the same thing — area times length, converted to gallons. Use whichever shape you are looking at.

The constants everything is built from

ConstantWhat it is
231 in³One gallon
7.48 galOne cubic foot
1,728 in³One cubic foot
8.34 lbOne gallon of water
62.4 lbOne cubic foot of water
0.0408ID² → gallons per foot of pipe
0.0034D² × L in inches → gallons
Worked — filling a 6" line 400 ft of 6" Sch 40, ID 6.065"
6.065² = 36.78
36.78 × 0.0408 = 1.50 gal/ft
400 × 1.50 = 600 gallons
600 × 8.34 = 5,004 lb of water in a line that weighs about 7,600 lb empty. Every hanger in before the fill valve opens.
Worked — a horizontal tank Tank 48" diameter, 10 ft long.
L = 10 × 12 = 120"
48² = 2,304
2,304 × 120 × 0.0034 = 940 gallons
940 × 8.34 = 7,840 lb of water. Add the shell and that is a serious pick — rigging weights are 25.7.
Worked — a rectangular sump 4 ft × 3 ft × 2 ft deep → 48 × 36 × 24 = 41,472 in³
41,472 ÷ 231 = 180 gallons
The cubic-foot way: 4 × 3 × 2 = 24 ft³, and 24 × 7.48 = 180 gallons ✓
Two routes, same answer — which is how you check yourself.

Fill and drain time

MINUTES = GALLONS ÷ GPM
Worked 600 gallon system, filling at 40 gpm:
600 ÷ 40 = 15 minutes
Useful on a hydro, when somebody wants to know how long before you are up to pressure and whether anyone has time to go anywhere.
Partly full is not proportional

A horizontal cylinder half full is exactly half its volume — but a quarter of the way up is not a quarter of the volume, because the cross-section is a circle. At 25% of the depth a horizontal tank holds about 20%.

Vertical tanks behave themselves: depth and volume track straight. If you need partial volumes in a horizontal tank properly, that is a chart from the tank maker, not math in your head.

Volume is what makes a test dangerous

The reason a pneumatic test is treated so differently from a hydro is entirely about volume. Water barely compresses, so a failure dumps its energy and stops. Compressed gas stores energy through the whole volume, and all of it comes out at once.

So on anything pneumatic, the volume is not trivia — it is the size of the hazard. See 11.2.

Area and volume of other shapes, including cones and polygons, are worked step by step in 18.27.

The line has to move over. You put in two fittings of the same angle with a sloped piece between them. That's an offset, and it has exactly three numbers.

RUN OFFSET TRAVEL 45° ell
The travel is the piece you cut. The offset and the run tell you whether it fits where you're putting it.
Offset
How far the line moves over. You usually know this from the print or the tape.
Travel
The sloped piece, center of fitting to center of fitting. This is what you're solving for.
Run
How far forward the line goes while it's moving over. Check this against your space.
Why the run matters

Everybody solves for travel and forgets the run. The run is what puts your fitting in the middle of a hanger or through a beam. Check it before you cut.

The offset math is the same for every material. Only the take-outs change — go to your material's section for those.

Three steps. That's the whole thing.

Taught from scratch

The same three steps, worked slowly with the reasons, are 18.17. The multipliers here come from the ratios in 18.10.

45° OFFSET the only thing you measure RUN TRAVEL MEASURE THE OFFSET. EVERYTHING ELSE IS A MULTIPLY. 1 offset × 1.414 = travel (centre to centre) 2 travel − two take-outs − two gaps = cut 3 offset × 1.000 = run, so you know where it lands
The whole job in three steps. You measure one thing — the offset — and the constant does the rest. Take out the two fitting take-outs (and the two root gaps, if your welder holds them — 18.14) and what is left is the piece you cut. At 45° the run equals the offset, which tells you where the far end lands.
  1. Measure the offset — how far the line has to move.
  2. Travel = offset × constant for your fitting angle.
  3. Cut = travel − take-outs — using your material's rule.
45°: TRAVEL = OFFSET × 1.414
Worked — 2" weld pipe 18" offset, 45°, take-out 1.38 each end
Travel = 18 × 1.4142 = 25.46" = 25-7/16" C-to-C
Cut = 25.46 − 1.38 − 1.38 = 22.70" = 22-11/16"
A 45° offset, start to finish

Step through it

18" offset 45° run 18" — same as the offset TRAVEL 25.46" 18 × 1.4142 = 25.46" 1.38 1.38 2" LR 45 take-out = 1.38 each end 25.46 − 1.38 − 1.38 = 22.70" CUT 22-11/16"
Same offset, 2" screw pipe Travel = 25.46" C-to-C, same as above
2" threaded 45 net = 0.93"
Cut = 25.46 − 0.93 − 0.93 = 23.60" = 23-5/8"
At 45° the run equals the offset

18" offset means the line also moves 18" forward. That one fact saves you a calculation every single time.

ANGLE OFFSET RUN TRAVEL OFFSET × (travel constant) = TRAVEL OFFSET × (run constant) = RUN 45° 1.414 / 1.000 30° 2.000 / 1.732 22-1/2° 2.613 / 2.414 60° 1.155 / .577 EVERY CONSTANT STARTS FROM THE OFFSET
The constants are only 1 ÷ sin and 1 ÷ tan written out so you do not have to press the keys. Both of them multiply the offset — that is the part people get backwards. Measure the offset, pick the row for your angle, and multiply twice. The two figures in each row are the travel constant and the run constant, in that order.
FittingTravel = Off×Run = Off×Off = Trav×
5-5/8°10.2010.15.098
11-1/4°5.1265.027.195
22-1/2°2.6132.414.383
30°2.0001.732.500
45°1.4141.000.707
60°1.155.577.866
72°1.051.325.951

Which column

Column 2
The one you use. Travel = offset × this.
Column 3
How much room the offset eats going down the line.
Column 4
Backwards — you know the travel, you want the offset.
Picking an angle

Short on room? Use a bigger angle — a 60° makes the same jump in about half the run.
Flow-sensitive line? Use a smaller angle. A 22-1/2° takes 2.4 times the run but is much easier on the water. That's why you see them on pump suctions.

Copper and plastic 45s are the common stock angles. 22-1/2° and 11-1/4° are readily available in weld, grooved and cast iron; less so in copper and threaded.

The line has to move two ways at once — up and over. It looks like a 3-D problem. It isn't. You flatten it into one number first, then it's an ordinary offset.

Taught from scratch

Where the true offset comes from and why the roll disappears into one number: 18.21. Odd angles and the angle of turn: 18.22.

ROLL RISE TRUE OFFSET FROM TO
Looking down the pipe: the true offset is the straight-line diagonal from where the pipe is to where it has to go.
  1. True offset = √(rise² + roll²)
  2. Travel = true offset × constant
  3. Run = true offset × run constant
  4. Cut = travel − take-outs
Worked — 45°, 3" weld pipe, rise 14", roll 9" 1. √(196+81) = √277 = 16.643" true offset
2. 16.643 × 1.4142 = 23.54" travel
3. 16.64 × 1.000 = 16.64" run
4. 23.54 − 2.00 − 2.00 = 19.54" = 19-9/16"
Check it before you cut

Chalk the rise and the roll on the deck and measure the diagonal between them. If the chalk doesn't agree with your math, your math is wrong. Two minutes of chalk beats an hour of rework.

The classic screw-up

Using the rise alone as the offset and forgetting the roll. You'll cut short every time and swear the print is wrong. If a rolling offset won't come out, you forgot to square-root — or you swapped rise and roll when you worked the turn, and rolled the fittings to the wrong mark.

Rolling the fittings

The travel piece is a plain square cut. The roll comes from rotating both fittings around the pipe, not from an angled cut.

ROTATION: the angle whose tan = ROLL ÷ RISE
Worked 9 ÷ 14 = .643 → about 33° off vertical. Mark it before you tack.
Field-calculating a rolling offset

Field video

Real footage, filmed on the jobTaking rise and roll off a real field joint, rolling both fittings to the mark, and proving it before it gets welded out. SOON

Shot in the field on a joint that has to close. The step-through walkthrough below is built into the book and works with no signal at all.

Now see why it works

ROLL RISE ADVANCE TRUE OFF TRAVEL up AND over — but it is not a 3-D problem ROLL RISE STAND AT THE END. LOOK DOWN THE PIPE. two sides of a rectangle — nothing more 9" 14" TRUE OFFSET 16.64" √(14² + 9²) = √277 = 16.643" 45° RUN 16.64" TRUE OFFSET 16.64" TRAVEL 23.54" 16.643 × 1.4142 = 23.54" travel TRAVEL 23.54" CUT 19-9/16" 2.00 2.00 T/O T/O SQUARE CUT — BOTH ENDS 23.54 − 2.00 − 2.00 = 19.54" = 19-9/16" LOOKING DOWN THE BORE TOP 33° tan⁻¹(9 ÷ 14) = 33° OFF TOP the roll is a rotation, not an angled cut

Two or more lines side by side that offset together and have to keep their spacing. Put the fittings at the same station and the lines squeeze together through the travel and come out crooked. You stagger them.

starts staggered — inside line first SAME SPREAD before the offset and after it — the copper is the spread EQUAL SPREAD THROUGH AN OFFSET
A bank of lines offsetting together. Every travel piece is the same length — the spacing does not change through the offset, so nothing needs working out twice. The only thing that moves is where each line starts its offset, staggered by spread × tan(half the angle) so they stay side by side — the line on the inside of the first turn starts first. All three travel pieces are the same length, and all three are cut the same. What changes is only where each one starts: stagger the starts and the bank stays parallel.
STAGGER = SPREAD × tan(half the angle)
AngleStagger = spread ×
22-1/2°.1989
30°.2679
45°.4142
60°.5774
Worked Lines 10" apart, 45° offset
10 × .4142 = 4-1/8" of stagger
Two things that make this easy

All the travel pieces are the same length. Cut them off one measurement.
The line on the inside of the first turn breaks first — its fittings sit upstream by the stagger, at both turns. Stagger the second set of fittings the same amount and the spread comes back out dead even.

IN THE WAY the piece "A 45 AND A PIECE"
The everyday dodge: 45 up, a straight piece across the top, 45 back down. Both angled pieces are the same length so there is only one calculation. The piece over the top is what you set by eye to clear whatever is in the way — plus insulation, plus room to get a wrench on it. Four fittings, two travels, one straight piece over the top — work one and cut two.
Room to work
Straight 45° offset. Done.
Run is limited
Check run = offset × run constant against your space. If 45° won't fit, step up to 60°.
Obstacle right at a fitting
45 and a piece — one 45 to clear it, a short nipple, another 45 to come back. Usually faster and cleaner than fighting a 90 into a tight spot.
Neither end moves
Fixed travel, fixed offset. Work backwards: offset ÷ travel = the sine of the angle you need.
Before you cut

If the angle you need isn't a stock fitting, you're into a miter or a re-route. Tell the foreman before you cut, not after.

Watch the other trades

Before you commit to a route, look at what's coming — duct, tray, conduit and sprinkler all want the same ceiling. The offset that clears today's obstacle can be the one that blocks somebody else tomorrow, and then it's yours to move.

Travel (center to center) for common offsets at 45°. Subtract your take-outs from these.

OffsetTravelOffsetTravel
2"2-13/16"18"25-7/16"
3"4-1/4"20"28-5/16"
4"5-11/16"22"31-1/8"
5"7-1/16"24"33-15/16"
6"8-1/2"26"36-3/4"
7"9-7/8"28"39-5/8"
8"11-5/16"30"42-7/16"
9"12-3/4"32"45-1/4"
10"14-1/8"34"48-1/16"
11"15-9/16"36"50-15/16"
12"17"40"56-9/16"
14"19-13/16"44"62-1/4"
16"22-5/8"48"67-7/8"

At 45° the run equals the offset, so the left column is also your advance. For any other angle use the constants in 8.3 or the calculator in 13.1.

Using the cut sheet Find your offset, read the travel beside it.
Then take off the two take-outs and the two gaps — the sheet gives centre to centre, never the cut length.
8" offset at 45°: travel 11.31". Two 2" 45s at 1.38 each (entry 1.11) and two 1/16" gaps:
11.31 − 1.38 − 1.38 − 1/16 − 1/16 = 8.43" = 8-7/16"

Common maximums for water service. Your code and spec govern — fire protection, gas and steam all have their own rules.

SPACING IS SET BY THE MATERIAL, NOT THE SIZE ALONE sag between hangers SPACING
Spacing is what keeps a line from sagging between supports — and sag is what breaks pitch on a drain and pockets condensate on steam. The tables differ by material because stiffness does: the same 2" span that is fine in steel will belly in CPVC. Steel spans furthest. Copper needs closer. Plastic needs closest of all, and closer again when it is hot. Every material has its own table — use the one for what you are actually hanging. A hanger at every change of direction and every concentrated load (valve, strainer, flange) no matter what the table says.
SizeSteel
SP-58
Copper
SP-58
PVC
IPC
CPVC
hot
Rod
SP-58
1/2"7 ft5 ft4 ft3 ft3/8"
3/4"7 ft5 ft4 ft3 ft3/8"
1"7 ft6 ft4 ft3 ft3/8"
1-1/4"7 ft7 ft4 ft3 ft3/8"
1-1/2"9 ft8 ft4 ft3 ft3/8"
2"10 ft8 ft4 ft3 ft3/8"
2-1/2"11 ft9 ft4 ft4 ft1/2"
3"12 ft10 ft4 ft4 ft1/2"
4"14 ft12 ft4 ft4 ft5/8"
6"17 ft14 ft4 ft4 ft3/4"
8"19 ft16 ft4 ft—7/8"
10"22 ft18 ft——7/8"
12"23 ft19 ft——7/8"

Steel and copper: MSS SP-58, water service (ASME B31.1 Table 121.5 gives the same steel spans). PVC: IPC Table 308.5 — 4 ft at every size; the maker's table allows more when cold, much less when hot. CPVC hot: typical for hot-water CPVC; spans shrink as the temperature climbs, so the maker's temperature table governs (IPC allows 3 ft to 1" and 4 ft above for ordinary service). Rod: MSS SP-58 minimum for one rod on steel pipe. Plumbing jobs: the IPC (Table 308.5) and UPC (Table 313.3) cap steel and copper at 12 ft and 10 ft respectively, whatever SP-58 allows — the code on the permit governs.

Cast iron
Every joint, 5 ft max — or 10 ft for 10-ft lengths with a hanger at every joint.
PEX
32" max at 1" and smaller, 4 ft at 1-1/4" and up (IPC Table 308.5). Hot runs sag between hangers — continuous support channel keeps them straight.
Glass / lined
Per the manufacturer, always closer than you'd think.
The plumbing code has its own table

The steel and copper columns are MSS SP-58 mechanical-piping practice. Where the plumbing code applies, IPC Table 308.5 sets its own limits: PVC 4 ft at every size, copper tube 6 ft at 1-1/4" and smaller and 10 ft at 1-1/2" and up, steel pipe 12 ft. Which one is tighter depends on the size — the code from 4" up and on 1-1/4" copper; SP-58 on steel under 3" and on copper 1/2"–3/4" and 1-1/2"–2-1/2". UPC Table 313.3 is different again.

Use the tighter of the two at every size. Hot lines go closer again. Find out which code your job is built to before you set the first hanger.

Rules that beat the table

  • Hang within a couple of feet of every change in direction.
  • Hang at every concentrated load — valve, flange pair, strainer, meter. The table assumes straight pipe with nothing on it.
  • Never hang off another trade's work — no duct, no tray, no conduit, no sprinkler. Structure only.
  • Dielectric isolation where copper touches steel.
  • Shield or saddle at every hanger on insulated line.
Leave them a flat loose

Don't final the hangers until the line is complete and tested. Tightening as you go pulls a line out of grade and out of line.

Clevis
The standard workhorse for a single line off a rod.
Trapeze
A channel across two rods. Carries several lines at once and lets you space them properly.
Roller
Lets the pipe move axially. Hot lines that grow.
Riser clamp
Carries a vertical line at the floor. Every floor on a stack.
Spring hanger
Where the pipe moves vertically and still has to be supported through the movement.
Anchor
Holds the pipe rigidly. Not a hanger. Decides where expansion goes.
Guide
Holds the line laterally but lets it slide. Works with the anchor.
Anchors and guides are engineered

They're on the drawing in a specific place for a specific reason. Moving one because it's inconvenient changes where all the expansion goes and can load a nozzle or a building member that was never meant to see it. If it can't go where it's drawn, that's a question for the engineer.

Getting it right

  • Rod size from the table in 9.1, and check the attachment is rated for the load too — the rod is often not the weak link.
  • Insulated lines: shield at minimum, a proper saddle on anything heavy or cold. A clevis on bare insulation crushes it and you get condensation and rot.
  • Cold lines get a vapor-barrier-safe support — an insulated pipe support block, not a bare clamp that bridges the barrier.
  • Leave room to insulate. Nothing is more frustrating than a perfectly hung line the insulators can't get around.
The hanger familyClevis, roller, trapeze and riser clamp, plus an insulated line on a shield and one crushing its insulation. PHOTO

Rigging is the part of this trade that kills people fastest, and it doesn't give second chances. This section gives you basic to intermediate knowledge, so you understand what a rig is doing and why, and you can tell when one looks wrong. It does not qualify you to rig anything.

Read this before any page in this section

Field Fitter is a reference, not training, and not a lift plan. Rigging and signalling must be done by people who are trained and qualified for that work, and certified wherever your employer, the site owner, the state or the job requires it.

Nothing in this section authorises you to rig, signal or direct a lift. Pipelogic LLC and Field Fitter take no responsibility for any lift, rig, sling, hitch, load or outcome. That responsibility sits with the qualified rigger, the lift plan, your employer's program and the equipment manufacturer. Where any of those say something different from this book, they win, every time.

Using this section means you accept that. The full disclaimer is in 20.8.

Qualified and certified are not the same thing

Qualified
OSHA's word. It means someone who, by a recognised certificate or professional standing, or by extensive knowledge, training and experience, has shown they can solve problems in that work (29 CFR 1926.32(m)). Your employer decides who is qualified and should be able to show how they decided.
Certified
You passed a third-party written and practical exam and hold a card, for example NCCCO Rigger Level I or Level II, NCCCO Signalperson, or the NCCER rigger and signal person credentials. Many sites, owners and union agreements require the card, whatever OSHA's minimum is.

When the rules say it has to be a qualified person

These are OSHA's construction crane rules (29 CFR 1926 Subpart CC), in general terms:

  • Hooking, unhooking or guiding a load, or making the first connection to a structure, while anyone is in the fall zone: the load has to be rigged by a qualified rigger (1926.1425).
  • Rigging during crane assembly and disassembly: qualified rigger (1926.1404).
  • Giving signals to a crane operator: a qualified signal person, with the qualification documented (1926.1428).
  • Slings and rigging hardware themselves: 1926.251 in construction, 1910.184 in general industry, with ASME B30.9 (slings), B30.10 (hooks), B30.16 (chain falls), B30.21 (come-alongs), B30.20 (below-the-hook devices) and B30.26 (hardware) behind them.

Rules are revised. These are summaries as of this edition, not the text of the rule. Your safety department has the current version.

What this section is good for

  • Understanding why the rigger set it up that way.
  • Checking a rig, a sling tag or a sling angle before you stand anywhere near it.
  • Knowing which questions to ask, and when to say stop.
  • Studying for a rigging card, alongside a real course.

It is not good for planning a lift, rating an attachment point, deciding a lift isn't critical, or talking yourself into a pick you aren't sure of.

Anybody can stop a lift

The crane operator has to obey a stop or emergency stop signal no matter who gives it (1926.1417). If something looks wrong, stop it. Nobody who knows rigging will hold it against you. The people who get hurt are the ones who saw it and said nothing.

Get the card anyway

Even where it isn't required, a rigging and signal person card is worth having. Ask your employer, your hall or your apprenticeship about NCCCO Rigger Level I and Signalperson, or the NCCER modules. The Test Prep section covers how those tests work.

The same questions before every lift, big or small. If you can't answer one of them, the pick waits until you can.

  1. Who is in charge? Who is the qualified rigger for this lift, and who is the one signal person? Name them out loud.
  2. What does it weigh? A number, not "about a ton". Include the rigging, and any water or product still inside (25.7).
  3. Where is the centre of gravity? Is the hook going to be right over it (25.8)?
  4. Is everything rated for it, in this hitch and at this angle? Tags readable, sling angle worked out (25.3), choker and wrap derating applied (25.5).
  5. Inspected today, in your hands? Slings, shackles, hooks and latches (25.6).
  6. What is it hanging from? Is the crane, hoist, beam clamp, trolley or structure rated, and did somebody qualified say so?
  7. Softeners on every edge?
  8. What's overhead? Power lines, other trades, lights, sprinkler pipe (25.18).
  9. Where does it land? Is the landing spot clear, with dunnage or blocking ready?
  10. Where are the people? Is the fall zone barricaded, tag lines on, nobody under it or between it and anything solid?
  11. Are the signals agreed? Hand or radio? Radio checked? Everybody knows the stop signal?
  12. Weather? Is the wind under the site limit? Any lightning in the area?
  13. Trial lift. Take it up an inch, stop and look, before it goes anywhere.
If it's a critical lift, this isn't enough

A lift near the crane's capacity, a lift with two cranes or two hoists, a lift over people or live lines, or anything unusual needs a written lift plan from a qualified person. This list doesn't replace it (25.11).

A sling at an angle carries more than its share. The flatter it gets, the worse it gets — and it gets bad fast.

TENSION PER LEG = (LOAD ÷ LEGS) × FACTOR
Angle from horizontalFactor
90° vertical1.000
75°1.035
60°1.155
45°1.414
30°2.000

No protractor? Factor = sling length ÷ height, measured straight up from the pick point to the hook. A 10 ft sling with the hook 5 ft above the pick points: 10 ÷ 5 = 2.000 — that is 30°, the limit.

Worked — why you don't rig flat 2,000 lb spool, two legs at 30°
(2000 ÷ 2) × 2.000 = 2,000 lb in each leg
Each sling is carrying the entire load.
Three and four leg bridles — divide by TWO, not by four

The formula above divides by the number of legs, and that is right for two. It is not right for three or four.

On a rigid load, manufacturing tolerance and the shape of the load mean you cannot get all four legs taking an equal share — two of them end up carrying and the others are along for the ride. So on a three or four leg bridle, work it out as though only two legs are carrying the whole load, unless a qualified person has analysed the lift and says otherwise.

Divide a 4,000 lb load by four and you have sized every sling at half what it may actually see.

Hard limit

Never rig below 30° from horizontal. ASME B30.9 allows it only when the sling maker or a qualified person has signed off on it. At 15° each leg sees nearly four times the share. Read the tag — if it's unreadable, the sling is out of service.

Watch the tension climb

A 2,000 lb spool on two legs

2,000 LB 60° 45° 30° 20° 1,155 LB PER LEGfactor 1.155 1,414 LB PER LEGfactor 1.414 2,000 LB PER LEGfactor 2.000 — the whole load, in each leg 2,924 LB PER LEGfactor 2.924 — and nobody rated it for that NEVER BELOW 30° FROM HORIZONTAL

Four kinds of sling, three ways to hitch them, and a box of hardware that all looks interchangeable and is not. The tag on the sling is the law — everything here is so you understand what the tag is telling you.

THREE HITCHES, THREE DIFFERENT CAPACITIES VERTICAL 100% of rated CHOKER about 75–80% BASKET 2× if legs vertical
The same sling, three ways, three capacities. A basket only earns its 2× with the legs straight up — the angle factor in 25.3 eats it fast.

What you will have on the job

Wire rope
Tough, cheap, handles heat better than synthetic. Bites into soft loads, and it tells you it is failing by growing broken wires.
Alloy chain
Grade 80 or 100 — and only alloy, never hardware-store chain. The one to use around heat, sharp edges and rough handling. Adjustable with a grab hook.
Synthetic web
Flat nylon or polyester. Kind to finished surfaces and light to handle. Cuts on an edge almost instantly — softeners every time.
Round sling
Load-bearing core inside a jacket. Very flexible, colour-coded by capacity, and the jacket is there to protect the core and show damage, not to carry the load.

The three hitches

HitchCapacityWhat it is for
Vertical100% of ratedStraight pull off a lifting lug or eye.
ChokerAbout 75–80% of verticalGrips the load so it cannot slide or roll. The workhorse on loose pipe.
BasketUp to 2× verticalCradles the load. Only gets the full 2× with the legs straight up — the angle factor eats it fast.
The choker number everybody guesses at

A choker's rated capacity assumes the angle of choke is 120° or more — a wide, open choke. Cinch it down tighter than that and the rating drops — and it drops harder on synthetic slings than on wire rope:

Choke angleWire / chainSynthetic
120–180°100%100%
105–119°87%82%
90–104°87%71%
60–89°74%58%
30–59°62%50%
Under 30°49%50%

Percent of the sling's choker rating, per ASME B30.9. The synthetic column is the one that bites on finished pipe — a web sling choked tight is carrying barely half its choker tag. The manufacturer's chart governs, not your head. A doubled-back "double choker" is a different rig again. When in doubt, more sling and a wider choke.

Hardware

  • Shackles. Screw-pin for temporary rigging you will take apart. Bolt type with a nut and cotter for anything left hanging, anything that could rotate, or any long-term pick — a screw pin backs itself out when the load moves against it.
  • Load a shackle in line, pin to bow. A side load cuts its capacity — to half at 90° on most makers' charts — so if you cannot avoid one, derate it off the maker's chart. Never swap the pin for a bolt.
  • Eye bolts. A plain eye bolt is for straight vertical pull only. Shouldered eye bolts can take some angle, and even then the capacity falls off a cliff — at 45° off the bolt's axis a shouldered eye bolt is down to roughly 30% of its rating. Past 45°, use a swivel hoist ring instead. Seat the shoulder flat against the surface and pull in the plane of the eye, never across it.
  • Hooks get working latches. A hook with the latch broken off or wired open is out of service, not "good enough for this one".
  • Turnbuckles and rigging screws are for tensioning and alignment, not for shock loads, and they get moused or pinned so they cannot unwind.
  • Softeners on every edge. Corner protectors, fire hose, a piece of belting. A flange edge will cut a web sling in a single pick.
D over d

Bend a wire rope sling around something small and it loses strength. The ratio of the Diameter of what it is wrapped around to the diameter of the rope is the D/d ratio, and small ratios mean real derating. Pin diameters, shackle bows and sharp corners all come into this. Bend a wire rope round something its own diameter (D/d = 1) and it has lost about half its strength. Most wire rope charts assume 25:1 for a basket — go below the chart's ratio and you are off the chart.

Read the tag, then believe it

Capacity, hitch, angle, material and D/d are all on the tag. A sling with a missing or unreadable tag has no rated capacity, which means it is scrap. It is not a judgement call and it is not rude to cut one out of service.

How the sling goes round the load decides two things: how much it's rated for, and whether it grips. On round, smooth pipe the grip is the one that gets people hurt.

LOOKING AT THE END OF THE PIPECHOKERsingle wrapgripsCHOKERdouble wrapgrips bestBASKETsingle wrapno grip at allBASKETdouble wrapgrips, 2 legs
The same sling, four wraps. A single basket only cradles, so a round pipe can roll or slide straight out of it. A double wrap puts the full 360° of sling in contact with the pipe, and that contact is what grips a smooth, round load. The dot is the choke: that is where the sling passes through its own eye or shackle.
WrapRating (vs vertical)Grips pipe?Use it for
Vertical100%—A rated lug, eye or lifting flange.
Single chokerAbout 75–80%, choke at 120° or moreSome. Slides on smooth, wet or oily pipe.Rough, square-edged loads.
Double wrap chokerThe choker rating on the maker's chartBest. Full contact all the way round.Loose pipe, bundles, anything round and smooth.
Double choker (two chokers, two legs)Choker rating per leg, times the angle factorYes, and it keeps the load level.Long pipe going up horizontally.
Single basketUp to 200% with vertical legsNo. Cradles only.Loads that can't roll or slide: skids, crates, blocked loads.
Double wrap basketThe basket rating, if the legs are verticalYes.Round loads that need basket capacity.
Bridle, 2 to 4 legsPer leg, times the angle factor; figure 3 and 4 legs as 2Only as well as each end is attached.Spools and equipment with lugs.

Percentages are typical. The sling tag and the maker's chart govern, and they differ by sling type. Sling angle factors are in 25.3, and choke-angle derating is in 25.4.

Putting on a double wrap choker

  1. Lay the sling over the pipe where you want the pick.
  2. Take it round a full turn, then a second turn beside the first. The turns must not cross over each other.
  3. Pass the running end through the eye, or choke it through a shackle (below).
  4. Check the turns lie flat and side by side. Crossed turns pinch and cut each other.
  5. Snug the choke up by hand. Don't beat it down.

Setting a choker so it's still rated

  • Choke on the body of the sling, never on a splice, a fitting, the tag or the eye.
  • Let the choke draw up by itself as the load comes on. Driving the eye down with a hammer or a bar closes the choke angle well under 120°, crushes the sling and cuts the rating.
  • Choking through a shackle is kinder to the sling. Put the pin through the eye of the sling and run the sling body through the bow, so the moving sling can't turn the pin and unscrew it.
  • A choke rolls the load toward itself as it tightens. Pull the chokes round by hand to where you want them before you take the strain. On a load that must stay the right way up, the rigger may set the two chokes from opposite sides so each one stops the other from rolling it.
A double wrap grips better, but it isn't rated higher

The extra turn buys you grip, not capacity. Rate it as a choker off the maker's chart. Grip still has limits: on coated, wet, icy or oily pipe, use a wide web sling, double wrapped, and watch the chokes closely on the trial lift.

When in doubt on loose pipe

Two double wrap chokers into a two-leg bridle or a spreader bar. That rig covers most of what a fitter sends up level, and the next page takes it step by step.

Before every single use, in your hands, in decent light. This takes twenty seconds and it is the cheapest twenty seconds on the job.

Any sling, straight out of service

  • Missing, illegible or unattached tag.
  • Evidence of heat damage — and that includes weld spatter and arc strikes.
  • Any repair or modification made by anybody who is not the manufacturer.
  • Anything about it you are not sure of. Uncertainty is a removal criterion.

Wire rope

  • Broken wires. Out of service at ten randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay, or five in one strand in one lay (ASME B30.9; OSHA 1910.184 says the same). Cable-laid and braided slings have their own counts. Broken wires cluster — find the worst lay and count there, not at an average spot. Your employer's program and the sling tag may be tighter; they never get looser.
  • Wear beyond one third of the original diameter of an outside individual wire.
  • Kinking, crushing, birdcaging or any distortion of the rope structure. A birdcage means the strands have been unloaded and shifted — it never goes back.
  • Severe localised abrasion or scraping, and severe corrosion.
  • End fittings cracked, bent, worn or pulling out of the swage.

Synthetic web and round slings

  • Cuts, snags, punctures, or any broken stitching in a load-bearing splice.
  • Melting, charring or glazing anywhere, from heat or from friction.
  • Acid or caustic burns — often a bleached, fuzzy patch rather than a hole.
  • Red warning yarns showing through the surface of a web sling. That colour is there to tell you the load-bearing yarns are cut.
  • Discoloured, brittle or stiff patches — sun or chemical damage.
  • On a round sling: any breach of the jacket that exposes the core. You can no longer inspect what is carrying the load.
  • Knots. A knotted sling is a failed sling.

Alloy chain

  • Stretch. Lay it beside a known-good chain of the same size — a stretched chain is visibly longer and the links have gone narrow.
  • Nicks, gouges, cracks, or a link that is bent, twisted or no longer moves freely.
  • Wear at the link bearing points beyond the manufacturer's allowance.
  • Heat damage, and any weld on the chain that was not put there at the factory.

Hooks and shackles

  • Hook throat opened up more than 5% over new (1/4" max) or past the maker's limit, or any visible bend or twist (ASME B30.10).
  • Wear over 10% of the original section of a hook, or of a shackle body or pin (B30.10, B30.26).
  • Latch missing, bent, or not closing the throat.
  • Shackle pin not fully engaged, threads damaged, or a bolt standing in for the proper pin. No readable capacity marking.
  • Cracks, nicks, gouges, heat damage or weld spatter anywhere on either.
Before every use is not the only inspection

What is on this page is the check you do in your hands, every single time. On top of it, slings also need a documented periodic inspection by a designated person — yearly for normal service, as often as monthly for severe service — with the records kept. That is the employer's duty, not yours, but a sling with no inspection record behind it is one you should be asking about.

Never field-repair rigging

No welding a link, no tying a knot, no shortening with a bolt through the eye, no "it will be fine for this one lift". Damaged rigging gets cut so it cannot be put back in the box, and then it gets reported.

Shock load is the invisible one

A load snatched up, dropped and caught, or swung into a stop can see several times its static weight for an instant. Nothing on the sling will look different afterwards. That is exactly why a sling that has been shock loaded comes out of service on somebody's word, not on what you can see.

What comes out of serviceThe single most useful photo set in the book: broken wires clustered in one lay, a birdcage, a cut web sling, a glazed sling, a stretched chain link, an unreadable tag. PHOTO

Every lift starts here, and "it's not that heavy" is not a number. The operator has a load chart and the chart needs a figure.

LOAD = PIPE + FITTINGS + VALVES + ANY WATER STILL IN IT + RIGGING

Rough weights to work from

ItemWeight
Steel pipe, per foot10.69 × (OD − wall) × wall
Water inside, per footID² × 0.34
Water, per gallon8.34 lb
Steel, per cubic inch0.283 lb
Steel plate, per sq ft per inch thick40.8 lb
150# weld neck flange, 6"~24 lb
6" LR 90, Sch 40~25 lb
6" 150# gate valve~150–250 lb (iron to cast steel)

Flange, fitting and valve weights vary a lot by class and maker. These are ballparks to sanity-check a number, not to rig to.

Worked — a 20 ft 6" spool with two flanges and a 90 20 ft × 18.99 lb/ft = 380 lb
+ two 150# flanges at ~24 = 48 lb
+ one LR 90 at ~25 = 25 lb
→ about 455 lb dry
Water is the one that catches people

A line that has been hydro-tested and "drained" can be holding a lot more than you think in every low point. 400 ft of 6" full of water is 5,000 lb of water alone. Before you cut into or lift a tested line, know whether it is empty.

Round up, then add some

Add the weight of your own rigging — slings, shackles, spreader bar — to the load. On anything close to capacity that is not a rounding error. And when you genuinely cannot work out the weight, you do not lift it; you get someone who can.

The same spool, still full of water 6" Sch 40 holds 12.5 lb of water per foot × 20 ft = 250 lb
+ about 15 lb in the 90
455 lb dry + 265 lb water → about 720 lb — over half as much again.
Rig for whatever is actually in it. A line that has been tested and "drained" holds water in every low point, and you do not get to assume it is empty — go and look. Hangers carry the wet weight regardless.
The quick field version There is no clean rule of thumb here, and the one people repeat — 3 × the size — only works at 6".
3 × 8 = 24, but 8" Sch 40 is 28.6. 3 × 12 = 36, but 12" STD is 49.6 (Sch 40, 53.6).
Learn the four you run most instead: 4" = 10.8 · 6" = 19 · 8" = 28.6 · 12" STD = 49.6 lb/ft.
For anything else, read 16.12. A 40 ft joint of 10" figured on a rule of thumb comes out 400 lb light.

The hook has to end up directly over the centre of gravity. If it does not, the load will swing until it is — and it will do that in the first inch off the ground, with your hands still on it.

HOOK OVER THE CG CG under the hook: level HOOK OFF THE CG heavy end drops, it swings
A spool with a valve on one end does not balance at its middle — the valve, the flange, the motor pulls the centre of gravity (CG) toward the heavy end. Hook over the CG and it comes up level. Hook off it and the heavy end drops and swings the moment it leaves the ground — toward whoever is standing there. Take the strain, stop and look; if it is not level, set it back down and move the hook. Never correct a swinging load by hand.

Finding it on pipe work

  • A bare joint of pipe balances in the middle. Almost nothing else on a pipe job does.
  • A spool with a valve, a flange pair or a strainer on one end has its centre of gravity shifted hard toward that end. Eyeball the heavy end and move your pick toward it.
  • Anything with the centre of gravity above the pick points wants to roll over. Put your attachment points above the CG, not level with it or below.
  • Fabricated assemblies with branches are not symmetrical even when they look it. Rig them, lift an inch, look.
The trial lift — do this every time

Take the slack out, lift the load one inch, and stop. Look at it. Is it level? Is it swinging? Are the slings seated and even? Is anything sliding? Then set it back down and fix what you saw. Every rigging failure that ever hurt somebody had a moment where this would have shown it.

Two-point picks and spreaders

  • Two picks spread wide on a long spool so it cannot bend, whip or hinge at a fitting.
  • A spreader bar puts the legs vertical and kills the angle problem completely. Worth the trip to get one on any long or awkward lift.
  • A lifting beam is not a spreader bar — different loading, different rating. Do not swap them.
  • Two hooks on one load means two operators and one signal person. That is a planned lift, not something you sort out as it goes.

While it is in the air

  • Tag line on anything that can rotate. Long enough to keep you out from under, and your hands are never the tag line.
  • Nobody under the load. Nobody. Not to steady it, not to look, not for a second.
  • Land it on dunnage, not on the slings — you have to get them back out.
  • Chock and block anything round the moment it is down.
Know the weight before the crane does

"About a ton" is not a weight. Work it out — feet times pounds per foot, plus fittings, plus water if it has any in it — and tell the operator a number. See 25.7 for the math. An operator working off a guess is working without a load chart.

Sending a joint or a spool up level. The pipe wants to slide out of the slings, tip end over end, or hit something on the way, and every step below is there to stop one of those.

60°L/4L/2L/4tag linetag linehook over the middleleg as long asthe spread = 60°double wrapchokers
A loose joint going up level. There are two double wrap chokers, each about a quarter of the length in from its end and the same distance from the middle. They go into a two-leg bridle, and legs as long as the gap between the picks give you 60°. There is a tag line on each end, held by people standing well out from under it.

Rigging a single joint, step by step

  1. Get the weight. Feet times pounds per foot, plus anything on it (25.7).
  2. Two pick points, the same distance from the middle, about a quarter of the length in from each end. Too close together and it see-saws. Too near the ends and the middle sags, which matters on long, thin-wall or plastic pipe.
  3. A double wrap choker at each point (25.5).
  4. Legs long enough. A bridle leg as long as the distance between the picks gives you 60°. Shorter legs mean a flatter angle and more load in each leg. If you can't get the length, use a spreader bar.
  5. A tag line on each end, long enough to keep the person holding it out from under.
  6. Trial lift. Up an inch and stop. Is it level? Are the chokes biting? Has anything slid? If not, set it down and fix it.
Worked: 40 ft of 12" standard wall 40 × 49.56 lb/ft = 1,982 lb, so call it 2,000 lb
Picks 10 ft in from each end, so they are 20 ft apart
20 ft legs give 60°: 2,000 ÷ 2 × 1.155 = 1,155 lb in each leg
Only 14 ft legs? The hook is √(14² − 10²) = 9.8 ft above the picks
Factor 14 ÷ 9.8 = 1.43, so 1,430 lb in each leg. That's about 45°, and each sling's choker rating has to cover it.

Bundles and short pieces

  • Never lift by the banding or the strapping. It holds the bundle together on a truck and nothing more.
  • A bundle goes up on two double wrap chokers, so each choke squeezes the whole bundle. Small pipe in the middle of a loose bundle can still slide out, so if the pieces are different lengths or loose, it goes in a rated pipe basket or bin.
  • Short pieces, fittings and valves go in a rated bucket, bin or box, not in a choker.

Pipe that needs care

  • Stainless and alloy. Use synthetic slings, or covered ones. Carbon steel chain or wire leaves iron on the surface, and the stainless rusts there.
  • Coated, lined or insulated pipe. Use wide web slings, with no chain and no wire rope. Never put end hooks in lined pipe.
  • PVC, CPVC, HDPE and fiberglass. Use wide web slings and a spreader bar on long lengths. No chain, wire rope or end hooks unless the maker says so. Cold PVC is brittle, and a bump that marks steel can crack it.
  • Long, thin-wall lengths. Use a spreader bar or more pick points, so it doesn't bend in the middle.

End hooks and pipe clamps

End hooks (pipe hooks) on a spreader bar, and horizontal pipe lifting clamps, are below-the-hook lifting devices (ASME B30.20). Each one is rated and sized for a range of pipe and used exactly as its maker says. They are fine on bare steel pipe, but keep them off beveled ends you have to weld, and off lined and plastic pipe.

Landing it in a rack or on stands

  • Bring it down to just above the rack, then line it up with the tag lines or a push stick, never with your hands on the pipe.
  • Set it on dunnage, stands or rollers, and chock it before the slings go slack.
  • Nobody stands between the pipe and the rack, the steel or another pipe. That gap is a pinch point.
Forks aren't a crane, unless they're rigged as one

Hanging a sling off a forklift's forks is only allowed with a rated attachment the truck's maker approves, like a fork-mounted hook or jib. A chain round a fork isn't rated. A forklift or telehandler set up to hoist a load on a hook or winch and move it is doing crane work. The crane rules apply, including a qualified rigger and signal person, and it has to run off the load chart for that attachment.

Straight up is where friction lets go. On a level pick the sling wraps under the pipe. Stand the pipe up and the only thing holding it is whatever you attached to, so that attachment has to be something the load can't slide off.

OKrated lug orliftingflangeOKchoker setunder ashoulderNOchoker onbare pipeslidesNOriser clampis a support,not a lift
Straight up, the pipe hangs from whatever you attached to and nothing else. A rated lug or lifting flange takes the load in the direction it was made for. A choker set tight under a flange, hub or coupling has a shoulder to bear on. On bare pipe, a choker has only friction holding it. A riser clamp is made to hold a riser up on a floor, and unless its maker rates it for lifting, it is not a lifting device.

What to attach to, best first

  1. A lifting lug, pad eye or trunnion designed for the lift. That is an engineered attachment, welded by a qualified welder to an approved procedure, then inspected. It is never something tacked on to get the pick done.
  2. A lifting flange, meaning a blind or plate with a rated lifting eye, bolted with the full bolt set to a flange on the top of the pipe.
  3. A vertical pipe lifting clamp rated for vertical lifts and sized to that pipe (ASME B30.20), used the way its maker says.
  4. A double wrap choker set tight directly under a shoulder: a flange, a hub, a welded collar. Then the shoulder carries the load, not friction. A threaded coupling only counts if it's wrench-tight on the joint you're lifting. A hand-tight one just unscrews.
Never on a vertical lift
  • A choker on smooth, bare pipe with nothing under it. It will hold, and hold, and then slide.
  • A riser clamp, unless its maker specifically rates it for lifting. Riser clamps are made to support a pipe on a floor.
  • Bolt holes, threads, bevels, a hand-tight coupling, an unrated eye nut, or a lug somebody tacked on.

Tailing up: from lying flat to standing

bottom end walks toward the hookhook movesacross, sothe linestays plumbbottom kickswhen it lifts
Tailing up, which means standing a pipe from flat to vertical. The hook takes the top end, and the bottom end stays on the ground and slides toward the hook as it comes up. The hook or trolley has to move across with it so the line stays plumb. If it doesn't, the load drags, then swings. The moment the bottom leaves the ground it swings in under the hook, so nobody stands at the bottom end.
  • Top end: attach to something that can't slide as the angle changes, like a lug, lifting flange or shoulder. A choker that's fine with the pipe flat can walk off the end as it comes vertical.
  • Bottom end: protect it with an end cap, a board or a skid, and set it where it can slide freely. On long, heavy or finished pipe, a second hoist on the bottom tails it and keeps it off the ground. That is a two-hoist lift, so it's planned.
  • Keep the hook plumb. The boom or trolley moves across as the pipe comes up. A hook pulling at an angle drags the load, and then it swings.
  • Nobody at the bottom end. When it leaves the ground it swings in under the hook.
  • Once it's upright, put a tag line on the bottom to stop it spinning.

Setting risers in a shaft or through floors

  • It hangs from a rated point overhead, like an engineered beam, a rated beam clamp or trolley, or a rated frame. Never from a bar joist, another pipe, a hanger or conduit.
  • Barricade the fall zone on every floor below the opening. Lock the doors or post someone at them, and keep radio contact floor to floor.
  • Lower it in steps. Set the riser clamp at each floor and let it take the weight before you unhook or change attachments.
  • Hands off the pipe as it passes through a sleeve or core. That is a pinch point on every floor.
  • An open shaft is a fall hazard. Guard it, or tie off, while you work at it.
One extra look

On the trial lift, mark the sling position on the pipe with soapstone. If the mark has moved when you look again, the choker is sliding. Set it down.

The loads that don't balance, don't have obvious lift points, or need two hoists. These are the lifts that go wrong, and most of them want a qualified rigger making the calls.

chain fall:trim it levelCG, toward the valvemiddle of pipe
A spool with a valve on one end. The centre of gravity sits toward the valve, not at the middle of the pipe, so the hook has to go over it. A chain fall in one leg lets you trim the load level after the trial lift instead of re-rigging, but the fall has to be rated for everything that leg can see.

Valves

  • Lift from the lugs or points the maker shows, or with slings round the body where the maker allows.
  • Never lift by the handwheel, stem, yoke, gear operator, actuator or positioner. None of them are built to carry the valve.
  • An actuated valve is top-heavy: its centre of gravity sits above the body. Rig above the centre of gravity, or with a basket round the body and a tag line, so it can't roll over.
  • Close a butterfly valve's disc inside the body before it moves, so the disc edge is protected.

Spools

  • Find the centre of gravity first (25.8). A valve, flange pair or strainer drags it toward that end.
  • A rated chain fall in one leg lets you trim the spool level after the trial lift instead of re-rigging.
  • Lift from the main run, not from a branch. Vents, drains, thermowells and small nipples snap.
  • No slings through flange bolt holes unless the lift was engineered that way.

Pumps, motors and equipment

  • Use the lifting points on the maker's drawing and nothing else.
  • A motor's eyebolt lifts the motor alone. It is not for the motor, pump and base together.
  • A skid with a base lifts from the base's lift points, with a spreader if the drawing shows one.

Handing a load from one hoist to another

  • This is also called drifting or a load transfer: two chain falls or trolleys move a load past an obstruction.
  • The second hoist takes the load before the first one lets go. In between, the share on each one keeps changing, and either one can end up carrying all of it. Rate both for the full load.
  • Chain falls and come-alongs pull in line. Side pulling is only allowed where the hoist maker permits it (ASME B30.16 and B30.21). Beam clamps and trolleys are rated for a vertical load unless marked otherwise.
  • One person directs the move, and everybody else waits for them.

Rolling and skidding

  • Use pipe rollers or skates, and pull with a come-along from a rated anchor.
  • Chock it every time it stops.
  • Stay out of line with a pulling sling or come-along. If it lets go, it snaps back.

Two cranes or two hoists on one load

As the load tilts or one hook runs faster, the weight shifts between the hooks, and one of them can end up carrying far more than half. That needs an engineered lift plan, one person in charge, and slow, matched moves. It isn't worked out on the fly.

Critical lifts are not your call to wave off

Your employer defines a critical lift. It commonly includes: over 75% of the crane's capacity at that radius; two cranes or two hoists; lifting over people, occupied buildings or live process lines; lifting personnel; near power lines; or an unusual, high-value or hard-to-replace load. It needs a written lift plan from a qualified person before it moves.

Wind

Plate, duct, big valves and long spools catch wind like a sail. The site and crane wind limits govern. Stop crane work when lightning is in the area.

SPOOL WEIGHT ≈ (FEET × lb/ft) + FITTINGS + FLANGES
Worked — know it before the crane does 20 ft of 6" Sch 40 at 18.99 = 380 lb
+ two 150# flanges (~24 lb each) + a 90 (~25 lb)
→ about 455 lb
  • Softeners on every sharp edge. A flange edge cuts a synthetic sling in one pick.
  • Two picks on a long spool, spread wide, so it can't whip or bend.
  • Tag line on anything that can swing. Your hands are not a tag line.
  • Chock and block pipe on racks. A rolling joint of 8" doesn't stop for anybody.
  • Never rig to a handwheel, a bolt hole or a hanger. None of them are lifting points.
  • One signal person, agreed on before the pick starts.
  • Never stand under it or reach in to steady it. Not for a second.
Weight of a full line

An empty 8" Sch 40 line is 29 lb/ft. Full of water it's 50. If you're setting supports for a line that's going to be tested and run, that's the number that matters — not what it weighs while you're hanging it.

Picking a spoolA flanged spool in the air with softeners at every edge, a tag line on it, and the rigger's hand well clear. Same spool on the ground with the chokers still slack for the before shot. PHOTO

Most pipe does not get set by a crane. It gets set by two men, a beam clamp and a chain fall — which makes this the rigging you will actually do most days.

The tools

Chain fall
Hand chain hoist. Pure vertical lifting, slow and controllable, holds where you stop it. The standard way to bring a spool up to elevation.
Lever hoist
Come-along. Short-throw lever, works at any angle. For pulling and drawing up — closing a flange gap, pulling a line into alignment.
Beam clamp
Clamps the bottom flange of a beam and gives you a rated attachment point. Sized to a flange thickness range.
Trolley
Rolls along the beam so the load can travel. Same flange fit rules.

How they get misused

  • Never put a cheater bar on the handle. A hoist is rated so that one person pulling normally can lift its rated load — so if it is taking more than that, you are either overloaded or hung up on something. A pipe on the lever hides which, and the next thing that moves is the load chain letting go. If it will not pull by hand, stop and find out why.
  • Never wrap the load chain around the load and hook back onto itself. The load chain is a lifting chain, not a sling — use a sling and hook to it.
  • Do not side-load it. Chain falls lift straight up; the chain has to run true through the wheel or it jumps the pocket.
  • Do not use a lever hoist as a permanent support. It is a tool, not a hanger.
  • Two hoists on one load is a planned operation — each one has to be rated for the whole load, because as soon as one takes more, it has it all.
  • Check the hook latches and look at the chain for stretch, twist, nicks and a twisted link before you load it.
Hanging off the building is not your call

A beam clamp on a joist, a hoist off a pipe rack, a chain fall tied to a strut — every one of those loads the structure, and whether the structure can take it is an engineer's question, not a fitter's. Joists especially: they are designed for load spread along the chord, and a heavy point load — worst of all one hung between panel points — can fold one. Ask before you hang.

Two falls and a spool

The everyday move: a chain fall at each end of a spool, lift both together, then work them a few clicks at a time, alternating, to walk it up level. Trying to take one end all the way first is how the low end swings into something.

Take up the slack and stop

Snug it, check every attachment point, check the hook seating, look up at the beam clamp, then lift. Everything that goes wrong with hand rigging announces itself in the first inch, and only if somebody is looking.

Chain fall and beam clampA chain fall hung off a beam clamp with the clamp seated square on the flange, plus a come-along and a trolley. Show a clamp set on the very edge of the flange as the wrong example. PHOTO
First, the line that matters

Rope is for tag lines, hand lines and securing — not for lifting loads. Loads go on rated slings with tags on them. Every knot you tie also takes strength out of the rope, commonly a third or more, and a knot has no rated capacity at all.

Five knots cover nearly everything a fitter does with a rope. Learn these properly and you will not need the other three hundred.

Bowline
A fixed loop that will not slip and still unties after it has been loaded. The one for putting a loop in the end of a hand line or a tag line.
Clove hitch
Fast attachment to a pipe, post or rail. It works loose under a changing load, so always back it up with two half hitches.
Two half hitches
The back-up, and on its own a serviceable way to tie off to anything round.
Trucker's hitch
A loop partway up the line gives you a purchase to pull tension, then you tie it off. For securing a load on a truck or snugging something down.
Figure eight
Stopper knot. Keeps the end from running back through a block or a hand.

Working with rope

  • Whip or tape the ends. A frayed end runs out of your hand and through a block.
  • Keep rope off sharp edges and off the ground — grit works into the fibres and cuts from the inside where you cannot see it.
  • Synthetic rope melts. Running it fast over a rail or through a hand builds enough heat to glaze and weaken it.
  • Never stand in the bight — inside a loop of rope under tension. If it comes tight, it takes whatever is in the loop with it.
  • Coil it and hang it. A kinked, knotted pile of rope is a rope nobody inspects.
Tie it so it comes undone

A knot you cannot untie after it has been loaded costs you a rope. That is most of the argument for the bowline — it holds under load and still breaks free with a push on the collar afterwards.

Knots that earn their keepBowline, clove hitch backed up with two half hitches, trucker's hitch and a figure eight — each tied on real rope against a plain background, dressed and set. PHOTO

The load is not down until it is stable without the crane. Most of the injuries on a pipe job happen in the last two feet and the first minute after.

Before it comes down

  • Dunnage on the ground first. Two pieces, square to the load, sized so the slings can be pulled out afterwards.
  • Never land a load on its slings. You will either tear them getting them out or leave them under it.
  • Check the ground. Soft fill, a trench, a covered floor opening — know what is under it before you put weight on it.
  • Land it level, and land it where it can stay. Double handling is where things get dropped.

Blocking and stacking pipe

  • Chock the outside joints on every rack and every layer. A rolling joint of 8" does not stop for anybody.
  • Dunnage between layers, lined up vertically so the load path runs straight down through the stack.
  • Do not stack higher than the blocking can hold, and never stack pipe against a wall as the restraint.
  • Crib square. Alternating layers, full contact, no wedges holding a corner up.
  • Pull joints off a rack from the top down, never from the middle.

Unhooking

  • It comes off the hook when it is stable, blocked and not going anywhere — not when it touches down.
  • Keep your hands and feet clear as the slings go slack. That is when a load shifts and finds its balance.
  • Do not climb the load to retrieve a sling. Get a ladder or a lift.
  • If a sling is trapped, the load gets picked again. Never pull a sling out from under a load with the crane — it shock-loads the sling and it can pull the load off the blocking.
Temporary supports are still supports

Pipe set but not yet hung is being held by something. Make sure that something is rated, blocked and obvious — and that it does not get removed by the next crew because it looked like scrap.

Landing it properlyDunnage laid out before the pick, the load set down square on it, and enough clearance to get the slings out without anybody putting a hand under the steel. PHOTO

One voice. Everything that goes wrong on a pick goes wrong because two people were talking to the operator, or because nobody was.

Hoist
Upper arm out to the side, forearm and index finger straight up, hand makes small circles.
Lower
Arm and index finger pointing down, hand makes small circles.
Stop
Arm out to the side, palm down, swung back and forth. Not held still.
Emergency stop
Both arms out, palms down, swung back and forth. Anybody on the job may give this one.
Dog everything
Hands held together at waist level. Everything holds exactly where it is.
Move slowly
One hand gives the motion signal; the other hand is held in front of it.
Swing
Arm out horizontally, index finger points the way the boom is to swing.
Raise boom
Arm out horizontally, fingers closed, thumb pointing up.
Lower boom
Arm out horizontally, fingers closed, thumb pointing down.
Raise boom, lower load
Thumb up, and the fingers open and close for as long as you want the load moving.
Use main hoist
Tap the top of your head, then give the signal you actually want.
Use whipline
Forearm vertical, tap your elbow with the other hand, then give the signal.

Standard signals per OSHA 1926 Subpart CC, Appendix A (same as ASME B30.5). Overhead-crane and hoist signals differ in places — learn the chart posted on your job.

The rest of the set

SignalHow it is given
TravelArm out in front, hand open and slightly raised, fingers up — push it the way the crane is to travel.
Lower boom, raise loadArm out, thumb down, fingers opening and closing.
Extend boomBoth hands at waist, fists closed, thumbs pointing outward.
Retract boomBoth hands at waist, fists closed, thumbs pointing at each other.
Crawler travel, one trackRaise a fist in front of you on the side of the track to be locked. Rotate the other fist in front of you the way the other track is to travel.
Crawler travel, both tracksBoth fists in front of you, rolling round each other — away from you for forward, toward you for back.

The rules around the signals

  • One signal person, agreed before the lift, and visibly marked — a distinct vest or gloves so the operator finds you without hunting.
  • Stand where the operator can see you and you can see the load. If you cannot have both, you need a second signaller relaying, and that gets agreed in advance too.
  • Anybody can call a stop or an emergency stop. Anybody. The operator must obey either one no matter who gives it (OSHA 1926.1417(y)), and nobody has ever been wrong for using it.
  • Operator loses sight of the signal person → the load stops until contact is back.
  • No signal means no movement — not "carry on as before".
  • Give the signal and hold it until the motion is done. A flick of the wrist is not a signal.
On the radio

Name the crane before every transmission, and hold the button down half a second before you speak or the first word gets clipped. Give it in order: function, direction, distance or speed, then stop — "hoist, up, ten feet… five… stop" (OSHA 1926.1420). Agree before the pick that dead air means stop — so a dropped radio ends the lift instead of continuing it.

Before the hook goes on

Weight known. Rigging inspected and rated for it. Angles checked. Path walked and clear. Landing spot ready with dunnage on it. Tag line in somebody's hand. Everyone knows who is signalling. If any one of those is missing you are not ready to lift — and the time to say so is now, not with it swinging.

A shop crane, a bridge crane, a monorail hoist. Different machine, different set of signals — and the ones that look like the boom signals in 25.16 don't all mean the same thing.

Hoist
Forearm vertical, index finger pointing up, hand moving in small horizontal circles.
Lower
Arm out and down, index finger pointing at the floor, hand moving in small circles.
Bridge travel
Arm straight out, palm open and facing forward, pushing the direction of travel.
Trolley travel
Palm up, fingers closed, thumb pointing the way the trolley is to run, hand jerked that way.
Stop
Arm out to the side, palm down, swung back and forth across the body.
EMERGENCY STOP
Both arms out to the sides, palms down, swung back and forth. Anybody may give it. Nobody argues with it.
Multiple trolleys
Hold up one finger for the block marked 1, two for the block marked 2, then give the regular signal.
Move slowly
One hand held still over the hand giving the motion signal. Hoist slowly is shown here.
Magnet is disconnected
Crane operator spreads both hands apart, palms up. Everybody clears out from under it.
Don't mix the two sets

A boom crane swings and booms. A bridge crane travels and trolleys. The signals in 25.16 are for mobile equipment; these are the overhead set, per ASME B30.2. If you give a swing signal to a bridge operator you will get a blank look at best. Learn whichever chart is posted at your crane, because that's the one the operator learned.

The motions

SignalHow it is given
HOISTForearm vertical, forefinger pointing up. Move the hand in small horizontal circles.
LOWERArm extended downward, forefinger pointing down. Small horizontal circles.
BRIDGE TRAVELArm extended forward, hand open and slightly raised. Make a pushing motion the way the bridge is to go.
TROLLEY TRAVELPalm up, fingers closed, thumb pointing the way the trolley is to go. Jerk the hand horizontally.
MOVE SLOWLYOne hand gives the motion signal; the other hand is held still in front of it. Same as the boom set.
MULTIPLE TROLLEYSHold up one finger for the block marked 1, two fingers for the block marked 2. Then give the regular signal.

The ones that stop everything

SignalHow it is given
STOPArm extended, palm down, moved back and forth horizontally. Keep it moving when you give it.
EMERGENCY STOPBoth arms extended, palms down, moved back and forth. Anybody on the floor may give this one.
MAGNET DISCONNECTEDOperator spreads both hands apart, palms up. The magnet is dead — whatever it was holding is about to not be held.

Older charts copied from OSHA 1910.179 show STOP as an arm held out rigid and EMERGENCY STOP as one arm waved fast. Treat any of them as a stop.

Working under a bridge crane

  1. One signal person. Same rule as any other crane — and the operator obeys nobody else, except a stop or emergency stop, which he obeys from anybody.
  2. Stand where the operator can see you and where you are not under the load or the rails.
  3. A shop crane has no boom to give it away, so a load can travel over you with no warning. Keep your head up and never walk under a hook, loaded or not.
  4. Load has to leave the floor straight up. If the hook isn't over the centre of gravity the load will swing the moment it breaks free — and in a shop there's always something within swinging distance.
  5. Pendant or radio instead of hand signals? Same rules. One voice, and say the motion before you say the direction.
Know the capacity

It's painted on the bridge in letters a foot tall, and it's the capacity of the crane, not of the slings on the hook, not of the beam it's hanging from, and not of the building. All four have to be good. Rigging weights are in 25.7, slings in 25.4.

Power lines — the one that kills the most

Assume every overhead line is live and at lethal voltage until the utility says otherwise. If a crane is going to work within 20 feet of a line up to 350 kV, the job has to do one of three things: de-energise and ground it, hold the full 20 feet, or hold the voltage-specific distance from the table below with the voltage confirmed. The distance counts from any part of the crane, load line, load or rigging, and tag lines near the line must be non-conductive.

Line voltageMinimum clearance
Up to 50 kV10 ft
Over 50 to 200 kV15 ft
Over 200 to 350 kV20 ft
Over 350 to 500 kV25 ft
Over 500 to 750 kV35 ft
Over 750 to 1,000 kV45 ft
Over 1,000 kVutility or PE sets it

Per OSHA 1926.1408 Table A. You do not get to guess the voltage.

You are usually up in the air while you do this

Almost everything on this page happens on a rack, on steel or out of a lift. Rigging protects the load; nothing on this page protects you from the fall. That is 12.2, and it applies the whole time.

The default is not always 20 feet

If nobody has confirmed the voltage, the fallback is 20 feet — but under 1926.1409, on any line over 350 kV that 20 foot figure becomes 50 feet. Transmission lines on towers are routinely over 350 kV and they do not look any different from a distance.

So: unconfirmed voltage on a distribution line, 20 feet. Unconfirmed voltage anywhere near transmission towers, 50 feet until the utility tells you otherwise.

If the machine does touch a line

The operator stays in the cab. He is safe there and he is not safe stepping off it. Nobody touches the machine, the load, the slings or the tag line. Everyone else moves away — and moves away in small shuffling steps with both feet on the ground, because the ground itself is energised in rings around the contact.

Call the utility. The machine comes clear only when they say the line is dead. If the operator has to get off because of fire, he jumps clear without touching machine and ground at once, lands with feet together, and shuffles away.

More people are killed by a power line contact standing on the ground than sitting in the cab.

The rest of the list

  • Under the load. Never, not for a second, not to look, not to steady it. This is the one rule with no exception on it.
  • Pinch points. Hands between a swinging load and a beam, a wall, another joint. Push a load with an open palm or a tag line, never with fingers wrapped around anything.
  • Struck-by. Unblocked pipe, a sling that lets go, a shackle pin somebody did not mouse. Look up and look around before you commit.
  • Wind. A large flat load is a sail. Most equipment has a wind speed at which lifting stops, and a long spool will weathervane and swing long before that.
  • Ground conditions. Crane outriggers need pads and solid ground. Backfill, trenches and buried utilities are how machines tip.
  • Communication breakdown. Two signallers, a radio failure, a hand signal misread. If you are not certain, stop the lift.
  • Shock load. Snatching a stuck load or dropping and catching it can multiply the force several times over, and nothing looks any different afterwards.
The one habit worth building

Before every pick: look up, look down, look around. Up for lines and overhead work, down for your footing and what is under the landing spot, around for who else is in the swing path. Three seconds, every time.

What will hurt youOverhead line clearance with a spotter, a pinch point between a load and a column, a load being walked under, and a sling loaded over a sharp edge with no softener. PHOTO
  • Guessing the weight. "About a ton" is not a number and the load chart cannot use it.
  • Rigging flat. At 30° each leg of a two-leg sling carries the whole load. Below that, nobody rated it. Longer slings or a spreader.
  • Forgetting the rigging is part of the load. Slings, shackles and a spreader bar all hang off the same hook.
  • No softeners on a flange edge. A web sling goes in one pick.
  • Screw-pin shackle on a load that can rotate. It unscrews itself. Bolt type with a nut and cotter.
  • Side-loading an eye bolt and expecting the rated capacity. Angle costs you most of it.
  • Hook not over the centre of gravity. It will swing until it is, in the first inch.
  • Skipping the trial lift. One inch and a look catches almost everything.
  • Cheater bar on a come-along. The handle length is the overload protection.
  • Hanging a chain fall off the building without asking whether the structure can take a point load.
  • Landing on the slings, then trying to drag them out with the crane.
  • Unhooking before it is blocked. Down is not the same as stable.
  • Unreadable tag left in service. No tag, no capacity, no lift.
  • Two people signalling. One voice, and everyone else gives a stop or nothing.
Rigging gone wrongSide-loaded hook, chokers doubled back on themselves, a shackle pin backed out, a tag on a sling that cannot be read, and a sling stored on the ground in the weather. PHOTO
OD BOLT CIRCLE BORE FOUR NUMBERS OD of the flange BOLT CIRCLE diameter NUMBER of holes SIZE of the bolts Get any one wrong and nothing lines up. Class 150 and 300 never share a bolt circle.
A flange is described by four numbers, and the bolt circle is the one that decides whether it mates. Holes always straddle the vertical centreline, never sit on it. Check the class stamped on the rim before you order the gasket — a 300 flange on a 150 line will not bolt up.
SizeODBolt circleNo.DiaStud
1/2"3.502.3841/2"2-1/4"
3/4"3.882.7541/2"2-1/2"
1"4.253.1241/2"2-1/2"
1-1/4"4.623.5041/2"2-3/4"
1-1/2"5.003.8841/2"2-3/4"
2"6.004.7545/8"3-1/4"
2-1/2"7.005.5045/8"3-1/2"
3"7.506.0045/8"3-1/2"
4"9.007.5085/8"3-1/2"
5"10.008.5083/4"3-3/4"
6"11.009.5083/4"4"
8"13.5011.7583/4"4-1/4"
10"16.0014.25127/8"4-1/2"
12"19.0017.00127/8"4-3/4"
14"21.0018.75121"5-1/4"
16"23.5021.25161"5-1/4"
18"25.0022.75161-1/8"5-3/4"
20"27.5025.00201-1/8"6-1/4"
24"32.0029.50201-1/4"6-3/4"

Flange dimensions per ASME B16.5. Stud lengths are the usual B16.5 chart for raised face — about a 1/8" gasket, points not counted, rounded up to the next 1/4" (the formula below lands within 1/4" of the chart). Confirm against the actual flanges on your job.

STUD = 2 × FLANGE THK + GASKET + 2 × NUT + 1/4"

Round up to the next 1/4". You want the stud right through each nut with a thread or two showing — never short of flush. (B31.3 accepts one thread short at most.)

Reading the table — 6" class 150 OD 11.00", bolt circle 9.50", 8 holes, 3/4" bolts.
Chord between two adjacent holes = 9.50 × sin(180 ÷ 8) = 9.50 × .3827 = 3.64" = 3-5/8"
Set your dividers there, step it round, and the eighth mark lands on the first.

Nominal per ASME B16.5. The standard governs.

SizeODBolt circleNo.Dia
1/2"3.752.6241/2"
3/4"4.623.2545/8"
1"4.883.5045/8"
1-1/4"5.253.8845/8"
1-1/2"6.124.5043/4"
2"6.505.0085/8"
2-1/2"7.505.8883/4"
3"8.256.6283/4"
4"10.007.8883/4"
6"12.5010.62123/4"
8"15.0013.00127/8"
10"17.5015.25161"
12"20.5017.75161-1/8"
Telling them apart in a rack

Same nominal size, a 300# flange is bigger in OD, thicker, and often has more or bigger bolts. Check the marking cast into the rim — class, material and size are all there.

Why you cannot mix classes 6" class 150: OD 11.00, bolt circle 9.50, 8 holes at 3/4".
6" class 300: OD 12.50, bolt circle 10.62, 12 holes at 3/4".
Different circle, different count. They will not bolt together and no amount of persuasion will change it — check the rim before you hang either one.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 STRAIGHT ACROSS NEVER WORK ROUND THE CIRCLE 1-5-3-7-2-6-4-8 30% → 60% → 100% then round the clock numbered clockwise
Go straight across to the bolt opposite, then quarter round and do it again — never work around the circle. Three passes at roughly 30%, 60% and 100% of final torque, then one more round the clock.
  1. Inspect both faces. Clean, no scratches crossing the seating surface, no old gasket.
  2. Check alignment first. Flanges should meet parallel and centered on their own. Needing bolts to drag them together builds in a stress that cracks something later.
  3. One gasket, centered. Never two. Never a gasket plus sealant to "make sure."
  4. Lubricate studs and nut faces unless the spec forbids it. Dry threads soak up so much torque in friction that the same wrench setting gives you a third or more less bolt load — and torque tables assume lubricated threads.
  5. Hand tight all around, then check the gap is even the whole way with a rule.
  6. Torque in a star pattern in passes — about 30%, then 60%, then 100%.
  7. Final passes round the clock at full torque, and keep going round until the nuts stop turning. That evens out the cross-talk between bolts (ASME PCC-1).
4 BOLTS 1-3-2-4  |  8 BOLTS 1-5-3-7-2-6-4-8
The pattern in one sentence

Always go straight across the flange to the bolt opposite, then quarter around and do it again. Never work around the circle.

The one that breaks cast iron

Never bolt a raised-face steel flange to a flat-face cast iron flange. The raised face acts as a fulcrum and cracks the cast flange when you torque it. Use a flat-face flange with a full-face gasket. Same with bronze and most plastic flanges — full face, and go easy.

Torque — reference only

Torque is a spec item. The gasket maker, the flange class and the joint spec set it. These are rough ranges to sanity-check what somebody hands you.

Studft-lb typical
1/2"50–75
5/8"100–150
3/4"175–250
7/8"300–400
1"450–550
1-1/8"600–750

Lubricated A193-B7 studs, standard spiral-wound gasket.

Gaskets

Class 150
1/16" or 1/8" compressed sheet on water and low pressure
Class 300+
Spiral wound with a centering ring. Also steam and hydrocarbons.
Ring
Sits inside the bolt circle. Raised-face flanges.
Full face
Covers the whole flange, bolt holes cut in. Flat-face flanges.

What goes where

Gate
On/off only. Full bore, low pressure drop. Don't throttle with it — it chatters and wears the seat.
Globe
Throttling. Flow usually goes under the seat — follow the arrow. High pressure drop by design.
Ball
On/off, quarter turn, full bore. The general-purpose shutoff.
Butterfly
Larger sizes, throttles reasonably, compact and cheap. Watch the disc clearance.
Check
One way only. Swing types for horizontal, spring/silent for vertical and pump discharge.
Triple duty
Check, balance and shutoff in one body. Standard on pump discharge.

Setting them

  • Find the arrow before it goes in. Check and globe valves both care about direction.
  • Butterfly disc clearance — the disc swings past the flange face. Reduced-bore pipe, an intruding gasket or a lined pipe will stop it and bend the stem. Crack it open before final torque.
  • Stems up or horizontal. Stem-down on a gate valve collects debris in the bonnet and chews the seat.
  • Install gate and globe valves partly open so the disc isn't jammed in the seat while you weld and bolt nearby.
  • Walk the handle swing and the packing gland access before you weld the flange. A valve nobody can operate or repack is a callback.
  • Leave room for insulation around the bonnet.
  • Tag every valve as it goes in with its number from the print. You will not remember on turnover day.
Heat and valves

Welding a flange next to a valve, or seal-welding at one, cooks the seat and the packing. Take the guts out, or open it and keep a wet rag on it, or use a union and set the valve after.

Flow arrows and stem orientationThe cast arrow on a check valve body, and a gate valve set stem-down to show what not to do. PHOTO

Strainers

  • Y-strainer screen points down or sideways on a horizontal line, never up — dirt has to collect in it, not fall back out. On steam and gas, sideways, so condensate cannot pool in the screen.
  • Blowdown valve on the strainer, piped to somewhere you can actually drain it.
  • Room to pull the screen. Measure the screen length and leave that much clearance. Countless strainers get installed where the basket can't come out.
  • Clean them after flushing and again after startup. Everything that was in the pipe ends up there.

Steam traps and drip legs

  • Drip legs at every rise, ahead of every control valve, and every 150–200 ft on a straight main, or what the spec says.
  • Drip leg full size of the main up to 4", then at least half the main size and never less than 4".
  • Make the leg long enough to collect, and put the trap connection above the bottom with a blowdown below it.
  • Trap discharge piped to return, and check valve it if the return is elevated.

Pumps

  • Eccentric reducer flat on top at the suction so air can't pocket in front of the impeller.
  • Straight run before the suction — five to ten pipe diameters. Elbows right at the suction starve one side of the impeller.
  • Suction velocity under 5 ft/s.
  • Support the pipe independently. Pipe weight hanging on a pump casing pulls it out of alignment and eats the seal.
  • Flex connectors where specified, and never as a way to make up a fit-up error.
  • Triple duty or check on the discharge, gate or butterfly on both sides so it can be isolated and pulled.
Air and drains

Automatic air vents at every high point, drains at every low point. It sounds obvious and it's the most common thing left off a hydronic system — then nobody can get the air out and the pump cavitates for a year.

Strainer, trap and pump orientationA Y-strainer with the basket pointing down where it can be pulled, a steam trap piped with its dirt pocket, and a pump suction with the eccentric reducer flat on top. PHOTO

Flange bolt holes are not placed anywhere. They straddle the centreline, every flange, everywhere in the world — and that one convention is what lets any two flanges bolt together in any position.

VERTICAL CL RIGHT VERTICAL CL WRONG holes straddle the centreline a hole on top dead centre
Two-holing means the bolt holes sit either side of the vertical centreline, never one on top of it. Every flange in the plant is drilled this way, so any two will bolt together in any position — and a level laid across the top pair tells you the flange is square.

What two-holing means

  • No bolt hole on top dead centre. A pair of holes sits either side of the vertical centreline, evenly spaced about it.
  • Same on the horizontal — a pair straddles the horizontal centreline too, for the same reason.
  • It only works because everyone does it. Two-hole every flange and any flange mates any flange. One flange clocked half a hole out and nothing on that line fits anything.
  • It gives you a datum. A level laid across the top pair of bolts, or a square off the face, tells you whether the flange is square and plumb — there is nothing else on a round flange to reference.
A flange welded out of clock is a cut-out, not an adjustment

You cannot rotate a welded flange, and you cannot open holes to make it fit — slotting a bolt hole destroys the bearing area the joint needs and it is not something you get to decide in the field.

So the check happens before the root goes in: two-hole it, level across the top pair, and look at the far end of the spool as well as the near end. A spool with a twist in it has one good flange and one bad one, and it will pin up perfectly at the first end before it refuses at the second (19.4).

Alignment pins

A two-hole pin — also called a drift pin, an alignment pin or a flange pin — is a tapered steel pin you drop through two matching bolt holes to hold and align a joint while you get the rest of the bolts in.

  1. Two pins, opposite each other, in the horizontal pair. Two points fix the rotation; one pin lets the flange swing.
  2. Drop them in the bottom pair first when you are landing a heavy flange, so the joint is caught before it can drop.
  3. Get real bolts in the other holes, hand tight, before you pull the pins.
  4. Pull the pins and replace them with bolts before any torque goes on. A pin is not a fastener.
A drift pin is for alignment, not for force

There is a real difference between using a tapered pin to guide holes that nearly line up and using it as a lever to drag a joint into place. The second one is how flanges get sprung, how gaskets get pinched, and how a nozzle on a vessel gets loaded with a stress that cracks it three months later.

If the flanges will not come together within about 1/16" of parallel and centred under their own weight and a little persuasion, stop. The pipe is in the wrong place. Bolts, pins and come-alongs used to close a gap just store that force in the joint (see 10.3).

And never leave a pin in a joint that is being pressurised, and never put a finger in a bolt hole to line it up — that is how fingers get taken off.

Clocking the rest of it

  • Valve stems and handwheels get set where somebody can reach them and where the stem is not below horizontal if you can avoid it — packing leaks run down into the bonnet otherwise. See 10.4.
  • Blind flanges and spec blinds two-hole like anything else, and the tag or handle wants to be readable from the floor.
  • Orifice flanges have their own orientation rules and their own bolt patterns — the taps have to sit where the transmitter can be piped to them. That is 16.8.
  • Lap joint flanges rotate freely on their stub end. When you genuinely cannot control the clock at both ends of a spool, that is the fitting that saves you.
Check the clock before it is out of reach

Two-holing is checked at the bench, in ten seconds, with a level across the top pair. The same check on a flange that is already hung twenty feet up needs a lift, a man and an hour — and if it is wrong up there, it is a burn-out.

Two-holed and notTwo flanges side by side at the bench, one with the pair straddling the vertical centreline and a level sat across it, one with a bolt at top dead centre. PHOTO
Pins doing it rightTwo drift pins in the horizontal pair holding a joint while bolts go in the rest, then the pins replaced with bolts before any torque. PHOTO
VENT highest point DRAIN lowest point GAUGE
Water is nearly incompressible, which is what makes a hydro safe — but only if all the air is out. Vent every high point until it runs solid water, drain from the low point, and put the gauge where you can read it from a safe spot. Fill from the bottom, vent from the top, and do not put the gauge where you cannot read it without standing under the line. Trapped air is what turns a water test into an air test.
Hydro first, always, if you have the choice

Water stores almost no energy. A failure under hydrostatic test is a mess. A failure under pneumatic test kills people.

  1. Walk the system and confirm every joint is complete, every hanger is in, and every support will carry the water weight.
  2. Isolate or remove what can't take it — gauges, relief valves, control valves, expansion tanks, pump seals, and anything rated below the test pressure. Write down every single one as you pull it.
  3. Open every high-point vent and confirm it's actually open.
  4. Fill slowly from the low point and let the air push out ahead of the water.
  5. Close the vents as water appears at each one.
  6. Bring pressure up in stages, walking the line at each stage.
  7. Hold for the required time and record it.
  8. Depressurize slowly, then drain completely.
  9. Put back everything you took out, off the list you wrote, and have somebody else check it against the list.
The test pressure is not yours to pick

The code and the job spec set the test pressure and the hold time, and they are written on the test package before anybody opens a valve. Different codes, services and temperatures give different answers, and some lines get tested well below what you would guess.

For B31.1, B31.3 and B31.9 the hydro minimum is 1.5 × design pressure — but B31.3 raises it for lines designed hot, no component may be taken past its own rating, and the plumbing codes work off working pressure instead. So 1.5 × is a sanity check on the number you are handed, not a replacement for it. If there is no written test pressure, there is no test yet.

CodeHydro testHold
ASME B31.3 process1.5 × design, raised for hot lines10 min, then inspect every joint
ASME B31.1 power1.5 × design at every point10 min, then may drop to design to inspect
ASME B31.9 building services1.5 × design10 min
IPC / UPC water supplyWater at not less than working pressure15 min minimum (IPC 312.5, UPC 609.4)
IPC / UPC drainage and vent10 ft head of water, or 5 psi air15 min

Code minimums (B31.3 345.4, B31.1 137.4, B31.9 937, IPC 312, UPC 609/712). Editions and local amendments change these — the test package governs.

A relief valve left out is how a test kills somebody next month

Every gauge, relief valve, rupture disc and control valve that came out for the test has to go back in, and the system is not a system again until it has. A line put into service with its relief gagged or missing has no protection at all and nothing about it looks wrong.

That is why the list matters. Written down on the way out, checked off on the way back in, by two people.

Trapped air is what makes a hydro dangerous

An air pocket in a "hydrostatic" test is a pneumatic test in that section, and it will let go with all the energy of one. Vent it properly, every time.

Where the gauge sits matters

Water adds 0.433 psi per foot of height. A gauge at the bottom of a 100 ft riser reads about 43 psi more than one at the top. Know where the test pressure is supposed to be read, and don't take the low point past what it is rated for. Worked example in 16.12.

Weight check before you fill

400 ft of 6" holds 600 gallons — 5,000 lb. An empty 8" line is 29 lb/ft and 50 lb/ft full. If the supports aren't all in and tight, the line finds out for you.

AIR STORES ENERGY. WATER DOES NOT.
The reason pneumatic tests are treated differently: compressed air stores energy the whole length of the line, and a failure releases all of it at once. A hydro that fails weeps. A pneumatic test that fails throws pipe — same pressure, entirely different consequence. If there is any way to test with water, test with water. If there is not, the procedure and the barricade are not paperwork: keep everyone out, step the pressure up and hold, and never start one without written permission and the engineer's procedure in your hand.
Treat this as the dangerous operation it is

Compressed gas stores enormous energy. A pipe that fails under air doesn't weep — it comes apart and throws pieces. Pneumatic testing is done only when hydro genuinely isn't possible, under a written procedure, with the area cleared.

ASME B31.3 pneumatic
Test pressure1.1 × design; no more than the lesser of 1.33 × design or 90% of yield stress
First stopHalf the test pressure or 25 psi, whichever is less — preliminary check
ThenUp in steps, holding at each, to test pressure
Leak checkDrop back to design pressure before anybody walks it
Relief on the rigSet no higher than test pressure + the lesser of 50 psi or 10%

B31.3 345.5. B31.1 is 1.2–1.5 × design (137.5). The procedure governs.

  • Barricade the area and keep everybody out of line with joints, caps and blinds. The exclusion distance comes from the stored energy in the line (ASME PCC-2 Part 5, Article 501, has the method) and it is written in the procedure — it is often much further than people expect.
  • Never stand in front of a blind or a cap under pressure, and never approach to "just check something" while it's up.
  • Bring it up in small steps with a hold at each, inspecting from a distance.
  • Soap-test joints at the preliminary step and after the pressure has come back down to design — never at full test pressure.
  • Never on PVC or any plastic. It shatters.
  • Relief device on the test rig, sized and set, so the system can't be over-pressured.
The usual sequence

A lot of jobs run a low-pressure pneumatic leak test first — B31.3 caps it at 25 psi — to find the obvious misses cheaply, then a full hydro for the record. That's a good order — it saves draining and re-filling.

Everything that fell in the pipe during construction is still in there. Flushing gets it out before it ends up in a pump, a coil or a control valve.

  • Flush at high velocity — you need turbulence to pick debris up off the bottom, not a trickle.
  • Bypass the equipment. Coils, pumps, chillers and control valves get looped out or blanked off so the trash doesn't go through them.
  • Pull and clean every strainer after the flush, then again after a day of running, then again. They'll keep loading up.
  • Flush to a drain that can take it, and know where that water is going.
  • Chemical clean and passivation on closed hydronic loops if the spec calls for it — that's a treatment contractor's scope, but the piping has to be arranged to let them do it.
  • Potable systems get disinfected to the code procedure — IPC 610 and UPC: 50 ppm chlorine for 24 hours, or 200 ppm for 3 hours — then flushed and sampled. Don't hand over a domestic system that hasn't been.
Freezing

Drain and blow down completely anywhere it can freeze. A line left with water in it over one cold night can split in a dozen places you won't find until spring.

Before and after a flushThe strainer basket pulled after first flush — scale, weld slag, a glove — beside the same basket clean. Include the temporary startup strainer that caught it. PHOTO

The job isn't done when the last weld cools. What you leave behind is what people judge the work by.

  • As-builts turned in. Every field change marked in red on the print.
  • Valve tags on and matching the schedule.
  • Test records complete — pressures, hold times, dates, signatures.
  • Everything pulled for the test is back in — relief valves above all, checked off the list (11.1).
  • Weld maps and NDE reports where the spec requires them.
  • Insulation ready: hangers shielded, enough clearance, nothing that has to be un-insulated later.
  • Access left where it's needed — strainer baskets, trap unions, valve handles, union takedowns.
  • Labels and flow arrows per the spec.
  • Punch list walked with the foreman before anybody else walks it.
  • Caps and plugs off, temporary supports removed, and the area cleaned up.
Walk it yourself first

Go look at your own work with fresh eyes before the inspector does. Every item you find yourself is one that doesn't end up on a list with your crew's name on it.

A tagged valveValve tag wired on and matching the schedule, with the line label and flow arrow in the same frame. PHOTO
Stored energy

A line is hot, pressurized or full until you personally proved it isn't. Lock it, tag it, try it, bleed it. Never take another man's word for a valve position.

  • Never stand under a load. Not for a second. Tag line, not hands.
  • Never put your hand where you wouldn't put your face.
  • Hot work — permit, fire watch, blanket, extinguisher, and know where the sparks land two floors down. Full page at 12.4.
  • Grinders — wheel rated above the tool's RPM, guard on, face shield over safety glasses, let it stop before you set it down.
  • Falls kill more construction workers than anything else, every year, and pipe work is elevated work. Tie off above six feet, check the harness before you put it on, and never be unhooked in the air. The whole thing — the numbers, the clearance math, what counts as an anchor and what does not — is 12.2. Ladders and lifts are 12.3.
  • Confined space (1926 Subpart AA) — permit, gas test, attendant. Every time. And a rescue plan before anybody goes in, because you do not enter to pull somebody out. Most people who die in a confined space are the second person down.
  • Clamp the pipe, don't hold it, and support the drop so it can't bind and kick.
  • Silica and fumes. Cutting cast iron, grinding, welding galvanized — respirator and ventilation, not a bandana. Stainless is its own hazard: grinding and welding it puts off hexavalent chromium, which has its own OSHA standard and its own exposure limit. Local exhaust, not an open door.
  • Housekeeping is safety. Most injuries on a pipe job are trips, falls and rolling pipe.
Argon and nitrogen will put you down with no warning

A purge gas is not poisonous — it just has no oxygen in it, and that is enough. Argon is heavier than air and pools in pipe, in pits, in trenches and in any low spot. You do not smell it, you do not cough, and you do not get a warning: you get one breath and your legs go.

Never put your head into a purged vessel or a large bore line. Vent the purge to atmosphere, not into the space you are standing in. If a purged volume is big enough to get into, it is a confined space and it gets a permit, a gas test and an attendant like any other.

And the same rule as above applies — do not go in after somebody who went down. That is how one body becomes two.

Old insulation — stop and ask

Pipefitters are the trade asbestos was written about. It is in pipe insulation, in block and wrap, in old gaskets, in packing and in fireproofing, and every one of those is something you are asked to cut into on a renovation.

If the building is old enough that you are wondering, stop. Do not cut it, scrape it, saw it or sweep it. Nothing about it looks dangerous, and there is no exposure you will feel. It is the owner's job to survey it and a licensed abatement contractor's job to remove it.

Galvanized

Welding, burning or grinding galvanized pipe puts off zinc oxide fume — metal fume fever, and worse with enough exposure. Grind the coating back well past the weld zone, ventilate it, and wear the right respirator.

Zeroed and taggedA lock and tag on an isolation valve with the energy actually bled off and the gauge reading zero in the same frame. A hot work permit and a fire watch with an extinguisher in reach. PHOTO

Falls kill more construction workers than anything else, every single year, and pipe work is elevated work — racks, steel, lifts, open floors. This is the page where being roughly right is not good enough, because the equipment only works if the math underneath it works.

When it is required

Where you areStarts at
Construction6 ft
Scaffolds10 ft
Steel erection15 ft
Plant maintenance (general industry)4 ft
Over equipmentAny height
Any open holeCover it, any depth

A hole gets a cover or a guardrail whatever its depth (1926.501(b)(4)); the 6 ft trigger for tying off is the same over a hole as anywhere else on the job. Construction is OSHA 1926 Subpart M; scaffolds are Subpart L; steel erection is Subpart R (and 30 ft, or two storeys, for connectors); maintenance in a running plant is the general industry standard, 1910 — but new construction or alteration inside a plant is still 1926, and still 6 ft. Your site's program can be — and often is — stricter than any of these. It never gets looser. When two rules disagree, the tighter one governs.

The three parts, and all three have to be good

Anchor
What you are tied to. 5,000 lb per person attached, or engineered to a safety factor of at least two under a qualified person.
Body wear
A full-body harness. Body belts have been illegal for fall arrest since 1 January 1998 — a belt stops the fall by folding you in half.
Connector
The lanyard or retractable between the two, with locking snaphooks on both ends.

The numbers, and why they are what they are

ANCHOR — 5,000 lb the next level down 18'-6" TOTAL 6'-0" FREE FALL the lanyard paying out 3'-6" DECELERATION 6'-0" YOU D-ring to boots, plus stretch 3'-0" SAFETY MARGIN ALL OF IT MEASURED DOWN FROM THE ANCHOR
A 6 ft shock-absorbing lanyard needs 18-1/2 feet below the anchor before it has finished stopping you. Your D-ring sits about 5 ft above the deck, so that is roughly 13-1/2 feet of clear space under your boots. Less than that and the lanyard works exactly as designed and you still hit the floor — which is what a retractable is for.
LimitFigureCite
Anchor, per person5,000 lb(d)(15)
Force on you1,800 lb(d)(16)(ii)
Free fall, max6 ft(d)(16)(iii)
Deceleration, max3.5 ft(d)(16)(iv)
Guardrail height42" ±3"(b)(1)
Guardrail force200 lb(b)(3)
Rescue after a fallPrompt(d)(20)

All of them from 29 CFR 1926.502. Body belts have not been acceptable for fall arrest since 1 January 1998, and only locking snaphooks since the same date.

Worked — how much air do you need? Six foot shock-absorbing lanyard, anchored level with your D-ring:
Free fall, the lanyard paying out  = 6.0 ft
+ deceleration, the pack tearing open = 3.5 ft
+ you, D-ring to boots plus harness stretch = 6.0 ft
+ safety margin = 3.0 ft
6.0 + 3.5 + 6.0 + 3.0 = 18.5 ft, measured down from the anchor.
Your D-ring rides about 5 ft above the deck, so that is 18.5 − 5 = 13.5 ft of clear space under your boots.
Working twelve feet up off a slab, that lanyard cannot stop you before the floor does. It is the wrong equipment, not a reason to shrug — a retractable catches you in the first foot or two, and that is exactly what it is for.
Tied off at your feet is not tied off

A 6 ft lanyard clipped to something level with your boots lets you fall the 6 ft of lanyard plus the 5 or 6 ft from your feet up to your D-ring before it starts doing anything. That is eleven or twelve feet of free fall against a legal limit of six — and the shock that comes with it is past what the harness is built to put into you.

Anchor overhead wherever you possibly can. If the only anchor is at foot level, you need a retractable rated for foot-level or leading-edge use — not a lanyard, and not a longer lanyard.

A pipe is not an anchor

Five thousand pounds. Not a sprinkler line, not conduit, not a duct hanger, not unistrut, not a hanger rod, not the handrail, not a ladder, and not the pipe you are installing. Everything on that list has been used, and some of them have failed with somebody on the end.

If you cannot point at what carries 5,000 lb, stop and ask. The engineered anchor is somebody's job to provide, and it is a fair thing to ask for.

Wearing it, and checking it

  • Check it before you put it on, every shift. Run the webbing through your hands in an inverted V — cuts, frays, burns, chemical damage, pulled or missing stitching.
  • Hardware — D-rings and buckles for cracks, distortion, sharp edges and corrosion. Snaphooks must latch and lock on their own.
  • The energy absorber pack. If the impact indicator has deployed, or the stitching has started to pull, it has already arrested a fall. It is done.
  • Dorsal D-ring between the shoulder blades, straps snug, leg straps tight enough that you can get a flat hand under and no more, chest strap at mid-chest. A loose harness is what turns a stopped fall into a broken back.
  • Anything that has taken a fall comes out of service permanently — harness, lanyard, retractable and the anchor connector. It gets cut up, not put back in the gang box.
  • No knots, no wrapping the lanyard round a beam and hooking back to itself unless it is a tie-back lanyard rated for it, no hook-to-hook, and no hooking two lanyards together to get more reach.
100 percent tie-off means 100 percent

The moment you are most likely to fall is the moment you are moving. A twin-leg (Y) lanyard lets you hook the second leg on before the first comes off, so you are never in the air unattached. Free-climbing between two anchors with the lanyard over your shoulder is the single most common way a properly-equipped hand falls.

Being caught is not being saved — there has to be a rescue plan

A man hanging in a harness is in trouble on a clock. Once he is suspended and not moving, blood pools in his legs and stops coming back up; it can turn serious in minutes, and it can happen to somebody who is conscious, talking and apparently fine. OSHA requires prompt rescue for exactly this reason, and prompt does not mean waiting for the fire department.

So before anybody goes up: who is getting him down, with what, and how long will it take? If the honest answer is a phone call, you do not have a plan. Relief straps let a suspended man stand in his own harness and buy time — they cost almost nothing and they belong on the harness before they are needed.

And if you are the one hanging: keep your legs moving, push against anything you can reach, get your knees up. Do not go still.

Ladders, lifts and the holes you leave behind are 12.3.

A harness inspection, step by stepHands running the webbing in an inverted V, a cut strap, a pulled stitch, a deployed impact indicator, and a distorted D-ring. Close and in focus — this is the set people will actually use. PHOTO
Fitted right and fitted wrongSame man, two frames: dorsal D-ring centred between the shoulder blades with straps snug, then the same harness slack with the D-ring down by his belt. PHOTO
Anchors, good and badAn engineered beam anchor and a properly wrapped sling, next to what people actually tie to — a sprinkler line, conduit, a hanger rod, a handrail. PHOTO

Three ways a fitter gets up to the work, and one thing he leaves behind him. None of them are complicated. All of them have a rule people break daily because nothing bad happened the last hundred times.

Lifts — and they are not the same machine

MachineWhat protects you from the fall
Scissor liftOSHA treats it as a mobile scaffold, so the guardrails are your fall protection. Keep them up, keep the chain or gate closed, and stay on the deck.
Boom liftOSHA treats it as an aerial lift (1926.453). Harness and lanyard, to the anchor in the basket — every time, every height, articulating or straight.
  • Tie off to the manufacturer's anchor in the basket, never to the rail and never to the structure you are working on. If the boom whips or the machine tips, being tied to the building is how you get pulled out of it.
  • Never climb the rails, never stand on the toeboard, never plank across two lifts, and never climb out of a basket unless your site's program specifically permits it and you are tied off the whole way.
  • Look up before you go up — power lines, and the clearance table in 25.18.
  • Look down too. Check the ground for holes, soft fill, slopes and buried services before you drive. A lift that sinks a wheel is a lift that goes over.

Ladders

the landing TIE IT OFF 4 FOUR UP, ONE OUT every ladder, every time 1 3 ft above if you step off
One foot out at the base for every four feet up, and three feet of rail above the landing if you are stepping off it — otherwise there is nothing to hold while you make the transition, which is where people come off. Tie the top off before you climb it the second time.
  • Four to one (1926.1053). One foot out at the base for every four feet up. Tie the top off.
  • Three feet above the landing if you are stepping off it, and three points of contact going up and down.
  • Face the ladder. Carry nothing in your hands — that is what a bucket and a rope are for.
  • Never the top two steps of a stepladder, never a closed stepladder leaned against something, and never a metal ladder anywhere near live electrical.
  • Set it on a level base, feet down and locked, not on a pallet, a bucket or a stack of blocks.
  • A ladder is for getting somewhere. Fitting off a ladder for an hour is how you end up leaning past your belt buckle — get a lift or a scaffold.

Holes and openings

  • Any hole you can step in or drop a tool through gets covered, secured so it cannot slide, and marked — and the cover has to hold twice what will ever be on it.
  • Never move somebody else's cover and walk away, and never assume a sheet of plywood on a floor is sound. If you pick one up, you own that hole until it is back.
  • Cutting a new penetration means you just made one. Cover it before you put the torch down.
  • A hole gets a cover at any depth — for tripping and dropped tools. Over 6 ft deep it is a fall hazard too, and needs a cover, a guardrail or tying off (1926.501(b)(4)).
The trade-off nobody says out loud

The reason people work off ladders they should not be on is that getting the lift takes twenty minutes and a conversation. Have the conversation. Nobody has ever been disciplined for asking for the right equipment, and the foreman would rather lose the twenty minutes than the man.

Boom basket versus scissor deckTied to the basket anchor in a boom lift, and standing inside closed guardrails on a scissor. One frame each so the difference is settled. PHOTO
Ladder set right, and set wrongThe same ladder at 4:1 with three feet above the landing and the top tied off, then the same ladder too steep, too short and untied. Shot from the side so the pitch reads. PHOTO
A hole cover done properlyMarked, screwed down so it cannot slide, and sized past the opening — next to the loose sheet of ply that people actually find. PHOTO

Hot work is anything that makes a spark, a flame, or enough heat to start one — welding, burning, brazing, grinding, even a cut-off wheel. The work is not the dangerous part. What the sparks land on, twenty minutes after you have gone home, is the dangerous part.

35 ft the torch sparks go through holes and through the wall to the far side MOVE IT COVER IT and up
Thirty-five feet is a sphere, not a circle on the floor. Slag rolls, bounces, and drops through every hole it finds — and it is still hot when it gets there. Move what will burn. What cannot be moved gets covered with something that will not.

Before you strike anything

  1. Can it be moved to a shop or a designated hot work area? If it can, move it. Every rule below exists because it could not be.
  2. Get the permit. On nearly every industrial and commercial site, hot work outside a designated area needs a written permit from whoever is authorised to sign it — and that signature is somebody checking your work area, not a formality.
  3. Sweep thirty-five feet. Move everything combustible out of a 35 ft radius. What genuinely cannot be moved gets covered with a welding blanket or fire-resistant sheet — not a tarp, not cardboard, not visqueen.
  4. Look down, and look through. Grating, floor openings, penetrations, gaps at the wall, the joint between deck plates. Slag finds every one of them and it is still hot when it lands.
  5. Look through the wall, too. Heat conducts. Steel being cut on one side can ignite insulation, paper or dust on the other, with nothing to see from where you stand.
  6. Extinguisher at hand, charged and inspected, and know what is behind you. Not across the room.
  7. Post the fire watch before the first spark, not after.

The fire watch

QuestionAnswer
When required?Whenever combustibles are within 35 ft, or could be reached through a floor, a wall or an opening
How long after?OSHA 1910.252: at least 30 min (1926.352: “a sufficient period”) · NFPA 51B: 60 min
And then?NFPA 51B lets the permit authority keep monitoring for up to three more hours
What does he do?Nothing else. Watches, holds an extinguisher, knows how to raise the alarm

Where both apply, the tighter one governs — and on most industrial sites and under most insurers that is the 60 minute figure, often longer. Your permit will say. A fire watch who is also holding a light, fetching rod or running a grinder is not a fire watch.

The fire you cause is almost never the one you see

A spark from cutting can travel 35 feet horizontally and a great deal further down, and it lands hot enough to start something smouldering that will not show itself for half an hour. That is the entire reason the watch stays after the work stops.

Walk the area below and behind before you leave, including the floor underneath you. Put your hand near anything that was in the spark stream.

Never on a drum, tank, vessel or line until it is proven

Anything that has held a flammable or an unknown gets emptied, isolated, cleaned, purged and gas tested by somebody qualified, and vented so nothing can build pressure while you heat it. An empty drum is worse than a full one — vapour and air in the right proportions is exactly what an explosion needs.

"It has been sitting empty for years" is not a gas test. Neither is a sniff. This is on the short list of things that take out whole crews.

Hot work in a confined space is two permits, not one

It is a confined space entry and hot work, and both sets of rules apply at once. Continuous gas monitoring, ventilation, an attendant outside, and a rescue plan that does not involve anybody going in after you.

The gases stack up fast in a small volume: shielding gas displaces oxygen, cutting makes its own fume, and coatings make more. Ventilation means air going in and fume coming out — not a door propped open.

What you are breathing

  • Galvanize — zinc fume fever. Grind the coating back a couple of inches either side, ventilate, and use the right respirator.
  • Stainless — hexavalent chromium, which has its own OSHA standard and its own exposure limit. Local exhaust, not an open door.
  • Cadmium plated hardware — acutely toxic when heated, and it has killed in a single shift in a small room. If it is bright yellow-gold plated, do not heat it.
  • Paint, primer, epoxy, coal tar — all of it makes something you should not breathe. Strip it back or get extraction on it.
  • Old insulation — stop and ask. See 12.1.
  • Degreaser vapour — chlorinated solvents near an arc turn into phosgene. Never weld or burn near a parts washer or fresh solvent.
Screen the arc, and think about who is behind you

Welding screens are not for your benefit. Arc flash burns the eyes of the labourer twenty feet away who glanced up, and he will not feel it until three in the morning. Screen it, or tell the people around you before you strike.

The walk-away check — do it out loud Torch off, bottles closed, lines bled, caps on.
Everything hot laid on steel, not on the deck and not on a blanket.
Thirty-five feet walked — including underneath and behind the wall.
Fire watch knows what time he can leave, and it is written on the permit.
Permit closed out and handed back.
Nobody has ever regretted the last two minutes of this.
A hot work permit, filled inA real permit board with the boxes ticked, the times written and the signature on it. Readable at phone size — this is the thing an apprentice has never actually looked at. PHOTO
Where sparks actually goA long exposure of a cut over grating, showing the stream going straight through to the level below. Then the same spot with a blanket and a spark curtain done properly. PHOTO
Covered, and not coveredFire blanket and a welding curtain done right, next to the plastic sheet and cardboard people reach for. PHOTO

Your tape

  • The hook is supposed to slide — exactly its own thickness, so push and pull both read true. Bent or loose is a bad tape.
  • Burn an inch on anything long or critical. Tell your partner, and burn the same amount both times.
  • Mark with a wrap line, not a tick. A tick tells you where; a wrap line tells you where and square.
  • Read to the sixteenth and write the sixteenth.
  • One tape for layout, and don't lend it. Two tapes can differ 1/16" over ten feet.

Laying out

  • Convert once, in writing. Print's C-to-C, minus take-outs, equals cut length — on paper, at the bench, before the saw runs.
  • Write the piece mark on the pipe the second you cut it. Two pieces 1/4" apart will get swapped.
  • Pull from one benchmark. Chained measurements stack their errors.
  • Cut the first piece long, trim to fit. The last piece takes the accumulated error, so make it the adjustable one.
  • Keep a stub of every size on the bench. Take-out gauge, fit check, wrap template, straightedge.
  • Mark cut lines all the way around.
  • Learn the nets for the size you run most. That alone saves you an hour a day.
The layout kitWrap, soapstone, centre punch, level, framing square, a laser and a good tape all laid out, plus the burned end of a tape that was hooked on the wrong edge. PHOTO
  • A flat, clear bench is the biggest time-saver in the trade. You cannot build a straight spool on a crowned bench.
  • Dry fit the whole assembly before any of it gets burned in. Every time.
  • Match-mark everything you take apart. A line across the joint so it goes back exactly as it came off.
  • Sight down every spool before it leaves. Doglegs are born at the bench and discovered in the rack.
  • Measure the spool again after welding. Welds pull.
  • Cap open ends the moment a spool is done. Gloves, hoods, bolts and rain all end up inside open pipe — and it all gets hydro-tested in there.
  • Stage in the order it installs. The last thing you want is the far spool buried under the near ones.
  • Label every spool with its mark and its line number, big enough to read from a lift.
A bench set up to workRollers set level, match marks across a joint, a square standing on the flange face, and a spool dry-fitted with everything clamped before a single tack. PHOTO
  • A 45 and a piece beats a fight with a 90 nine times out of ten. Faster, flows better, and gives you somewhere to absorb error.
  • Think about the wrench before you weld the flange. Walk the bolt swing, the handwheel swing, the insulation thickness.
  • Hang it loosely as you build, final it at the end, working from the anchor outward.
  • Support both sides before you cut into an existing line. Old pipe holds itself up until it doesn't.
  • Photograph anything you're about to cover up. Worth more than your memory in six months.
  • Look up before you commit a route. Duct, tray, conduit and sprinkler all want that ceiling. Losing the coordination fight after you've hung it is the expensive way to learn it.
  • Mark up your print in red as you go and turn it in.
  • Leave access. Somebody has to service this in ten years.
When the print and the field disagree

Stop. Field conditions win on dimensions and the print wins on intent, but the decision belongs to the foreman and the engineer — not to you alone at two in the afternoon.

Making it fit in the fieldA field weld left long and trimmed to the steel, a spool tacked in place and checked with a level, and the wrench room around a flange that somebody thought about beforehand. PHOTO
  • Show up early and ready. Tools in order, at the work at start time. Nothing builds a reputation faster.
  • Ask the question. An hour guessing costs more than the question ever will, and nobody respects a man who quietly welded it wrong.
  • Own the mistake fast. A wrong cut caught in ten minutes is a nuisance. Caught after the hydro, it's a shutdown.
  • Read the whole print, not just your line. Knowing what's coming through the rack next week is how you stop building yourself into a corner.
  • Watch the hands who make it look easy and ask why they did it that way. Most will tell you.
  • Take care of your tape, your level and your square. Everything you build is only as true as those three.
  • Learn the next material. The fitter who can run weld, screw, copper and grooved is the one who stays working.
  • Keep your own notes. Take-outs that surprised you, tricks that worked, the number for the supply house. Your own book beats anybody else's.
  • The work outlives you. Somebody opens that ceiling in twenty years and sees what you did. Build it so you'd be glad to be standing there.
Take-out
Center of a fitting to its face. Copper is the one exception — its take-out already runs to the bottom of the socket, so it needs no separate add-back (3.1).
Add-back
How far the pipe buries into the fitting, and gets added back onto the take-out. Threaded, socket-weld steel, and PVC/CPVC. Copper has none of its own — the take-out already runs to the socket bottom (3.1).
Net
Take-out minus add-back, where there is one. What you actually subtract — for copper that is just the take-out.
C-to-C
Center-to-center. How prints dimension.
Offset
How far the line moves sideways or up.
Travel
The sloped piece in an offset, center to center.
Run
How far forward the line moves while it's offsetting.
Roll
A second offset at 90° to the first.
Spool
Pipe with fittings on it, built at the bench.
BOP / TOP
Bottom of pipe / top of pipe.
Invert
Inside bottom of a gravity drain. What you grade to.
Working point
Where two centerlines cross.
Hi-lo
Inside misalignment at a weld joint.
Two-holing
Flange bolt holes straddling the centerline.
Dogleg
A spool that isn't straight.
Burn an inch
Start at the 1" mark so you're not trusting the hook.
Laying length
End-to-end dimension of a fitting. Cast iron and DWV.
Olet
A branch fitting welded onto the side of a pipe.
Swing joint
Ells and nipples that let a threaded connection rotate into place.
Drip leg
A collection pocket on a steam line, trapped at the bottom.
Punch list
The items left to finish before turnover.
1.414
45° travel multiplier. Most-used number in the trade.
1.000
45° run multiplier — run equals offset.
0.707
Travel back to offset.
2.613
22-1/2° travel multiplier.
0.4142
Parallel-offset stagger at 45°. Also tan 22-1/2°.
1.5 × size
Butt weld LR 90 take-out — holds from 1" up. The 1/2", 3/4" and 1" LR 90s are all a flat 1.50" (1.11).
1 × size
Butt weld SR 90 take-out.
1.50"
2" threaded 90 net.
0.50"
1/2" copper 90 take-out — straight to the socket bottom, no separate step (3.1).
3-4-5
Square, every time.
3.1416
OD × this = circumference.
0.0408
ID² × this = gallons per foot.
0.433
PSI per foot of water head.
8.34
Pounds per gallon of water.
10.69
Steel pipe weight constant.
0.78
Carbon steel growth per 100 ft per 100°F.
3.60
Same for PVC. Four and a half times steel.
60 in-lb
No-hub coupling torque.

What this is, where the numbers came from, and what to do when you find something wrong — because you will, and I want to hear about it.

Edition
Version 5
Data current as of
September 2026
Standards
Figures reflect the editions named in each entry. Standards get revised — check the current edition of the one your job runs to.

What this book is

A field reference for pipefitters, written to be used with dirty hands on a phone with no signal. Every material gets its own section with its own cut rule, so when you are on weld pipe nothing from the threaded side is in front of you. The shared math sits behind that, and section 18 teaches it from scratch if you want it.

What this book is not

Read this once, properly

This is not a code, a standard, an engineering document, or a substitute for any of them. It does not replace your job spec, your drawings, your engineer, your foreman, or your own judgment. Nothing in it is an instruction to do work you are not trained and qualified to do.

Reinforcement, blind thickness, support design, anchors and guides, rigging plans, test pressures and anything touching a pressure boundary are engineering decisions. This book explains what they are and how the numbers work so you understand what you are building. It does not authorise you to make those calls.

When this book and the spec on your job disagree, the spec wins. Every time, no exceptions.

Where the numbers come from

Kind of numberSource
Fitting and flange dimensionsNominal per the ASME standard named in the entry — B16.5, B16.9, B16.10, B16.11, B16.20, B16.47, B16.48, B36.10M, B1.20.1. The standard itself is the authority, and it is worth having on a job that runs to it.
Layout ordinates, trig, conversionsWorked out from the geometry and computed, not copied. Check any of them yourself with the formulas given.
Grooved, press, olets, valves, gasketsTypical working figures. The maker's catalog governs — these vary by brand, by run size and by schedule.
Rigging, hangers, testing, safetyWritten to OSHA 1926 and common industry practice. Your employer's program and the tag on the equipment govern.
Fall protection figuresOSHA 1926 Subpart M — 1926.501 and 1926.502(b) and (d), cited in the entry. The standard is the authority, and your site's program may be stricter.
Hot work, fire watchOSHA 1910.252 and NFPA 51B. Where both apply the tighter one governs, and your permit says which.
Oxy-fuel settings and cylinder rulesCylinder and pressure rules from OSHA 1910.253. Tip pressures are typical published figures for one common tip series — the chart that came with your torch governs.
Hanger spacing, grade, drainageCommon maximums. Local code governs and varies by jurisdiction.
Flow, velocity and volumeComputed from the formulas shown, on published pipe IDs. Velocity limits are common industry practice. Pipe sizing is an engineering function — the drawing governs.

Standards get revised. Nothing here is a substitute for the current edition of the one your job runs to.

Trademarks

Trade names appear in this book because they are what people say on the job. They are used only to identify those companies' products, and this book is independent — not affiliated with, authorized by, sponsored by or endorsed by any of them.

MarkOwner
Weldolet®, Sockolet®, Thredolet®, Elbolet®, Latrolet®, Nipolet®Bonney Forge Corporation
Victaulic®Victaulic Company
Teflon®The Chemours Company
ProPress®, Viega®Viega LLC
NIBCO®NIBCO Inc.
Anvil®ASC Engineered Solutions
Shurjoint®Shurjoint Piping Products
AlliedAllied Group / Allied Fittings
Victor®ESAB Group Inc.
Harris®The Harris Products Group / Lincoln Electric

Full trademark and third-party notices, plus the terms, privacy policy and copyright licence, are in section 20.

All other marks are the property of their respective owners. Where this book can, it uses the generic name for a fitting — butt weld outlet rather than the brand, grooved coupling rather than the brand, PTFE tape rather than the brand — because that is what you order by and any supply house will understand it.

Field video

Entries marked GUIDE in the section index have a step-through walkthrough built into the book. Those work with no signal, anywhere, forever.

Real footage is being filmed for those entries and will land in the book itself — shot on the job, at working speed, on pipe that has to go together. Nothing will be hosted somewhere that can take it down or put an advert in front of it.

Found something wrong?

Tell me — I mean it

A take-out that does not match your catalog, a formula that does not close, a practice answer that comes out different, a habit from your shop that belongs in here. Send the entry number, what you got, and what you expected. Corrections go in fast and you will see them the next time you open it.

This book gets better because fitters tell me where it is wrong. That is the whole arrangement.

Terms of use

Terms of use

THIS BOOK IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITH NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

To the fullest extent the law allows, the author is not liable for any loss, damage, injury, rework or delay arising out of the use of, or reliance on, anything in this book, and total liability will not exceed what you paid for it in the twelve months before the claim. Nothing here limits any liability that cannot lawfully be limited.

You are responsible for verifying every figure against the governing standard, specification, code and manufacturer's data for your job, and for working within your training, your qualifications and the rules of your site. If you are not sure, ask someone who is.

Thirteen calculators and your cut list, all on this page. Tap along the top to switch — every one shows the math underneath, so you can check it by hand or learn it as you go.

Offset calculator

Measure three things between the two pipes: the rise (how much higher or lower B is), the run (how far along the line B is) and the roll (how far over to one side). From those it works out the angle the fittings have to be, the travel and the cut — and which stock fittings would fit instead. Pick the size and it fills the take-outs for whatever angle comes out. Already picked your fittings and just need to know how much run they take? Change What do you have.

Difference in elevation, centreline to centreline
Over to one side, centreline to centreline. 0 if it only rises
Along the line, measured the way you pick below
Take-outs — filled from the size for any angle
0 if your shop pulls the joints closed
Which way it runs — turns the drawing, the math stays the same
True offset
—
Travel C-to-C
—
Run / advance
—
Cut this pipe
—

Type fractions however you say them — 18 1/2, 18-1/2 or 18.5 all work. Nothing here overrides a drawing, a spec or the tag on a sling.

A hand bender is a protractor with a handle. Everything it does comes down to putting the right mark in the right place on the shoe and then bending until the right number lines up.

ARROW stub-ups STAR back to back NOTCH — offsets THREE MARKS, THREE JOBS
A hand bender has three reference marks and each does one job: the arrow for stub-ups, the star (or teardrop) for back-to-back bends, and the notch or rim for the centre bend of a saddle. Learn which is which on your own bender — the makers do not all mark them alike. The marks are not interchangeable. Using the arrow where the job wants the star is the single commonest conduit mistake, and it puts every bend after it out by the take-up.

What is in your hand

The shoe
The curved casting the conduit wraps around. Its radius is fixed, and that radius is where take-up, gain and shrink all come from.
Degree marks
Cast into the shoe or the frame. Usually 10, 22½, 30, 45 and 60, plus the 90.
The hook
Catches the conduit and gives you something to stand on. Your foot goes here, not on the handle.
The handle
Leverage only. You steer with it; the foot does the work.

The three reference marks

MarkPut your line on it for
ArrowStub-ups, and both bends of a simple offset — flip the conduit 180° between them. The workhorse.
Star / teardropBack-to-back bends — the second 90 of a U.
Rim notchThe centre of the bend. The 45 in a three-point saddle.
Read the bender in your hand

Manufacturers do not all mark the same way, and take-up is stamped on most benders for a reason. Bend one piece of scrap and measure it before you cut a bundle to a number you got out of a book — this one included.

Which conduit

EMT
Thin wall. Set-screw or compression fittings, no threads. What a hand bender is made for.
IMC
Heavier wall, threadable. Bends harder and holds its shape better.
Rigid (RMC)
Heaviest, threaded. Beyond small sizes this is a hydraulic bender's job, not a hand bender's.
Keep it flat and keep it square

Bend on the floor, not on a bench or across a hole. Steady foot pressure all the way through the bend, and keep the conduit flat — almost every dogleg starts with the bender rocking or the conduit lifting halfway through.

The bend eats length. Take-up is how much, and subtracting it is the whole trick to a 90 that lands where you said it would.

MARK = DESIRED STUB HEIGHT − TAKE-UP
ConduitTypical take-up
1/2" EMT5"
3/4" EMT6"
1" EMT8"
1-1/4" EMT11"

Typical for common hand benders. Yours may differ — it is usually stamped on the shoe. Verify with one test bend.

Worked — a 10" stub in 1/2" EMT 10 − 5 = 5"
Measure 5" back from the end, mark it, put the mark on the arrow, bend to 90°.
Where the mark actually goes

Step through it

10" the stub you want 1/2" EMT take-up = 5" stamped on the shoe 10" from the end 5" MARK HERE ARROW 10" TAKE-UP IS PER BENDER bend a scrap and measure before you cut a bundle

Two bends of the same angle, opposite directions, and the run steps over. The only number you need is how far apart to put the marks.

DISTANCE BETWEEN MARKS = OFFSET DEPTH × MULTIPLIER
AngleMultiplierShrink per inch of offset
10°6.0 (5.8 true)1/16"
22-1/2°2.63/16"
30°2.01/4"
45°1.43/8"
60°1.21/2"

Shrink is the trade's rounded number. The true figure is tan of half the angle: .268 at 30°, .414 at 45° (closer to 7/16"), .577 at 60° (closer to 9/16"). On a small offset the rounding disappears in the bend; on a big one at 45° or 60° use the true number — a 4" offset at 60° really shrinks 2-5/16", not 2".

Worked — stepping over a 4" obstruction at 30° Marks: 4 × 2.0 = 8" apart
Shrink: 4 × 1/4" = 1" — the run finishes 1" short, so add 1" before you cut.
Marks, bends and the shrink nobody remembers

Step through it

4" HIGH 30° → multiplier 2.0 4" × 2.0 = 8" between marks 8" 30° same angle, opposite way SHRINK 1" 4" × 1/4" — add it back before you cut
Shrink is what makes you short at the box

Going up and over uses length. The conduit reaches less far down the run after the offset than it did before, by the shrink amount. Forget it once and the piece will not make the connector, and you will swear you measured right — because you did.

Keeping both bends in one plane

Bend the first, pull the conduit out, rotate it 180° and reseat it, then bend the second. If the two bends are not in the same plane the offset comes out with a twist in it and will not lie against the wall. Sight down it before you leave the bender.

Box offset

The little one that steps into a box knockout — usually about 1/2" to 3/4" deep, two shallow bends close together, often done by eye once you have made a hundred. Same math, small numbers.

An offset goes over and stays there. A saddle goes over something and comes back down — which is what you need when a pipe crosses your run.

Three-point saddle

CENTRE BEND 45° · OUTER BENDS 22½° · OUTER MARKS AT 2.5 × DEPTH
  1. Mark the centre of the obstacle on the conduit.
  2. Measure 2.5 × the obstacle depth each way from that centre mark, and mark both.
  3. Centre mark on the rim notch, bend 45°.
  4. Both outer marks on the arrow, bend 22½° each, in the opposite direction to the centre bend.
  5. Allow 3/16" of shrink per inch of obstacle depth.
Worked — saddling a 2" pipe Outer marks: 2 × 2.5 = 5" each side of centre
Shrink: 2 × 3/16" = 3/8"
Three marks, three bends

Step through it

2" PIPE IN THE WAY CENTRE 5" 5" 2" × 2.5 = 5" 45° on the rim notch 22½° 22½° SHRINK 3/8" 2" deep × 3/16" per inch FOUR-POINT two offsets, back to back, for something wide

Four-point saddle

When the obstacle is wide — a duct, a beam, a bank of pipe — a three-point will not sit over it. A four-point is simply two offsets back to back: up and over on one side, along the top, down and out on the other. Same multipliers, same shrink, applied twice.

Which one

Three-point for a single round obstruction you are crossing. Four-point for anything with width, or anywhere the conduit needs to run flat along the top of whatever it is clearing.

Back-to-back

Two 90s facing each other — the U that goes up a wall, across, and back down, or the piece that drops into two boxes.

  1. Bend the first 90 as an ordinary stub, off the arrow.
  2. Measure the finished back-to-back dimension along the conduit from the back of the first bend.
  3. Put that mark on the star (the teardrop), and bend the second 90 in the same direction.
Back of bend, not the end

Back-to-back dimensions are measured back of bend to back of bend. Measure from the end of the conduit and you will be out by the stub height every time.

Kicks

A single bend that moves the run sideways or up without bringing it back — a stub that has to land off-line, or a run stepping onto a different plane. Treat it as half an offset: pick an angle, use the same multiplier on the rise you want, and remember it shrinks like an offset does.

Gain

A bend cuts the corner. Two legs measured square to their imaginary corner always add up to more than the bent conduit actually uses, and the difference is gain. Take-up is really just gain accounted for at the shoe — which is why subtracting take-up works and why you never add the two legs together and cut to that.

Parallel and concentric runs

  • Conduits running side by side through a turn need different radii — the outside one travels further. Same centre point, bigger sweep.
  • Keep the spacing constant through the bend, not just before and after it. Stagger the marks the way you stagger parallel pipe offsets.
  • Rack it and strap it so the spacing is held. A bank of conduit is judged entirely on whether the lines stay parallel.
Four quarter bends and no more

Code limits you to the equivalent of four quarter bends — 360° total — between pull points. Offsets and saddles count toward it. Plan the pulls before you plan the bends, and check the edition of the code on your job.

Back to back and the gainTwo bends made back to back with a tape reading the distance between them, and a stub-up measured with and without the gain so the difference shows. PHOTO
  • Using book take-up on a bender that does not match. Bend a scrap, measure it, write the real number on the bender with a paint pen.
  • Forgetting shrink. The offset is right, the run is short, and nothing lines up at the box.
  • Bends out of plane. Rotate a full 180° between the two bends of an offset and sight down it before you walk away.
  • Over-bending and bending back. EMT kinks and flattens on the way back. Cut it off and start again — it is cheaper than a pull that hangs up.
  • Bending too close to a coupling. The wall is doubled there and it will kink at the transition.
  • Not reaming the cut. A burr on the inside skins the insulation off a conductor on the pull, and nobody finds it until the megger does.
  • More than 360° between pull points. Legal problem and a practical one — the pull will not go.
  • Standing on the handle instead of the hook. That is how you get a bent shoe and a flattened bend.
  • Measuring back-to-back from the end instead of from the back of the bend.
  • Support and spacing forgotten. Straps within the required distance of every box and at the required intervals — a beautifully bent run that is unsupported is still a rejected run.
Conduit gone wrongA dogleg, a kinked bend, a stub-up short by the take-up, a saddle that missed the obstruction, and a run with more than 360° of bend in it. PHOTO

Everything in this section is the same one trick. A pipe is a flat sheet rolled up. Unroll it in your head, draw the cut on the flat, roll it back, and burn what you drew.

ON THE PIPE: STRAIGHT UNROLL IT UNROLLED FLAT
A cut that is a straight line on the pipe becomes a curve once the skin is unrolled. That is the whole reason you cannot wrap a square line round a pipe and call it a miter.

The four steps — every layout in this section

  1. Wrap. A strip of paper, roofing felt or a proper wrap-around, long enough to go round the pipe with an overlap. Line the two edges up with each other, not with the pipe — that's what makes the mark square.
  2. Divide. Step the circumference into 16 equal parts. Those are your stations. Number them.
  3. Ordinates. At each station, measure one distance from a common square base line. That distance is the ordinate. Where the numbers come from is what the rest of this section is about.
  4. Connect and cut. Join the marks with a smooth curve — a piece of banding or a scrap of 1/8" rod bent to follow makes a better fair curve than a free hand. Burn on the waste side and grind to the line — torch technique and the kerf allowance are in 1.5c.
Why 16

Sixteen stations is fine enough that the curve between marks is almost straight, and it's easy to get: fold the wrap in half, in half, in half, in half. On anything under 3" use 8 and save the time. On 18" and up, use 24 or 32 — a 24" pipe has 4-11/16" between 16 stations and you'll cut flats into the curve.

Two rules that save every layout

Base line

Every ordinate on one piece gets measured from the same square line. Not from the pipe end — the pipe end is never square until you make it square. Square a line all the way round first, and measure everything from that.

Station zero

Mark station 1 with a punch or a deep soapstone cross and carry that mark onto both pieces before you cut anything. Every one of these layouts is symmetrical, which means the pattern will fit four different ways and only one of them is right. When you lose station 1 you lose the job.

What goes where

15.4–15.5Cutting a pipe off at an angle, and turning a corner with mitered pieces.
15.6–15.10Two pipes running into each other — tees, saddles, off-centre and 45° branches.
15.11–15.14Cones and heads. Reducers, transitions, dished heads.
15.15–15.20Coils, steel, supports on elbows, bolt holes, and pipe bends.

Stations and circumference numbers: 15.2 and 15.3. Start there if you have never wrapped a pipe.

The number you step round a pipe with dividers. Circumference is OD × 3.1416 — everything else on this page is that number divided up.

16 PARTS FOLD IT IN HALF, FOUR TIMES circ ÷ 16
Sixteen stations, got by folding rather than measuring — no tape and no math, and any error in your circumference cancels itself out. The quarter marks are the ones you punch.
CIRCUMFERENCE = OD × 3.1416  ·  SPACING = CIRC ÷ PARTS
SizeODCirc÷3÷4÷6÷8÷12÷16÷24
1/2"0.8402.640.8800.6600.4400.3300.2200.1650.110
3/4"1.0503.301.1000.8250.5500.4120.2750.2060.137
1"1.3154.131.3771.0330.6890.5160.3440.2580.172
1-1/4"1.6605.221.7381.3040.8690.6520.4350.3260.217
1-1/2"1.9005.971.9901.4920.9950.7460.4970.3730.249
2"2.3757.462.4871.8651.2440.9330.6220.4660.311
2-1/2"2.8759.033.0112.2581.5051.1290.7530.5650.376
3"3.50011.003.6652.7491.8331.3740.9160.6870.458
4"4.50014.144.7123.5342.3561.7671.1780.8840.589
5"5.56317.485.8264.3692.9132.1851.4561.0920.728
6"6.62520.816.9385.2033.4692.6021.7341.3010.867
8"8.62527.109.0326.7744.5163.3872.2581.6941.129
10"10.75033.7711.2578.4435.6294.2222.8142.1111.407
12"12.75040.0613.35210.0146.6765.0073.3382.5031.669
14"14.00043.9814.66110.9967.3305.4983.6652.7491.833
16"16.00050.2716.75512.5668.3786.2834.1893.1422.094
18"18.00056.5518.85014.1379.4257.0694.7123.5342.356
20"20.00062.8320.94415.70810.4727.8545.2363.9272.618
24"24.00075.4025.13318.85012.5669.4256.2834.7123.142

What each column is for

÷3Trisecting — a true Y, a three-leg support, 120° work.
÷4Quarter marks. Clocking a flange, four tacks, top-dead-centre.
÷8Small bore layout, and 8-bolt flanges.
÷12Cone and reducer triangulation, orange peel gores.
÷16The standard for miters, saddles and laterals. Most of this section.
÷24Big bore — 18" and up, where 16 stations leaves flats in the curve.
Do it by folding, not by measuring

Wrap the paper, mark the overlap, take it off, and fold it in half four times. Sixteen equal parts, dead accurate, no math, and any error in your circumference measurement cancels itself out. The table is for when you have to step it with dividers on the pipe itself.

Close the circle

Step it round with dividers and the last space is never the same as the first. Split the difference and step it again. Two or three passes and it closes. Never just crowd the error into the last space — it lands on station 16, which is where your seam goes.

An ordinate is one measurement, taken at one station, from one square line. A whole cut is just sixteen of them joined up.

BASE LINE — squared all the way round 1 5 9 13 1 ORDINATE at station 9 STATION
Every ordinate is measured from the same squared base line — never from the last mark, because errors add up that way.

Setting the base line

  1. Wrap the pipe and scribe all the way round. That is your base line — square to the pipe, and the only thing you measure from.
  2. Put it far enough back that every ordinate lands on metal, not past the end of the pipe. On a deep cut give yourself the full spread plus a couple of inches.
  3. Divide the base line into 16 (15.2). Scribe a short line up the pipe at each — those are the station lines. Number 1 through 16 and punch number 1.

Numbering — the convention this book uses

Station 1The short point of the cut. Throat of a miter, crotch of a saddle.
Station 5Quarter round — 90° from station 1.
Station 9The long point. Directly opposite station 1.
13Three-quarter round. Same ordinate as 5.

Stations 2–8 and 16–10 mirror each other, so every table in this section only lists 1 through 9. Read it forwards to 9, then backwards to 16.

STN 10 = STN 8  ·  11 = 7  ·  12 = 6  ·  13 = 5  ·  14 = 4  ·  15 = 3  ·  16 = 2

Taking the lengths off

  1. Hook or butt the tape on the base line at station 1. Mark the ordinate for station 1.
  2. Move to station 2, measure from the base line again — never from the last mark. Errors add up the other way.
  3. Round to the nearest 16th as you go, but do the math in decimals and convert once (17.1).
  4. Sixteen marks. Bend a piece of 1/8" rod or banding to touch them all and scribe the curve.
Paper first on anything you can't afford to cut twice

Do the whole layout on a paper wrap flat on the bench, where you can erase. Then tape the paper to the pipe, line up station 1, and trace. On a big lateral that's twenty minutes against a $900 spool.

Which side of the line

These ordinates land on the outside of the pipe, and the outside is longer than the inside. On thin wall, ignore it. On extra strong and heavier, the wall thickness moves the fit — see 15.8. Cut fat, dress to the line, check the fit dry before the torch comes back out.

Where station 1 and the base line sit changes by layout

Most layouts in this section start station 1 at the short point with the base line back from the cut. The lateral (15.10) starts at the toe with the base line through the horns, and elbow supports (15.17) measure back from the long points. Each entry says where its station 1 and base line are — follow the one you are using, and mark station 1 on the wrap so the template can't go on backwards.

A wrap template in usePaper strip taped round an 8" pipe, sixteen stations punched, ordinates marked, and a piece of banding bent to fair the curve. PHOTO

One pipe cut off on a slant. Do it twice and weld them together and you have made an elbow nobody sells.

SPREAD = OD × tan(cut) 45° THROAT — short point, station 1 HEEL — long point, station 9
One angled cut. The spread from throat to heel is the outside diameter times the tangent of the cut angle — at 45° the tangent is 1, so the spread is simply the OD.

The cut angle

Two pipes meeting at a turn of A degrees are each cut at half of it. The cut plane bisects the angle between them.

CUT OFF SQUARE = TURN ÷ 2

90° turn → 45° cuts. 45° turn → 22-1/2° cuts. 60° turn → 30° cuts.

How far the cut runs — short point to long point

SPREAD = OD × tan (CUT ANGLE)
Worked 8" pipe (OD 8.625), 45° cut. tan 45 = 1.000
SPREAD = 8.625 × 1.000 = 8-5/8" from throat to heel.
Same pipe, 22-1/2° cut: 8.625 × .4142 = 3-9/16"

The ordinates — one table, every pipe, every angle

Multiply the spread by the factor. That's the distance up from the base line at each station, with the base line set at the short point.

ORDINATE = OD × tan(CUT) × FACTOR
StnFactorAlso
10.0000—
20.0381stn 16
30.1464stn 15
40.3087stn 14
50.5000stn 13
60.6913stn 12
70.8536stn 11
80.9619stn 10
91.0000—

Station 1 is the throat (short point), station 9 is the heel (long point). The factors never change — they are the shape of a circle, not the shape of your pipe.

Worked — 6" pipe, 45° cut Spread = 6.625 × 1.0 = 6.625"
Stn 1 = 0 · Stn 2 = 6.625×.0381 = .25" · Stn 3 = ×.1464 = .97" · Stn 4 = ×.3087 = 2.05"
Stn 5 = ×.5 = 3.31" · Stn 6 = 4.58" · Stn 7 = 5.66" · Stn 8 = 6.37" · Stn 9 = 6.625"

45° cut — ordinates straight off the shelf

Inches from the base line at the throat. For any other angle, multiply these by the tangent of your cut angle (22-1/2° ×.4142, 30° ×.5774, 15° ×.2679, 11-1/4° ×.1989).

Size123456789
2"0.0000.0900.3480.7331.1871.6422.0272.2852.375
2-1/2"0.0000.1090.4210.8871.4371.9882.4542.7662.875
3"0.0000.1330.5131.0801.7502.4202.9873.3673.500
4"0.0000.1710.6591.3892.2503.1113.8414.3294.500
5"0.0000.2120.8151.7172.7813.8464.7485.3515.563
6"0.0000.2520.9702.0453.3124.5805.6556.3736.625
8"0.0000.3281.2632.6624.3125.9637.3628.2978.625
10"0.0000.4091.5743.3185.3757.4329.17610.34110.750
12"0.0000.4851.8673.9356.3758.81510.88312.26512.750
14"0.0000.5332.0504.3217.0009.67911.95013.46714.000
16"0.0000.6092.3434.9398.00011.06113.65715.39116.000
18"0.0000.6852.6365.5569.00012.44415.36417.31518.000
20"0.0000.7612.9296.17310.00013.82717.07119.23920.000
24"0.0000.9133.5157.40812.00016.59220.48523.08724.000
Cut both halves from one layout

Lay one pipe out, cut it, and use the drop as the template for the mating piece — flipped end for end. Two cuts off one layout, and they are guaranteed to match because they came off the same line.

Buy it if you can

A mitered 90 is a code question on most process and steam work, and a pressure-drop question on all of it. Butt weld fittings are cheap. Miter when the size, the angle or the schedule doesn't come in a box — not to save a trip to the warehouse.

Above about 14" nobody wants a two-piece 90 in a flow line. Break the turn into three, four or five pieces and it starts to behave like a real elbow.

IN OUT 3 PIECES → 2 JOINTS each joint turns 45° each cut is 22-1/2° off square CUT = TURN ÷ (2 × JOINTS) 90 ÷ (2 × 2) = 22-1/2° middle piece: both ends
A three-piece 90. The cut is the turn divided by twice the number of joints: 90 ÷ 4 = 22-1/2°. The middle piece carries that cut at both ends, turned 180° from each other — get that backwards and you have built a straight piece with two scrap cuts in it.

The one formula

CUT OFF SQUARE = TURN ÷ (2 × (PIECES − 1))

A turn made of P pieces has P−1 joints. Each joint turns the same amount, and each of the two cuts at a joint is half of that.

Turn2 pc3 pc4 pc5 pc
90°45°22.5°15°11.25°
60°30°15°10°7.5°
45°22.5°11.25°7.5°5.625°
30°15°7.5°5°3.75°
22.5°11.25°5.625°3.75°2.812°

The end pieces get one angled cut and one square end. Every middle piece gets the same angle on both ends — and the two cuts are turned 180° from each other, not parallel.

Tangent of the cut — for the spread

SPREAD = OD × tan(CUT)
Turn2 pc3 pc4 pc5 pc
90°1.00000.41420.26790.1989
60°0.57740.26790.17630.1317
45°0.41420.19890.13170.0985
30°0.26790.13170.08750.0655
22.5°0.19890.09850.06550.0491

How long each piece is

Pick a centerline radius R first. Match a long radius elbow and use R = 1.5 × nominal size; go bigger if the line needs the flow.

MIDDLE PIECE — BACK = (R + OD÷2) × 2 × tan(CUT)
MIDDLE PIECE — THROAT = (R − OD÷2) × 2 × tan(CUT)
END PIECE — half of those, plus whatever straight you want
Worked — 16" three-piece 90°, R = 24" Cut = 90 ÷ (2×2) = 22-1/2°, tan = .4142
Spread = 16.0 × .4142 = 6-5/8" throat to heel on every cut
Middle back = (24 + 8) × 2 × .4142 = 26-1/2"
Middle throat = (24 − 8) × 2 × .4142 = 13-1/4"
End pieces = half of each, plus tangent: back 13-1/4", throat 6-5/8"

Cutting the middle pieces

  1. Square a base line near one end. Lay out the first cut off it, station 1 at the throat.
  2. Do not move station 1. Measure the throat length along the pipe from the finished short point and square a second base line there.
  3. Lay the second cut out off that line with station 1 on the opposite side — 180° round, station 9 lined up with the first cut's station 1.
  4. Number every piece and paint an arrow up the back before anything leaves the bench.
The one that bites

Get the second cut's station 1 on the same side as the first and you have built a straight piece of pipe with two scrap cuts in it. Mark the back of every segment with a continuous chalk line down the whole assembly before you break it apart.

How many pieces

Rule of thumb on a 90: two pieces for a vent or a drain, three for general service, four or five for anything pumped or anything a pig has to pass. Each extra piece costs you two more welds and buys back pressure drop. Your spec may set a minimum — check before you cut.

Three pipes into one point, all the same size, all the same angle. Three identical cuts — which is the whole appeal of it.

CROTCH 120° 3 LEGS AT 120° every cut identical: 30° OFF SQUARE spread = OD × .5774 (180 − 120) ÷ 2 = 30
Three legs, 120° apart, three identical cuts — which is the whole appeal of a true Y. The copper lines are where the three pieces meet.

The cut

CUT OFF SQUARE = (180° − ANGLE BETWEEN LEGS) ÷ 2
Between legsCut off squareSpread × OD
120°30°0.5774
90°45°1.0000
60°60°1.7321
45°67.5°2.4142
30°75°3.7321

A true Y is three legs at 120°. That makes every cut 30° off square, and the spread is OD × .5774.

Laying it out

  1. All three pieces get the identical cut: two 30°-off-square half-cuts meeting in a V. Each half has a spread of radius × .5774 (half of OD × .5774).
  2. Each leg meets two others. Split the layout on the station 5–station 13 line — the two points out of the plane of the Y. The half through station 1 mates with one neighbour, the half through station 9 with the other.
  3. Stations 5 and 13 are the long points, the tips of the V, where all three pipes meet on the centre line. Stations 1 and 9 are the short points, facing the neighbouring legs. Ordinates below are from a base line through the short points.
  4. Fit all three up at once on a flat bench with the centre pinned. Tack the long points first, work outward.
Worked — 6" true Y Each half-cut 30° off square. Spread = 3.3125 × .5774 = 1.91"
Stn 1 = 0 · 2 = .15" · 3 = .56" · 4 = 1.18" · 5 = 1.91" · 6 = 1.18" · 7 = .56" · 8 = .15" · 9 = 0 — and 10–16 mirror 2–8

Unequal Y

Two branches off a main at different angles is not a true Y — it's two separate laterals sharing a crotch (15.10). Lay each one out on its own against the main and accept that the two branch cuts are different.

The crotch

Three weld preps meet at one point and there is nothing behind them. That point is a full penetration weld with no backing and no room, and it is the first thing that leaks. On anything pressurised, put a gusset or a wrapper plate over the crotch, and get the welder to look at it before you tack it solid.

When it's worth it

True Ys are for drainage headers, flare and vent collection, and sample manifolds — places where you want balanced flow and no dead leg. On a pressure line, price a cast or forged wye first.

A branch running square into a header. The branch gets a fishmouth cut, the header gets a hole. Get the fishmouth right and the hole almost draws itself.

BRANCH RUN HORN HORN CROTCH THE SAME CUT, UNROLLED
A branch square into a run. The horns reach down the sides of the run; the crotches sit on the crown. Two horns and two crotches, repeating every quarter turn — which is why five ordinates cover all sixteen stations.

What the cut looks like

Two horns that reach down the sides of the run, and two crotches where the branch meets the crown. The horns are 90° round from the crotches, so the shape repeats four times around the branch — which is why the table below only needs five rows.

How deep the cut goes

DEPTH = (RUN OD ÷ 2) − √((RUN OD÷2)² − (BR OD÷2)²)
Worked — 4" branch on 8" run Run radius 4.3125, branch radius 2.25
√(18.60 − 5.06) = 3.679
DEPTH = 4.3125 − 3.679 = .633" — call it 5/8" from crotch to horn

Full size on full size, the depth is exactly half the branch OD and the horns come to a knife point.

The ordinates

Multiply the branch OD by the factor for your size ratio. Base line at the crotch, station 1.

ORDINATE = BRANCH OD × FACTOR   (ratio = BR OD ÷ RUN OD)

Column headings are the ratio. Interpolate between columns — the curve is gentle and a 64th either way is nothing.

Stn10.8750.750.6250.50.3750.25
1 · 90.00000.00000.00000.00000.00000.00000.0000
2 · 80.03810.03300.02800.02320.01850.01380.0092
3 · 70.14640.12250.10150.08240.06460.04770.0315
4 · 60.30870.23510.18600.14680.11310.08260.0541
5 · 130.50000.29480.22570.17550.13400.09730.0635

Stations repeat every quarter: 6=4, 7=3, 8=2, 9=1, 10=2, 11=3, 12=4, 13=5, 14=4, 15=3, 16=2.

Worked — 6" branch on 12" run Ratio = 6.625 ÷ 12.75 = .52 — a little past the .50 column, 16% of the way to .625.
Interpolate each factor: stn 5 = .1340 + .16 × (.1755 − .1340) = .1406
Stn 1 = 0 · 2 = 6.625×.0193 = .13" · 3 = ×.0674 = .45" · 4 = ×.1184 = .78" · Stn 5 = ×.1406 = .93" (15/16")
Reading straight off the .50 column gives .89" — 1/32" shy at the horns. Close enough on a scribe-and-dress fit; interpolate when the cut has to land.
Shallow, because the run is nearly twice the branch. The bigger the header, the flatter the saddle.
Laying out a saddle

Step through it

12" run6" branch HORNHORN CROTCH (front & back) 6.625 ÷ 12.75 = .52 → past .50 12345678910111213141516 end of branch16 stations 1 & 9 crotch · 5 & 13 horn BASE LINE through the crotches cut end this way ↓ wrap, laid flat .13.45.78.93 0 · .13 · .45 · .78 · .93 bend banding through the dots — scribe sits downall round scribe thehole off it

The hole in the run

HALF LENGTH at arc ψ = √((BR OD÷2)² − (RUN OD÷2)² × sin²ψ)

Measured along the run axis, either side of the branch centerline, at arc angle ψ round from the crown. The hole closes out at ψ = sin⁻¹(BR OD ÷ RUN OD).

Or do it the easy way

Cut the branch first. Stand it on the run, get it plumb and square, and scribe round it with a soapstone held flat against the pipe. That line is the hole. Nine fitters out of ten do it that way and it beats a layout every time, as long as the branch is cut right and actually sits down.

Hole size

The hole is the bore, not the OD. Cut it to the branch ID plus a hair for the root, and dress the edge back to bare metal. Cut it to the OD and you have put a step in the flow and given the welder nothing to root onto.

Reinforcement

Anything over about a third of the run, or anything on a coded line, needs the reinforcement checked — that's an engineering call, not a field one. If the spec calls a pad or a full-size fitting, a saddle cut is not a substitute.

Same cut, same factors, one difference — on heavy wall you stop laying out to the outside of the pipe.

OD OD ID ID MEAN DIAMETER OD − wall WALL HEAVY WALL — the joint is made through it EXTRA STRONG: a gap you cannot weld out
On heavy wall, laying out to the outside leaves you long, because the joint is made through the wall. On standard weight the difference disappears into the bevel; on extra strong it is a gap you cannot weld out. Lay out to the mean diameter — OD minus one wall.

Why standard weight forgives you and extra strong doesn't

The layout in 15.7 develops the line where the outside of the branch meets the outside of the run. But the joint is made through the wall, and the root is at the bore. On standard weight the wall is thin enough that the difference disappears into the bevel. On extra strong it's a half inch of steel, and it shows up as a gap at the crotch and a branch that sits proud.

HEAVY WALL — LAY OUT TO THE MEAN DIAMETER
MEAN D = OD − WALL

Run the same formulas and the same factors from 15.7, but feed them mean diameters instead of ODs, for both pipes. Then burn on the outside of that line and bevel back to it.

Wall and mean diameter

SizeODSTD wallMean DXS wallMean D
2"2.3750.1542.2210.2182.157
3"3.5000.2163.2840.3003.200
4"4.5000.2374.2630.3374.163
6"6.6250.2806.3450.4326.193
8"8.6250.3228.3030.5008.125
10"10.7500.36510.3850.50010.250
12"12.7500.37512.3750.50012.250
14"14.0000.37513.6250.50013.500
16"16.0000.37515.6250.50015.500
Worked — 8" XS branch on 8" XS run, full size Mean D both = 8.625 − .500 = 8.125
Ratio = 1.00, so depth = half the mean D = 4.06"
Lay it out on the OD instead and you get 4.31" — a quarter inch too deep, right where the horns come to a point. That quarter inch is a gap you cannot weld out.

The bevel changes as it goes round

At the hornsThe two pipes are near parallel. Bevel is close to a normal 37-1/2° and the fit is easy.
Quarter roundOpening up. Roll the grinder as you go — the prep is a changing angle, not a fixed one.
At the crotchThe pipes meet almost square. Bevel goes near flat, land gets wide, and this is where a heavy-wall saddle leaks. Take your time here.
Dry fit it — twice

On XS and heavier, set the branch on, look at the light all the way round, mark the high spots, pull it and dress them. Repeat until it sits with no rock and an even root gap. A heavy-wall saddle that rocks will not be saved by the welder, whatever he tells you.

Schedule 160 and double extra strong

Same method — mean diameter, every time. On XXS the wall can be over an inch and the "cut" is really a machining job. Price a forged tee or a weldolet before you start. In most cases the fitting is cheaper than the hours.

A branch that comes in square to the run but not through its centerline. Off to one side to clear a support, or run tangential on purpose so the flow sweeps in instead of slamming in.

E — offset run CL branch CL NOT SYMMETRICAL Work out all sixteen. MAX E = run rad − branch rad
A branch square to the run but off its centreline. One side of the cut is a different shape from the other, so station 2 and station 16 are no longer the same number — you have to work out all sixteen. The offset can never exceed the run radius minus the branch radius.

The formula

HEIGHT at station = √(Rr² − (E + r × sinφ)²)
Rrrun radius (OD ÷ 2)
rbranch radius (OD ÷ 2)
Eoffset — how far the branch centerline sits off the run centerline
φstation angle, 22-1/2° per station

Work out the height at all sixteen stations, find the biggest one, and subtract every height from it. Those answers are your ordinates, measured from a base line at the shortest point.

It is not symmetrical

A centered saddle repeats four times and you only work out five numbers. An eccentric one doesn't repeat — the two sides are different shapes. Do all sixteen. Stations 2 and 16 are not the same number.

Worked — 6" branch on 12" run, offset 3"

Run radius 6.375, branch radius 3.3125, E = 3.000. Ordinates in inches from the base line.

StnOrdinateStnOrdinate
10.75090.750
21.639100.240
32.896110.034
44.397120.000
55.484130.007
64.397140.000
72.896150.034
81.639160.240

How far off you can go

MAX OFFSET = (RUN OD ÷ 2) − (BRANCH OD ÷ 2)

Past that the branch hangs over the side of the run and there is nothing to weld to. In practice stop well short — leave at least the branch wall thickness of run surface outboard of the hole, or the toe of the weld sits on the run's steepest curve with no land under it.

Tangential entries

On tanks and separators a tangential nozzle is drawn deliberately, to spin the liquid down the wall instead of splashing it. The offset is a process number off the drawing — do not adjust it to make your layout easier.

Check the hole first

Lay the hole out on the run and look at it before you cut the branch. On a big offset the hole goes long and narrow and eats more of the run's cross-section than anybody expected. That's a reinforcement question — take it to the engineer, not to the grinder.

A branch coming in at 45° instead of square. Flows better, takes a pig, and takes about three times the layout.

centrelines cross 45° TOE — obtuse side CROTCH — acute side JOINS WITH THE FLOW — crotch upstream
A 45° lateral. On the header, the hole runs a long way down the acute side to the crotch — the hardest weld on the job — and stops just past the crossing at the toe on the obtuse side. On the branch it is the other way round: the crotch is the shortest part of the cut. The branch leans back against the header flow, so the crotch is upstream and the toe downstream — fit it backwards and you have built a scoop.

The shape

ToeThe obtuse side, where the branch leans away from the header. On the header the hole ends only 0.41 × radius past the crossing; on the branch this side stands long.
CrotchThe acute side, where the branch tucks under. On the header the hole reaches 2.41 × radius down from the crossing; on the branch this is the shortest part of the cut. Hardest weld on the job.
HornsThe two sides, 90° round from either. On a full size lateral they reach right down to the header's centerline.

The formula

S = [√(Rr² − r²sin²φ) − r × cosφ × cosα] ÷ sinα

S is the distance from the point where the two centerlines cross, measured out along the branch, to the cut at that station. α is the angle between the pipes — 45° here, but the formula takes any angle, including 90° (which gives you the saddle in 15.7 back again).

Work out all sixteen, find the smallest, subtract it from every one. Those are your ordinates, from a base line through the lowest point — on a full-size lateral that is the two horns (stations 5 and 13).

Full size 45° lateral — multiply by the pipe radius

Branch and run the same size. Station 1 is the toe, station 9 the crotch. Numbers are distance from the centerline crossing. On the header the toe and crotch land on opposite sides of the crossing, so the hole is 0.414 + 2.414 = 2.83 radii long — the pipe diameter ÷ sin 45°.

Stn× radiusStn× radius
10.414292.4142
20.3827102.2304
30.2929111.7071
40.1585120.9239
50.0000130.0000
60.9239140.1585
71.7071150.2929
82.2304160.3827
A 45° lateral, the parts and the cut

Step through it

header FLOW TOE CROTCH acute sideobtuse side CROSSING 2.414 r = 8.00" .414 r = 1.37" hole 9.37" long 6.625 ÷ sin 45° BASE LINE through the horns (5 & 13) 9 crotch 8.00" 1 toe 1.37" ↑ cut end 6" full size · factor × 3.3125 CUT THE BRANCH FIRST set it at 45° on a stand, brace it, and scribe the header hole off it

Worked — 6" branch on 8" run, 45°

Run radius 4.3125, branch radius 3.3125.

StnFrom crossingOrdinate
12.7860.017
22.7690.000
32.7790.010
43.0290.260
53.9051.136
65.5652.796
77.4634.694
88.8906.121
99.4116.642
108.8906.121
117.4634.694
125.5652.796
133.9051.136
143.0290.260
152.7790.010
162.7690.000

The hole

The hole in the header for a 45° lateral is a long oval, and it is not symmetrical end to end. Cut the branch first, sit it in place at 45° on a stand, brace it, and scribe. Trying to develop that hole flat and then roll it onto the header is how you end up burning a second one.

The crotch

This is a full penetration weld into a sharp corner with no access. Most specs want a reinforcing pad or a forged lateral above a certain size or pressure. Check before you spend a shift on the layout.

Which way it points

On drainage and on anything with solids, the lateral joins with the flow — the crotch upstream, the toe downstream. Get it backwards and you've built a scoop that catches everything going past. Check the arrow on the iso before you cut the hole.

A reducer is a cone with the point cut off. Unrolled flat it is a piece of a ring — two arcs and two straight sides. Four numbers and you can draw it.

BIG SM LENGTH INCLUDED ANGLE UNROLLED — A WEDGE OF A RING big arc radius = slant × big rad ÷ (big − sm)
A reducer is a cone with the point cut off. Unrolled it is a wedge of a ring: two arcs struck from one centre, with the big arc radius equal to the slant length times the big radius divided by the difference in radii.

The four numbers

SLANT = √(LENGTH² + (BIG RAD − SM RAD)²)
BIG ARC RADIUS = SLANT × BIG RAD ÷ (BIG RAD − SM RAD)
SM ARC RADIUS = SLANT × SM RAD ÷ (BIG RAD − SM RAD)
INCLUDED ANGLE = 360° × BIG RAD ÷ BIG ARC RADIUS

Drawing it

  1. Strike a centre point on the plate. From it swing the big arc radius and the small arc radius. Two concentric arcs.
  2. From the centre, lay off the included angle. Draw both radial lines out to the big arc. That wedge between the two arcs is your pattern.
  3. Add root gap, weld prep and any forming allowance on the two straight edges.
  4. Check before you cut: the length of the big arc should equal the big end's circumference. If it doesn't, your angle is wrong.
CHECK: BIG ARC LENGTH = BIG OD × 3.1416
Worked — 12" to 8", cone 10" long Big rad 6.375, small rad 4.3125, difference 2.0625
SLANT = √(100 + 4.25) = 10.21"
BIG ARC RAD = 10.21 × 6.375 ÷ 2.0625 = 31.56"
SM ARC RAD = 10.21 × 4.3125 ÷ 2.0625 = 21.35"
ANGLE = 360 × 6.375 ÷ 31.56 = 72.7°
Check: 72.7° of a 31.56" radius = 40.05" = 12.75 × 3.1416 ✓

Standard butt weld reducers, worked out

Using the full catalog length as the cone length. A real B16.9 reducer has a short straight tangent at each end, so the actual cone is a little shorter — measure the fitting if you are matching one.

ReducerBig ODSm ODLenSlantBig radSm radAngle
2 x 12.3751.3153.03.0466.833.7862.6°
3 x 23.5002.3753.53.54511.037.4857.1°
4 x 34.5003.5004.04.03118.1414.1144.7°
6 x 46.6254.5005.55.60217.4611.8668.3°
8 x 68.6256.6256.06.08326.2320.1559.2°
10 x 810.7508.6257.07.08035.8228.7454.0°
12 x 1012.75010.7508.08.06251.4043.3344.7°
16 x 1216.00012.75014.014.09469.3955.2941.5°
20 x 1620.00016.00020.020.100100.5080.4035.8°
24 x 2024.00020.00020.020.100120.60100.5035.8°
Big pattern, small plate

On a shallow reducer the arc radius gets huge — a 20x16 wants a trammel over 8 ft long. Two ways round it: split the cone into two or four pieces with a seam in each, or step it off by chords using the station method from 15.12. Nobody swings a ten foot arc in a fab shop.

Buy it if it comes in a box

Below 24" a butt weld reducer is a stock item and a rolled cone is not worth the hours or the weld. Roll your own for odd transitions, tank cones, hopper chutes and sizes the catalog doesn't carry.

One side straight, the other side doing all the work. It will not unroll into a neat ring like a concentric cone — it has to be triangulated, station by station.

FLAT SIDE — does not move OFFSET (big OD − sm OD) ÷ 2 CL in CL out FLAT ON TOP pump suction — no air pocket FLAT ON BOTTOM — drainage, invert stays on the line
One side straight, the other doing all the work. An eccentric reducer will not unroll into a neat ring — it has to be triangulated station by station, sixteen element lengths stepped off in pairs. Flat on top for pump suction so no air can pocket; flat on the bottom where the line has to drain.

The offset

OFFSET = (BIG OD − SMALL OD) ÷ 2

That is how far the small end's centerline sits off the big end's. It is also how much the line steps up or down through the fitting — which is the number that matters on an iso (15.13).

Element lengths — the triangulation

E = √(dX² + dY² + LENGTH²)
dX = OFFSET + (SM RAD − BIG RAD) × cosφ
dY = (SM RAD − BIG RAD) × sinφ

Each element is the straight line from station φ on the big circle to the same station on the small circle. Sixteen of them describes the whole cone.

Laying the pattern out

  1. Draw a straight base line. Step off the big end chord spacing (big circumference ÷ 16) sixteen times — that's the unrolled big circle.
  2. From station 1 on that line, swing the element length for station 1. From station 1's spacing on the small end, swing the small chord spacing. Where they cross is station 1 on the small circle.
  3. Work along, station by station. Each new point is the crossing of one element arc and one small-end chord arc.
  4. Fair a curve through the big-end points and another through the small-end points. That is the pattern.

Small end chord spacing = SMALL OD × 3.1416 ÷ 16.

Worked — 12" to 8" eccentric, 10" cone

Offset 2.0625". Station 1 is the flat side, station 9 the full-taper side.

StnElementStnElement
110.000910.817
210.0321010.787
310.1241110.702
410.2591210.572
510.4171310.417
610.5721410.259
710.7021510.124
810.7871610.032

Station 1 comes out at exactly the cone length — the flat side is a straight line, which is the whole point of the fitting.

Which way up

FLAT ON TOPPump suction. Keeps the top of the line level so air can't collect in a pocket and starve the pump. This is the one people get wrong.
FLAT ON BOTTOMGravity and drainage. Keeps the invert running true so nothing pools in a low spot.
FLAT ON BOTTOMAlso for anything sitting on pipe shoes or a rack, so the support elevation carries straight through.
Mark it before it leaves the bench

An eccentric reducer looks symmetrical from six feet away. Paint an arrow and the word TOP on it while you still know. Fitted upside down on a suction line, it will cavitate a pump and nobody will find it for a year.

An eccentric reducer moves the centerline sideways while you are still going straight. If you dimension off the centerline and forget that, everything past the reducer is out by the offset.

BOP — unchanged right through the drop 12" CL 8" CL FLAT ON BOTTOM 12x8 drops the CL 2-1/16"
Flat side on the bottom keeps the invert true, and the centreline steps down by the offset — a 12x8 drops it 2-1/16". Everything you dimension off the centreline past that reducer moves with it.

What actually moves

FLAT SIDEDoes not move. Same elevation in and out. That is the side the print dimensions from.
CENTERLINEMoves by the offset — going big to small, down if the flat is on the bottom, up if the flat is on top.
OTHER SIDEMoves by twice the offset, which is the full difference in diameters.
OFFSET = (BIG OD − SMALL OD) ÷ 2

Reducer centers

C-to-C is the straight line between the two centerline ends — the number you scale off an iso if the reducer is drawn on a slope. Angle is how far off the run that line sits.

ReducerLengthOffsetC-to-CAngle
2 x 13.00.53003.04610.0°
3 x 23.50.56253.5459.1°
4 x 34.00.50004.0317.1°
6 x 45.51.06255.60210.9°
8 x 66.01.00006.0839.5°
10 x 87.01.06257.0808.6°
12 x 88.02.06258.26214.5°
12 x 108.01.00008.0627.1°
16 x 1214.01.625014.0946.6°
20 x 1620.02.000020.1005.7°
24 x 2020.02.000020.1005.7°
Worked — 12x8 flat on bottom, BOP EL 104'-0" Offset = (12.75 − 8.625) ÷ 2 = 2.0625"
12" centerline = 104'-0" + 6.375" = EL 104'-6 3/8"
8" centerline = 104'-0" + 4.3125" = EL 104'-4 5/16"
The line dropped 2-1/16" without a single fitting turning.

Eccentric flanges

A flange with its bore deliberately off the centerline of the bolt circle. Rare, but they turn up on old equipment, on some pump and compressor nozzles, and where a nozzle had to be shifted after the vessel was built.

  1. The bolt circle is still concentric with the flange OD. That's what lines up with the mating flange.
  2. The bore sits off by the eccentricity, which is stamped on the flange or given on the drawing. That's what your pipe centerline follows.
  3. So your pipe centerline lands at the mating flange's centerline plus or minus the eccentricity, depending on which way the flange is clocked.
  4. Clock it before you tack. Turning it 180° later means breaking the joint and it moves the line by twice the eccentricity, not once.
Stack them and they add up

Two eccentric reducers in a run either cancel out or double up, depending which way you point them. On a rack where everything runs off one BOP, put both flats down and the invert stays true through both. Put one up and one down and you've built a dogleg that doesn't show on the iso.

On the iso

A good drafter puts ECC REDR FOB or FOT (flat on bottom / flat on top) right on the symbol. If the iso just says REDR and the line is on shoes, it is almost certainly flat on the bottom — but ask, don't assume.

A dome built out of flat plate. Cut it into segments like the peel of an orange, roll each one to a curve, and weld them up with a round cap over the top.

CAP 6 GORES + A CROWN CAP half width × 2 ONE GORE, FLAT all six identical
A dome built from flat plate: six identical gores rolled to shape, with a plain disc capping the point where they would all meet at once.

How many gores

4 goresSmall heads and anything you're going to hammer to shape anyway.
6 goresThe usual. Manageable plate, manageable roll.
8 or 12Big heads, or heavy plate that won't take a compound roll.
Crown capA plain disc over the top where the gores stop — stop them at 60° and the cap is half the head diameter. Saves fighting six points that all meet at once.

The gore — two numbers at each station

ALONG THE GORE = RADIUS × ANGLE IN RADIANS
HALF WIDTH = 3.1416 × RADIUS × cos(ANGLE) ÷ NUMBER OF GORES

Pick stations every 10° from the equator up to the crown. At each one, measure along the gore's centerline, then square off it and mark the half width each side. Fair a curve through the points — that's one gore, and they are all identical.

Six gores — multiply everything by the head radius

Up from equatorAlong goreHalf width
0°0.0000 R0.5236 R
10°0.1745 R0.5156 R
20°0.3491 R0.4920 R
30°0.5236 R0.4534 R
40°0.6981 R0.4011 R
50°0.8727 R0.3366 R
60°1.0472 R0.2618 R
70°1.2217 R0.1791 R
80°1.3963 R0.0909 R
90°1.5708 R0.0000 R

Stop wherever the crown cap starts. Cut the cap disc to that circle plus your prep — at 60° up, the cap radius is R × cos 60 = half the head radius.

Worked — 48" diameter head, 6 gores, cap at 60° R = 24"
Gore length to 60° = 24 × 1.047 = 25.1"
Half width at the equator = 24 × .5236 = 12.57" (so 25-1/8" wide at the bottom)
Half width at 60° = 24 × .2618 = 6.28"
Crown cap = 24 × cos 60 = 12" radius → 24" disc
Add for the roll, not just the weld

Plate stretches on the outside when you roll it, and a gore is rolled in two directions at once. Add your normal weld prep plus trim allowance on all four edges and cut the last one to fit. Lay them out on the plate as a nested set, alternating point-up and point-down, or you'll waste half the sheet.

When to build one

Formed heads are cheap and code-stamped. Build an orange peel head for non-pressure work — hoppers, covers, weather caps, transitions — or where the size isn't made. Anything under pressure wants a stamped head, not six welded gores.

Pipe wound round the inside of a tank to heat it or cool it. Either a true helix or a stack of flat rings tied together — and either way the first question is how much pipe to order.

6 TURNS IN THE TANK coil radius 3.1416 × COIL DIA PITCH ONE TURN UNROLL ONE TURN AND IT IS A RIGHT TRIANGLE √(circ² + pitch²)
Unroll a single turn of a helix and it is an ordinary right triangle — circumference along the bottom, pitch up the side, the pipe itself as the hypotenuse. At normal pitches the pitch term barely moves the answer, but on a steep coil it is the whole difference.

How much pipe

ONE TURN = √((3.1416 × COIL DIA)² + PITCH²)
TOTAL = TURNS × ONE TURN

COIL DIA is to the pipe centerline, not the tank wall. PITCH is how far the coil climbs in one full turn.

Worked — 10 ft tank, 2" coil, 8 turns, 9" pitch Tank ID 120", coil standing 6" off the wall → coil dia = 120 − 12 = 108"
ONE TURN = √((3.1416×108)² + 9²) = √(115,120 + 81) = 339.4"
TOTAL = 8 × 339.4 = 2,715" = 226 feet — order 250 and allow for the drop legs.

At normal pitches the spiral barely adds anything. 3.1416 × coil dia × turns is within a hair of it — the pitch term only matters on a steep coil.

Built from rings instead

Most field coils are not wound — they're welded up as flat rings out of mitered segments, then joined with short risers. Each segment gets the same two cuts.

CUT OFF SQUARE = 180° ÷ SEGMENTS  ·  CHORD = COIL RADIUS × FACTOR
SegmentsCut off squareChord × coil radius
630°1.0000
822.5°0.7654
1215°0.5176
1611.25°0.3902
247.5°0.2611
325.625°0.1960

Chord is centerline end-to-end of one segment. Lay the cuts out with the miter factors in 15.4. More segments means a rounder ring and more welds — 12 to 16 is the usual trade.

Things that sink a coil

DrainageA steam coil that won't drain will water-hammer itself apart. Pitch every run to the outlet, and put the trap at the low point — not where it's convenient.
ExpansionA 200 ft steam coil grows several inches. Support it so it can move, and never weld it hard to the tank wall at both ends.
SupportsClips welded to the shell need the tank owner's blessing before you strike an arc. On a coded vessel that is a repair, not a modification.
Getting it inBuild it in sections that fit the manway. Measure the manway before you build anything.
Test before you close up

Hydro the coil on the ground, or at minimum before the tank is buttoned up. A pinhole found from inside an empty tank is an hour. The same pinhole found after it's in service is a drain-down, a permit, a confined space entry and a week.

Pipe supports, trapeze hangers, equipment frames, guards. Angle iron is what holds up the work, and it cuts by the same rule pipe does.

LEG × 2 × tan(turn÷2) 90° point at the heel CUT A V OUT OF THE STANDING LEG CLOSE UP AND WELD NOT PAST THE HEEL
Notching beats mitering because the flat leg stays continuous. On 3 x 3 angle a square corner wants a 6" wide notch tapering to a point, and that point lands exactly at the heel — cut past it and you have cut the angle in half.

Mitering a corner — two pieces

CUT OFF SQUARE = TURN ÷ 2

A square frame corner is two 45° cuts. The cut goes through both legs at the same angle — it's a single plane, so a bandsaw with the vice swung over does it in one pass. Mark the heel, not the toe: the heel is the side that has to be right.

Notching to fold — one piece

Better joint than a miter, because the flat leg stays continuous. Cut a V out of the standing leg, close it up, weld the V shut.

V ANGLE = THE TURN  ·  WIDTH AT TOP = LEG × 2 × tan(TURN÷2)
TurnMiter cutNotch at top of leg
90°45°2.0000 × leg
60°30°1.1547 × leg
45°22.5°0.8284 × leg
30°15°0.5359 × leg
22.5°11.25°0.3978 × leg
15°7.5°0.2633 × leg

The V comes to a point exactly at the heel where the two legs meet. Cut past the heel and you've cut the angle in half.

Worked — square corner in 3 x 3 x 1/4 V angle = 90°
Width at the top of the standing leg = 3 × 2.000 = 6", tapering to a point at the heel
Mark 3" either side of the corner line, cut both lines to the heel, fold it up, weld the seam.

Brackets and knee braces

45° BRACE = RISE × 1.414  ·  cut 45° both ends
Where it landsThe brace wants to hit the arm at least half way out. Closer to the wall and it isn't doing much; out at the tip and you're just loading the weld.
Gusset plateRule of thumb, as deep as the member is wide, at 45°, full fillet both sides. Clip the corner so the weld has somewhere to stop.
Toe up or downStanding leg up under a load — that's the strong way. Standing leg down and you're bending the flat leg.
HolesPunch or drill before you weld. Every time.
Welding to building steel

Nothing gets welded to a beam, a joist or a deck without the structural engineer saying so. Especially not a joist — the chords are sized to the ounce and a hot spot in the wrong place is a real problem. Clamps and beam clamps first, welding only with a signature.

Cut one, check it, cut the rest

Make one bracket complete, hold it up where it goes, and then cut the other twenty. Everybody knows this. Everybody has also cut twenty of the wrong thing at least once.

A stub of pipe welded to the back of an elbow to carry the line — a dummy leg, or a trunnion. Cheap, strong, and the cut is the ugliest fishmouth in the trade, because you are fitting a round pipe to a doughnut.

bend centre to the steel cut lands here THE UGLIEST FISHMOUTH IN THE TRADE
A dummy leg off the back of an elbow at 45°. You are fitting a round pipe to a doughnut: two short points land in the plane of the bend and the long points reach down the sides of the elbow, 90° round from them. It is the ugliest fishmouth in the trade, which is why most shops scribe it rather than lay it out.

The three types

TYPE 1 — full size concentricLeg the same size as the line, centered on the back of the elbow at 45°. Strongest, deepest cut, and the leg comes to two long points down the sides of the elbow.
TYPE 2 — reduced concentricLeg one or two sizes down, still centered. Shallower cut, easier fit, less capacity. The usual choice.
TYPE 3 — eccentricLeg pushed off the centerline plane to clear a beam, a flange or the next line over. Cut is no longer symmetrical — every station is its own number.

The geometry

T = √((Rb + √(ρ² − (E + r sinφ)²))² − (r cosφ)²)
Rbbend radius of the elbow — for a long radius 90 that's 1.5 × nominal size, same number as the take-out
ρradius of the line pipe (OD ÷ 2)
rradius of the dummy leg
Eeccentricity — zero for types 1 and 2

T is measured from the bend center, out along the leg's axis. Work all sixteen stations, take the smallest, subtract it from the rest. Those are your ordinates, measured back from a base line through the long points. Set E to zero and stations repeat — 1 through 9 covers it.

Worked — 8" line, LR 90 (Rb = 12"), legs concentric

Ordinates in inches from the base line. Stations 1 and 9 both fall in the plane of the bend — the short points, and they come out equal because they're mirror images of each other across the leg. Station 5 is 90° round, out of the plane — the long point, and that's where the base line sits.

Stn8" leg6" leg4" leg
13.7321.2110.478
23.4801.0680.413
32.7370.6830.250
41.5500.2240.076
50.0000.0000.000
61.5500.2240.076
72.7370.6830.250
83.4801.0680.413
93.7321.2110.478

Note how much shallower the cut gets as the leg comes down in size. That is the whole argument for a Type 2.

Or do what the shop does

  1. Square-cut the leg a couple of inches long.
  2. Stand it on the elbow, plumb, square and clocked at 45° on the back. Clamp it or tack a strap.
  3. Scribe round it with a contour marker — a washer with a soapstone through the middle, run round with the washer flat on the elbow.
  4. Cut fat, dress, offer it back up, repeat. Twenty minutes and it beats an hour of ordinates every time.
What the engineer has to say

A dummy leg puts a point load on the back of an elbow, which is the most highly stressed part of the fitting. On hot lines, big bore or anything cyclic, it's a stress-analysis item — where it goes, how long it is and whether it gets a pad is on the drawing. Do not add one because it looked like it needed support.

Leave it off the shoe

The leg is a support, not a restraint. Unless the drawing calls an anchor, it sits on the steel and slides. Weld it down and you have anchored a line that was designed to move, and the next thermal cycle finds out where the weak point is.

The warehouse has 90s and 45s. The job wants a 30. You cut it out of a 90 — and the two numbers you need are where to cut and what the take-out becomes.

CUT THROUGH THE BEND CENTRE throat mark ONE CUT, TWO ELBOWS NEW T.O. = Rb × tan(A÷2) BACK = (Rb + OD÷2) sin A THROAT = (Rb − OD÷2) sin A
Cut a long radius 90 anywhere through the bend centre and whatever is left is a good elbow of that angle — a 45 and a 45, or a 30 and a 60. Work out what the drop is worth before you throw it on the rack. The back and throat marks put the cut plane on the fitting.

The rule

A long radius elbow is an arc of constant radius. Cut it anywhere through the bend center and whatever's left is a perfectly good elbow of whatever angle you left behind.

Rb = 1.5 × NOMINAL SIZE  (also the 90° take-out)
NEW TAKE-OUT = Rb × tan(ANGLE ÷ 2)

Where to cut — measured from the existing face

Square off the good face and measure along the pipe. The back mark and the throat mark are on the same cut plane — join them round the elbow and that's your line.

BACK = (Rb + OD÷2) × sin(ANGLE)
THROAT = (Rb − OD÷2) × sin(ANGLE)

Multipliers — take-out × nominal size, marks × nominal size

Back and throat multipliers below assume OD = nominal, which is right at 14" and up. Below that, use the formulas or the worked table.

AngleTake-outBack markThroat mark
11.25°0.14770.39020.1951
15°0.19750.51760.2588
22.5°0.29840.76540.3827
30°0.40191.00000.5000
45°0.62131.41420.7071
60°0.86601.73210.8660
75°1.15101.93190.9659

Check: a 45 cut from a 90 gives a take-out of .6213 × nominal. A bought 45 is .625 × nominal. That's .044" — about 3/64" — on a 12" — which is why cutting 45s out of 90s has always worked.

New take-out for the common cut angles

Centre-to-face in inches after the cut, long radius elbows.

SizeRb15°22-1/2°30°45°60°
2"3.000.390.600.801.241.73
3"4.500.590.901.211.862.60
4"6.000.791.191.612.493.46
6"9.001.181.792.413.735.20
8"12.001.582.393.224.976.93
10"15.001.972.984.026.218.66
12"18.002.373.584.827.4610.39
14"21.002.764.185.638.7012.12
16"24.003.164.776.439.9413.86
18"27.003.555.377.2311.1815.59
20"30.003.955.978.0412.4317.32
24"36.004.747.169.6514.9120.78

Worked out for 45° and 30°

All in inches. T.O. is the new center-to-face.

SizeRb45° T.O.45° back45° throat30° T.O.30° back30° throat
2"3.001.242.961.280.802.090.91
3"4.501.864.421.941.213.121.37
4"6.002.495.832.651.614.121.87
6"9.003.738.714.022.416.162.84
8"12.004.9711.535.443.228.163.84
10"15.006.2114.416.814.0210.194.81
12"18.007.4617.248.224.8212.195.81
14"21.008.7019.809.905.6314.007.00
16"24.009.9422.6311.316.4316.008.00
18"27.0011.1825.4612.737.2318.009.00
20"30.0012.4328.2814.148.0420.0010.00
24"36.0014.9133.9416.979.6524.0012.00
Worked — 30° out of an 8" LR 90 Rb = 1.5 × 8 = 12"
New take-out = 12 × tan 15° = 12 × .2679 = 3-7/32"
Back mark = (12 + 4.3125) × .5 = 8-5/32" from the face
Throat mark = (12 − 4.3125) × .5 = 3-27/32" from the face
Cut, bevel, and you have a 30° elbow with 3-7/32" take-out.

Marking it round

  1. Square a line off the good face — wrap it, don't eyeball it.
  2. Measure the back mark on the outside of the bend and the throat mark on the inside, each square off the face — straight-line distance from the face plane, not round the curve.
  3. Wrap a strip from the back mark to the throat mark. Keep the edges lined up with each other and the wrap will find the true cut plane on its own.
  4. Check both sides read the same before you strike an arc. They should — the cut plane is symmetrical about the bend.
Two out of one

A 90 gives you two elbows — a 30 and a 60, a 45 and a 45, a 22-1/2 and a 67-1/2. Work out what the drop is worth before you throw it on the rack. Also: you now have a cut end with no bevel and no tangent. Both pieces need prepping, and a cut end has none of the straight bit a fitting normally gives you to grip.

Short radius and reducing elbows

Same rule, different Rb. Short radius is 1.0 × nominal. On a reducing elbow, don't — the bend radius changes through the fitting and the math stops working.

Flange holes are evenly spaced on a bolt circle. Two numbers do all of it: the angle between holes, and the straight-line distance between two next to each other.

22½° VERTICAL CENTRELINE TWO-HOLING First hole at HALF the hole angle CHORD = BC × sin(180÷N)
Eight holes straddling both centrelines, none on top dead centre — which is why every standard flange has a hole count divisible by four. The first hole sits at half the hole angle off vertical; set your dividers to the copper chord, step it round, and check that it closes.

Angles between bolt holes

ANGLE = 360° ÷ NUMBER OF HOLES
CHORD = BOLT CIRCLE DIA × sin(180° ÷ HOLES)
HolesAngle apartHalf angleChord × BC
490°45°0.7071
845°22.5°0.3827
1230°15°0.2588
1622.5°11.25°0.1951
2018°9°0.1564
2415°7.5°0.1305
2812.86°6.429°0.1120
3211.25°5.625°0.0980
3610°5°0.0872
409°4.5°0.0785
448.182°4.091°0.0713
487.5°3.75°0.0654

Chord is centre of hole to centre of the next one, straight across — the setting you step round with dividers.

Worked — 8" Class 150: 8 holes on an 11.75" bolt circle Angle = 360 ÷ 8 = 45°
Chord = 11.75 × .3827 = 4.497" — set the dividers to 4-1/2" and split the error as you step it
Half angle = 22-1/2° — that's where the first hole goes off the centerline
Bolt circles by size and class are in 10.1 and 10.2. Use the bolt circle, not the pipe size.

Laying the holes out

  1. Find the centre. Scribe the bolt circle with dividers or a trammel.
  2. Scribe the vertical and horizontal centerlines across it. These are your datum — not the flange OD, which is never quite round.
  3. Mark the first hole at the half angle off the vertical centerline, to one side. See two-holing below.
  4. Set dividers to the chord and step round. Come back to the start — if it misses, split the error and step it again. Two or three passes and it closes.
  5. Punch every centre, then drill. A punch mark is cheap to move; a drilled hole is not.

Two-holing — get this wrong and nothing lines up

The rule

Flange bolt holes straddle the vertical and horizontal centerlines. They do not sit on them. Two holes either side of top dead centre, two either side of the horizontal — which is why every standard flange has a hole count divisible by four.

So the first hole sits at half the hole angle off the centerline: 22-1/2° on an 8-hole, 15° on a 12-hole, 11-1/4° on a 16-hole. Put a hole on top dead centre instead and the flange bolts up fine on the bench and will not mate with anything on the job.

Checking a flange you didn't make

Bolt circleMeasure centre-to-centre across two opposite holes. That is the bolt circle diameter, direct.
Odd countOn a hole count not divisible by four, measure the chord and back it out: BC = chord ÷ sin(180÷holes).
ClassCount the holes and measure the bolt circle, then look it up in 10.1 or 10.2. Same size in a different class has a different circle — that's the check.
Clock it before you tack

Get the two-holing right on the loose flange, on the bench, with a level. Every flange on the spool gets checked against the same datum. Finding one flange clocked half a hole out after the spool is welded and painted is a very long afternoon.

A bend has no weld in it, no seam, and nothing to catch a pig. When the job calls for one, the two numbers are how much pipe it eats and where the tangents start.

RADIUS 5D = 5 × nominal bend centre 60° ARC = R × DEG × .01745
A 60° bend on a 5D radius. The copper arc is the straight pipe that goes into the machine — add the tangents on both ends. The outside thins as it stretches and the spec caps how much ovality you are allowed. The orange dots are the tangent points; your cut has to land on the straight.

The bend radius

BEND RADIUS = MULTIPLE × NOMINAL SIZE

Quoted as 3D, 5D and so on — a 5D bend on 12" pipe has a 60" centerline radius. A long radius elbow is 1.5D by comparison, and a short radius is 1D.

How much pipe the bend uses

ARC = RADIUS × ANGLE × .01745

That's the developed length along the centerline — how much straight pipe goes into the bending machine to come out as that bend. Add tangents on both ends.

Worked — 12" pipe, 5D, 45° Radius = 5 × 12 = 60"
Arc = 60 × 45 × .01745 = 47.1" of pipe in the bend itself
Plus a tangent each end — usually 1.5 to 3 diameters, so add maybe 36" and order a 12 ft length.

Take-out — same rule as an elbow

TAKE-OUT = RADIUS × tan(ANGLE ÷ 2) + TANGENT

The bend itself takes out radius × tan(half the angle), measured from the theoretical intersection point. The tangent is straight pipe on top of that. Same math as cutting an elbow out of a 90 (15.18).

Radius and arc length, worked out

Inches. Arc is centerline, bend only, no tangents.

Size3D rad5D rad3D 90° arc5D 90° arc3D 45° arc5D 45° arc
2"6.010.09.4215.714.717.85
3"9.015.014.1423.567.0711.78
4"12.020.018.8531.429.4215.71
6"18.030.028.2747.1214.1423.56
8"24.040.037.7062.8318.8531.42
10"30.050.047.1278.5423.5639.27
12"36.060.056.5594.2528.2747.12
14"42.070.065.97109.9632.9954.98
16"48.080.075.40125.6637.7062.83
18"54.090.084.82141.3742.4170.69
20"60.0100.094.25157.0847.1278.54
24"72.0120.0113.10188.5056.5594.25

What a bend does to the wall

Outside thinsThe extrados (the long outside curve of the bend) stretches and loses wall — often 10–15% on a tight bend. Order heavier pipe for the bend if the spec doesn't call it, and expect to prove the wall afterwards.
Inside thickensThe intrados (the short inside curve) bunches up. Too tight a radius and it wrinkles, which is a reject.
OvalityThe round section goes egg-shaped. Most specs cap it around 5–8%. Measure it — max minus min, over nominal.
SpringbackCold bends come back a few degrees. The machine operator knows the number for that pipe and that die; a field bend without one is a guess.

Where bends come from

Induction bendsHeated ring, hydraulic push, shop machine. 3D and 5D, any angle, big bore. Ordered off a drawing with the angle, radius and tangent lengths on it. Long lead time — get them on order early.
Cold field bendsPipeline work, mostly. Machine and shoe, one degree at a time. Radius is limited by what the pipe will take without wrinkling.
Tube and small boreHand or hydraulic bender with a die per size. Instrument tubing, conduit, small copper. Section 14 is the bender's own math — take-up, multipliers and saddles.
You do not free-hand a pressure pipe bend

Heating a line with a rosebud and pulling it round is not a bend, it's damage. Bends on coded pipe are an engineered item with a procedure, a qualified operator and an inspection. Fit fittings, or order the bend.

Mark the tangents

An induction bend arrives with the tangent points paint-marked. Measure and re-mark them yourself before it goes up — your cut has to land on the straight, and the first inch or two past the tangent is still out of round.

American pipe thread is tapered — 3/4" of taper per foot of length, on the diameter. That taper is what seals it, and it is why a threaded joint gets tighter the further you drive it.

THE TAPER IS THE SEAL 3/4" in a foot — 1°47' per side hand tight wrench spare
A pipe thread is a wedge. It tapers 3/4" in a foot, so the further the fitting goes on the tighter it gets — until it splits the fitting. Hand tight gets you engaged, the wrench gets you sealed, and the last few threads are there so you have somewhere to go. NPT threads seal on the flanks as the taper wedges, not on the crests — which is why dope or tape is a lubricant and a filler, not the seal itself. Two or three threads showing past the fitting is right. None showing means you went too far.
TAPER = 3/4" PER FOOT  ·  1° 47' PER SIDE

Thread data nominal per ASME B1.20.1. Machine screw tap drills (16.2) follow ASME B1.1.

NPT thread data

HAND TIGHTHow far it screws in by hand, per B1.20.1. It is not the number you subtract for a cut length — wrenching it home buries the pipe deeper than this. Use the fuller, wrench-tight engagement in 2.2 for that.
EFFECTIVELength of full-form thread the die cuts. Set by formula — roughly hand tight plus wrench makeup on the small sizes, more than that on the big ones.
OVERALLTotal thread including the imperfect run-out at the end. What you see on the pipe.
TURNSRoughly how many turns of thread are engaged hand tight.
SizeTPIHand tightEffectiveOverallTurns
1/8"270.1620.26390.39244.4
1/4"180.2280.40180.59464.1
3/8"180.2400.40780.60064.3
1/2"140.3200.53370.78154.5
3/4"140.3390.54570.79354.7
1"11.50.4000.68280.98454.6
1-1/4"11.50.4200.70681.00854.8
1-1/2"11.50.4200.72351.02524.8
2"11.50.4360.75651.05825.0
2-1/2"80.6821.13751.57125.5
3"80.7661.20001.63376.1
4"80.8441.30001.73376.8
6"80.9581.51251.94627.7
8"81.0631.71252.14628.5

Wrench makeup — how far past hand tight

2 TO 3 TURNS PAST HAND TIGHT

2 to 3 turns on 1/2" through 1"; 1-1/2 to 2 on the bigger sizes (2.4). Not "until it stops" — a tapered thread never stops, it just splits the fitting. Count turns.

Thread types you'll meet

NPTTapered, seals on the thread flanks. Needs dope or tape. The default on everything in this book.
NPSStraight. Does not seal on the thread — needs a gasket or an O-ring. Common on lock nuts and some unions.
NPTFDryseal. Crests and roots interfere so it seals without dope. Hydraulics and fuel.
BSPT / BSPPBritish, 55° thread form. Looks close, will not mate. Imported equipment.
NPT into NPS

A tapered male into a straight female will start, go two turns, and feel tight. It is not sealed — it's wedged. Check the port before you make up anything on imported equipment, and check it again if the thread feels wrong.

Reading a thread on the pipe

Lay a rule on it and count crests in an inch — that's your TPI, and TPI plus the diameter tells you the size. 11-1/2 crests in an inch on something around 2-3/8" OD is a 2" pipe thread, whatever the tag says.

What size socket, what size drill. The two lookups you need at the bench and never have on you.

Wrench across flats

Heavy hex is what's on flange bolting. Standard hex is everything else — brackets, clamps, machine bolts.

BoltHeavy hexBoltStd hex
1/27/81/47/16
5/81-1/165/161/2
3/41-1/43/89/16
7/81-7/167/1611/16
11-5/81/23/4
1-1/81-13/169/167/8
1-1/425/815/16
1-3/82-3/163/41-1/8
1-1/22-3/87/81-5/16
1-5/82-9/1611-1/2
1-3/42-3/4
23-1/8
HEAVY HEX = (BOLT × 1.5) + 1/8"
The 1.5 rule works on heavy hex, not on standard hex

Heavy hex really is bolt × 1.5 plus an eighth, all the way up. Standard hex is not bolt × 1.5 — it holds at 3/8, 1/2, 5/8, 3/4, 7/8 and 1", and it is wrong at 1/4, 5/16, 7/16 and 9/16 — the real sizes are 7/16, 1/2, 11/16 and 7/8 (B18.2.2 — the 5/8 and 13/16 you may have seen are bolt heads, not nuts). Read the table for those four.

Pipe wrench to pipe size

10"up to 1-1/2"
14"up to 2"
18"up to 2-1/2"
24"up to 3"
36"up to 5"
48"up to 6"

Two wrenches, not one wrench and a cheater. A cheater on a 24" is how you snap a jaw and take a knuckle with it.

Drill sizes for pipe taps

NPT taper taps. Pipe-tap drill sizes vary a bit by tap maker and target thread depth — treat this as a starting point and check it against the tap you're running. Drill straight, tap slow, back it off every half turn and keep oil on it.

Pipe tapDrillDecimal
1/8-27R.3390
1/4-187/16.4375
3/8-1837/64.5781
1/2-1423/32.7188
3/4-1459/64.9219
1-11.51-5/321.1563
1-1/4-11.51-1/21.5000
1-1/2-11.51-47/641.7344
2-11.52-7/322.2188
2-1/2-82-5/82.6250
3-83-1/43.2500
4-84-1/44.2500

Tap drill sizes — machine threads

75% thread engagement, which is what you want for steel.

ThreadDrillDecimal
#6-3236.1065
#8-3229.1360
#10-2425.1495
#10-3221.1590
1/4-207.2010
1/4-283.2130
5/16-18F.2570
5/16-24I.2720
3/8-165/16.3125
3/8-24Q.3320
7/16-14U.3680
7/16-2025/64.3906
1/2-1327/64.4219
1/2-2029/64.4531
9/16-1231/64.4844
5/8-1117/32.5312
3/4-1021/32.6562
7/8-949/64.7656
1-87/8.8750
TAP DRILL ≈ MAJOR DIA − (1 ÷ TPI)

Close enough for any thread not in the table. 1/2-13: .500 − .077 = .423, and the chart says .4219.

Clearance holes

Not the same as a tap drill. Clearance is the next drill up from the bolt: 1/2" bolt → 9/16" hole. Flange bolt holes are 1/8" over the stud — a 3/4" stud goes in a 7/8" hole.

Tapping into a pressure boundary

Drilling and tapping a fitting, a valve body or a header for a gauge or a drain is a pressure-boundary modification. It needs the spec, the engineer, and a wall thickness that can carry the thread. Don't take a drill to a line because someone needs a gauge port.

The drill and the tap it goes withA tap drill sat next to its tap with the chart in frame, and a hole tapped correctly beside one drilled to the tap size that stripped. PHOTO

An olet is a forged branch that sits on the run instead of cutting into a tee. The two numbers that matter are how high it stands and how big a hole to burn.

Standard weight butt weld outlet — working figures

Height is from the run OD to the branch bevel. The hole column is a rule of thumb — the branch bore plus 1/16" — not a published figure. Read the caution below before you use these.

BranchODSch 40 IDHeightHole (bore + 1/16", approx.)
1/2"0.8400.6220.750.684
3/4"1.0500.8240.880.886
1"1.3151.0491.061.111
1-1/4"1.6601.3801.251.442
1-1/2"1.9001.6101.311.673
2"2.3752.0671.502.130
2-1/2"2.8752.4691.622.531
3"3.5003.0681.753.131
4"4.5004.0262.004.088
6"6.6256.0652.386.128
8"8.6257.9812.758.043
These are ballpark, and the box is the authority

Olet dimensions change with the run size and the schedule, not just the branch size — the same 2" outlet on a 6" run and on a 24" run is a different fitting with a different contour and a different height. Bonney, Allied and the rest publish the exact figures and every box has a take-off card in it. Use the table to order steel and plan a spool. Use the card to cut the hole.

Take-out

C-to-END OF BRANCH = (RUN OD ÷ 2) + HEIGHT
Worked — 2" butt weld outlet on 8" run (8.625 ÷ 2) + 1.50 = 4.3125 + 1.50 = 5.81" from the run centerline to the branch bevel.
So a 2" nipple to a valve centerline at 14" off the run centerline = 14 − 5.81 − (valve take-out) − root gaps.

The hole

HOLE = BRANCH BORE, not branch OD
  1. Mark the centre. Scribe the hole from the take-off card, or scribe round the olet's bore with it held in place.
  2. Burn inside the line and grind out to it. A hole you can shrink is a hole you can't fix.
  3. Dress the edge to bare metal, inside and out. Knock the slag off the inside — you cannot reach it once the olet is on.
  4. Sit the olet down and look at the light all the way round. It should rock on nothing.

The family

Butt weld outlet
Weldolet®
Full pressure branch. The one in the table above.
Socket weld outlet
Sockolet®
Small bore. Instruments, vents, drains.
Threaded outlet
Thredolet®
Threaded branch. Gauges and test points.
Elbow outlet
Elbolet®
Sits on the back of an elbow. Thermowells and vents.
45° outlet
Latrolet®
Sweeping takeoffs without a lateral layout.
Outlet nipple
Nipolet®
Outlet and nipple in one piece, with a valve end. Drains and vents.

The names in the second line of each row are registered trademarks of Bonney Forge Corporation, used here only to identify their fittings. Other makers sell equivalents under their own names. More on choosing between them and where to point a branch: 1.14.

An outlet sat down on the holeA butt weld outlet on a burned and dressed hole with full contact all round — and one rocking on a bad hole beside it. PHOTO

Forged steel small bore — Class 3000 and 6000, socket weld or threaded. Different animal from the 150# malleable in section 2, and it turns up on every process and steam job.

Class 3000 socket weld

Per ASME B16.11. C to socket bottom is centre of the fitting to the bottom of the socket — where the pipe end lands before you pull it back 1/16". Add the gap and that is the take-out. Tee run and branch are the same as the 90.

SizeC to socket bottomSocket depth (min)Socket bore (min)
1/2"0.620.380.86
3/4"0.750.501.07
1"0.880.501.33
1-1/4"1.060.501.68
1-1/2"1.250.501.92
2"1.500.622.41
2-1/2"1.620.622.91
3"2.250.623.54

A 45° socket weld ell runs about two-thirds of the 90's (a little over half at 3"). Class 6000 runs one step longer to the socket bottom in every size (1/2" 0.75, 3/4" 0.88, 1" 1.06, 1-1/4" 1.25, 1-1/2" 1.50, 2" 1.62) with the same socket depth and a heavier body — don't use this column for it.

Cutting for socket weld

CUT = C-to-C − (C to SOCKET BOTTOM + 1/16" GAP) each end
The 1/16" gap

Bottom the pipe in the socket, then pull it back 1/16" before you tack. That gap is what lets the fitting expand without cracking the weld root. Weld it bottomed out and the joint will crack — not today, but on the first real thermal cycle. Use a scribe mark or a bit of welding wire as a gauge and check every joint.

Worked — 1" 3000# socket weld, 24" centre to centre, two 90s C to socket bottom, 1": .88
Plus the 1/16" gap: .88 + 1/16 = .9425 each end
CUT = 24 − (2 × .9425) = 24 − 1.885 = 22-1/8"
The 1/2" socket depth does not come into it — the pipe sits inside it either way.

Screwed — Class 3000 threaded

Threaded Class 3000 fittings have their own centre-to-end figures in B16.11 — they are not the socket weld numbers above, so read them off the box or the maker's card. The math is the screw pipe method: centre-to-end minus the thread engagement, both ends.

CUT = C-to-C − (C-to-END − ENGAGEMENT) both ends

Hand tight engagement is in 16.1. The threaded net-length method is in 2.1 and 2.2.

Where each one belongs

Socket weld for steam, hot oil, anything cyclic, anything you don't want to see again. Threaded for instrument runs, utility air, and anything that has to come apart. Most process specs draw the line at 2" — socket weld or butt weld at 2" and up, threaded only below it, and sometimes not even then.

No socket weld on a rotating line

A socket weld joint is a stress riser with a built-in crevice. Some specs bar them from vibrating service and from severe cyclic service entirely. Check before you buy a box of them.

Face-to-face of a flanged valve, per ASME B16.10. This is the take-out — it's the length the valve eats out of your run, flange face to flange face.

All figures in inches. Flanged ends, raised face. Typical published face-to-face dimensions — ASME B16.10 and the valve maker's cut sheet govern, and reconditioned or imported valves often do not match either. The Class 300 gate figures from 14" up are B16.10 short pattern; long-pattern gates in those sizes run 30, 33, 36, 39 and 45" — the cut sheet says which you have.

Size150 Gate150 Globe150 Check300 Gate300 Globe300 Check
2"7888-1/210-1/210-1/2
2-1/2"7-1/28-1/28-1/29-1/211-1/211-1/2
3"89-1/29-1/211-1/812-1/212-1/2
4"911-1/211-1/2121414
6"10-1/2161415-7/817-1/217-1/2
8"11-1/219-1/219-1/216-1/22221
10"1324-1/224-1/21824-1/224-1/2
12"1427-1/227-1/219-3/42828
14"15——22-1/2——
16"16——24——
18"17——26——
20"18——28——
24"20——31——

Using it

CUT = C-to-C − VALVE F-to-F − FLANGE TAKE-OUTS − 2 GASKETS
Worked — 6" Class 150 gate between two weld necks, 48" centre to centre of the flange faces Valve f-to-f = 10.5"
Two 6" 150 weld necks, take-out 3.50 each = 7.00
Two 1/8" gaskets = 1/4"
Pipe needed = 48 − 10.5 − 7.00 − 1/4 = 30-1/4" total, split between the two pieces

Things this table won't tell you

Butterfly and ballWafer and lug butterflies are a fraction of these lengths and the maker's number is the only one that counts. Ball valves vary wildly — full port, reduced port, split body, all different.
Stem heightNot in any face-to-face table and it decides whether the valve fits under the beam. Get it off the cut sheet, and get it for the valve open.
Handwheel swingA 12" gate has a wheel most of two feet across and somebody has to turn it. Check the clearance before you set the spool.
Gear operatorsAdd a box on the side. Check which side, and check it clears.
Measure the valve

B16.10 is what the valve should be. Take a tape to the one on the pallet before you cut pipe to suit it. Especially on anything imported, anything reconditioned, and anything that came off another job.

Orientation

Check valves and globe valves have a flow arrow and it is not a suggestion. Gate valves are usually bi-directional but a lot of them still have a preferred side for the seat. Setting valves is 10.4.

Centre-to-face of flanged cast fittings. Old plants, fire water, raw water, big slow-moving stuff. The take-out here is centre of the fitting to the flange face, gasket not included.

Per ASME B16.5 (flanged fittings tables for Class 150 and 300) — the standard and the maker's catalog govern. Measure the first fitting out of every box.

Inches. Tee figures are run and branch both — same as the 90 of that size. A cross is the same again.

Size150 90°150 45°150 Tee300 90°300 45°300 Tee
1"3-1/21-3/43-1/242-1/44
1-1/4"3-3/423-3/44-1/42-1/24-1/4
1-1/2"42-1/444-1/22-3/44-1/2
2"4-1/22-1/24-1/2535
2-1/2"5355-1/23-1/25-1/2
3"5-1/235-1/263-1/26
4"6-1/246-1/274-1/27
5"7-1/24-1/27-1/2858
6"8588-1/25-1/28-1/2
8"95-1/2910610
10"116-1/21111-1/2711-1/2
12"127-1/21213813
14"147-1/214158-1/215
16"1581516-1/29-1/216-1/2
18"16-1/28-1/216-1/2181018
20"189-1/21819-1/210-1/219-1/2
24"22112222-1/21222-1/2

Working with them

CUT = C-to-C − TAKE-OUTS − FLANGE TAKE-OUTS − GASKETS

Every joint here is a bolted one, so every joint eats a gasket. On a run with four flanged fittings that's eight gaskets — an inch of length nobody counted.

Worked — 8" Class 150, 90° ell to 90° ell, 60" centre to centre Two ells at 9.00 = 18.00
Two 8" weld necks at 4.00 = 8.00
Two 1/8" gaskets (one at each ell) = 1/4"
Pipe = 60 − 18.00 − 8.00 − 1/4 = 33-3/4"

Reducing flanged fittings

A reducing flanged ell or tee keeps the larger size's centre-to-face on every leg. That's the standard and it's what makes them drop-in interchangeable — but it means the small branch sticks out further than you'd expect from its own size.

Cast iron is not cast steel

Class 125 and 250 cast iron flanged fittings are a different standard (B16.1) — Class 125 has a flat face and a lighter body, Class 250 a 1/16" raised face. Never bolt a raised face flange straight to a flat faced cast iron one — the raised face acts as a fulcrum and cracks the casting. Full face gasket and, on anything with a moment on it, machine the raised face off. Bolt-up is in 10.3.

Weight

A 12" Class 150 flanged ell is 250 lb or more and it has nothing to grab. Plan the rigging before it comes off the pallet — 25.7 for working out what it weighs.

How many, how big, how long, and which ring. Everything you count out of the gang box before you go up.

Bolting and flange data per ASME B16.5; ring joint numbers per ASME B16.20. Confirm against the flange in your hand and the gasket on the pallet.

Stud lengths are the usual B16.5 chart for raised face (about a 1/8" gasket), not counting the points on a stud bolt. Add about 1/2" for RTJ — the ring stands the flanges further apart than a spiral wound. Round up to the next 1/4". Same figures as 10.1.

Size150 No.150 Dia150 Len300 No.300 Dia300 LenRTJ 150RTJ 300/600
1"41/22-1/245/83R-15R-16
1-1/2"41/22-3/443/43-1/2R-19R-20
2"45/83-1/485/83-1/2R-22R-23
2-1/2"45/83-1/283/44R-25R-26
3"45/83-1/283/44-1/4R-29R-31
4"85/83-1/283/44-1/2R-36R-37
5"83/43-3/483/44-3/4R-40R-41
6"83/44123/44-3/4R-43R-45
8"83/44-1/4127/85-1/2R-48R-49
10"127/84-1/21616-1/4R-52R-53
12"127/84-3/4161-1/86-3/4R-56R-57
14"1215-1/4201-1/87R-59R-61
16"1615-1/4201-1/47-1/2R-64R-65
18"161-1/85-3/4241-1/47-3/4R-68R-69
20"201-1/86-1/4241-1/48R-72R-73
24"201-1/46-3/4241-1/29R-76R-77

Working out a stud length yourself

STUD = 2 FLANGE THICKNESSES + GASKET + 2 NUTS + 2 THREADS SHOWING

Heavy hex nut thickness is about the same as the bolt diameter. Two or three threads past the nut is what you want showing — enough to prove it's engaged, not so much that it fouls the insulation.

Gaskets

Spiral woundThe default on process. 0.175" thick as supplied, about 1/8" once it's crushed; metal winding with a filler, inner and outer ring. Compresses to a set thickness and stops — that's what makes it forgiving.
Sheet / compressed fibreUtility, water, low pressure. 1/16" or 1/8". Ring type for raised face, full face for flat face.
Ring joint (RTJ)A solid metal ring in a machined groove. High pressure and high temperature. Oval or octagonal — octagonal seals better, oval fits older grooves.
Full faceGoes out past the bolts, holes and all. Mandatory on flat faced flanges and on cast iron.

Ring joint numbers

The R number is the ring, not the pipe size — an R-45 is the 6" ring for Class 300, 600 and 900, and fits nothing else. It's stamped on the ring and it's on the flange's groove. Match the number, match the material, match the shape.

RTJ rules

The ring seals on the groove flanks, not the bottom. There should be a visible gap between the flange faces when it's bolted up — that gap is normal and correct. Rings and grooves must be clean and unmarked; one nick and it leaks. Never reuse a ring, and the ring must be softer than the flange or it damages the groove.

Count before you climb

Flange, gasket, right number of studs and twice as many nuts, anti-seize, the right two wrenches, and the torque figures. One trip. Bolt-up pattern and torque are in 10.3.

Gaskets and ring jointsA spiral wound, a full face, a ring type joint gasket and a flat sheet laid out with the flange faces they belong on. Shoot a used RTJ groove with its ring seated. PHOTO

An orifice union is two flanges bolted face to face with a plate and two gaskets between them. The bolt circle and count are standard — the stud length is not.

Bolt count and diameter

Straight off the standard flange chart for that size and class — 16.7, or 10.1 and 10.2 for the bolt circles. An orifice flange bolts to the same pattern as any other flange of its size and class. Nothing changes there.

Stud length — the part that does change

ORIFICE STUD = NORMAL STUD + PLATE THICKNESS + ONE EXTRA GASKET

Then round up to the next 1/4". The plate is usually 1/8" and the second gasket another 1/8", so on most jobs it works out as the standard length plus 1/4", sometimes 1/2" on thicker plates and on RTJ.

Worked — 6" Class 300 orifice union Standard 6" 300 stud from 16.7 = 4-3/4"
Plate 1/8" + one more 1/8" gasket = 1/4"
Orifice studs = 4-3/4 + 1/4 = 5" — 12 off, 3/4" diameter
Order them separately

Orifice studs are not the same as the line studs and they will not be in the same box. If somebody grabs standard length studs for the orifice union, they'll thread up, they'll feel tight, and there will be a thread and a half in the nut. Bag them and tag them by tag number.

Jack screws

Most orifice flanges have two tapped holes on the bolt circle for jack screws — you run them in to spread the flanges and get the plate out without breaking the whole joint apart. Two things:

  1. The jack screw holes are tapped, not clearance. Don't put a stud through them.
  2. Back the jack screws right off before final torque, or you're bolting the joint up against your own jacks and the gasket never sees the load.

Setting the plate

TabPoints out, where you can read it. The stamping on the tab faces upstream.
BevelIf the plate has a bevelled bore, the square edge faces upstream and the bevel faces downstream. Backwards and the meter reads wrong all year.
Vent / drain holeSmall hole off centre. Gas service — hole at the bottom to drain liquid. Liquid service — hole at the top to vent gas.
TapsFlange taps are in the flanges themselves. Keep them clear, keep them level with each other, and don't let a welder's slag find them.
Straight runThe meter needs a set number of diameters of straight pipe up and downstream. It's on the drawing. It's not negotiable and a fitting inside it makes the meter useless.
It's a custody transfer point

On a lot of jobs this flange is how somebody gets paid. Handle the plate like glass, leave it in its envelope until the last minute, and don't hydro through a plate unless the test procedure says to.

Everything measures off the OD, and the OD never changes with schedule — the wall grows inward. That one fact is why a 6" pipe is always 6.625" round the outside whatever the spec calls for.

Pipe per ASME B36.10M, flange bores per ASME B16.5. The standards govern.

SizeODSTD wallSTD IDXS wallXS IDSO bore
1/2"0.8400.1090.6220.1470.5460.88
3/4"1.0500.1130.8240.1540.7421.09
1"1.3150.1331.0490.1790.9571.36
1-1/4"1.6600.1401.3800.1911.2781.70
1-1/2"1.9000.1451.6100.2001.5001.95
2"2.3750.1542.0670.2181.9392.44
2-1/2"2.8750.2032.4690.2762.3232.94
3"3.5000.2163.0680.3002.9003.57
4"4.5000.2374.0260.3373.8264.57
5"5.5630.2585.0470.3754.8135.66
6"6.6250.2806.0650.4325.7616.72
8"8.6250.3227.9810.5007.6258.72
10"10.7500.36510.0200.5009.75010.88
12"12.7500.37512.0000.50011.75012.88
14"14.0000.37513.2500.50013.00014.14
16"16.0000.37515.2500.50015.00016.16
18"18.0000.37517.2500.50017.00018.18
20"20.0000.37519.2500.50019.00020.20
24"24.0000.37523.2500.50023.00024.25

SO bore is the slip-on and socket weld flange bore per B16.5 Table 8 — a shade over the pipe OD, so the pipe slides in. Full pipe data and other schedules are in 1.12.

Which bore goes with which flange

WELD NECKBored to match the pipe ID for the schedule you ordered it for. A weld neck is schedule-specific — a Sch 40 neck on Sch 80 pipe gives a step in the bore and a bad root. Always check the stamp.
SLIP-ONBored just over the pipe OD. Same flange fits any schedule of that size.
SOCKET WELDSame as slip-on, with a shoulder at the bottom of the socket. Pull back 1/16" before you weld.
LAP JOINTOver the OD, sits loose behind a stub end. Free to rotate, which is what you're buying.
BLINDNo bore at all.
THREADEDTapped to NPT for that size. Nothing to weld.
Check the stamp on a weld neck

Every weld neck has the size, class, material and schedule forged into the rim. Two 8" Class 300 weld necks can look identical on the rack and have a quarter inch difference in the bore. Read the stamp, not the shape.

Quick math

ID = OD − (2 × WALL)
AREA = ID² × .7854  ·  GAL PER FOOT = ID² × .0408
Where nominal stops meaning anything

Below 14" the nominal size is a name, not a measurement — a 2" pipe is 2.375" OD. At 14" and up, nominal is the OD. That's the dividing line, and it's why so many quick formulas break right there.

OD, ID and bore, measuredCalipers on the outside of a pipe, a bore gauge in the inside, and the same pipe's nominal size stencilled on the barrel so the three numbers can be compared in one frame. PHOTO

A steel plate bolted between two flanges to shut a line off dead. It is the only isolation anybody should trust to work behind, because unlike a valve you can see what it's doing.

handle out so you can read it SPECTACLE BLIND one piece — swing it either way stays with the joint forever PADDLE SPACER two pieces — one goes in as the other comes out
The handle sticks out past the insulation on purpose — on a spectacle blind you can tell open from blanked from across the unit, which is the whole argument for it.

The three kinds

SPECTACLE BLINDSolid disc and an open ring forged as one piece, like a pair of glasses. Swing it one way it's blanked, swing it the other it's open. Stays with the joint forever, which is why it's the safe one.
PADDLE BLIND (slip blind)Solid disc with a handle. Slipped in when you need it, pulled when you don't.
SPACER (pancake)Open ring with a handle, the paddle's partner. Goes in when the paddle comes out, so the joint stays the same length and you don't have to move the pipe.

Thickness — the formula

T = BORE × √(3P ÷ (16 × S × E)) + CORROSION
BOREgasket inside diameter — near enough the pipe ID
Pdesign pressure, psi (the class rating at temperature, or the test pressure — whichever governs)
Sallowable stress for the plate at temperature. A516-70 runs about 20,000 psi warm.
Ejoint efficiency — 1.0 for solid plate

What the formula is for

Understanding — so you can see why a bigger bore or a higher class needs more plate, and so a number somebody hands you either makes sense or doesn't. It is not a sizing method.

Worked — 6" line, Class 300, A516-70 plate Bore 6.065" · P = 740 psi · S = 20,000 psi · E = 1.0
3 × 740 = 2,220  ·  16 × 20,000 × 1.0 = 320,000
2,220 ÷ 320,000 = .006938  ·  √.006938 = .0833
6.065 × .0833 = .505" bare, plus corrosion allowance

And then you throw that number away and use the one off the spec, which will be thicker — B16.48 builds in more than the bare formula gives.
Why there is no thickness table in this book

Because a table invites you to build from it, and the bare formula output is thinner than what ASME B16.48 actually calls for in a lot of sizes. A blind that is too thick is a nuisance. A blind that is too thin lets go with people working behind it. Blind thickness comes off B16.48 and your job spec — nowhere else, ever.

This is an engineering item, not a field one

ASME B16.48 lists the real dimensions, and your job spec, your design temperature and your plate material all move the number. Never size a blind yourself, never size one off a rule of thumb, and never reuse one without measuring it and checking it is the right one for that joint. If nobody has told you what thickness goes in, that is a question for the engineer — not a gap for you to fill.

Putting one in

  1. Line is drained, depressured, vented and locked out. Verify it — don't be told.
  2. Break the joint on the far side first. Leave the top bolts in so the joint can only open at the bottom, away from where you are standing — and make sure nobody is below it, because whatever comes out is going down onto the deck.
  3. New gaskets both sides. Never reuse.
  4. Stud length goes up by the blind thickness plus a gasket — the same math as 16.8. Have the longer studs before you start.
  5. Tag it, log it on the blind list, and put the handle where it can be seen from the deck.
The handle tells the story

The handle is stamped with the line number, size and class, and it sticks out past the insulation on purpose. On a spectacle blind you can tell open from closed at a glance from across the unit — which is the whole point, and the reason a spec blind beats a paddle every time on something that gets isolated often.

Breaking strength is where it lets go. Safe working load is breaking strength divided by the design factor — five to one on rigging, and you never work above it.

SAFE LOAD = BREAKING STRENGTH ÷ 5

All figures in pounds, new rope, straight vertical pull, at a 5:1 design factor. Typical published values — the manufacturer's figures for the rope in your hands govern, and rigging equipment is covered by your employer's program and the ASME B30 series. Everything below reduces from there.

5:1 is not the factor for everything

Wire rope, synthetic web and round slings run a 5:1 design factor. Alloy chain runs 4:1. Hooks and shackles are usually 5:1 or 6:1 depending on the maker. Do not carry the number on this page across to a chain sling — read its tag.

This page is rope, and rope does not lift

Everything here is for tag lines, hand lines and lashings. Nothing on this page is a lifting capacity. Anything that picks a load up goes on a tagged, rated sling, and the tag governs — not this table, not your judgement, not what it held last time.

Wire rope — 6 x 19 improved plow steel, fibre core

DiaBreakingSafe @ 5:1
1/4"5,4801,096
3/8"12,2002,440
1/2"21,4004,280
5/8"33,4006,680
3/4"47,6009,520
7/8"64,40012,880
1"83,60016,720
1-1/8"105,20021,040

Nominal breaking strength for fibre core. IWRC of the same size runs about 7–8% higher — the rope's own certificate governs.

Manila — three strand

DiaBreaking (min)Safe @ 5:1Safe @ 10:1
3/8"1,215243121
1/2"2,385477238
5/8"3,960792396
3/4"4,860972486
7/8"6,9301,386693
1"8,1001,620810
1-1/4"12,1502,4301,215

Cordage Institute minimum breaking strengths. A lot of sites run natural fibre at 10:1, not 5:1 — use the right-hand column if yours does.

Manila loses roughly half its strength wet, and it rots from the inside. Open the lay and look at the fibres — powder or dark staining means throw it away.

Nylon — three strand

DiaBreakingSafe @ 5:1
3/8"3,240648
1/2"5,6701,134
5/8"8,9101,782
3/4"12,7802,556
7/8"17,2803,456
1"22,2304,446
1-1/4"34,8306,966

Stretches 15–30% under load, which is good for shock and bad for control. It also stores that stretch — a nylon line that parts under load comes back hard enough to kill. Never stand in line with one.

Polyester — three strand

DiaBreakingSafe @ 5:1
3/8"2,900580
1/2"5,0001,000
5/8"7,8001,560
3/4"10,5002,100
7/8"14,0002,800
1"18,0003,600
1-1/4"26,0005,200

Less stretch than nylon, keeps its strength wet, better in sun. The usual choice for tag lines and hand lines.

What takes the numbers back down

KnotsAny knot costs you a third to a half. A bowline is about 45% off. Spliced eye is only about 10% off — splice it if it's going to stay.
Sling angleTwo legs at 30° each carry double. 25.3 has the numbers — this is the one that kills people.
Sharp bendsOver an edge or a small pin, wire rope loses strength fast. Keep the D/d ratio up and use softeners.
Age and weatherSynthetic loses strength in sunlight. Manila rots. Wire rope rusts from inside and you can't see it.
Shock loadSnatching a load multiplies the force several times over. Take up slow.
Rope is not a sling

These charts are for rope — tag lines, hand lines, lashings. Rated slings come with a tag and the tag governs: capacity, hitch, angle, serial number. No tag, no lift. Sling and hardware capacities are in 25.4, inspection in 25.6.

Tag lines

Long enough that you're never under the load, and never wrapped round your hand or your body. If a tag line goes tight enough to pull you, let go — that's what it's for.

Rope and its conditionNew wire rope, synthetic web and manila side by side, and beside each one the same rope worn out — broken wires, cut web, rotted manila. PHOTO
Reading a rope table Only the Safe column is a working load — the breaking strength already divided by the design factor. Do not divide it again.
The Breaking column is never a working figure. Rig to it and you are at 5× the load, 10× on manila.
Do not use either number for a rope you cannot inspect end to end.
A sling at 60° carries 1.155 × its share; at 30° it carries 2 ×. The angle is on you, not the table.

What the line weighs empty, what it weighs full, and what the column of water inside it is doing to the bottom of the riser. Three numbers that decide hangers, rigging and hydro.

PIPE lb/ft = 10.69 × (OD − WALL) × WALL
WATER lb/ft = ID² × .3405
SizeSTD lb/ftXS lb/ftWater lb/ftSTD fullGal/ft
1/2"0.851.090.130.980.016
3/4"1.131.470.231.360.028
1"1.682.170.372.060.045
1-1/4"2.273.000.652.920.078
1-1/2"2.723.630.883.600.106
2"3.665.031.455.110.174
2-1/2"5.807.672.087.870.249
3"7.5810.263.2010.790.384
4"10.8015.005.5216.320.661
5"14.6320.808.6723.301.039
6"18.9928.6012.5331.521.501
8"28.5843.4321.6950.272.599
10"40.5254.7934.1974.714.096
12"49.6165.4849.0398.645.875
14"54.6272.1659.78114.407.163
16"62.6482.8579.19141.829.489
18"70.6593.54101.32171.9712.141
20"78.67104.23126.18204.8515.119
24"94.71125.61184.06278.7722.055

STD full is standard weight pipe plus the water in it — the hydro weight, and the number your hangers actually have to carry.

Worked — 12" STD, 200 ft run, hydro Pipe: 200 × 49.6 = 9,920 lb
Water: 200 × 49.0 = 9,800 lb
Total 19,720 lb — near enough ten tons, and every hanger has to be in and tight before the fill valve opens. Add flanges, valves and insulation on top of that (25.7).

Feet of head to PSI

FEET × .433 = PSI  ·  PSI × 2.31 = FEET
Head= psiPressure= head
5 ft2.25 psi12 ft
10 ft4.310 psi23 ft
20 ft8.720 psi46 ft
30 ft13.030 psi69 ft
40 ft17.340 psi92 ft
50 ft21.650 psi116 ft
60 ft26.060 psi139 ft
75 ft32.575 psi173 ft
100 ft43.3100 psi231 ft
125 ft54.1125 psi289 ft
150 ft65.0150 psi346 ft
200 ft86.6200 psi462 ft
250 ft108.2250 psi578 ft
300 ft129.9300 psi693 ft

Clean water. Heavier fluid, multiply by its specific gravity.

Worked — the thing people forget on a hydro A 90 ft riser tested at 150 psi at the gauge on the roof is seeing 150 + (90 × .433) = 189 psi at the bottom.
Put the gauge at the bottom and set 150 there, and the top of the riser is only at 111 psi — which may be below the test pressure the spec wants. Know which end your gauge is on. Hydro procedure is in 11.1.

Handy weights

Water8.34 lb/gal · 62.4 lb/ft³
Steel489 lb/ft³ · .2833 lb/in³
Steel plate40.8 lb per ft² per inch of thickness
Insulationroughly 10–15% on top of the bare pipe weight
Never air test what you can hydro

The water in that 12" line stores almost nothing. The same line full of air at the same pressure is a bomb. Pneumatic testing is 11.2 — read it before anybody connects a compressor.

What a full line weighs — 6" schedule 40, 100 ft Pipe: 18.99 lb/ft × 100 = 1,899 lb
Water: 12.53 lb/ft × 100 = 1,253 lb
Full: 3,152 lb, or about 315 lb on every hanger at 10 ft spacing.
That is before insulation, valves, or anybody standing on it.
Head to pressure A 90 ft riser, pump off:
90 × .433 = 39 psi at the bottom
Going the other way, a gauge reading 60 psi is 60 × 2.31 = 139 ft of head.
Neither one cares how big the pipe is.

Every number on a tape is a fraction. Every number out of a calculator is a decimal. This is how you get between them without thinking about it.

Decimal → fraction

× 16 = SIXTEENTHS   × 32 = THIRTY-SECONDS   × 64 = SIXTY-FOURTHS

Multiply, round to the nearest whole number, put it over what you multiplied by, reduce.

Worked 0.6875 × 16 = 11.0 → 11/16 → 11/16"
0.42 × 16 = 6.72 → round 7 → 7/16"
0.42 × 64 = 26.9 → round 27 → 27/64" (same number, finer tape)
3.8125 → whole 3, then .8125 × 16 = 13 → 3-13/16"

Fraction → decimal

TOP ÷ BOTTOM
Worked 5/8 → 5 ÷ 8 = 0.625
7-3/16 → 3 ÷ 16 = .1875 → 7.1875

The whole tape, to 64ths

Copper-coloured decimals are the ones that land on a 16th — the marks actually on most tapes.

FracDecFracDecFracDecFracDec
1/640.015617/640.265633/640.515649/640.7656
1/320.03129/320.281217/320.531225/320.7812
3/640.046919/640.296935/640.546951/640.7969
1/160.06255/160.31259/160.562513/160.8125
5/640.078121/640.328137/640.578153/640.8281
3/320.093811/320.343819/320.593827/320.8438
7/640.109423/640.359439/640.609455/640.8594
1/80.12503/80.37505/80.62507/80.8750
9/640.140625/640.390641/640.640657/640.8906
5/320.156213/320.406221/320.656229/320.9062
11/640.171927/640.421943/640.671959/640.9219
3/160.18757/160.437511/160.687515/160.9375
13/640.203129/640.453145/640.703161/640.9531
7/320.218815/320.468823/320.718831/320.9688
15/640.234431/640.484447/640.734463/640.9844
1/40.25001/20.50003/40.750011.0000
Rounding on the job

Round to the nearest 16th for anything you are cutting with a saw or a torch. Round to 32nds for machine work and gasket stuff. Never round in the middle of a calculation — carry the decimals all the way to the end, then round once. Round three times in one offset and you'll be 1/8" out and not know where it went.

The trap

0.5 is not 5/8, and 0.75 is not 7/8. A decimal point is not a fraction bar. If you catch yourself reading 4.3 as 4-3/8, stop and multiply: .3 × 16 = 4.8, so it's 4-5/16. Miss that and you are 1/16" heavy every cut.

Survey instruments, grade sheets, pump curves and most engineering dimensions are in decimal feet. Your tape is not. This is the bridge.

INCHES ÷ 12 = DECIMAL OF A FOOT
Worked 7-1/2" → 7.5 ÷ 12 = 0.625'
4'-3 1/4" → 3.25 ÷ 12 = .271 → 4.271'

Inches and eighths → decimal of a foot

Read down the inch column, across to the fraction.

In01/81/43/81/25/83/47/8
0"0.00000.01040.02080.03120.04170.05210.06250.0729
1"0.08330.09380.10420.11460.12500.13540.14580.1562
2"0.16670.17710.18750.19790.20830.21880.22920.2396
3"0.25000.26040.27080.28120.29170.30210.31250.3229
4"0.33330.34380.35420.36460.37500.38540.39580.4062
5"0.41670.42710.43750.44790.45830.46880.47920.4896
6"0.50000.51040.52080.53120.54170.55210.56250.5729
7"0.58330.59380.60420.61460.62500.63540.64580.6562
8"0.66670.67710.68750.69790.70830.71880.72920.7396
9"0.75000.76040.77080.78120.79170.80210.81250.8229
10"0.83330.84380.85420.86460.87500.88540.89580.9062
11"0.91670.92710.93750.94790.95830.96880.97920.9896
Between the columns

A 16th is .0052'. A 32nd is .0026'. Need 5-7/16"? Take 5-3/8 (.4479) and add .0052 → .4531'.

The ones worth knowing cold

1"
.0833'
1/8"
.0104'
1/4"
.0208'
1/2"
.0417'
3"
.250'
6"
.500'
9"
.750'
Grade sheets

A drawing that says INV 98.75 means ninety-eight and three-quarters of a foot — 98'-9", not 98'-7 1/2". Mixing the two on a sanitary line is how a run ends up flat.

The one that trips people up. The print says EL 112.79 and you have to cut something. Here is how that decimal turns back into a mark on a tape.

Three steps, every time

  1. The whole number is feet. Set it aside.
  2. Decimal × 12. The whole number of that answer is inches.
  3. What's still left over, × 16, round it — that's your sixteenths.
DEC × 12 = INCHES  ·  LEFTOVER × 16 = SIXTEENTHS
Worked — 112.79' 112 → 112 feet
.79 × 12 = 9.48 → 9 inches
.48 × 16 = 7.68 → round 8 → 8/16 = 1/2"
Answer: EL 112'-9 1/2"
Worked — 0.3646' .3646 × 12 = 4.375 → 4 inches
.375 × 16 = 6 → 6/16 = 3/8"
Answer: 4-3/8"

Straight lookup — hundredths of a foot

To the nearest 16th. Good enough for anything you cut.

Dec=Dec=Dec=Dec=
.000".253".506".759"
.011/8".263-1/8".516-1/8".769-1/8"
.021/4".273-1/4".526-1/4".779-1/4"
.033/8".283-3/8".536-3/8".789-3/8"
.041/2".293-1/2".546-1/2".799-1/2"
.055/8".303-5/8".556-5/8".809-5/8"
.063/4".313-3/4".566-3/4".819-3/4"
.0713/16".323-13/16".576-13/16".829-13/16"
.0815/16".333-15/16".586-15/16".839-15/16"
.091-1/16".344-1/16".597-1/16".8410-1/16"
.101-3/16".354-3/16".607-3/16".8510-3/16"
.111-5/16".364-5/16".617-5/16".8610-5/16"
.121-7/16".374-7/16".627-7/16".8710-7/16"
.131-9/16".384-9/16".637-9/16".8810-9/16"
.141-11/16".394-11/16".647-11/16".8910-11/16"
.151-13/16".404-13/16".657-13/16".9010-13/16"
.161-15/16".414-15/16".667-15/16".9110-15/16"
.172-1/16".425-1/16".678-1/16".9211-1/16"
.182-3/16".435-3/16".688-3/16".9311-3/16"
.192-1/4".445-1/4".698-1/4".9411-1/4"
.202-3/8".455-3/8".708-3/8".9511-3/8"
.212-1/2".465-1/2".718-1/2".9611-1/2"
.222-5/8".475-5/8".728-5/8".9711-5/8"
.232-3/4".485-3/4".738-3/4".9811-3/4"
.242-7/8".495-7/8".748-7/8".9911-7/8"
The shortcut everyone uses

A hundredth of a foot is just a hair under 1/8" (.12"). So .01' ≈ 1/8", .02' ≈ 1/4", .04' ≈ 1/2", .08' ≈ 1". Close enough to sanity-check what your calculator just told you, and it'll catch a decimal point in the wrong place every time.

Don't stack the rounding

Convert once, at the end. If you are working out a total fall over 140 feet, do the whole thing in decimal feet, then turn the one final answer into a fraction. Convert every intermediate step and the errors pile up in the same direction.

Imported valves, European pumps, skid packages and every gasket catalog printed after 1990. Metric turns up whether you want it or not.

INCHES × 25.4 = mm  ·  mm ÷ 25.4 = INCHES  ·  FEET × 304.8 = mm
Worked A flange face-to-face given as 356 mm → 356 ÷ 25.4 = 14.02 → 14"
Cut length 4'-7 1/2" → 55.5 × 25.4 = 1410 mm

Fractions of an inch to mm

InmmInmmInmmInmm
1/320.799/327.1417/3213.4925/3219.84
1/161.595/167.949/1614.2913/1620.64
3/322.3811/328.7319/3215.0827/3221.43
1/83.183/89.535/815.887/822.23
5/323.9713/3210.3221/3216.6729/3223.02
3/164.767/1611.1111/1617.4615/1623.81
7/325.5615/3211.9123/3218.2631/3224.61
1/46.351/212.703/419.05125.40

Inches and feet to mm

InmmInmmFtmmFtmm
1"25.47"177.81'3057'2134
2"50.88"203.22'6108'2438
3"76.29"228.63'9149'2743
4"101.610"254.04'121910'3048
5"127.011"279.45'152411'3353
6"152.412"304.86'182912'3658

Both ways, in your head

1"
25.4 mm
1 mm
.0394" — call it 1/25"
1 m
39.37" = 3'-3 3/8"
1 ft
.3048 m
25 mm
just under 1" (.984)
100 mm
3.94" — near enough 4"
DN is not inches

A metric print calling a line DN 50 means 2" nominal, not 50 mm of anything you can measure. DN 15=1/2, 20=3/4, 25=1, 32=1-1/4, 40=1-1/2, 50=2, 65=2-1/2, 80=3, 100=4, 125=5, 150=6, 200=8, 250=10, 300=12. Do not put a tape on a DN number.

One page of multipliers. Anything you need to turn into something else on a job site is on it.

Length

in × 25.4millimeters
in × 2.54centimeters
ft × .3048meters
ft × 304.8millimeters
mm × .03937inches
m × 3.281feet
yd × 3feet
mile × 5280feet

Area & volume

in² × 6.452cm²
ft² × .0929m²
ft³ × 7.481gallons
ft³ × 1728in³
gal × 231in³
gal × 3.785liters
gal × .1337ft³
liter × .2642gallons
barrel (oil) × 42gallons

Weight

lb × .4536kilograms
kg × 2.205pounds
ton (short) × 2000pounds
metric ton × 2205pounds
gal water × 8.34pounds
ft³ water × 62.4pounds
in³ steel × .2833pounds
steel plate: ft² × thickness(in) × 40.8pounds

Pressure & head

psi × 2.31feet of water
ft of water × .433psi
psi × 2.036in. mercury
psi × 27.71in. water column
psi × .0689bar
bar × 14.5psi
psi × 6.895kPa
atmosphere14.7 psi = 34 ft water

Flow, heat & power

gpm × .1337ft³/min
gpm × 60gal/hr
cfm × 7.481gpm
BTU/hr ÷ 12000tons of refrigeration
BTU/hr × .000293kW
hp × 746watts
hp × 2545BTU/hr
boiler hp × 33,475BTU/hr

Temperature

°C = (°F − 32) ÷ 1.8  ·  °F = (°C × 1.8) + 32

−40 is the same in both. 16°C = 61°F, 100°C = 212°F, 200°C = 392°F.

Circle

π3.1416
circumferencediameter × 3.1416
diametercircumference × .3183
area of circlediameter² × .7854
area of spherediameter² × 3.1416
volume of spherediameter³ × .5236
volume of cylinderdiameter² × .7854 × length
1 degree of arccircumference ÷ 360
1 radian57.296°
The four that pay the bills

3.1416 around a pipe · .7854 for area · 2.31 for head · 8.34 for a gallon of water. Know those four and you can rough out most of a job with a phone calculator and no book at all.

Using a constant Multiply going one way, divide coming back — the same constant does both.
Inches to mm: 8-1/4" = 8.25 × 25.4 = 209.6 mm
mm to inches: 209.6 ÷ 25.4 = 8.25"
Write the constant down before you press a key. Half of all conversion errors are multiplying when you meant to divide.

An angle off a print or a total station comes as degrees, minutes and seconds. A calculator only eats decimals. Sixty minutes in a degree, sixty seconds in a minute — same as a clock.

30° ONE DEGREE = 60 MINUTES ONE MINUTE = 60 SECONDS 30° 15' 00" 15 ÷ 60 = .25 so 30°15' = 30.25° Going back: 30.25 − 30 = .25 .25 × 60 = 15' Most calculators have a DMS or °'" key that does it for you.
Angles split like a clock: sixty minutes to a degree, sixty seconds to a minute. Divide the minutes by 60 to get the decimal your calculator wants. On pipe work you will almost never need seconds — a minute is already finer than you can cut.
DEC° = DEG + (MIN ÷ 60) + (SEC ÷ 3600)
Worked 22° 30' → 30 ÷ 60 = .5 → 22.5°
38° 15' 30" → 15÷60 = .25, 30÷3600 = .0083 → 38.2583°

Going back the other way

  1. Whole number is degrees.
  2. Leftover decimal × 60 = minutes.
  3. Any leftover from that × 60 = seconds.
Worked — 31.42° 31 → 31°
.42 × 60 = 25.2 → 25'
.2 × 60 = 12 → 12" → 31° 25' 12"

Minutes to decimals of a degree

MinDegMinDegMinDegMinDeg
0'0.000016'0.266731'0.516746'0.7667
1'0.016717'0.283332'0.533347'0.7833
2'0.033318'0.300033'0.550048'0.8000
3'0.050019'0.316734'0.566749'0.8167
4'0.066720'0.333335'0.583350'0.8333
5'0.083321'0.350036'0.600051'0.8500
6'0.100022'0.366737'0.616752'0.8667
7'0.116723'0.383338'0.633353'0.8833
8'0.133324'0.400039'0.650054'0.9000
9'0.150025'0.416740'0.666755'0.9167
10'0.166726'0.433341'0.683356'0.9333
11'0.183327'0.450042'0.700057'0.9500
12'0.200028'0.466743'0.716758'0.9667
13'0.216729'0.483344'0.733359'0.9833
14'0.233330'0.500045'0.750060'1.0000
Fitting angles in minutes

11°15' = 11.25° · 22°30' = 22.5° · 37°30' = 37.5° (your bevel) · 67°30' = 67.5°. If a drawing gives one of these in minutes it is telling you a stock fitting, not a custom cut.

Every right triangle in this trade is the same three sides with different names on them. Know any two, you can find the other four. This page is the whole set.

Taught from scratch

These are the formulas on one page. If any of them is new to you, 18.8 to 18.12 build them up one at a time with a worked example on each.

The names

HYPHypotenuse — the long side, opposite the square corner. On a pipe job this is the TRAVEL (the sloped piece you cut).
OPPThe side across from the angle you're working with. Usually the OFFSET (how far over you moved).
ADJThe side beside the angle. Usually the RUN (how far along you moved).

Finding a side, when you know an angle and a side

WantFormula
OPPHYP × sin  |  ADJ × tan
ADJHYP × cos  |  OPP ÷ tan
HYPOPP ÷ sin  |  ADJ ÷ cos

Finding an angle, when you know two sides

KnowDo this, then look it up
OPP & HYPOPP ÷ HYP = sin of the angle
ADJ & HYPADJ ÷ HYP = cos of the angle
OPP & ADJOPP ÷ ADJ = tan of the angle

On a calculator the lookup is the sin⁻¹ / cos⁻¹ / tan⁻¹ button (often marked INV or 2nd). In the table at 17.8, run down the right column until you find your number.

Finding a side, when you know two sides

HYP = √(OPP² + ADJ²)
OPP = √(HYP² − ADJ²)  ·  ADJ = √(HYP² − OPP²)

The rest of the relationships

cot1 ÷ tan — ADJ ÷ OPP
sec1 ÷ cos — HYP ÷ ADJ
csc1 ÷ sin — HYP ÷ OPP
tansin ÷ cos
sin² + cos²= 1, always. Good check on a table you don't trust.
the other angle90° − your angle. The two non-square corners always add to 90.

Triangles that aren't square-cornered

Rare on pipe, but it shows up on a true Y and on odd bracing.

LAW OF SINES:  a ÷ sin A = b ÷ sin B = c ÷ sin C
LAW OF COSINES:  c² = a² + b² − (2ab × cos C)

Three angles of any triangle add to 180°. Area = ½ × base × height.

In practice

Nine jobs out of ten you never touch these — you use the constant out of 8.3 and move on. The formulas are for the tenth job, when the angle isn't a stock fitting and you have to work out what it actually is.

Picking the right formula Know the travel and the angle, want the offset → offset = travel × sin A
Know the offset and the angle, want the travel → travel = offset ÷ sin A
Same formula, rearranged. The side you want decides whether you multiply or divide: going to the bigger side you divide, coming back you multiply.

Zero to ninety, every half degree. Copper rows are the angles that come in a box.

sin = OPP÷HYP  cos = ADJ÷HYP  tan = OPP÷ADJ  cot = ADJ÷OPP

Using it forwards

Worked 22-1/2° offset, run measures 30". Table says tan 22.5° = .4142.
OFFSET = 30 × .4142 = 12.43"
TRAVEL = 30 ÷ cos 22.5° = 30 ÷ .9239 = 32.47"

Using it backwards — finding the angle

Worked Offset 9", run 14". 9 ÷ 14 = .6429 → that's a tangent.
Run down the tan column: .6249 at 32°, .6494 at 33°. Yours sits just under 33 → about 32.7°.
No fitting makes that. Either roll a 45 to suit, or stretch the run to 21.73" (9 ÷ .4142) and use a 22-1/2.

Between two rows

Take the difference between the two rows, split it by how far along you are. Between 32° (.6249) and 33° (.6494) the step is .0245 per degree, so .00041 per minute. Close enough for anything you are cutting.

Angsincostancot
0°0.00001.00000.0000∞
0.5°0.00871.00000.0087114.6
1°0.01750.99980.017557.2900
1.5°0.02620.99970.026238.1885
2°0.03490.99940.034928.6363
2.5°0.04360.99900.043722.9038
3°0.05230.99860.052419.0811
3.5°0.06100.99810.061216.3499
4°0.06980.99760.069914.3007
4.5°0.07850.99690.078712.7062
5°0.08720.99620.087511.4301
5.5°0.09580.99540.096310.3854
6°0.10450.99450.10519.5144
6.5°0.11320.99360.11398.7769
7°0.12190.99250.12288.1443
7.5°0.13050.99140.13177.5958
8°0.13920.99030.14057.1154
8.5°0.14780.98900.14956.6912
9°0.15640.98770.15846.3138
9.5°0.16500.98630.16735.9758
10°0.17360.98480.17635.6713
10.5°0.18220.98330.18535.3955
11°0.19080.98160.19445.1446
11.25°0.19510.98080.19895.0273
11.5°0.19940.97990.20354.9152
12°0.20790.97810.21264.7046
12.5°0.21640.97630.22174.5107
13°0.22500.97440.23094.3315
13.5°0.23340.97240.24014.1653
14°0.24190.97030.24934.0108
14.5°0.25040.96810.25863.8667
15°0.25880.96590.26793.7321
15.5°0.26720.96360.27733.6059
16°0.27560.96130.28673.4874
16.5°0.28400.95880.29623.3759
17°0.29240.95630.30573.2709
17.5°0.30070.95370.31533.1716
18°0.30900.95110.32493.0777
18.5°0.31730.94830.33462.9887
19°0.32560.94550.34432.9042
19.5°0.33380.94260.35412.8239
20°0.34200.93970.36402.7475
20.5°0.35020.93670.37392.6746
21°0.35840.93360.38392.6051
21.5°0.36650.93040.39392.5386
22°0.37460.92720.40402.4751
22.5°0.38270.92390.41422.4142
23°0.39070.92050.42452.3559
23.5°0.39870.91710.43482.2998
24°0.40670.91350.44522.2460
24.5°0.41470.91000.45572.1943
25°0.42260.90630.46632.1445
25.5°0.43050.90260.47702.0965
26°0.43840.89880.48772.0503
26.5°0.44620.89490.49862.0057
27°0.45400.89100.50951.9626
27.5°0.46170.88700.52061.9210
28°0.46950.88290.53171.8807
28.5°0.47720.87880.54301.8418
29°0.48480.87460.55431.8040
29.5°0.49240.87040.56581.7675
30°0.50000.86600.57741.7321
30.5°0.50750.86160.58901.6977
31°0.51500.85720.60091.6643
31.5°0.52250.85260.61281.6319
32°0.52990.84800.62491.6003
32.5°0.53730.84340.63711.5697
33°0.54460.83870.64941.5399
33.5°0.55190.83390.66191.5108
34°0.55920.82900.67451.4826
34.5°0.56640.82410.68731.4550
35°0.57360.81920.70021.4281
35.5°0.58070.81410.71331.4019
36°0.58780.80900.72651.3764
36.5°0.59480.80390.74001.3514
37°0.60180.79860.75361.3270
37.5°0.60880.79340.76731.3032
38°0.61570.78800.78131.2799
38.5°0.62250.78260.79541.2572
39°0.62930.77710.80981.2349
39.5°0.63610.77160.82431.2131
40°0.64280.76600.83911.1918
40.5°0.64940.76040.85411.1708
41°0.65610.75470.86931.1504
41.5°0.66260.74900.88471.1303
42°0.66910.74310.90041.1106
42.5°0.67560.73730.91631.0913
43°0.68200.73140.93251.0724
43.5°0.68840.72540.94901.0538
44°0.69470.71930.96571.0355
44.5°0.70090.71330.98271.0176
45°0.70710.70711.00001.0000
45.5°0.71330.70091.01760.9827
46°0.71930.69471.03550.9657
46.5°0.72540.68841.05380.9490
47°0.73140.68201.07240.9325
47.5°0.73730.67561.09130.9163
48°0.74310.66911.11060.9004
48.5°0.74900.66261.13030.8847
49°0.75470.65611.15040.8693
49.5°0.76040.64941.17080.8541
50°0.76600.64281.19180.8391
50.5°0.77160.63611.21310.8243
51°0.77710.62931.23490.8098
51.5°0.78260.62251.25720.7954
52°0.78800.61571.27990.7813
52.5°0.79340.60881.30320.7673
53°0.79860.60181.32700.7536
53.5°0.80390.59481.35140.7400
54°0.80900.58781.37640.7265
54.5°0.81410.58071.40190.7133
55°0.81920.57361.42810.7002
55.5°0.82410.56641.45500.6873
56°0.82900.55921.48260.6745
56.5°0.83390.55191.51080.6619
57°0.83870.54461.53990.6494
57.5°0.84340.53731.56970.6371
58°0.84800.52991.60030.6249
58.5°0.85260.52251.63190.6128
59°0.85720.51501.66430.6009
59.5°0.86160.50751.69770.5890
60°0.86600.50001.73210.5774
60.5°0.87040.49241.76750.5658
61°0.87460.48481.80400.5543
61.5°0.87880.47721.84180.5430
62°0.88290.46951.88070.5317
62.5°0.88700.46171.92100.5206
63°0.89100.45401.96260.5095
63.5°0.89490.44622.00570.4986
64°0.89880.43842.05030.4877
64.5°0.90260.43052.09650.4770
65°0.90630.42262.14450.4663
65.5°0.91000.41472.19430.4557
66°0.91350.40672.24600.4452
66.5°0.91710.39872.29980.4348
67°0.92050.39072.35590.4245
67.5°0.92390.38272.41420.4142
68°0.92720.37462.47510.4040
68.5°0.93040.36652.53860.3939
69°0.93360.35842.60510.3839
69.5°0.93670.35022.67460.3739
70°0.93970.34202.74750.3640
70.5°0.94260.33382.82390.3541
71°0.94550.32562.90420.3443
71.5°0.94830.31732.98870.3346
72°0.95110.30903.07770.3249
72.5°0.95370.30073.17160.3153
73°0.95630.29243.27090.3057
73.5°0.95880.28403.37590.2962
74°0.96130.27563.48740.2867
74.5°0.96360.26723.60590.2773
75°0.96590.25883.73210.2679
75.5°0.96810.25043.86670.2586
76°0.97030.24194.01080.2493
76.5°0.97240.23344.16530.2401
77°0.97440.22504.33150.2309
77.5°0.97630.21644.51070.2217
78°0.97810.20794.70460.2126
78.5°0.97990.19944.91520.2035
79°0.98160.19085.14460.1944
79.5°0.98330.18225.39550.1853
80°0.98480.17365.67130.1763
80.5°0.98630.16505.97580.1673
81°0.98770.15646.31380.1584
81.5°0.98900.14786.69120.1495
82°0.99030.13927.11540.1405
82.5°0.99140.13057.59580.1317
83°0.99250.12198.14430.1228
83.5°0.99360.11328.77690.1139
84°0.99450.10459.51440.1051
84.5°0.99540.095810.38540.0963
85°0.99620.087211.43010.0875
85.5°0.99690.078512.70620.0787
86°0.99760.069814.30070.0699
86.5°0.99810.061016.34990.0612
87°0.99860.052319.08110.0524
87.5°0.99900.043622.90380.0437
88°0.99940.034928.63630.0349
88.5°0.99970.026238.18850.0262
89°0.99980.017557.29000.0175
89.5°1.00000.0087114.60.0087
90°1.00000.0000∞0.0000
Sanity check

sin goes 0 → 1 as the angle opens. cos goes 1 → 0. tan passes through 1.0000 at 45° and runs away to infinity at 90. If your answer breaks one of those, you read the wrong column.

Reading between the lines of the table Want 37°15' and the table steps in half degrees.
15' is a quarter of a degree, so 37°15' = 37.25°.
sin 37.0 = .6018 and sin 37.5 = .6088, so halfway between them is .6053.
The calculator says sin 37.25 = .6053. The table row and the machine agree to four places, which is finer than any tape you own.

This section teaches the math. The rest of the book gives you the answer; this one shows you where the answer came from, one step at a time, with a worked example on every page.

Five tracks, in this order

The calculator comes first on purpose. It is the tool you use on every page after it, and most of us were handed one and never actually shown what the second function key does.

18.2The tool. Your calculator — the function keys, the inverse key, and the one setting that quietly makes every trig answer wrong if it is set the other way.
18.3–18.7Numbers. Fractions to decimals and back, doubling and halving on the pipe without a calculator, angles and degrees, squares and square roots.
18.8–18.13The triangle. Naming the sides, finding a missing one, sine cosine and tangent, finding an angle, solving the whole thing off one side and one angle, and the 45 on its own page.
18.14–18.23The payoff. Elbows, where take-out actually comes from, then every offset there is — simple, shortest, combination, rolling and combination rolling, each one built out of the one before it.
18.24–18.27Circles. Its own track, take it whenever you like — pi, circumference, radians, chords, laying out a flange with dividers, area and volume.
18.28–18.29Practice, and the answers. Fourteen problems. Work them on paper before you look.

Three habits that make the math easy

  1. Work in decimals, convert once at the end. Turn every fraction into a decimal before you start, do the whole problem, and only turn the final answer back into a fraction. Convert in the middle and the rounding errors stack up.
  2. Write it down. Every step, on the back of the print or in a notebook. A number you did in your head is a number nobody can check — including you, ten minutes later.
  3. Sanity-check the answer. Is the travel longer than the offset? It has to be. Is the cut shorter than the center-to-center? It has to be. Catching a wrong answer costs a second; cutting one costs a joint.
You do not have to memorise any of this

The constants in 12.10, the tables in 17, and the calculators in 13 will get you through any day on the job. This section is for the days the table does not have your number in it — an odd angle, an odd fitting, a spot nobody drew. That is when knowing where the numbers come from is worth something.

How to work a problem out of this section 1  Draw it, even badly. Mark what you know.
2  Name the three sides: offset, run, travel.
3  Pick the formula that uses the two you have.
4  Work it in decimal inches all the way through.
5  Convert to a fraction once, at the end.
6  Take off the take-outs and the gaps — then cut.

Any cheap scientific calculator does everything in this book. Here is what the buttons are and the order to press them in.

Do this first, before anything else

Put the calculator in DEGREES. Look for DEG or D in the little display at the top. If it says RAD or GRAD, press the DRG or MODE button until it says DEG. Every answer in this book is wrong if it doesn't.

Test it: type 45, press tan. You should get 1. If you get 1.6198, you are in radians.

The function keys — angle in, ratio out

KeyYou typeYou get
sinan angleopposite ÷ hypotenuse
cosan angleadjacent ÷ hypotenuse
tanan angleopposite ÷ adjacent
Try these three right now 45 tan → 1
45 sin → 0.7071
22.5 tan → 0.4142 — the stagger number from 8.5, straight out of the machine

Some calculators want the number first, some want the function first. Test on 45 tan. Whichever order gives you 1 is your machine's order — and it will be that order forever.

The inverse key — ratio in, angle out

The same three keys run backwards when you press 2nd (or INV, or SHIFT) first. The little writing above the key — sin⁻¹, cos⁻¹, tan⁻¹ — is what you are reaching for. These are also called the arc functions: arcsin, arccos, arctan. Same thing, older name.

Try it 1 2nd tan⁻¹ → 45
.7071 2nd sin⁻¹ → 45
.4142 2nd tan⁻¹ → 22.5
The plain-English version

Plain key: "I have the angle, give me the number."
2nd + key: "I have the number, give me the angle."
That is the entire difference, and it is the thing most people never get told.

The other keys you will use

x²Squares whatever is showing. 14 x² → 196.
√Square root. 277 √ → 16.643.
1/xFlips a number over. Turns a tangent into a cotangent, or .7071 into 1.414.
π3.14159… Saves typing it, and saves the rounding.
( )Brackets. Use them. √( 14 x² + 9 x² ) keeps the machine from rooting only the 9.
M+ / MRMemory. Park a take-out in there and stop retyping it forty times.

A whole rolling offset, keystroke by keystroke

Rise 14", roll 9", 45° fittings, 2.00" take-outs True offset: 14 x² + 9 x² = 277, √ → 16.643
Travel: ÷ 45 sin → 16.643 ÷ .7071 = 23.537
Cut: − 2 − 2 = 19.537
To a fraction: .537 × 16 = 8.59 → round 9 → 19-9/16"
Roll angle: 9 ÷ 14 = .6429, 2nd tan⁻¹ → 32.7° off top
A phone will do it too

Turn an iPhone sideways in the calculator app and the scientific keys appear. Android calculators have a button or a swipe for the same thing. But a $12 scientific calculator with real buttons works with gloves on, in the cold, with wet hands, and does not ring.

Your calculator, keys namedA plain scientific calculator with the keys you actually use circled: sin, cos, tan, the shift or 2nd key, x², √, and the degree mode indicator on the display. PHOTO

Three kinds of fraction come at you on a job, and all three turn into a decimal the same way: divide the top by the bottom.

0 1/4 1/2 3/4 1" 11/16 11 ÷ 16 = .6875 Going back: .6875 × 16 = 11, so 11/16. THE TAPE IS A FRACTION MACHINE
One inch cut into sixteenths, which is every mark on a standard tape. To go to decimal, divide the top by the bottom. To come back, multiply the decimal by 16 and round — the answer is how many sixteenths, and the tape does the rest. Top number divided by bottom number. That is all a fraction is. Multiply by 16 and round to the nearest whole number — that is your sixteenths, so .69 × 16 = 11.04 gives 11/16. Always reduce: 8/16 is 1/2, 12/16 is 3/4, 4/16 is 1/4.
TOP ÷ BOTTOM = DECIMAL

1 · A fraction of an inch

  1. Take the top number (the numerator).
  2. Divide it by the bottom number (the denominator).
  3. That's it.
Worked 5/8" → 5 ÷ 8 = 0.625"
3/16" → 3 ÷ 16 = 0.1875"
7/32" → 7 ÷ 32 = 0.21875"

2 · A mixed number — whole inches plus a fraction

A mixed number is a whole number with a fraction stuck to it, like 6-3/4". The whole number does not change. Only the fraction gets divided.

  1. Set the whole number aside.
  2. Divide the fraction.
  3. Add the two back together.
Worked 6-3/4" → 3 ÷ 4 = .75 → 6 + .75 = 6.75"
14-5/16" → 5 ÷ 16 = .3125 → 14.3125"
2-1/8" → 1 ÷ 8 = .125 → 2.125"
The dash is not a minus sign

6-3/4" means six and three quarters. It does not mean six minus three quarters. Some prints write it 6 3/4 with just a space, which is clearer — but the dash is what most people write, and you have to read it as "and".

3 · A fraction of a foot

Here you have an extra step, because there are 12 inches in a foot. Get to inches first, then divide by 12.

INCHES ÷ 12 = DECIMAL OF A FOOT
Worked 9" → 9 ÷ 12 = 0.75'
4-1/2" → 4.5 ÷ 12 = 0.375'
7'-3 1/4" → 3.25 ÷ 12 = .2708 → 7.2708'
Two different jobs, two different divisions

Divide by the bottom of the fraction to get a decimal of an inch. Divide by 12 to get a decimal of a foot. Mixing those two up is the single most common mistake in pipe math. Ask yourself which unit you want before you touch the calculator.

The full lookup tables: 17.1 for fractions to 64ths, 17.2 for the whole decimal-of-a-foot grid.

The calculator hands you 0.4375. Your tape has never heard of it. Here is how to get back.

1 · A decimal of an inch → a fraction

× 16, ROUND, PUT IT OVER 16, REDUCE
  1. Multiply by 16. That tells you how many sixteenths you have.
  2. Round to the nearest whole number.
  3. Put it over 16.
  4. Reduce — if top and bottom are both even, halve them both, and keep going until one is odd.
Worked — 0.4375 .4375 × 16 = 7.0 → 7 → 7/16 → 7 is odd, done → 7/16"
Worked — 0.63 .63 × 16 = 10.08 → round to 10 → 10/16
Reduce: both even → 5/8 → 5 is odd, done → 5/8"

Need it finer than a 16th? Multiply by 32 and put it over 32, or by 64 and put it over 64. Same three steps.

2 · A number with decimals → a mixed number

Same thing, with the whole number set aside first.

  1. The whole number stays whole. Write it down and forget it.
  2. Take only what's after the decimal point and run it through the three steps above.
  3. Put them back together.
Worked — 23.8125 Whole: 23
.8125 × 16 = 13 → 13/16 (13 is odd, done)
Answer: 23-13/16"
Worked — 19.53 Whole: 19
.53 × 16 = 8.48 → round to 8 → 8/16 → 4/8 → 1/2
Answer: 19-1/2"

3 · A decimal of a foot → feet, inches and a fraction

Two multiplications instead of one, because you have to get through feet and inches.

  1. Whole number = feet. Set it aside.
  2. Decimal × 12 = inches. The whole part of that answer is your inches.
  3. What's left over × 16 = sixteenths. Round it and reduce.
Worked — 12.79' Feet: 12
.79 × 12 = 9.48 → inches: 9
.48 × 16 = 7.68 → round 8 → 8/16 → 1/2
Answer: 12'-9 1/2"
Worked — 0.3646' Feet: 0
.3646 × 12 = 4.375 → inches: 4
.375 × 16 = 6 → 6/16 → 3/8
Answer: 4-3/8"
The check that catches a bad answer

A hundredth of a foot is about 1/8", so .79' should land somewhere around 9-7/8" (79 hundredths ≈ 79 eighths). That is a rough check, not exact — the real answer above was 9-1/2", and both are in the same neighbourhood: single-digit inches, not 90-something or a fraction of an inch. That is all this check is for — catching a decimal point in the wrong place. If your answer is nowhere near that, you divided when you should have multiplied.

Straight lookup tables for all of this: 17.1 and 17.3.

You halve a dimension every time you find a centerline, and you double one every time you work from a centerline out. These two tricks let you do it on the pipe without a calculator.

START DOUBLE HALVE 3/8 3/4 3/16 5/8 1-1/4 5/16 7/16 7/8 7/32 DOUBLE: halve the bottom number. HALVE: double the bottom number. THE TOP NUMBER NEVER MOVES
The whole trick: leave the top number alone. To double a fraction, halve the bottom; to halve it, double the bottom. 3/8 doubled is 3/4, and halved is 3/16. When the bottom will not halve evenly, double the top instead — 3/8 doubled is also 6/8, which reduces to 3/4. Halving an offset to find its centre, doubling a radius to get a diameter — you do this twenty times a day. Doing it on the bottom number alone is faster than any calculator.

Doubling — halve the bottom number

TO DOUBLE: CUT THE BOTTOM NUMBER IN HALF

The top stays the same. It works because a sixteenth doubled is an eighth — the pieces get twice as big, so you need half as many of them in an inch.

Worked 3/16 doubled → 3/8
5/32 doubled → 5/16
1/8 doubled → 1/4
3/4 doubled → 3/2 → 1-1/2  (top bigger than bottom? carry the whole out)

If the bottom number is odd and will not halve — like 3/5, which you will never see on a tape — double the top instead.

Halving — double the bottom number

TO HALVE: DOUBLE THE BOTTOM NUMBER
Worked 3/8 halved → 3/16
1/2 halved → 1/4
5/16 halved → 5/32
7/8 halved → 7/16

Halving a mixed number — the one worth practising

This is the one you use finding the centre of a pipe, a flange or a bay. Do the whole number and the fraction separately, then deal with the leftover.

  1. Halve the whole number. If it's even you're done with it. If it's odd, halve the even part and hold the leftover 1 back.
  2. Halve the fraction by doubling its bottom number.
  3. If you held a 1 back, half of it is 1/2 — add that to the fraction.
Worked — half of 6-3/8" 6 ÷ 2 = 3, nothing held back
3/8 halved → 3/16
Answer: 3-3/16"
Worked — half of 7-1/4" (odd whole number) 7 = 6 + 1. Half of 6 is 3, hold the 1 back.
1/4 halved → 1/8
The held-back 1 halves to 1/2 → 1/8 + 1/2 = 1/8 + 4/8 = 5/8
Answer: 3-5/8"
Worked — half of 15-3/4" 15 = 14 + 1. Half of 14 is 7, hold the 1.
3/4 halved → 3/8
3/8 + 1/2 = 3/8 + 4/8 = 7/8
Answer: 7-7/8"
Same answer on the calculator

15-3/4 = 15.75 → ÷ 2 = 7.875 → .875 × 16 = 14 → 14/16 → 7/8 → 7-7/8". Same answer. The trick is faster when your hands are full and the calculator is in the gang box.

An angle is the amount of turn between two lines. It is measured in degrees, and a full turn is 360 of them.

ACUTE under 90 40° RIGHT exactly 90 90° OBTUSE over 90 135° STRAIGHT flat, 180 180° EVERY ANGLE YOU WILL MEET measured from one leg round to the other
The four you need names for. A fitting's angle is the turn — how far the line swings off its old direction — not the angle you see between the two pipes. A 45° ell turns the line 45° but the pipes themselves stand 135° apart.

Angle names

NameSizeWhere you see it
Acuteless than 90°Every stock fitting below a 90 — 45s, 22-1/2s, the crotch of a lateral.
Rightexactly 90°A square corner. The one in every triangle you will solve.
Obtusebetween 90° and 180°The open side of a lateral, the back of a Y.
Straightexactly 180°A straight piece of pipe. No turn at all.
Reflexmore than 180°Going the long way round. Rare on pipe, common on a full circle of segments.

The two pairs worth knowing

ComplementaryTwo angles that add to 90°. The two non-square corners of any right triangle are always complementary — so if one is 30°, the other is 60°, no math needed.
SupplementaryTwo angles that add to 180°. A 45° fitting turns the line 45°, which means the angle inside it is 135°. That is why a "45° elbow" measures 135° with a protractor.
Fitting angle vs. measured angle

A fitting is named for how far it turns the line, not for the angle you would read across it. Lay a protractor on a 45° elbow and it reads 135°. Lay it on a 90 and it reads 90 — which is why the 90 never causes confusion and the 45 always does.

Degrees and circles

FULL CIRCLE = 360°  ·  HALF = 180°  ·  QUARTER = 90°

Divide a circle into equal parts and each part is 360 ÷ parts. Eight bolt holes? 45° apart. Twelve? 30°. That is the whole of 15.19 in one line.

Degrees and triangles

THE THREE ANGLES OF ANY TRIANGLE ADD TO 180°
Worked A right triangle has the square corner at 90°. One other angle measures 32°.
180 − 90 − 32 = 58° for the third one.
Shortcut: in a right triangle, the other two always add to 90. So 90 − 32 = 58° straight off.

Degrees split into minutes and seconds on survey work — 17.6 covers turning those into decimals.

Two buttons on the calculator, and you cannot do a single offset without both of them.

5 5 25 SQUARES 5² = 5 × 5 = 25 a number times itself √25 = 5 what times itself makes 25 On the calculator: 5 x² and 25 √
Squaring builds the square; the square root takes you back to its side. Every offset you ever calculate is these two keys and nothing else — you square the two sides you know, and you root the answer to get the one you want.

Squaring — a number times itself

n² = n × n
Worked 5² = 5 × 5 = 25
12² = 12 × 12 = 144
8.5² = 8.5 × 8.5 = 72.25

On a calculator: type the number, press x². Or just multiply it by itself — same thing, and it works on any calculator ever made.

Square root — the other way round

The square root of a number is what you would have squared to get it. Undo, not do.

√25 = 5, because 5 × 5 = 25
Worked √144 = 12
√72.25 = 8.5
√277 = 16.643 — most real answers are not whole numbers, and that is fine

On a calculator: press √ then the number, or the number then √ — depends on the calculator. Try it on 25. If you get 5, you pressed them in the right order for your machine.

The ones worth knowing on sight

nn²nn²nn²
1163611121
2474912144
3986415225
41698120400
5251010025625

Knowing these lets you spot a 3-4-5 triangle (9 + 16 = 25) and a 6-8-10 (36 + 64 = 100) without touching anything.

Square the sides, not the answer

√(14² + 9²) means square each one first, then add, then root. It is not 14 + 9 = 23 rooted. 196 + 81 = 277, √277 = 16.64". If you ever get an answer smaller than the longest side you started with, you did it in the wrong order.

Why this matters on pipe

Every rolling offset, every brace, every diagonal check on a frame is square-and-root. It is the one piece of school math that earns its keep every single day in this trade.

A right triangle is any triangle with one square corner. Every offset, every brace, every grade problem in this trade is one — so getting the names straight is the whole game.

The quick version

On the job you will use 7.1, which is this page boiled down to one drawing.

A RUN adjacent to A OFFSET opposite A TRAVEL hypotenuse — always the longest THE ONLY TRIANGLE IN PIPEFITTING The square corner is what makes it work.
One shape, two sets of names. The book calls them opposite, adjacent and hypotenuse; the job calls them offset, run and travel. They are the same three sides. Opposite and adjacent swap round when you change which angle you are working from — the hypotenuse never does.

The three sides

NameWhich one it isOn a pipe job
HYPOTENUSEThe long one, always directly across from the square corner. It never changes name.Travel — the sloped piece you cut.
OPPOSITEThe side across from the angle you are working with.Offset — how far the line moved over.
ADJACENTThe side beside that angle (and not the hypotenuse).Run — how far along the line went while it moved.
Opposite and adjacent swap. Hypotenuse never does.

There are two non-square corners in a right triangle. Pick the other one to work from and the side that was opposite becomes adjacent, and the other way round. That is not a trick question — it is why you must decide which angle you are working from before you name anything. The hypotenuse is the only side that is safe to name on sight.

Naming them, in order, every time

  1. Find the square corner. It's usually marked with a little box.
  2. The side across from it is the hypotenuse. Label it. Done forever.
  3. Pick your angle — the one you know, or the one you want.
  4. The side across from your angle is the opposite.
  5. The one left over is the adjacent.

The same triangle, three jobs

JobHypotenuseOppositeAdjacent
Pipe offsetTravelOffsetRun
Graded drainThe pipe itselfFallHorizontal run
Knee braceThe braceRise up the wallBase along the floor
The hypotenuse is always the longest

Always. If your answer for the travel comes out shorter than the offset or the run, you have made a mistake — not a small one. Check that before you do anything else.

There's a labelled picture and a step-through animation of all this in 7.1.

Know two sides, want the third. One formula, used two ways — and which way depends on whether the side you want is the long one.

9 3² 16 4² 5 3² + 4² = 5² 9 + 16 = 25 √25 = 5 SQUARE the two ADD them ROOT the answer
The two grey squares hold 9 and 16. Together that is 25, and 25 is the square on the copper side. That is the whole of Pythagoras, and it is why a 3-4-5 comes out square every time. Looking for a short side instead? Subtract rather than add, then root.

Finding the hypotenuse — add, then root

HYP = √(SIDE² + SIDE²)
  1. Square the first short side.
  2. Square the other short side.
  3. Add them together.
  4. Take the square root.
Worked — rise 14", roll 9" 14² = 196
9² = 81
196 + 81 = 277
√277 = 16.64" = 16-5/8"
Worked — a 3-4-5 check 3² = 9  ·  4² = 16  ·  9 + 16 = 25  ·  √25 = 5
Which is why a 3-4-5 layout comes out square. Same for 6-8-10 and 9-12-15.

Finding a short side — subtract, then root

If the side you want is not the hypotenuse, you subtract instead of adding. Everything else is the same.

SIDE = √(HYP² − KNOWN SIDE²)
  1. Square the hypotenuse.
  2. Square the side you know.
  3. Subtract the small one from the big one.
  4. Take the square root.
Worked — travel is 30", offset is 18", what's the run? 30² = 900
18² = 324
900 − 324 = 576
√576 = 24"
Worked — a brace 8'-0" long reaching 5'-6" up a wall Work in inches: 96" and 66"
96² = 9216  ·  66² = 4356
9216 − 4356 = 4860
√4860 = 69.71" → 5'-9 11/16" out from the wall
Add or subtract? Look at what you want.

Want the long side → ADD. Want a short side → SUBTRACT, always big minus small. Get it backwards on a subtraction and the calculator will try to root a negative number and give you an error — which is actually the machine doing you a favour.

Do it all in one unit

Inches or decimal feet, pick one and convert everything before you start. Squaring a number that is half in feet and half in inches gives an answer that is wrong in a way that looks believable.

Squaring and rooting finds a side when you know two sides. But when you know a side and an angle, you need these three. They are nothing more than one side divided by another.

The quick version

The stock-angle values are on 7.2; the full table is 17.8.

A ADJ OPP HYP SIN A = OPP         HYP COS A = ADJ         HYP TAN A = OPP         ADJ THREE RATIOS, ONE ANGLE Each one is just two sides divided.
Sine, cosine and tangent are not magic — each is one side divided by another. Pick the ratio that uses the side you know and the side you want, and the third side never enters into it. SOH-CAH-TOA is the old way of remembering which is which.

What they actually are

Take any right triangle with, say, a 30° angle in it. Make it big, make it small — doesn't matter. The ratio between any two of its sides stays exactly the same. Sine, cosine and tangent are just the names of those three ratios.

sin = OPP ÷ HYP
cos = ADJ ÷ HYP
tan = OPP ÷ ADJ

The memory aid

SOH · CAH · TOA
SOHSine = Opposite over Hypotenuse
CAHCosine = Adjacent over Hypotenuse
TOATangent = Opposite over Adjacent

Say it out loud a few times — "so-cah-toa". It is the only thing in this section worth memorising, and it will still be there in twenty years.

Proving it to yourself

Worked — the same 45° triangle, two sizes Small: opposite 3", adjacent 3", hypotenuse 4.243"
tan = 3 ÷ 3 = 1.000  ·  sin = 3 ÷ 4.243 = .7071

Big: opposite 30", adjacent 30", hypotenuse 42.43"
tan = 30 ÷ 30 = 1.000  ·  sin = 30 ÷ 42.43 = .7071

Ten times bigger, identical ratios. That is why one table of numbers works for every pipe on every job.

Where each one earns its keep

You knowYou wantUse
Offset and angleTravelsin — travel = offset ÷ sin
Run and angleTravelcos — travel = run ÷ cos
Run and angleOffsettan — offset = run × tan
Offset and angleRuntan — run = offset ÷ tan

Every offset constant in 8.3 is one of these three numbers. The 45° travel multiplier 1.414 is just 1 ÷ sin 45°. The 45° stagger .4142 is tan 22-1/2° — half the fitting angle. No magic anywhere.

A rule that saves you every time

sin and cos can never be more than 1, because you are dividing a short side by the longest side. If you work one out and get 1.4, you divided the wrong way round. tan has no such limit — it goes past 1 as soon as the angle passes 45°.

Two sides measured, and you want to know what angle they make. This is the backwards trip — and it is how you find out whether a stock fitting will do the job.

? 16" 9" SIDES IN → ANGLE OUT TAN A = 9 ÷ 16 = .5625 then the INVERSE key TAN⁻¹ .5625 = 29.36° Marked INV, 2nd, SHIFT or ARC on your calculator.
Working the other way. Divide the two sides you have, then press the inverse of whichever ratio you used — that turns a decimal back into an angle. The keys are usually the plain SIN, COS and TAN with a shift key first, and the answer comes out in degrees.

The two steps

  1. Divide two sides to get a ratio. Which two you have decides which ratio it is.
  2. Look that ratio up — on the calculator or in the table — to get the angle.
Sides you haveDivideYou get
OPP and HYPopp ÷ hypa sine
ADJ and HYPadj ÷ hypa cosine
OPP and ADJopp ÷ adja tangent

Looking it up on the calculator

The button you want is the inverse of whichever function you got — marked sin⁻¹, cos⁻¹, tan⁻¹, or sometimes ASIN / ACOS / ATAN. On most calculators you get to them by pressing 2nd or INV or SHIFT first. Full instructions in 18.2.

Worked — offset 9", run 14" Two short sides → that's a tangent
9 ÷ 14 = .6429
2nd tan⁻¹ .6429 = 32.7°
Worked — offset 12", travel 17" A short side and the long side → that's a sine
12 ÷ 17 = .7059
2nd sin⁻¹ .7059 = 44.9° — close enough to a 45 that it is a 45, and your tape was a sixteenth out somewhere

Looking it up in the table — no calculator needed

The trig table in 17.8 runs every half degree from 0 to 90. Run your finger down the right column and find where your number sits.

Worked — the same .6429 tangent Down the tan column:
32° → .6249  (too small)
33° → .6494  (too big)
Yours sits between, closer to 33 → about 32.7°

Want it finer? The step from 32 to 33 is .0245. You are .0180 above 32. .0180 ÷ .0245 = .73 of the way → 32.73°.
Now ask the real question

32.7° is not a fitting. Nobody sells one. So you have three choices, and you make the call before you cut: change the run so a stock angle works, roll the fittings to suit, or cut a miter. Finding the angle is not the end of the job — it is how you find out you have a decision to make.

Working backwards to a stock angle

You have 9" of offset and a 45 is what's in the gang box. A 45 needs run = offset, so you need 9" of run, not 14". Can you move a support and get 9"? Then you are done and you never needed the inverse button at all.

This is the most useful single skill in the section. Know one side and one angle and you can produce every other number in the triangle — which is exactly the situation on almost every offset you will ever lay out.

30° 24" ? ? ONE SIDE + ONE ANGLE solves the whole thing OPP = HYP × sin A = 24 × .5 = 12" ADJ = HYP × cos A = 24 × .866 = 20.78" third angle = 90 − 30 = 60°
Give it one side and one angle and the rest falls out. Multiply the hypotenuse by the sine for the opposite side and by the cosine for the adjacent. The two acute angles always add to 90, so the second one is free.

The whole method in one rule

GOING TO A BIGGER SIDE? MULTIPLY. GOING TO A SMALLER SIDE? DIVIDE.

The hypotenuse is always the biggest. So going to the hypotenuse you divide, and coming from it you multiply.

The six moves

HaveWantDo this
HYPOPPHYP × sin
HYPADJHYP × cos
OPPHYPOPP ÷ sin
ADJHYPADJ ÷ cos
ADJOPPADJ × tan
OPPADJOPP ÷ tan

Six lines, and there is nothing else. Every offset problem in this trade is one of these six.

Worked — the everyday one

18" offset, 45° fittings. Find travel and run. Travel (offset → hyp, so divide): 18 ÷ sin 45 = 18 ÷ .7071 = 25.46"
Run (offset → adj, so divide by tan): 18 ÷ tan 45 = 18 ÷ 1.000 = 18.00"
Third angle: 90 − 45 = 45°

Which is where "at 45°, run equals offset" comes from. It is not a rule of thumb, it is because tan 45 is exactly 1.

Worked — a tight spot

You have 22" of run and need 14" of offset. What angle, and what travel? Angle (two short sides → tangent): 14 ÷ 22 = .6364, tan⁻¹ → 32.5°
Travel (opp → hyp, divide): 14 ÷ sin 32.47 = 14 ÷ .5368 = 26.08"

No 32.5° fitting exists. So: use a 30° and see what run it needs — 14 ÷ tan 30 = 14 ÷ .5774 = 24.25". That is 2-1/4" more run than you have.
Use a 45° instead — run = 14", well inside your 22". That's your answer.

Worked — grade

A drain at 1/4" per foot over 38 feet. How much fall, and what angle is that? Fall (adj → opp, multiply by tan — but grade is already a tangent):
.25 × 38 = 9.5" of fall
Angle: 1/4" in 12" → .25 ÷ 12 = .02083, tan⁻¹ → 1.19°

A grade is a tangent — rise over run. That is all "quarter inch per foot" has ever meant.
How to pick the right line out of the six

Say it out loud: "I have the run, I want the offset." Then find that row. Do not try to remember formulas — find your row. That is what the table is for, and looking it up is not cheating.

The 45 gets its own page because it is most of the work you will ever do, and because its numbers are so clean you can do them in your head.

45° 45° RUN 12" OFFSET 12" TRAVEL 16.97" AT 45° THE RUN AND OFFSET ARE EQUAL TRAVEL = OFFSET × 1.414 OFFSET = TRAVEL × .707 Two numbers. Learn them and most offsets are done
The workhorse. Because both acute angles are 45°, the two short sides come out the same length — so on a 45° offset your run is your offset, and you already know one of them. Multiply by 1.414 for the travel, or by .707 to go back the other way.

What makes it special

A right triangle with a 45° angle must have a second 45° angle — the other two always add to 90. Two equal angles means two equal sides. The offset and the run are the same number.

AT 45°: RUN = OFFSET  ·  TRAVEL = OFFSET × 1.414

Where 1.414 comes from

Worked from scratch Take the simplest one: both short sides = 1.
HYP = √(1² + 1²) = √2 = 1.4142

So the long side of any 45° right triangle is 1.414 times a short side. That is the most-used number in the trade and it is nothing but the square root of two.

The four numbers

HaveWantDo
OffsetTravel× 1.414
TravelOffset× .707
OffsetRunsame number
RunTravel× 1.414

.707 is just 1 ÷ 1.414. Two numbers, four jobs.

Worked — 2" weld pipe, 18" offset Travel = 18 × 1.4142 = 25.46" center to center
Run = 18" — check it against your space before you go further
2" 45° LR take-out = 1.38 each end
Cut = 25.46 − 1.38 − 1.38 = 22.70" → 22-11/16"

45° angles, elbows and offsets — the connection

The fittingA 45° elbow turns the line 45°. Two of them, turned opposite ways, put the line back parallel to where it started. That is an offset.
The triangleThe travel piece between them is the hypotenuse of a 45° right triangle. The offset and run are its two equal legs.
The take-outA 45 LR butt weld elbow takes out about 5/8 × nominal size. Two of them come off the travel to give you the cut.
The limitBecause the elbows have length, there is a shortest offset two 45s can make — that's 18.18.
Do it in your head

1.414 is "the number plus about 40% of it". A 20" offset → 20 + 8 = 28" travel (true answer 28.28"). Close enough to know instantly whether the piece will fit in the rack, and then you do it properly on the calculator before you cut.

Do not use 1.414 on anything but a 45

Every angle has its own multiplier, and they are nothing like each other — a 22-1/2 is 2.613, a 30 is 2.000, a 60 is 1.155. The table is in 8.3. Reaching for 1.414 out of habit on a 22-1/2 puts you nearly half the travel short.

Three kinds of elbow, three different ways the pipe meets them — and that difference is the whole reason each material in this book has its own cut rule.

CENTRE TO CENTRE T.O. T.O. CUT THIS gap gap CUT = C-to-C − 2 T.O. − 2 GAPS
Two take-outs come off, and so do the two root gaps. Miss the gaps on a long spool with a dozen joints and you are an inch short by the end of it. Ask your welder what he wants and use the same number all the way through the spool. The gap is the root opening the welder asked for — usually 1/16" to 1/8".

Screwed elbows

The pipe threads into the fitting. So part of your pipe disappears inside it, and you get that length back.

Take-outCentre of the fitting to the face (the end of the hub).
What you get backThe thread engagement — how far the pipe screws in hand tight.
What you subtractNET = take-out − engagement. Tables in 2.2.

Socket weld elbows

The pipe slides into a socket and stops on a shoulder. Same idea as threaded, different number.

Take-outCentre to face.
What you get backThe socket depth, less the pull-back.
The 1/16" pull-backBottom the pipe, then pull it back 1/16" before you weld. It is there so the weld can shrink without cracking. Dimensions in 16.4.

Butt weld elbows

The pipe stops at the face. Nothing goes inside. Nothing comes back.

BUTT WELD: SUBTRACT THE TAKE-OUT AND NOTHING ELSE

This is why section 1 keeps saying "no add-back". If you ever catch yourself adding something back on a butt weld joint, you have picked up the wrong material's habit.

The welder's gap

A butt weld joint is not pipe-hard-against-fitting. The welder needs a gap to get the root in — usually 1/16" to 1/8", matched to the rod he's rooting with (1.4).

EVERY WELDED END ADDS ITS GAP TO THE ASSEMBLED LENGTH
Worked — what the gap actually does 6" line, 90 to 90, 60" centre to centre. Take-outs 9.00 each.
Cut to take-outs only: 60 − 9 − 9 = 42"
Now gap both ends 1/8": the finished spool measures 42 + 1/8 + 1/8 + 9 + 9 = 60-1/4"
You are a quarter inch long, and you did the math right.
TRUE DIMENSION: CUT = C-to-C − T.O. − T.O. − GAP − GAP
Ask which way your shop runs before you cut anything

Most shops cut to take-outs only and pull the joints closed to absorb the gap. Some hold true dimensions and subtract it. Both are fine. Being the only one on the crew doing it the other way is not. On a six-joint spool, an eighth an end is three quarters of an inch.

Where it really bites

Long runs with a lot of joints, and anything tying into fixed equipment at both ends. On a single offset between two loose ends, nobody will ever know. Tying two nozzles together forty feet apart, it is the whole job.

Prints dimension to the working point — where the two centrelines cross — and there is nothing there but air. Here is how to find it on the fitting in your hands.

THREE MARKS BACK = (Rb + OD÷2) sin A CENTRE = Rb × sin A THROAT = (Rb − OD÷2) sinA All three measured from the face of the fitting. MARKING A 45 OUT OF A 90
Three marks put a cut plane on a curved fitting: one on the back, one on the centreline, one in the throat. Measure all three from the face, not from each other, and join them round the elbow with a wrap.

What the working point is

Run the centreline of the incoming pipe straight on. Run the centreline of the outgoing pipe straight back. Where those two imaginary lines cross is the working point, and that is the corner every dimension on the iso is measured to.

TAKE-OUT = WORKING POINT TO THE FACE

The long way — constructing it

  1. Set the elbow on a flat bench.
  2. Find the centre of each face. Quarter marks, or a centre finder.
  3. Draw the axis out from each face, square to that face, on the bench.
  4. Where the two lines cross is the working point.
  5. Measure from there back to each face. On a good fitting both distances are the same, and they equal the take-out.

Worth doing once, on one fitting, so you have seen it with your own eyes. After that, use the easy way out.

The easy way out

90° LR = 1.5 × NOMINAL  ·  45° LR = .625 × NOMINAL

You do not have to construct anything. The take-out is a published number. Measure it back from the face along the pipe and you are at the working point.

Worked — marking an 8" LR 90 Take-out = 1.5 × 8 = 12"
Square a line round the pipe 12" back from the elbow face. That line passes through the working point.
Do it on both legs and you have the corner pinned without measuring the fitting at all.

Marking a 45° butt weld elbow

Same idea, but the two axes cross at 45° instead of square, so the working point sits further out from the fitting than it feels like it should.

Worked — a 6" 45 Take-out = .625 × 6 = 3.75" (matches the table in 1.11)
Measure 3-3/4" back from each face along each axis. Where they meet is the working point.

Feel the difference: a 6" 90 takes out 9". A 6" 45 takes out 3-3/4". Less than half — the shallower the turn, the less the fitting eats.

Marking it on the pipe

  1. Square a line all the way round at the take-out distance — wrap it, do not tick it.
  2. Mark the back and the throat so the line is findable once the fitting is up in the rack.
  3. Write the number on the pipe in soapstone. Six hours later you will not remember whether that line was 9" or 9-1/4".
Check a fitting from a strange box

B16.9 take-outs are standard, but reducing elbows, short radius, imported fittings and anything reconditioned are not. Construct the working point the long way on the first one out of every box, confirm it matches the table, then trust the table for the rest.

Every take-out in this book came out of one formula. Learn it and you can work out a fitting no table covers — which is the whole point of knowing the math instead of just looking things up.

TAKE-OUT Rb 1.5 × nominal half the angle WORKING POINT centrelines cross T.O. = Rb × tan(A÷2)
Every take-out in the book comes out of one formula: the bend radius times the tangent of half the turn. On a 90, half the angle is 45 and tan 45 is exactly 1 — which is the only reason a long radius 90 comes out at 1.5 times the pipe size.

The formula

TAKE-OUT = BEND RADIUS × tan(HALF THE ANGLE)
BEND RADIUSHow tight the elbow curves, measured on the centreline. Long radius = 1.5 × nominal size. Short radius = 1.0 × nominal.
HALF THE ANGLEHalf of how far the fitting turns the line. A 90 → 45. A 45 → 22-1/2.

Why it works out to 1.5 × size on a 90

Worked — any LR 90 Radius = 1.5 × nominal
Half the angle = 45°, and tan 45 = 1.000
T.O. = 1.5 × nominal × 1.000 = 1.5 × nominal

The multiplier is 1 only because it is a 90. That is the whole reason the 90 is the easy one.

90° butt weld elbows

Worked 8": 1.5 × 8 = 12.00"
12": 1.5 × 12 = 18.00"
Short radius 8": 1.0 × 8 = 8.00"

45° butt weld elbows — two different numbers

This is the one that confuses people, and the difference is real.

Take-outWhy
Field cut from a 901.5 × nom × tan 22.5
= .6213 × nominal
You cut a 90 in half through the bend centre (15.18). It keeps the 90's radius.
Factory made.625 × nominal
(5/8 × size)
What B16.9 actually specifies for a made 45.
How much does it matter? 12" pipe: field cut = 12 × .6213 = 7.456". Factory = 12 × .625 = 7.500"
Difference: .044" — about a twentieth of an inch.

Which is why nobody worries about it on one joint, and why you should still use the right number when four of them stack up in a run.

Odd angle elbows

Same formula, any angle you like.

T.O. = 1.5 × NOMINAL × tan(ANGLE ÷ 2)
Worked — a 30° elbow in 8" Half the angle: 15°, tan 15 = .2679
T.O. = 1.5 × 8 × .2679 = 3.21"

And 15.18 tells you where to cut it out of a 90.

Take-out in inches, long radius. The 45° column is the factory B16.9 figure — the same number as 1.11 and the cut length calculator. The other odd-angle columns are the formula, because nobody sells those fittings. Below 1" the factory 90 is 1-1/2" (not 1.5 × nominal), so 1/2" and 3/4" use the 1" radius.

Size90°22-1/2°30°45°60°
1/2"1.500.300.400.620.87
3/4"1.500.300.400.750.87
1"1.500.300.400.880.87
1-1/4"1.880.370.501.001.08
1-1/2"2.250.450.601.121.30
2"3.000.600.801.381.73
2-1/2"3.750.751.001.752.17
3"4.500.901.212.002.60
4"6.001.191.612.503.46
5"7.501.492.013.124.33
6"9.001.792.413.755.20
8"12.002.393.225.006.93
10"15.002.984.026.258.66
12"18.003.584.827.5010.39
14"21.004.185.638.7512.12
16"24.004.776.4310.0013.86
18"27.005.377.2311.2515.59
20"30.005.978.0412.5017.32
24"36.007.169.6515.0020.78

Below 1" nominal the standard stops scaling down: 1/2", 3/4" and 1" LR elbows all share the same 1.50" bend radius, so their 90° and 45° take-outs above are the real B16.9 numbers, not 1.5×size. The 45° column is the factory figure at every size — use it, because it is the fitting in the box. From 4" up it is .625 × size, a hair over the field-cut formula; from 3/4" to 3" the factory 45 runs longer than the formula (2" is 1.38 against 1.24). The 22-1/2°, 30° and 60° columns have no off-the-shelf fitting, so those are the pure formula on the real bend radius — which is why 1/2" and 3/4" read the same as 1".

Screwed and socket weld take-outs

The formula does not work on these. A threaded or socket fitting is not a constant-radius bend — it is a casting or a forging with a hub on it, and its centre-to-face is whatever the pattern maker decided.

FittingWhere the number comes from
90° screwedTable in 2.2 (150# malleable). Use the NET column.
90° socket weldTable in 16.4 (Class 3000 forged steel).
45° screwed or socket weldSame tables. A 45 runs roughly .6 of the 90's take-out in both — but look it up, do not scale it.
Anything unusualMeasure it. Lay it against a framing square, butt one face to the blade, measure to the centre of the other opening.
Unions and couplings have no take-out at all

There is no centre to measure from — they are straight-through fittings. Work those out from laying lengths instead (2.2).

A simple offset is two fittings of the same angle, turned opposite ways. The line steps over and comes back out parallel to where it started. It is the offset you will build ninety times out of a hundred.

The quick version

Three steps and the multipliers, no explanation: 8.2 and 8.3. The calculator in 13.1 does it with the take-outs.

RUN OFFSET TRAVEL the piece you cut 45° TWO FITTINGS, OPPOSITE WAYS
Two fittings of the same angle turned opposite ways, and the line comes out parallel to where it started. The travel is the piece you actually cut.

The three numbers

OFFSETHow far the line moves over. Usually given, or measured.
TRAVELThe sloped piece, centre of fitting to centre of fitting. What you're solving for.
RUNHow far along the line goes while it moves over. Check this against your space.

The method, any angle

  1. Travel = offset ÷ sin(angle)
  2. Run = offset ÷ tan(angle)
  3. Face to face = travel − both take-outs
  4. Cut = face to face, less the welder's gaps if your shop subtracts them

Or use the multipliers in 8.3, which are these same divisions worked out once for every stock angle.

45° simple offset — the common one

TRAVEL = OFFSET × 1.414  ·  RUN = OFFSET
Worked — 6" weld pipe, 14" offset Travel = 14 × 1.414 = 19.80"
Run = 14.00"
6" 45 take-out = 3.75 each end
Face to face = 19.80 − 3.75 − 3.75 = 12.30" = 12-5/16"
Gapping 1/8" each end? 12-5/16 − 1/4 = 12-1/16"

Face to face — what it means

Travel is centre to centre — working point to working point. Face to face is the gap between the two fitting faces, which is the piece of pipe you cut. They are two different numbers and the difference is the two take-outs.

Never cut to the travel

The travel is a dimension on paper. Cut a pipe to it and it is too long by both take-outs — on 6" that is 7-1/2". This is the single most common way an apprentice ruins a joint of pipe, and everybody does it once.

90° simple offset

Two 90s. The line goes square off, across, and square back.

TRAVEL = OFFSET  ·  RUN = 0

sin 90 = 1, so the travel is the offset. And tan 90 is infinite, which is the maths saying the run is zero — the line does not advance at all. Use it when you have no room to go forward.

Worked — 4" weld pipe, 30" offset, no room to advance Travel = 30"
4" 90 take-out = 6.00 each end
Face to face = 30 − 6 − 6 = 18"

Odd angle simple offsets

Same method, any angle — it just means working the sin and tan yourself instead of reading a multiplier.

Worked — 22-1/2°, 8" offset, 3" weld pipe Travel = 8 ÷ sin 22.5 = 8 ÷ .3827 = 20.90"
Run = 8 ÷ tan 22.5 = 8 ÷ .4142 = 19.31" — that is a lot of run for 8" of offset, so check the space
3" 22-1/2° take-out = 1.5 × 3 × tan 11.25 = 0.90"
Face to face = 20.90 − .90 − .90 = 19.10" = 19-1/8"
Picking the angle

Tight on run? Go steeper — 60° makes the same jump in 58% of the run a 45 needs. Flow-sensitive? Go shallower — a 22-1/2 is much easier on the water, which is why you see them on pump suctions. The run column in 8.3 is what you compare.

There is a smallest offset two fittings can make — the one where they are welded face to face with nothing but a gap between them. Below that, no amount of math helps: you need a different angle.

fitting to fitting SHORTEST OFFSET TWO FITTINGS HARD TOGETHER
The least offset a pair of 45s can make: both fittings butted up with only the root gaps between them. Work it out once for each pipe size and write it on the back of your book — it tells you the moment a 45 is not going to reach. Nothing between them but the root gaps. Any less offset than this and a 45 will not fit — you drop to 22-1/2° or roll it.

Why there's a limit

The fittings have length. Two 45s butted together still put the line over by whatever their take-outs add up to, measured on the slant. You cannot get closer than that with those fittings.

SHORTEST TRAVEL = T.O. + GAP + T.O.
SHORTEST OFFSET = SHORTEST TRAVEL × sin(ANGLE)
Worked — 6" pipe, two 45s butted 6" 45 take-out = 3.75"
Travel = 3.75 + 1/8 + 3.75 = 7.625"
Offset = 7.625 × .7071 = 5.39"
Run = 7.625 × .7071 = 5.39" (same, because it's a 45)

So on 6" pipe you cannot make a 45° offset smaller than about 5-3/8". Ask for 4" of offset and the answer is no.

The table

Inches, butt weld long radius, 1/8" welder's gap at the one joint between the fittings. Offset is the smallest you can make with those two fittings butted; run is what it costs you.

Size22½° off45° off45° run90° off90° travel
1/2"0.280.970.973.123.12
3/4"0.281.151.153.123.12
1"0.281.331.333.123.12
1-1/4"0.331.501.503.883.88
1-1/2"0.391.671.674.624.62
2"0.502.042.046.126.12
2-1/2"0.622.562.567.627.62
3"0.732.922.929.129.12
4"0.963.623.6212.1212.12
5"1.194.504.5015.1215.12
6"1.425.395.3918.1218.12
8"1.877.167.1624.1224.12
10"2.338.938.9330.1230.12
12"2.7910.6910.6936.1236.12
14"3.2412.4612.4642.1242.12
16"3.7014.2314.2348.1248.12
18"4.1616.0016.0054.1254.12
20"4.6217.7717.7760.1260.12
24"5.5321.3021.3072.1272.12

What to do when you need less

ProblemAnswer
Offset too small for two 45sGo shallower. A 22-1/2 makes a much smaller offset — look at the first column. But it eats 2.4 times the run.
Still too small at 22-1/2°Roll the fittings. Two 45s rotated so only part of their offset lands in the direction you need (18.21).
Still too smallMove something else. A support, a nozzle, the route. At some point the fitting is not the problem.
Need a tiny offset in small boreBend it if the material allows, or use an eccentric reducer pair (15.13) if a size change is happening anyway.
The 90° column is the other kind of limit

Two 90s butted give you the biggest offset per zero run — on 6" that is 18-1/8" of offset and no advance at all. That is the tool for getting around something with no room to go forward. What it costs you is two hard turns and the pressure drop that comes with them.

Keep some pipe between them

These are the theoretical minimums. In practice put at least a short nipple between two fittings — the welder needs room to get round the joint, and a fitting-to-fitting weld on a tight radius is miserable work and a common reject.

Sometimes the line has to move over a long way in a very short distance. A 45 needs as much run as offset. A combination offset uses a 90 to gain offset with no run at all, then 45s to finish the job.

SQUARE LEG offset − run 45° TRAVEL = run × 1.414 RUN — all you have OFFSET (> the run) 90 GAINS OFFSET WITH NO RUN AT ALL 90 − 45 − 45 = 0
When the offset is bigger than the run, a pair of 45s will not reach. A 90 gains offset with no run at all, then the two 45s bring the line back parallel: 90 − 45 − 45 = 0. The square leg is the offset minus the run, and the 45° travel is the run times 1.414.

What it is

Three fittings: a 90, then two 45s. The 90 turns the line square off the run; it travels straight across; then the two 45s bring it back parallel to where it started.

90° OUT → SQUARE LEG → 45° → TRAVEL → 45° → PARALLEL AGAIN

Turn counting: 90 one way, then 45 back, then 45 back again. 90 − 45 − 45 = 0. The line ends up dead parallel — which is what makes it an offset and not a change of direction.

When you reach for one

USE IT WHEN THE OFFSET IS BIGGER THAN THE RUN YOU HAVE

If the offset and the run are equal, a plain 45 does it and you do not need this. If the offset is smaller than the run, go shallower than 45. This is the tool for offset > run.

The method — two lines of math

SQUARE LEG = OFFSET − RUN
45° TRAVEL = RUN × 1.414

Both are centre-to-centre. Take your take-outs off each one to get the pipe.

Worked — 6" weld pipe, 30" of offset, only 10" of run A 45 alone would need 30" of run. You have 10. So:

Square leg = 30 − 10 = 20" centre to centre
45° travel = 10 × 1.414 = 14.14" centre to centre

Now the pipe. 6" take-outs: 90 = 9.00, 45 = 3.75
Square leg cut = 20 − 9.00 − 3.75 = 7.25" = 7-1/4"
45° travel cut = 14.14 − 3.75 − 3.75 = 6.64" = 6-5/8"

Two short pieces of pipe, three fittings, 30" of offset in 10" of run.

Checking it closes

Same job, walked through on paper Start at the 90's working point, call it 0,0. Line was running east.
90 turns it north. Go 20" north → you are at (0, 20)
45 turns it northeast. Go 14.14" at 45° → that's 10 east and 10 north → (10, 30)
45 turns it back east.

Moved over 30, advanced 10. Exactly what was asked for.

90° and an odd angle

Same shape with other fittings — a 90, then an A° fitting, then a (90 − A)° fitting to bring the line back parallel. The last two always add to 90: two 45s, or a 60 and a 30, or a 22-1/2 and a 67-1/2. Two formulas instead of two numbers.

SQUARE LEG = OFFSET − (RUN ÷ tan A)
TRAVEL = RUN ÷ sin A
Worked — 30" offset, 10" run, a 60° then a 30° Square leg = 30 − (10 ÷ 1.7321) = 30 − 5.77 = 24.23"
Travel = 10 ÷ .8660 = 11.55"

Steeper fittings mean a longer square leg and a shorter travel. Shallower means the other way. Two 60s would leave the line 30° off parallel — check the angles add up: 90 − 60 − 30 = 0. Pick the angle on flow and on what's in the warehouse.
Check both legs will physically fit

Run the math and you can get a leg shorter than the two fittings on it — a negative cut. That means the offset you want cannot be built that way in that space. Check against 18.20 before you order anything.

The other combination — turning a corner

Put just a 90 and one 45 together and the line does not come back parallel — it leaves at 45° to where it came in. That is a change of direction with a step over in it, and it is the right answer when the rack itself turns 45°. The set you gain is simply T.O.(90) + gap + T.O.(45).

Squeeze every fitting in a combination offset up against the next one and you get the most offset anybody can make in the least run with stock fittings. This is the table you check when somebody says it cannot be done.

OFFSET RUN SQUARE LEG as short as the 90 and 45 allow A 90 AND TWO 45s, ALL TIGHT the least run this offset can be made in
When the offset is bigger than the run you have, this is as tight as it gets: a 90 hard against a 45, the square leg no longer than the two fittings need. Anything tighter and you are into a fabricated miter or a different route.

How it's built

SQUARE LEG = T.O.(90) + GAP + T.O.(45)
45° TRAVEL = T.O.(45) + GAP + T.O.(45)
OFFSET = SQUARE LEG + (TRAVEL × .7071)
RUN = TRAVEL × .7071
Worked — 6" pipe, everything butted Square leg = 9.00 + 1/8 + 3.75 = 12.875"
45° travel = 3.75 + 1/8 + 3.75 = 7.625"
Offset = 12.875 + (7.625 × .7071) = 12.875 + 5.39 = 18.27"
Run = 5.39"

The table

Inches, butt weld long radius, 1/8" gaps. Every leg is fitting-to-fitting with no pipe in it. These are limits, not recommendations — see the warning below.

SizeSquare leg45° travelMax offsetin this run
1/2"2.251.363.210.97
3/4"2.371.623.521.15
1"2.501.893.841.33
1-1/4"3.002.124.511.50
1-1/2"3.502.375.171.67
2"4.502.886.552.04
2-1/2"5.623.628.192.56
3"6.624.129.542.92
4"8.625.1212.253.62
5"10.756.3715.254.50
6"12.887.6218.275.39
8"17.1210.1224.287.16
10"21.3812.6230.308.93
12"25.6215.1236.3210.69
14"29.8817.6242.3412.46
16"34.1220.1248.3614.23
18"38.3822.6254.3716.00
20"42.6225.1260.3917.77
24"51.1230.1272.4321.30

Why it's worth knowing

6" pipe, 5-3/8" of run to work in Simple 45 offset: run 5.39" buys you 5.39" of offset.
Combination offset: the same 5.39" of run buys you 18.27" of offset.

More than three times the offset in identical space. That is what the 90 is doing for you — offset with no run attached to it.

Reading the table

Your offset is less than the tableA combination is overkill. Use a simple offset (18.17).
Your offset is more than the table, run is tightCombination offset. Work the legs out with 18.19.
Your run is less than the table's runNo combination fits. Two 90s (run = 0) or re-route.
Both too tightIt is not a pipe problem any more. Take it back to the foreman.
Fitting-to-fitting is a last resort

These numbers assume every fitting is welded straight to the next with no pipe between. That is legal and it is done — but the welds are awkward, the flow is ugly, and some specs prohibit it outright. Build to the table only when you have to, and put a nipple in wherever you can afford the room.

The line has to move up and over at the same time. It looks like a three-dimensional problem and people dread it. It is not — you flatten it into one number and then it is an ordinary offset.

The quick version

The field method and the step-through animation are 8.4; the calculator in 13.1 takes rise and roll directly.

ROLL RISE ADVANCE TRUE OFFSET TRAVEL RISE AND ROLL BECOME ONE NUMBER √(rise² + roll²) = true offset
The box. Rise and roll are two edges of the end face; the diagonal across that face is the true offset, and the diagonal through the middle is the travel you cut.

The box

Picture a rectangular box. The pipe enters at one bottom corner and leaves at the opposite top corner. Three edges of that box are your three measurements:

EdgeWhat it is
RISEHow far the line moves up (or down).
ROLLHow far it moves sideways. Also called the set.
ADVANCEHow far it moves along the original direction. Same idea as run.

And two diagonals matter:

TRUE OFFSETThe diagonal across the end of the box. Rise and roll combined into a single straight-line distance.
TRAVELThe diagonal through the middle of the box, corner to opposite corner. The piece you cut.

The one move that makes it easy

TRUE OFFSET = √(RISE² + ROLL²)

Do this first, every time. Once rise and roll are one number, everything after it is the ordinary offset math from 18.17 — the true offset just takes the place of the offset.

Prove it to yourself

Stand at the end of the pipe and look straight down the bore. The advance vanishes — you are looking along it. All you can see is the rise and the roll, two sides of a rectangle, and the straight line between where the pipe is and where it has to go. That line is the true offset, and it is just an offset.

The whole method

  1. True offset = √(rise² + roll²)
  2. Travel = true offset ÷ sin(fitting angle)
  3. Advance = true offset ÷ tan(fitting angle)
  4. Cut = travel − both take-outs
  5. Angle of turn = the angle whose tangent is roll ÷ rise — how far to rotate the fittings (18.22)

45° rolling offset

Worked — 3" weld pipe, rise 14", roll 9" 1. True offset: 14² = 196, 9² = 81, 196 + 81 = 277, √277 = 16.643"
2. Travel: 16.643 × 1.4142 = 23.54"
3. Advance: 16.64 × 1.000 = 16.64" — check it against your space
4. Cut: 3" 45 take-out = 2.00 → 23.54 − 2.00 − 2.00 = 19.54" = 19-9/16"
5. Turn: 9 ÷ 14 = .6429 → 32.7° off top dead centre

90° rolling offset

Two 90s, rolled. sin 90 = 1, so the travel is the true offset, and the advance is zero.

Worked — 4" weld pipe, rise 20", roll 15", no room to advance True offset = √(400 + 225) = √625 = 25.00"
Travel = 25.00"  ·  Advance = 0
4" 90 take-out = 6.00 → Cut = 25 − 6 − 6 = 13"
Turn = 15 ÷ 20 = .75 → 36.9° off top
The mistake everybody makes once

Using the rise on its own as the offset and forgetting the roll. You will cut short every time and be certain the print is wrong. If a rolling offset will not come out, you either swapped rise and roll or you forgot to square-root.

Chalk it on the deck

Before you cut, chalk the rise and the roll on the floor as two sides of a rectangle and measure the diagonal. If the chalk disagrees with your calculator, your calculator is wrong. Two minutes of chalk has saved a lot of pipe.

There is a full step-through animation of this in 8.4, and a calculator in 13.1.

When the advance is fixed by the job — a nozzle, a wall, a hanger you cannot move — you do not get to pick the fitting angle. You have to work out what angle the job is asking for, and then two more angles to build it.

PLAN — from above ROLL ELEVATION — from the side RISE TRUE OFFSET = √(RISE² + ROLL²) TURN = the angle you set the fitting to, found from the true offset and the advance.
Two drawings of one pipe. Neither view shows the real length — the plan hides the rise and the elevation hides the roll. Square them, add, root, and you have the true offset, which is what the fitting actually has to make.

All three measurements known

Rise, roll and advance are all set by where the pipe starts and where it has to end. Everything else falls out of them.

  1. True offset = √(rise² + roll²)
  2. Fitting angle = the angle whose tangent is true offset ÷ advance
  3. Travel = √(true offset² + advance²)

That travel formula is just the box diagonal — all three edges squared, added, rooted. It gives the same answer as true offset ÷ sin(angle), and it saves you finding the angle first.

Worked — rise 12", roll 16", advance 34" True offset = √(144 + 256) = √400 = 20.00"
Fitting angle = 20 ÷ 34 = .5882 → tan⁻¹ → 30.5°
Travel = √(400 + 1156) = √1556 = 39.45"

30.5° is not a fitting. So either take the 30° and let the advance come out at 20 ÷ tan 30 = 34.64" — 5/8" longer than you have — or cut the fittings, or move something.

The angle of turn

This is how far round the pipe you rotate the fittings from top dead centre. It is what makes a rolling offset roll.

ANGLE OF TURN = the angle whose tan is ROLL ÷ RISE
Worked — roll 16", rise 12" 16 ÷ 12 = 1.3333 → tan⁻¹ → 53.1° off top dead centre

Mark top dead centre on the pipe, measure 53.1° round, and that is where the elbow's plane goes. More roll than rise gives you more than 45°; more rise than roll gives you less.
Marking the turn on the pipe

Degrees round a pipe are just a distance along the circumference: OD × 3.1416 × degrees ÷ 360. On 6" pipe, 53.1° is 20.81 × 53.1 ÷ 360 = 3.07" round from top dead centre. Wrap it, measure it, punch it. No protractor needed.

The angle of rise

How steeply the travel piece climbs, looked at from the side. Not the same as the fitting angle, and not the same as the turn.

ANGLE OF RISE = the angle whose tan is RISE ÷ ADVANCE
Worked — rise 12", advance 34" 12 ÷ 34 = .3529 → tan⁻¹ → 19.4°

That is the slope you will see on the elevation drawing. A level laid on the travel piece reads a little less, because the piece also swings sideways by the roll: 12 ÷ √(16² + 34²) = 12 ÷ 37.58 → 17.7°. Useful for checking the spool in place, and for telling a hanger crew how steep the line is running through their bay.

The three angles, side by side

AngleAnswersFrom
Fitting angleWhich elbow do I buy?true offset ÷ advance
Angle of turnHow far do I rotate them round the pipe?roll ÷ rise
Angle of riseHow steep does the piece sit?rise ÷ advance
The roll is a rotation, not a cut

The travel piece is a square cut at both ends. There is no angle on the pipe anywhere. Everything about the roll lives in how far the two fittings are turned around the pipe — and they must both be turned the same amount, the same way. Mark a continuous chalk line down the back of the whole spool before you break anything apart.

The hardest-sounding thing in the book, and it is two things you already know stacked on top of each other. The line has to move up and over and it has more offset than run.

SQUARE LEG TRAVEL
A rolling offset that is too steep for a pair of 45s. Reduce the rise and roll to one true offset, then add the square leg the same way you would on the flat — the box does not change the method, only the numbers that go into it.

The trick is the order

FLATTEN IT FIRST, THEN TREAT IT AS A FLAT COMBINATION OFFSET

Rise and roll collapse into one true offset (18.21). From that point on the problem is exactly the combination offset from 18.19 — there is nothing new in it at all. At the very end you roll the whole assembly by the angle of turn.

The five steps

  1. True offset = √(rise² + roll²). Rise and roll are now one number and you are done with them.
  2. Square leg = true offset − advance. That is the piece straight off the 90.
  3. 45° travel = advance × 1.414.
  4. Take the take-outs off both legs to get the two pipe lengths.
  5. Angle of turn = tan⁻¹(roll ÷ rise). Rotate every fitting in the assembly by that amount, the same way.
Worked — 6" weld pipe. Rise 24", roll 18", only 12" of advance. 1. True offset: 24² = 576, 18² = 324, 576 + 324 = 900, √900 = 30.00"

A 45 would need 30" of advance. You have 12. So it's a combination.

2. Square leg: 30 − 12 = 18.00" centre to centre
3. 45° travel: 12 × 1.414 = 16.97" centre to centre

4. The pipe — 6" take-outs: 90 = 9.00, 45 = 3.75
Square leg cut = 18.00 − 9.00 − 3.75 = 5.25" = 5-1/4"
Travel cut = 16.97 − 3.75 − 3.75 = 9.47" = 9-1/2"

5. Angle of turn: 18 ÷ 24 = .75 → tan⁻¹ → 36.9° off top dead centre
Every fitting gets rolled 36.9°, all the same way.

Why rolling the 90 too

The whole assembly is one flat offset that has been tipped over sideways. If you roll the 45s but leave the 90 plumb, the flat offset is no longer flat — and the line will not land where you calculated. The 90 rolls with everything else.

Checking it before you weld

  1. Chalk the rise and the roll on the deck as two sides of a rectangle. Measure the diagonal — it must equal your true offset.
  2. Tack it up loose and put a tape on the finished rise, roll and advance before anything gets welded out.
  3. Sight down the whole spool. A combination rolling offset with one fitting rolled wrong looks almost right from six feet away and is completely wrong at the other end.
This is the one to draw

Three fittings' worth of decisions and three directions. Sketch it on the back of the print, write the rise, roll and advance on the sketch, then write each leg length on it as you work them out. Nobody holds a combination rolling offset in their head, and the ones who try are the ones who build it backwards.

If it will not close

Work backwards from the sketch: does square leg + (travel × .7071) equal your true offset? Does travel × .7071 equal your advance? If either check fails, the math is wrong. If they both pass and it still will not fit, the measurements are wrong — go take them again.

Everything in this trade is round. One number — pi — connects the distance across a circle to the distance around it, and it is the same number for every circle that has ever existed.

DIAMETER RADIUS CIRCUMFERENCE C = π × D π = 3.1416 D = C ÷ π R = D ÷ 2 Wrap a 6" pipe (6.625 OD) 6.625 × 3.1416 = 20.81" ≈ 20-13/16" of paper
π is how many diameters it takes to go round. A shade over three, every time, on any circle there has ever been. Multiply the outside diameter — not the nominal size — when you are cutting a wrap.

Pi

π = 3.1416

Take any circle. Measure around it, measure across it, divide the first by the second. You get 3.1416. Every time, on a 1/2" nipple or a 300-foot tank. That is all pi is — how many diameters it takes to go around.

3.1416 is plenty. 3.14 is fine for a rough check. The calculator's π key gives you more digits than any tape can read.

Circumference from the diameter

C = D × 3.1416

This is the one you use, because pipe is sold and stamped by diameter.

Worked 6" pipe (OD 6.625): 6.625 × 3.1416 = 20.81" around
12" pipe (OD 12.750): 12.750 × 3.1416 = 40.06" around
A 48" tank: 48 × 3.1416 = 150.80" = 12'-6 13/16"

Circumference from the radius

The radius is half the diameter, so you need pi twice.

C = 2 × π × R
Worked — a bend with a 60" centerline radius Full circle: 2 × 3.1416 × 60 = 376.99"
A 90° bend is a quarter of that: 376.99 ÷ 4 = 94.25" of pipe in the bend
(Which matches the arc formula in 15.20 — same math, different dress.)
Radius or diameter? Look at what you were given.

Pipe is given as a diameter. Bends are given as a radius. Using one where the other belongs puts you out by exactly double or exactly half — an error big enough that it is usually obvious, but not always. Write down which one you have before you start.

Going backwards

D = C ÷ 3.1416   (or C × .3183)
Worked — measuring an unmarked pipe Wrap a tape around it: 27-1/8" = 27.125"
27.125 ÷ 3.1416 = 8.634" OD → that's 8" pipe (8.625 OD)

This is how you size a line you cannot get a caliper on. Wrap it, divide by pi, match it to the table in 16.9.

Circumference of every pipe size, and the same number divided into equal parts for layout, is in 15.2.

Two ideas that explain why the trig works, plus one formula you will actually use on bends and coils.

1 RADIAN = 57.3° arc = radius, so the angle is one radian ARC = R × DEG × .017453 .017453 turns degrees into radians. A 60° bend, 30" radius: 30 × 60 × .017453 = 31.4" of arc The pipe the machine eats Add both tangents.
One radian is the angle you get when the arc is as long as the radius — 57.3°. You never have to think in radians on the job, but the constant .017453 that comes out of them is what turns a bend angle into inches of pipe.

The unit circle — where sine and cosine come from

Draw a circle with a radius of exactly 1. Draw a line out from the centre at some angle. Where that line hits the circle, drop down to the horizontal.

The height of that pointis the sine of the angle
The distance across to that pointis the cosine of the angle
The radius itselfis the hypotenuse, and it is 1
What it shows you At 0° the point is flat right: height 0, across 1. So sin 0 = 0, cos 0 = 1.
At 90° the point is straight up: height 1, across 0. So sin 90 = 1, cos 90 = 0.
At 45° it is halfway: both .7071.

And because the radius is 1, nothing can ever be bigger than 1. That is why a sine or cosine over 1.000 always means you divided the wrong way round.

Radians — the other way to measure an angle

A radian is the angle you get when the arc along the edge is exactly as long as the radius. It is not a fitter's unit — but it is what arc-length math runs on, and it is the mode your calculator must not be in.

1 RADIAN = 57.296°  ·  FULL CIRCLE = 6.2832 RADIANS
DEGREES × .017453 = RADIANS  ·  RADIANS × 57.296 = DEGREES
Worked — radians for a central angle 90° → 90 × .017453 = 1.5708 rad
45° → 45 × .017453 = 0.7854 rad
30° → 30 × .017453 = 0.5236 rad

Arc length — the one you will use

ARC = RADIUS × ANGLE IN RADIANS

Or skip the middle step and do it in one:

ARC = RADIUS × DEGREES × .017453
Worked — pipe in a 5D bend 12" pipe, 5D bend → radius = 5 × 12 = 60"
45° bend: 60 × 45 × .017453 = 47.1" of pipe in the bend
90° bend: 60 × 90 × .017453 = 94.2"
Worked — stepping round a pipe 8" pipe, OD 8.625, radius 4.3125. How far along the surface is 22-1/2°?
4.3125 × 22.5 × .017453 = 1.694"
Which is the ÷16 station spacing in 15.2. Same number, arrived at the long way.
This is the DEG/RAD thing on your calculator

Your calculator can measure angles in either. Everything in this book is in degrees. If your trig answers are coming out strange, that switch is the first thing to check — 18.2 shows you how.

A chord is a straight line between two points on a circle. It is how you lay out bolt holes with a pair of dividers and no protractor at all.

45° CHORD = BC × sin(180 ÷ N) BC = bolt circle N = number of holes 8 holes on a 7-1/2" BC: 7.5 × sin 22.5° = 2.87" = 2-7/8" Set dividers, step it round.
A chord is the straight line between two holes — what your dividers actually measure. Step it round the bolt circle and the last one should land on the first; if it does not, your bolt circle is wrong, not your math.

The chord formula

CHORD = CIRCLE DIAMETER × sin(HALF THE ANGLE)

The "angle" is the central angle — how many degrees apart the two points are, measured at the centre.

Worked — two points 45° apart on a 6" bolt circle Half the angle: 45 ÷ 2 = 22.5°
sin 22.5° = .3827
CHORD = 6 × .3827 = 2.296" → set dividers at 2-19/64, near enough 2-5/16"

Flanges using the chord length

Bolt holes are evenly spaced, so the angle between them is 360 ÷ holes and the chord is the same for every pair. Work it out once and step it round.

PartsAngle apartChord × bolt circle
3120°0.8660
490°0.7071
572°0.5878
660°0.5000
845°0.3827
1036°0.3090
1230°0.2588
1622.5°0.1951
2018°0.1564
2415°0.1305

Multiply your bolt circle diameter by the factor. Bolt circles by size and class are in 10.1 and 10.2.

Worked — 8" Class 150: 8 holes, 11.75" bolt circle 8 × .3827 → no — the 8 is the pipe size, not a diameter.
Use the bolt circle off 10.1: 11.75 × .3827 = 4.497" between hole centres — call it 4-1/2".

Marking a flange with a compass

  1. Find the centre and scribe the bolt circle with dividers or a trammel.
  2. Scribe the vertical and horizontal centrelines across it. These are your datum.
  3. Mark the first hole at HALF the hole angle off the vertical centreline — that is two-holing (15.19), and it is not optional.
  4. Set the dividers to the chord and walk them round, stepping from mark to mark.
  5. Check it closes. The last step should land exactly on the first mark. If it misses, split the difference across all the steps and walk it again. Two or three passes and it closes.
  6. Punch every centre, then drill.

Right triangles in circles — and how to find a centre with a square

Here is a fact worth carrying: draw a line from each end of a diameter to any point on the circle, and the corner you make is always exactly 90°. Any point, every circle, no exceptions.

Turn that around and it becomes the fastest way to find the centre of anything round:

  1. Put the corner of a framing square anywhere on the edge of the circle.
  2. Mark the two points where the blades cross the edge. Join them — that line is a diameter, because the corner was square.
  3. Move the square somewhere else on the edge and do it again.
  4. Where the two diameters cross is the centre.
Where you'll use it Centring a hole on a plate · finding the centre of a pipe end to lay out a saddle · finding the middle of a flange with no markings · centring a bolt pattern on a round base.

Two square corners and a straightedge. No math, no dividers, works on any diameter from a nipple to a tank head.

The six-step trick

THE RADIUS STEPS AROUND ANY CIRCLE EXACTLY SIX TIMES

Because for 6 parts the chord is D × sin 30° = D × .5 — which is the radius. So set your dividers to the radius, step round, and you have six exact points with no math. Halve those steps and you have twelve. It is the oldest layout trick there is and it still works.

Why bother when a flange comes drilled

Because sooner or later you will be laying out a blind, a plate, a bolt pattern on a base, or a set of holes in a support, and there is no drilled flange to copy. Chords and a pair of dividers work on anything round.

How much is inside a pipe, and how to lay out a shape with more than four sides.

R AREA = πR² VOLUME = πR² × L ACROSS FLATS = across corners × .866 1 cu ft = 7.48 gal  ·  1 gal of water = 8.34 lb
Area for a circle, volume for a length of pipe, and the hex rule that turns across-corners into across-flats. The volume one is not academic: it is how you work out what a filled line weighs before you hang it or hydro it. A 6" line 100 ft long holds about 150 gallons — 1,252 lb of water before you add the pipe. That is what your hangers are carrying.

Area of a circle

AREA = D² × .7854

.7854 is pi divided by 4. Use the inside diameter for flow area — the bore is what the water sees.

Worked — 6" Sch 40, ID 6.065 6.065² = 36.78
36.78 × .7854 = 28.89 square inches of bore

Volume of a cylinder

VOLUME = D² × .7854 × LENGTH

Area times length. Same number as above, stretched down the pipe. In inches it gives you cubic inches; divide by 231 for gallons.

Worked — 400 ft of 6" Sch 40 Length in inches: 400 × 12 = 4,800"
28.89 × 4,800 = 138,672 in³
138,672 ÷ 231 = 600 gallons
× 8.34 lb = 5,004 lb of water — which is why every hanger goes in before the fill valve opens
SHORTCUT: GAL PER FOOT = ID² × .0408

6.065² × .0408 = 1.50 gal/ft → × 400 = 600 gallons. Same answer, one step. That is where the constant in 12.10 comes from.

Tanks

Worked — a 4 ft tank, 8 ft tall 48² × .7854 = 1,810 in² of floor
× (8 × 12) = 173,718 in³
÷ 231 = 752 gallons

Polygons

A regular polygon is a many-sided shape with all sides and angles equal — a hexagon bolt head, an octagonal base, a segmented ring. Three numbers cover all of them.

CENTRAL ANGLE = 360 ÷ SIDES
INSIDE CORNER = (SIDES − 2) × 180 ÷ SIDES
SIDE LENGTH = CIRCLE DIA × sin(180 ÷ SIDES)

Side length is for a polygon drawn inside a circle, with its corners touching — which is how you lay one out.

SidesCentralInside cornerSide × dia
3120°60°0.8660
490°90°0.7071
572°108°0.5878
660°120°0.5000
845°135°0.3827
1036°144°0.3090
1230°150°0.2588
Worked — an octagonal base plate inside a 24" circle Central angle: 360 ÷ 8 = 45°
Inside corner: (8−2) × 180 ÷ 8 = 135°
Side length: 24 × .3827 = 9.18"

Scribe the 24" circle, step 9-3/16" round it eight times, connect the marks. And each corner cut is half of 45 = 22-1/2°, which you already know how to lay out from 15.16.
A ring made of segments is a polygon

A flat coil ring built from 12 mitered pieces (15.15) is a 12-sided polygon. Its central angle is 30°, each cut is 15° off square, and the chord is dia × .2588. Same three formulas doing a different job.

Fourteen problems covering the whole section. Work them on paper before you look at 18.29 — reading an answer teaches you nothing, and getting one wrong on the bench costs nothing.

How to work them

Write every step down. Work in decimals and convert once at the end. If you get stuck, the entry that covers it is named in the answer — go back and read it again rather than guessing.

  1. Convert 5-3/16" to a decimal.
  2. Convert 0.84375" to a fraction, to the nearest 32nd.
  3. Convert 14.37 feet to feet, inches and a fraction.
  4. What is half of 9-5/8"? Do it without a calculator.
  5. A rolling offset has a rise of 20" and a roll of 15". What is the true offset?
  6. An offset measures 16" with a 27" run. What angle is that, and is it a stock fitting?
  7. A 45° simple offset has to move the line 22". Travel and run?
  8. Same offset in 4" butt weld pipe. What is the face-to-face?
  9. What is the take-out of a 60° long radius elbow in 10" pipe?
  10. What is the circumference of 10" pipe, and what is that divided into 16 stations?
  11. A flange has 12 bolt holes on a 17" bolt circle. What is the chord between two holes, and how many degrees apart are they?
  12. How many gallons are in 150 feet of 4" Sch 40 (ID 4.026)? What does that water weigh?
  13. A 45° rolling offset in 8" weld pipe: rise 18", roll 10". Find the true offset, the travel, the cut length, and the angle of turn.
  14. A combination offset in 6" weld pipe has to move the line 24" with only 9" of run. Find both centre-to-centre legs and both cut lengths.
Do not look yet

Answers are in 18.29, a separate page on purpose. Get all fourteen and you can lay out anything in this book.

Before you start Work these on paper, in decimal inches, and check them against the answers in 18.29.
If one comes out wrong, go back to the entry it came from rather than to the answer — the method is the thing you are trying to keep, not the number.

Worked answers to 18.28. If one does not match, it is almost always a rounding difference or a conversion in the wrong direction — check those two first.

#Answer
13 ÷ 16 = .1875 → 5.1875"
2.84375 × 32 = 27 → 27/32"
314 feet · .37 × 12 = 4.44 → 4" · .44 × 16 = 7.04 → 7/16 → 14'-4 7/16"
49 = 8 + 1. Half of 8 is 4, hold the 1. 5/8 halved = 5/16. The held 1 halves to 1/2 = 8/16. 5/16 + 8/16 = 13/16 → 4-13/16"
520² = 400, 15² = 225, 400 + 225 = 625, √625 = 25"
616 ÷ 27 = .5926 → tan⁻¹ → 30.7°. Not a stock fitting. Closest is 30°, which would need a run of 16 ÷ tan 30 = 27.71" — 11/16" more than you have.
7Travel = 22 × 1.414 = 31.11" · Run = 22.00"
84" 45° take-out = 2.50 each end → 31.11 − 2.50 − 2.50 = 26.11" = 26-1/8"
91.5 × 10 × tan 30° = 15 × .5774 = 8.66"
1010.750 × 3.1416 = 33.77" · ÷ 16 = 2.111" per station
11360 ÷ 12 = 30° apart · Chord = 17 × sin 15° = 17 × .2588 = 4.40"
124.026² × .0408 = .661 gal/ft × 150 = 99.2 gallons (call it 99) · × 8.34 = 827 lb
13True offset = √(324 + 100) = √424 = 20.59"
Travel = 20.59 × 1.414 = 29.12"
8" 45° take-out = 5.00 → Cut = 29.12 − 5 − 5 = 19.12" = 19-1/8"
Turn = 10 ÷ 18 = .5556 → 29.1° off top
14Square leg = 24 − 9 = 15.00" C-to-C · 45° travel = 9 × 1.414 = 12.73" C-to-C
6" take-outs: 90 = 9.00, 45 = 3.75
Square leg cut = 15.00 − 9.00 − 3.75 = 2.25" = 2-1/4"
Travel cut = 12.73 − 3.75 − 3.75 = 5.23" = 5-1/4"
Off by a sixteenth?

That is rounding, not an error. If you carried .7071 and the answer used 1.414, or you rounded a take-out, you will land within a sixteenth. Anything bigger than that is a real mistake — and the usual suspects are forgetting to square-root, using the rise alone on a rolling offset, or cutting to the travel instead of the face-to-face.

Before any of the rest of it makes sense, you have to be able to name what you are holding. Half of what sounds like jargon on a pipe job is just precise language for things that would otherwise take a sentence to point at.

A fitting

FACE FACE WORKING POINT where centrelines cross CENTRE TO FACE = TAKE-OUT THROAT inside the turn HEEL outside, and longer
Every dimension on a fitting is measured to its face, and every dimension on a print is measured to the working point — where the centrelines cross, out in mid-air where there is no metal at all. The distance between those two is the take-out, and subtracting it is the whole job.
Face
The flat end of a fitting, where your pipe stops. Every fitting dimension in this book is measured to a face.
Working point
Where two centrelines cross. It is a point in mid-air with no metal at it, and it is what the print dimensions to.
Take-out
Working point to face. The number you subtract. Also called centre-to-face or centre-to-end.
Throat
The short inside curve of a bend.
Heel
The long outside curve. On a bent pipe this is where the wall thins.
Crotch
The inside corner where a branch meets a run. The hardest spot on any fitting to weld and the first place one cracks.
Bore
The hole through it. Matters because a fitting's bore has to match the pipe's, or you build a hi-lo.

An assembly

weld weld ONE SPOOL — built at the bench, hung as a unit BRANCH THE RUN FLANGE FLANGE TOP CL BOP
A spool is pipe with fittings already on it, made up at the bench and set as one piece. The run is the straight line through it; anything coming off the side is a branch. Prints dimension to the centreline, but hangers, clearances and interferences all get checked at top of pipe and bottom of pipe.
Spool
Pipe with fittings on it, made up at the bench and set as one piece. The unit of work on a fabricated job.
Piece mark
The number written on a spool that matches it to the drawing. Write it the second it is cut.
Run
The straight line through an assembly.
Branch
Anything coming off the side of the run.
Nipple
A short piece of pipe, threaded both ends. A close nipple is all thread with no bare pipe in the middle.
Field weld
A joint deliberately left for the field so the spool can be adjusted. Marked FW on the iso.

Where a dimension is measured to

MarkMeans
CLCentreline. What prints dimension to, and what all the offset math works in.
TOPTop of pipe. What you check clearance and headroom against.
BOPBottom of pipe. What you set a rack elevation to, because that is what sits on the steel.
TOSTop of steel. The elevation of the beam or support, not the pipe.
InvertThe inside bottom of a gravity drain. Grade is set to invert, never to the outside.
CrownInside top. Used on drainage the same way invert is.
BOP and invert are not the same number

Bottom of pipe is the outside bottom. Invert is the inside bottom. They differ by one wall thickness, which on 12" Sch 40 is .406". Check the wall on whatever you are running.

On a pressure line nobody cares. On a gravity drain it is a flat error at every point — at 1/8" per foot, 3/8" or 1/2" is the whole fall of three or four feet of run. Read which one the print says.

Positions around the pipe

The clock face is how everybody describes a position around a pipe, looking along it in the direction of flow: 12 o'clock is the top, 6 is the bottom, 3 and 9 are the sides. "Seam at 2 o'clock" and "there's a pinhole at 5" are complete instructions.

The spring line is the horizontal centreline — 3 and 9 o'clock — the widest part of the pipe seen from above. It is where a trench bed has to support a pipe and where a clamp gets its grip.

Say it the way the trade says it

None of this is showing off. "Cut the branch back to the crotch" is instant and unmistakable, and "cut that bit where the little pipe joins the big pipe, up in the corner bit" is not. When you can name the parts, you stop describing and start instructing — and people start handing you work.

The full glossary of trade words is 12.9.

The same elbow, labelled with tapeA real LR 90 on a bench with masking tape flags on it: face, throat, heel, bore, and a soapstone dot out in the air where the working point would be. One shot does more than a page of words. PHOTO
A spool with its piece markA finished flanged spool on horses with the piece mark in soapstone, next to the iso it came off, so the two can be read together. PHOTO

Nobody is born knowing this and plenty of hands fake it for years. It takes about ten minutes to learn properly and it is the single most used skill in the trade.

0 1 INCH 1/4 1/2 3/4 Tallest and numbered is the inch. Next tallest, the half. Then quarters, then eighths. Shortest are sixteenths. Count the little ones up from the last big one you know.
One inch, blown up. You are not reading sixteen identical lines — you are reading a ladder of heights. Find the nearest tall mark you recognise, then count the short ones up from it. Nobody measures by counting all sixteen.

How the marks work

An inch is divided in half, then each half in half, then again, then again. Four cuts, sixteen pieces. The height of the mark tells you which cut it belongs to — that is the whole system, and it is why you can read a tape at arm's length in bad light.

MarkHeightHow many in an inch
InchTallest, numbered1
HalfNext tallest2
QuarterShorter4
EighthShorter again8
SixteenthShortest16
Read from the nearest big mark, not from zero

Do not count sixteen little lines. Find the tall mark you can see at a glance — the half, or the quarter — and count the short ones from there. Two short marks past the half is 1/2 + 2/16 = 5/8.

Everybody who reads a tape fast is doing it this way.

Worked — three reads Three short marks past 3" → 3 + 3/16 = 3-3/16"
One short mark past the half, after 7" → 7 + 8/16 + 1/16 = 7-9/16"
One short mark before 5" → 5 − 1/16 = 4-15/16"
That last one is the read people fumble. Counting backward from a number you can see beats counting forward from one you cannot.

Always reduce

Write 3/4, not 12/16. Write 1/2, not 8/16. A cut list in sixteenths is hard to read fast and easy to misread under a hard hat. Divide top and bottom by the same number until it will not go any further. The full conversion tables are 17.1, and if fractions themselves are shaky, 18.3 teaches them from scratch.

You countedWrite
2/161/8
4/161/4
6/163/8
8/161/2
10/165/8
12/163/4
14/167/8

Feet and inches

A tape marks every foot, usually boxed or in a different colour. Past that it keeps counting inches, so the 40" mark and the 3'-4" mark are the same place. Prints are in feet and inches; most take-out math is easier in straight inches. Convert once, in writing, and work in one or the other — mixing them mid-calculation is a classic way to lose a foot.

FEET × 12 + INCHES = TOTAL INCHES
Worked 6'-3" → 6 × 12 = 72, + 3 = 75"
Back again: 75 ÷ 12 = 6 remainder 3 → 6'-3"

The other marks on the blade

16" marks
Usually red or boxed. Stud spacing — nothing to do with pipe, but that is what they are.
Black diamonds
Every 19.2", which is five joists per eight feet. Also not yours.
The case length
Printed on the case, normally 3" or so. Butt the case into a corner, read the tape, add it — that is what it is for.
The hook is supposed to be loose

That little bit of slop is not wear. The hook floats by exactly its own thickness, so that hooking over an end and pushing against one both read true. If you squeeze it tight to "fix" it, every inside measurement you take from then on is short by the thickness of the hook.

A hook that is bent, or loose by more than its own thickness, is a different story. That tape is done — and it has been giving you bad numbers for a while.

Burn an inch

On anything long or critical, start at the 1" mark instead of the hook, take your reading, and subtract an inch. Now nothing depends on a bit of stamped metal that has been dropped off a rack fifty times.

Two rules: say it out loud to whoever is on the other end, and burn the same amount at both ends. Half the burned-inch mistakes in the trade are one man burning and the other not.

One tape, and do not lend it

Two tapes of different brands can disagree by a sixteenth over ten feet, and both are within their own tolerance. Lay out a whole spool with one tape and check it with another and you will find errors that are not there.

Pick one, mark it, use it for everything on that job.

The ladder of marks, up closeA macro shot of one inch of a real tape so the four heights are unmistakable, then the same inch with 5/8 and 11/16 flagged, because those are the two that get misread. PHOTO
A good hook and a bad oneA hook sliding its proper amount, then one visibly bent, and a shot of a tape started at the 1" mark with the burn called out. PHOTO

A level tells you one thing: whether a surface matches gravity. Everything else — grade, plumb, square, pitch — is that one measurement used cleverly. Which is why a level that lies quietly is the most expensive tool on the job.

LEVEL LOW ON THE LEFT The bubble runs to the HIGH end. CHECKING THE LEVEL ITSELF 1. read it 2. spin it end for end 3. same reading? the level is true different? it lies
The bubble always runs toward the high end. And a level that reads a hair off in one direction and a hair off the same direction when you spin it end for end is out of calibration — it has been lying to you all week. Reverse it on the same spot before you trust it.

The ones a fitter actually carries

Torpedo
9" or so, magnetic, lives in your bags. Fine for a nipple, a valve handle, a short piece of unistrut. Too short to trust on a run — a 9" level on a 20 ft pipe magnifies its own error more than twenty times.
Box / I-beam, 2 to 4 ft
The one you should be reaching for on anything that matters. Longer is more accurate, because the same bubble error spread over more length is a smaller angle.
Pipe level
V-grooved or chain-mounted so it sits on the crown of a round pipe instead of rocking. If you fit pipe every day, own one.
Digital / angle finder
Reads degrees, percent or inches per foot straight off. Excellent for setting a specific fall. Needs zeroing, and the battery dies exactly when you need it.
Line level
A tiny vial hung on a string. Rough work only — the string sag alone will beat its accuracy.
Laser
Its own page: 19.6.

Reading the vial

  • The bubble runs to the high end. If it drifts right, the right end is up. That is the only rule and it never changes.
  • Centred means between the lines, not touching one. On a good vial the gap either side should look equal — get your eye square to it, because looking from an angle moves the bubble.
  • The second vial reads plumb, at 90°. Same rule: bubble to the high side.
  • Temperature moves a bubble. A level left on hot steel or in a truck in the sun reads differently to one at hand temperature. On precision work let it sit a minute.
Reverse it before you trust it — every level, every job

Set the level on a surface and read the bubble. Now spin it end for end on the exact same spot and read it again.

If the bubble sits the same amount off in the same direction on the surface both times, the surface is out and the level is fine. If it reads off one way and then off the other way, the level is out of calibration and the true reading is halfway between the two.

Thirty seconds. Do it when you pick up a level you did not personally drop — and especially on a shop level that lives on a bench everyone shares.

Level on the bottom of the pipe, not the top

The top of a pipe carries the longitudinal seam, the weld crown, scale and whatever got dropped on it. The bottom is usually the cleanest arc you have. Set your level on the underside where you can, or use a pipe level that sits in the crown properly.

And on anything out of round — which is most big bore — a flat level on a round pipe is measuring whatever high spot it happens to be sat on. Roll it a few degrees and read it again.

Setting a fall with a level

You do not need a digital level to set a grade. Block one end of an ordinary level by the amount of fall it should have over its own length, and level the bubble — the pipe is then at grade.

BLOCK = LEVEL LENGTH (FT) × FALL PER FOOT
Worked — 1/4" per foot on a 2 ft level 2 ft × 1/4" = 1/2"
Tape a 1/2" block under the downhill end of a 2 ft level. When the bubble centres, the pipe is falling exactly 1/4" per foot.
Same level, 1/8" per foot: 2 × 1/8 = 1/4" block.

Grade, fall and the per-foot table are in 7.7. Elevations and how to carry them are 7.6.

Short level, long pipe

Accuracy scales with length. A level that is out by half a bubble over 9" is out by a lot more than that over a 20 ft joint, because you are extending the same angle. Use the longest level that will physically sit on the work, and on a long run check it in more than one place rather than trusting one reading in the middle.

Reverse-checking a levelSame level, same spot, spun end for end, with the two bubble readings shot close enough to compare. Then one that fails the check. PHOTO
Levels a fitter carriesTorpedo, 2 ft box, pipe level and a digital angle finder laid out, plus the pipe level actually sat in the crown of a 6" joint. PHOTO

Three separate questions, and a thing can pass two and fail the third. Get in the habit of asking all three, every time, and most of the errors that cost a day never happen.

Level
Flat side to side. Matches gravity horizontally.
Plumb
Straight up and down. Matches gravity vertically.
Square
90° between two things. Has nothing to do with gravity — two pipes can be perfectly square to each other while the whole assembly leans.
Why all three

A riser can be plumb and its branch still not square to it. A rack can be level across and still be racked out of square along its length. A spool can be square at every fitting and still be twisted end to end. They catch different mistakes, and checking one and assuming the others is how a spool gets to the field and does not fit.

Checking square

  • Framing square across two faces — fastest, and good enough for most bench work. Check the square itself against a known edge; they get dropped and they bend.
  • Combination square for smaller work and for marking a line square around a pipe. The head is the reference, not the blade.
  • 3-4-5 for anything bigger than your square. Measure 3 along one leg, 4 along the other, and the diagonal between those two marks must be exactly 5 — in any units, and any multiple works (6-8-10, 9-12-15). This is the one that scales, and it is 7.3.
  • Equal diagonals on a rectangle. Measure corner to corner both ways; if the two match, it is square. No square needed, no math, works at any size.
Worked — squaring a rack with 3-4-5 Use a big multiple so the error shows up: 6-8-10 feet.
6 ft along the main run, 8 ft out on the branch line.
Diagonal must read 10'-0". Check: 6² + 8² = 36 + 64 = 100, and √100 = 10 ✓
If it reads 10'-1", the corner is open. Swing the branch until the diagonal comes to exactly 10'-0".

Checking plumb

  • Level on two faces, 90° apart. Plumb on one face only means nothing — a riser can be dead plumb north-south and leaning east. Always check the second face.
  • Plumb bob for anything tall, or where you cannot get a level on it. Gravity does not care how long the drop is, which is why a bob beats a level on a 30 ft riser. That is 19.5.
  • On round pipe, do not trust a level laid against the side — you are reading a tangent on a curve. Use a pipe level, or sight the bob.
The one people miss: twist

A spool can be level at both ends, square at every fitting, and still have a twist in it — one flange rotated relative to the other. Nothing in a level or a square catches that.

Check it by putting a level across the bolt holes of both flanges, or by sighting down the spool at the two faces. On a flanged spool, twist is what makes bolt holes miss at the far end after the near end is already pinned.

The habit

  1. Check it before you tack. A tack is thirty seconds to grind. A welded-out joint is an hour and a rejected weld.
  2. Check it after you tack, because tacks pull.
  3. Check it after the root, because the root pulls more.
  4. Check it against the print, not against what is next to it. The pipe beside you may be wrong, and then you have made two.
  5. Check the tool. Square against a known edge, level reversed end for end (19.3).
Say what you checked

"It's good" means nothing. "Plumb both ways, square to the header, diagonals match" is a handoff. When somebody later finds it out, you both know exactly which check to repeat — and if it was right when you left it, that is on record too.

All three checks on one spoolLevel across the run, level on two faces of the riser 90° apart, framing square at the branch, and a tape pulling both diagonals. Four frames, one spool. PHOTO
A twisted spoolTwo flanges on one spool with the bolt holes visibly out of clock with each other, shot down the length so the twist reads. PHOTO

Two of the oldest tools on the job and still two of the best. A string gives you a perfectly straight line as long as you want one. A bob gives you a perfectly vertical one. Neither needs a battery, neither can be miscalibrated, and neither cares how cold it is.

steel overhead the point you want same point, on the deck hangs plumb on its own — gravity does not need a battery now measure from the column
A plumb bob moves a point straight down through thin air so you can measure it from something you can reach. Let it stop swinging. A bob still moving is a point still moving, and in a breeze you damp it in a bucket of water rather than guess the middle of the swing.

The plumb bob

  • Moving a point up or down through thin air is the whole job. A mark on the steel overhead becomes a mark on the deck you can actually measure from.
  • Let it settle. A swinging bob is a moving point. If it will not stop, hang it lower, use a heavier bob, or drop the tip in a bucket of water — the water damps the swing without touching the string.
  • Heavier is steadier. In a draft a 16 oz bob settles when an 8 oz one never will.
  • Mark the tip, not the body. The point is the measurement.
  • Works upward too. Hold the string on a floor mark and the string itself is a plumb line you can measure a hanger location from.
Wind, and things that touch

A bob that is brushing a column, a conduit or a piece of hanging plastic is not plumb and will look perfectly still while it lies to you. Check the whole length of the string is in free air before you mark anything.

String and dry lines

  • Pull it tight. Any sag at all and the middle of your line is below the ends, which on a long rack means every hanger in the middle is set low.
  • Braided line, not twisted. Twisted line stretches unevenly and rolls under your thumb.
  • Set the ends off a real datum — a column line, a benchmark, a gridline — not off the last pipe somebody hung.
  • Offset the line when the pipe itself is in the way. Run the string 6" to one side of where the pipe goes, then measure 6" off it at every hanger. Same straight line, nothing fouling it.
  • Chalk line for marking, dry line for holding. A chalked line snapped on steel leaves a mark; a dry line stays up all day as a reference to measure from.
Worked — setting a straight run of hangers Rack is 90 ft long, hangers every 10 ft, all at BOP 12'-6".
Wrong: set the first hanger, measure 10 ft to the next, and repeat. Every small error carries into all the rest — that is a chained measurement.
Right: set the two end hangers off the benchmark, pull a dry line between them, then set all eight in the middle to the line. The line holds the straightness and every hanger is independent of the last.
Same tools, same time, and the error stops accumulating.
Two points make a line — three prove it

Set the two ends, then check a point in the middle before you trust the run. If the middle is off, something moved, something sagged, or one end was never right. Better to find that now than after forty hangers are drilled.

A string is straight. That does not make it level.

A tight string between two points is a perfectly straight line, and it is only level if both ends are at the same elevation. A line level hung on it is rough at best. If the elevation matters, set both ends off a benchmark or a laser, and then let the string hold the straightness only.

A bob settling, and a dry line pulledA plumb bob with its tip in a bucket of water, still; then a dry line pulled the length of a rack with a tape measuring an offset off it at a middle hanger. PHOTO

A laser does not measure anything. What it does is hold a reference — a level plane, a straight line, a plumb point — so that you can measure off the same datum everywhere, all day, on your own.

rotary laser one level plane, all the way round 78" 46" Same laser line, two different floors. Measure DOWN from it and both elevations are true to the same datum — no chained measurements.
A rotary laser puts one level plane across the whole room, and then everything is measured down from that one plane. That is the point of it: not speed, but the fact that no measurement depends on the one before it, so nothing accumulates.

Which one does what

TypeWhat it gives you
RotaryA spinning beam sweeping a full level plane around the room. The one for elevations, racks and hanger layout. Usually needs a detector to find outdoors or at distance.
LineProjects visible level and plumb lines on walls and steel. Best indoors and up close. What you use to line up a run of hangers on a wall.
Point / dotSingle dots up, down and sideways. Plumb transfer through a hole in a deck — a plumb bob that works in wind.
Grade / slopeA rotary you can dial a fall into, in percent or inches per foot. Drainage, sewer, anything graded.

Setting up

  1. Solid ground, solid tripod. Not on a deck people are walking on, not on scaffold, not on anything a forklift goes past. If it moves after you have shot your first point, everything after it is wrong and nothing tells you.
  2. Let it self-level and confirm it has. Most units flash or beep until they settle, and a unit tipped past its self-levelling range will sit there out of level with no complaint at all.
  3. Shoot your benchmark first. Find the job benchmark, read the laser on it, and write down the number. That single figure ties every measurement you take to the building.
  4. Measure down from the plane, never between your own marks.
  5. Re-shoot the benchmark before you pack up. If it reads the same, the whole day's work is good. If it does not, you have just found out before anyone else did.
Shoot the benchmark at the start and at the end. Every time.

This is the one discipline that separates using a laser from trusting a laser. A tripod leg that settled into mud, a knock from a passing scissor lift, a unit that was never quite within its self-levelling range — none of those announce themselves. The beam looks exactly as convincing when it is wrong.

Two readings on a known point, one at each end of the shift, is the entire check. If they match you can stand behind everything between them.

Worked — carrying an elevation across a building Benchmark is EL 100'-0". Laser plane reads 52" above it on the rod.
So the plane is at 100'-0" + 4'-4" = EL 104'-4".
Now anywhere in the room: rod reads 71" → that spot is 104'-4" − 5'-11" = EL 98'-5".
Every point ties to the benchmark, not to the point before it. That is what you are paying the laser for — see 7.6 for the elevation math.
Use the detector even when you can see the dot

Your eye picks the centre of a fat red line differently every time, and the beam gets fatter the further it goes. A detector beeps on the actual centre and repeats to a sixteenth at a hundred feet. On long runs it is not a convenience, it is the accuracy.

Do not look into it, and think about who is at eye level

Most construction laser levels are Class 2 under IEC 60825-1 / ANSI Z136.1 — under 1 mW, and the blink reflex is enough protection under normal use. Some rotary units sold for long outdoor range are Class 3R (up to 5 mW): still not a burn hazard, but do not stare into the beam or view it through binoculars, a scope, or a level's own sight — check the label on yours. Either way, a beam straight into the eye at short range is still a bad idea, and so is putting a spinning plane at head height in a room full of people. Set it above or below eye level where you can.

And never aim a laser at anyone, at a mirror, or at glass — a reflection goes somewhere you did not intend.

It needs calibrating, and it will not tell you

A laser that has been in the back of a truck for two years drifts. Most makers publish a field check — typically shooting two points from one position, then moving the laser and shooting them again. Do it on a schedule, and always after it gets dropped.

The job's surveyed benchmark outranks your laser, always.

The benchmark shotA rod on the job benchmark with the detector beeping, the number written on the column in soapstone, and the same shot repeated at the end of the day. PHOTO
The three lasersRotary on a tripod with a detector, a line laser throwing a level line along a wall of hangers, and a dot laser shooting plumb through a deck penetration. PHOTO

You cannot measure to the centre of a circle, because there is nothing there to hook a tape on. So you never measure it — you construct it, and every method below is the same idea: cross two lines that both have to pass through the middle.

CENTRE centring head, vee down on the pipe Scribe a line. Turn the head a quarter turn. Scribe again. They cross at dead centre.
Any line scribed through the centre of a circle crosses every other one at the centre. Two is all it takes — scribe, rotate about a quarter turn, scribe again. A third line at another angle is the check: if all three meet at one point, you have it.

Centring head — the fast way

  1. Seat the vee of the centring head against the outside of the pipe or bar, flat on the end face. The vee automatically straddles the stock evenly, so the blade runs through the centre.
  2. Scribe along the blade, right across the face.
  3. Rotate the head about a quarter turn and scribe again.
  4. The two lines cross at dead centre. Centre punch it there.
  5. Want proof? Scribe a third at another angle. Three lines meeting in one point is as good as it gets by hand.

Ninety degrees is not required — any two different angles work. A quarter turn just gives the cleanest crossing to read.

No centring head? Four other ways

Wrap and halve
Wrap a strip round the pipe, mark where it laps itself, fold that length in half and mark the pipe at the fold. Do it again 90° round. Those two marks give you the axis. Wrap method is 7.4.
Square and rule
Hold a framing square so both legs touch the outside of the stock, and mark along the diagonal of the corner. Rotate, repeat. Same crossing.
Dividers
Set them to a bit over half the diameter, scribe four arcs from four points around the rim; the small square they make in the middle has the centre in it. Halve it by eye — close enough for a punch mark.
Two chords
Scribe any two chords, bisect each with a perpendicular, and where the perpendiculars cross is the centre. The textbook one, and the one that works on a piece of plate with no round edge to register on.
Do not find centre off a torch-cut end

Every method here registers on the outside of the stock, so it assumes the outside is round and the end is square. A torch-cut end that is out of square, or a pipe end that has been dropped and gone oval, will give you a confident centre mark that is not the centre.

Dress the end square first. And on anything big, bear in mind that pipe is allowed to be out of round by the standard — the further out it is, the more your two lines will disagree.

Your two lines disagree? That is information.

If three scribed lines make a little triangle in the middle instead of meeting at a point, the stock is out of round or the end is not square. The size of that triangle is roughly how far out you are. Small triangle, punch the middle of it. Big triangle, go and fix the end before you drill anything.

Worked — why the vee works The vee touches the circle at two points, and the blade bisects the angle between them.
Any line that bisects that vee has to pass through the centre — that is true wherever you sit the head, which is why you can rotate it anywhere and scribe again.
Two such lines can only cross in one place.
Centring head, two scribesA combination square centring head seated on a 4" pipe end, the first scribed line, the head rotated, the second line, and the punch mark where they cross. PHOTO
When it does not workAn out-of-round pipe end with three scribed lines making a visible triangle in the middle instead of a point. PHOTO

Your plan, your settings, and every piece of the legal end of this thing — all in one place, none of it buried.

Preview — what this page looks like signed in
Gage T.
gage@example.com
Active
Plan
Field Fitter — Monthly, [$PRICE]/month
Renews
—
Billed by
Apple, through the App Store — the charge shows as Apple on your statement
Member since
September 2026

Everything else in here

    Signing out and closing your account

    Sign outSigns you out on this device only. Your subscription and your settings are not affected.
    Delete your account and dataPermanently erases your account, your email address and anything tied to it. This does not cancel billing on its own — cancel first, then delete.
    Two different things

    Cancelling is done in your phone’s Settings, because Apple takes the payment. It stops the billing and leaves you full access until the end of the period you already paid for. Deleting erases the account itself. Cancelling does not delete your data, and deleting does not refund you. Do them in that order if you want both.

    Set it up once for how you actually work. Everything here takes effect the moment you tap it.

    Appearance
    ThemeAuto follows your phone. Dark is easier in a pipe rack at night; light wins in direct sun.
    Follow the phone’s text sizeUses the size you set in your phone’s own settings as the starting point. The switch below scales up from there.
    Text sizeScales the whole book, tables and all.
    On the job
    Your tradePuts your materials and sections first on the home screen. Every page stays in the book, one tap away.
    Gloves modeMakes every list row and button big enough to hit with a glove on. Nothing gets hidden — it just gets bigger.
    Keep the screen awakeHolds the screen on while the book is open, so it does not go black halfway through a cut list. Turns itself off when you leave.
    Tap feedbackA small buzz in your hand when a tap lands — so you know it took, gloves on or not. iPhone app only; a browser cannot do it.
    Works with no signalEverything in the book — every table, calculator and walkthrough — runs on your phone, and nothing in it phones home — not even for fonts. Open it while you still have signal, then a dead zone changes nothing for as long as it stays open. The App Store version keeps the whole book on the phone permanently. Nothing online
    Email
    Remind me before each renewalAn email a few days before your card is charged, with the amount, the date and a one-tap cancel link. On by default because you should never be surprised by a charge.
    Tell me when the book gets updatedA short note when entries are added or a figure is corrected. No marketing.
    Reset all settingsPuts theme, text size and the switches above back to how they shipped. Does not touch your account or your subscription.

    Settings are kept on this device. Change phones and you will set them again.

    What language the book reads in. Trade words are the hard part — a machine translation of take-out or rolling offset is worse than useless on a job, so these get written by fitters who work in that language.

    Tell me when Español is readyOne email when it lands. Nothing else.
    Want another language?Tell me which one and what you run — if enough hands ask for it, it gets written.

    Units

    The book is written in feet, inches and sixteenths, because that is what is printed on the drawings and stamped on the fittings on the jobs it is written for. Millimetre equivalents sit in section 17. The calculators work in inches and feet — type 18 1/2, 18-1/2 or 18.5 and they will sort it out — and the Conversions tab in the calculators (13.1) turns fractions, decimals, millimetres and metres into feet and inches and back. The Fraction calc tab next to it adds, subtracts, multiplies and divides them.

    A metric edition

    Not the same job as a translation. Metric pipe runs to different schedules, different standards and different stock fittings — converting the numbers would give you a book that is right on paper and practically wrong. If it gets built it gets built properly, from metric standards.

    What you pay, when you pay it, and how to stop paying it. Apple bills App Store subscriptions, so cancelling takes a few taps in your phone’s Settings — no phone call, no chat window, no talking anybody out of it.

    Automatic renewal — read this

    Your subscription renews automatically. Until you cancel, Apple will charge the payment method on your Apple ID [$PRICE] every [month], at the start of each new term, with no further action by you.

    You can cancel any time in your phone’s Settings, at least 24 hours before your next term starts. Cancel and you keep full access through the end of the period you have already paid for; nothing further is charged after that.

    Charges appear on your statement as Apple. Prices are in [USD]; Apple adds any tax that applies where you are.

    Plan
    Field Fitter — Monthly
    Price
    [$PRICE] per month, plus tax where it applies
    Renews
    —
    Cancel by
    — (24 hours before the renewal date)
    Payment
    The card on your Apple ID. We never see it.
    Receipts
    Apple emails one after every charge

    Where did you subscribe?

    It matters, because whoever took the payment is who has to stop it. Right now that is the App Store. If a web version comes later, subscriptions bought there will be cancelled here in the app instead.

    Cancel your subscription

    One tap to start, one to confirm. That is the whole process for a subscription you bought here. Bought it through the App Store or Google Play? Pick that above — Apple or Google has to stop it.

    Refunds

    App Store: Apple handles refunds under its own policy, at reportaproblem.apple.com; we cannot issue one for a purchase Apple took. Web: [REFUND POLICY — attorney to set] The working intent: if you subscribed in the last [14 days] and it is not what you needed, write to [SUPPORT EMAIL] and you get your money back, no argument. Where the law where you live gives you a stronger cancellation or refund right than this paragraph does, that law wins and nothing here limits it.

    If the price ever changes

    The promise

    No price rises without at least [30 days] notice, stating the old price, the new price and the date it starts. On the App Store, Apple sends that notice and, above its own thresholds, asks you to agree before the new price is charged; our email is a courtesy on top. A price change never takes effect in a term you already paid for, and if you do nothing but you did not want it, the notice tells you exactly how to stop it before it lands.

    Failed payments

    App Store: Apple retries the card for up to 60 days and emails you. [If billing grace period is switched on in App Store Connect: you keep full access for the grace period set there — 3, 16 or 28 days (6 at most on weekly plans) — while it retries.] Web: if a card is declined you get an email and [7 days] to fix it, with full access the whole time. After that, access pauses rather than the account being deleted — update the card and everything comes straight back.

    What happens to your data

    Cancelling does not delete anything. Your account, email and settings stay as they are until you delete them yourself (20.1) or until [24 months] of inactivity, after which the account is erased and you get an email before that happens. The full detail is in the privacy policy (20.6).

    This book gets better because the people using it say where it falls short. A page you wanted and could not find, a better way your shop does it, the job you will never forget, or a plain complaint — send it. Every one gets read.

    What is it?

    About you — all optional

    What happens to it

    Suggestions and wrong numbers go on the list for the next update, and anything that gets changed shows up in What changed. Complaints get read first. Stories and shout-outs are only ever shared if you picked yes above — and you can change your mind any time by writing back.

    Your draft is kept on this phone until you send it or start over, so you can come back to a long one. What you send is covered by 20.5 section 9 — you keep owning it — and by the privacy policy in 20.6.

    Internal — remove or gate this entry before launch

    This page is for whoever is building Field Fitter, not for subscribers. It lists what is still a front end with nothing behind it, and what has to be true before money changes hands. Nothing on this page is legal advice — an attorney licensed in [STATE] signs off the documents in 20.5 to 20.8.

    What in section 20 is real today, and what is a shell

    ThingStateWhat it needs
    Theme, text size, gloves mode, screen awakeWorkingNothing. Stored on the device.
    Account card, plan, renewal dateWired (v32)Inside the app these show the real plan and renewal date from Apple, through RevenueCat. In a browser they still show sample data.
    Paywall, buying, restoring, locksWired (v32)Needs the RevenueCat key pasted in and the products made in App Store Connect — see below.
    Manage / cancel buttonWired (v32)Opens Apple's own subscriptions page. Apple does the cancelling.
    Tap feedback, keep-awakeWired (v32)Uses the phone's hardware inside the app; does nothing in a browser.
    Cancel flow (20.4)Front end onlyWire the confirm to the provider's cancel-at-period-end call. Until it is wired, this button must not ship — a cancel button that does not cancel is the single worst thing on this list, legally and otherwise.
    Pause, restart, reason chipsFront end onlyProvider pause/resume; store the reason against the account.
    Email toggles, language notifyFront end onlyWrite to the account record; hook the email provider.
    Sign out, delete accountFront end onlyAuth provider; a real deletion job that also clears the email provider and support inbox.
    Settings persistenceDevice onlyMove to the account so they follow the user to a new phone.
    Your say (20.12)Working — through the user’s own email or share sheetPut the inbox in FEEDBACK_EMAIL at the top of the v33voice script. Keep every story email: the “OK to share” line in it is your permission to feature it. If volume grows, move to a form service — and add it to the privacy policy first.

    Wiring the subscription (v32)

    The paywall is built in. It only switches on inside the iPhone app, and only once these are done:

    1. App Store Connect → your app → Subscriptions. Make one subscription group called Field Fitter, and in it the plans — for example fieldfitter_monthly and fieldfitter_yearly. Set the price there. Add a 7-day free trial as an introductory offer on each plan — that is the plan: a free taste, then 7 days of everything, then pay. The paywall reads the price and the trial straight from Apple, so nothing in the book has to change when you change them.
    2. Sign the Paid Apps agreement and fill in banking and tax in App Store Connect → Business. Purchases do not work, even in testing, until that is done.
    3. RevenueCat (free until you make real money): make a project, add the iOS app with the in-app purchase key from App Store Connect, import the products, make an entitlement called pro with every plan attached, and a default offering holding the plans in the order you want them shown.
    4. Paste the App Store public key (starts appl_) into CONFIG.appleKey at the top of the v32pay script in this file. Until you do, the app gives the whole book away.
    5. What is free (v34): CONFIG.freeSections — the chart index (0), Tools & Measuring (19), the account pages (20) and From the Trade (21). freeEntries adds a taste of the paid book: 1.1 how weld pipe is measured, 1.3 fab math, the three field-video pages (1.6b bevels, 1.15a miters, 8.4 rolling offsets), 8.1–8.2 simple offsets, the safety pages 12.1–12.4, 25.1, 25.2 and 25.18, and 18.1. Safety never goes behind the paywall. Everything a hand reaches for every day — take-out charts, pipe and flange data, layout, calculators — sits behind the trial. Weld Pipe was wide open before this; that gave away the heart of the book. Section 20 has to stay free: terms, privacy and how to cancel must be reachable without paying. Add single pages to freeEntries. Anything you give away in a marketing video, make free here too — add that page’s id (8.4 is 'e8-4'), so someone who downloads because of the video lands on the thing they just watched, not a paywall.
    6. Test with a Sandbox account (App Store Connect → Users and Access → Sandbox) through TestFlight: buy, cancel, restore on a second phone, and let a trial run out.
    7. App Store listing: put links to the Terms (20.5) and Privacy Policy (20.6) in the app description and the privacy policy URL field. Apple rejects subscription apps that are missing either.

    App Store first — what that changes on this list

    The plan is to sell through the iPhone App Store first. For a subscription bought in the app, Apple is the merchant of record: Apple holds the card, bills, sends receipts, runs renewals, decides refunds and collects sales tax. That removes the auto-renewal-law, sign-up-screen, sales-tax and card-on-file items below for iOS buyers, but it changes 20.4 and 20.1 in ways the current text does not reflect:

    • Cancelling. There is no in-app cancel button on iOS. Cancellation happens in the phone's Settings under Subscriptions; the most the app can do is open that sheet. Rewrite 20.4's "the cancel button is right here" around that, and note Apple wants the cancel done at least 24 hours before renewal.
    • No pause. Apple has no pause for auto-renewing subscriptions. Drop the pause offer and the pause/resume row above for iOS.
    • Refunds. Apple decides refunds, not you. "Write to support and you get your money back" cannot be promised to an iOS buyer — point them to Apple's report-a-problem page.
    • Card, statement name, receipts. You never see the card. Charges show as Apple, receipts come from Apple. Remove the "card ending" rows from 20.1 and 20.4.
    • Failed payments. Apple runs its own billing retry and grace period from a fixed set of lengths; the "[7 days]" figure is not one of them.
    • Price changes. Apple sends the notice and, above its thresholds, asks the subscriber to agree. Your email is a courtesy, not the mechanism.

    Keep the direct-billing version of 20.4 for a later web launch, but the iOS build ships the Apple version.

    Before the first charge

    1. Attorney review of 20.5–20.8. Fill every bracket. Pick the dispute route (20.11).
    2. Auto-renewal compliance. Federal ROSCA plus the state automatic-renewal laws — California's is the strictest and is the one to build to. The three things they all want: a clear and conspicuous disclosure before purchase (price, frequency, that it renews until cancelled, how to cancel), separate affirmative consent to the auto-renewal itself, and a cancellation path as easy as the sign-up path and in the same medium. Send an acknowledgment email after purchase, in a form the subscriber can keep, containing the terms and the cancellation instructions.
    3. Sign-up screen. The disclosure box in 20.4 has to appear at checkout, next to the pay button — not behind a link. Consent to auto-renewal is its own checkbox, unticked, separate from "I agree to the terms".
    4. Renewal and price-change notices. Build the reminder email before launch, not after. Annual plans and long free trials attract extra notice requirements in several states; a reminder before every renewal satisfies all of them and costs nothing but goodwill.
    5. Trade mark clearance on "Field Fitter." (A knockout web and app-store search on September 26, 2026 turned up no "Field Fitter" app or software mark — "Fitter’s Mate" is the nearest name in the trade. That is a first look, not clearance.) Forming Pipelogic LLC registers the company name with the state; it does not give you the trade mark. A real USPTO search by a trade mark attorney, not a knockout search — it is far cheaper to find out now than after the app icon is printed on hoodies.
    6. Register the DMCA agent with the U.S. Copyright Office. Safe harbour does not exist without it, and it is a small fee.
    7. Business insurance. General liability plus errors and omissions, with the carrier told plainly that this is technical reference material for construction trades. The liability cap in 20.5 is a contract term, not a shield — insurance is the shield.
    8. Entity and registered agent in place before taking money, with a commercial agent address rather than a home address.
    9. Sales tax. Digital subscriptions are taxable in a growing list of states. Use a provider that calculates and remits it.
    10. Accessibility audit (20.10). Cheap now, expensive as a demand letter.
    11. Test the cancel path end to end on a real card, on a phone, and time it. No law counts taps, but California and the FTC want it as easy as signing up, in the same place. If it takes more than two taps from opening the app, it is not good enough.

    The standard to hold the cancel flow to

    Worth being unusually good at this

    Every retention maze in this category exists because somebody measured that it works in the short run. It also generates the complaints, the chargebacks, the regulator attention and the one-star reviews that say impossible to cancel — and for a product sold to a trade where everybody knows everybody, the reputational cost lands harder than the churn saved.

    A hand who cancels in ten seconds and tells his crew it was painless is worth more than a month of his subscription held against his will. Keep it two taps, keep the pause offer to one line, and never ask twice.

    v34 — accuracy review, September 26, 2026

    Three independent passes over the numbers: every computed table recalculated in code (about 2,450 cells — trig, fractions, decimals of a foot, offsets, every layout table in section 15, every worked example and practice answer in 18), every transcribed standards table checked row by row (about 560 rows against B16.9, B16.5, B36.10M, B1.20.1, B16.11, B16.10, B16.20, B16.3, B88, D1785), and every safety figure checked against OSHA, ASME B30.9/B31 and NFPA 51B. Nothing wrong in the dimensional tables. What was fixed is listed in What changed, Version 2.

    Still needs a person before money changes hands

    A machine check is not a journeyman’s sign-off. Before launch, have a working journeyman fitter (and a welder for 1.5–1.8) read sections 1, 8, 9, 15 and 16 on a phone and initial each section. Pay them — it is the cheapest liability cover you will buy. Things only a person can settle:

    • Copper take-outs (3.2). No standard sets them. The small-size 90s run at the long end of what makers sell (3/4" is about 3/16" longer than Elkhart close-rough). Measure the brands your area actually stocks.
    • 4" thread engagement (2.2) — the book says 1.06"; some charts say 1-1/8". Settle it with a gauge and a fitting.
    • Saddle on heavy wall (15.8) lays out to the mean diameter. Some shops lay out branch ID to run OD on a set-on. Pick the shop method you want to teach and say so.
    • Flanged fitting dimensions (16.6) agree with B16.5 as far as any online copy reaches — check against a purchased copy of the standard.

    Still blank

    • FEEDBACK_EMAIL (Your say) and SUPPORT_EMAIL (report a wrong number) are empty — until they are set, messages go out through the share sheet instead of straight to an inbox. Set up one inbox on the domain and paste it into both.
    • Every [SUPPORT EMAIL], [$PRICE], [STATE] and [ADDRESS] in section 20.
    • Section 21 has the frame and the questions but no tips yet. Do not ship sample tips with invented names — ship it with the call for tips and add real ones as they come in.

    The rest of this book is the standard and the math. This section is the part nobody writes down — the tricks, habits and hard lessons working hands pass to the next one, with their names on them.

    Every tip here comes from someone in the trade who sent it in and said yes to sharing it. Nothing is made up and nothing is ghost-written. If a tip is here, a real fitter, welder, plumber or steamfitter stands behind it.

    What a tip looks like

    [The tip, in the words of the person who sent it — what the job was, what they do, and why it works.]

    — [First name] · [Trade] · [Years in] · [Local, shop or state][page it goes with]

    Credit reads exactly the way the sender chose in 20.12: first name and trade, or “a pipefitter in Ohio” with nothing that points to them.

    How a tip gets in

    1. Send it through Your say and pick Trade tip. Say which page it goes with if you know.
    2. A journeyman reads it before it goes in. A tip that could get someone hurt, fail a test or break a code does not go in, however good the story.
    3. It goes in with your name — or without it — the way you said, and shows up in What changed. The page it belongs to gets a link back here.

    A tip is not a procedure

    These are the ways good hands work, not the rule. Where a WPS, the job spec, the code or the manufacturer says something different, they win — every time (20.8).

    The tips

    More are on the way. The questions going out are in 21.2 — answer any of them and you could be next.

    The questions going out to working hands for this section. Pick any one, answer it the way you would at lunch, and send it.

    Short is fine. A page number helps. Tell us your trade and years if you want the credit.

    Starting out

    1. What is the one thing you wish somebody had told you your first year?
    2. What did a journeyman show you that you still use every week?
    3. What should every apprentice have in their bag that is not on the tool list?

    Measuring and cutting

    1. How do you check a fitting or an end is square without a square?
    2. What is your trick for marking pipe so the mark survives the torch or the grinder?
    3. How do you make sure your cut list is right before a single piece gets cut?
    4. What is the fastest way you know to get a take-out off a fitting that is not on any chart?

    Fit-up and welding

    1. How do you set and hold a gap that every welder on the crew is happy with?
    2. How do you keep a spool from pulling when it gets welded out?
    3. Welders: what do you wish every fitter did before handing you a joint?

    Offsets, layout and the field

    1. How do you field-check a rolling offset before you weld it?
    2. What is your shortcut for a saddle or a lateral when there is no time to lay it out?
    3. What is the mistake you have seen cost the most money on a job, and how do you avoid it?

    Rigging, safety and being a hand

    1. What is the rigging habit that has kept you or your crew out of trouble?
    2. What is the one thing about safety a new hand does not take seriously enough?
    3. What makes a hand the one the foreman asks for by name?

    Ten answers from Seth Edstrom on weld pipe, from the tape to the tacks. Each one links to the page it goes with.

    Measure it all, or piece by piece? On a simple run, taking all your measurements at the start is usually quicker. On a complex fit or a tight area, I go piece by piece, or in small sections, instead of measuring everything at once.

    — Seth Edstrom1.2

    Take the gap off. On straight runs with several welds, taking the gap off is important. It matters less when there are a lot of turns. You should still do it on every fit, but with multiple turns there is more opportunity to correct small and big gaps.

    — Seth Edstrom1.3

    No wrap-around in the gang box? If you don’t have one out of the pack (Flange Wizard, etc.), I have used tape. Cut it to length and rub the sticky side on the ground so it won’t stick. Works fairly well, but nothing beats the straight edge of a product made for it.

    — Seth Edstrom1.4

    Only prep what you can finish. I prep whatever I can get done that work day. If you get pulled off of it the next day, or it rains, the steel fittings start to rust without their protective coating.

    — Seth Edstrom1.6

    Checking square. If it’s not X-ray, I eyeball the cut. If it needs checking, I use a 2 ft framing square, or a combo square on smaller pipe: the short leg of the square on the pipe itself and the long leg across the face. I check it in quarters, at least 4 different spots.

    — Seth Edstrom1.6a

    Prep is 80% of the work. If your fit-up is bad enough that you can’t put an X-ray quality weld in the joint, reject it. I can usually make a good weld even with a less than perfect fit and prep, but the prep work should be 80 percent of your work and should set you up for the easiest weld possible. I use a 3/32 rod as a gap, or whatever size my welder wants. I’ve used Sawzall blades as a gap when they want a tight one.

    — Seth Edstrom1.7

    Grinding the bevel. I keep my non-dominant hand close to the top and rock the grinder from left to right. To keep the land the same, I eyeball it, but keep consistent pressure on the grinder and make a full circle in one swoop.

    — Seth Edstrom1.6c

    Deburr, and keep stainless separate. I use a file to deburr, or an end grinder if I have one. I keep my stainless tools separate from my carbon tools and pipe, to avoid cross-contamination.

    — Seth Edstrom1.6d

    Gap and land for the root. For 6010 roots I use a 3/32 gap and land. That’s kind of a middle ground. Get good at that and you’re better set up for a less than perfect fit: you can handle a little tighter or a little wider gap. TIG roots I run knife edge, with a gap just big enough to fit my filler wire. That’s just me, though. Your welder will dictate what fit-up you make.

    — Seth Edstrom1.6e

    Clean it, then tack in order. Stick or TIG, and the type of metal, decide exactly how clean the pipe has to be. After that, land and gap are welder’s choice. Ultra Clamps are useful in a lot of situations to take out any hi-low. Tack on top, check level. Then the bottom. Then square up the sides and tack.

    — Seth Edstrom1.8a
    His way, not the rule

    Where your WPS, your welder or the job spec says something different about gap, land or cleanliness, they win (20.8).

    Cross-linked polyethylene tubing for hot and cold water and radiant heat. It bends around corners, so a PEX job is laid out with fewer fittings than copper — and every fitting you leave out is a joint that can never leak.

    PEX-A
    Cross-linked while it's still soft (the Engel method). The most flexible. Kinks can be heated back out, and it's the tubing the cold-expansion fittings are built for.
    PEX-B
    Cross-linked after it's formed (silane method). Stiffer, holds its shape, usually cheaper. Crimp, clamp or press fittings. A kink gets cut out, not heated.
    PEX-C
    Cross-linked with an electron beam. The stiffest. Same fittings as PEX-B.
    Color is not the type

    Red, blue and white are the same tubing. Color is only there to tell hot from cold. The type (A, B or C), the standard and the pressure rating are printed on the side every few feet — read the print, not the color.

    Ratings on standard PEX water tubing

    Water tempPressure rating
    73°F160 psi
    180°F100 psi
    200°F80 psi

    The standard hydrostatic ratings for PEX water tubing (ASTM F876/F877). They're printed on the tubing. Heating-only and oxygen-barrier PEX may be rated differently, so go by what the print says.

    Sizes

    Water PEX is copper tube size (CTS), SDR 9. The outside diameter matches copper tube of the same nominal size, which is why push fittings and some transitions fit both. The wall is thicker than copper, so the bore is smaller. The numbers are in 22.2.

    Keep it out of the sun

    UV breaks PEX down. Leave it in the box or the bag until you use it, and never run it exposed outdoors. The print or the maker's sheet says how many days of sunlight it can take during construction. That's often only 30 days, and some makers allow less.

    Heat and chemicals

    Keep it clear of flue pipes, recessed lights and anything else that runs hot. The maker lists clearances. Most makers, and many local codes, want the first 18" off a water heater to be metal. Never bury PEX in soil soaked with fuel or solvents, because they go right through it. PEX water tubing is never used for fuel gas.

    SDR 9, copper tube size. The OD is fixed and the wall is 1/9 of the OD, with a floor of .070" on the small sizes.

    NominalODMin wallID (approx)Gal / 100 ft
    3/8".500.070.3600.53
    1/2".625.070.4850.96
    3/4".875.097.6811.89
    1"1.125.125.8753.12
    1-1/4"1.375.1531.0694.66
    1-1/2"1.625.1811.2636.51
    2"2.125.2361.65311.15

    OD and minimum wall per ASTM F876 (SDR 9, CTS). The ID column is worked from the minimum wall, so real tubing runs a hair smaller. Gallons per 100 ft is worked from that ID.

    Why 3/4" PEX isn't 3/4" copper

    3/4" type L copper has about a .785" bore. 3/4" PEX has about .681". That's roughly a quarter less flow area. On a long run, or on a manifold feed, that's why the PEX is often sized up one.

    How long until hot water gets there

    Gallons in the line ÷ faucet GPM = minutes of waiting. A 50 ft run of 1/2" PEX holds about 0.48 gal. At a 1.2 GPM lav that's about 24 seconds of cold water before the hot arrives. The same run in 3/4" is about 47 seconds. That's the case for home runs in 3/8" and 1/2" to the far fixtures.

    Five ways to make the joint. The system is decided by the tubing, the fittings and the tool, all together. Don't mix brands or standards in one joint unless both makers say it's allowed.

    1/8"–1/4" RING PEX TUBE FITTING SHOULDER insert inside
    Crimp or clamp: tube pushed onto the insert all the way to the shoulder, ring set 1/8" to 1/4" back from the tube end. Too close to the end and it rides off the barbs. Too far back and it squeezes plain tube with no barb under it.
    SystemHow it worksCheck it with
    Crimp
    F1807 / F2159
    Copper ring squeezed around the tube over a barbed insert.Go/no-go gauge on every joint.
    Clamp (cinch)
    F2098
    Stainless band with a tab. One tool does every size.The tab is fully closed. The tool lets go at the right squeeze.
    Expansion
    F1960
    PEX-A only. Ring on, tube and ring expanded, fitting pushed in. The PEX shrinks back down onto it.Tube on to the shoulder, no gap. Wait the shrink time before testing.
    Expansion + sleeve
    F2080
    Tube expanded over the fitting, then a metal sleeve is pressed over it.Sleeve fully home against the fitting.
    PressA sleeve or ring pressed on with a jaw tool. Maker-specific.The press indicator is gone or turned.
    Push-to-connect
    ASSE 1061
    Grab ring and O-ring. No tool.The insertion depth mark on the tube meets the fitting.

    Crimp, step by step

    1. Cut square with a PEX cutter. A hacksaw leaves a ragged, angled end that won't seal.
    2. Slide the ring on first. It's easy to forget until the fitting's already in.
    3. Push the tube onto the insert until it touches the shoulder.
    4. Set the ring 1/8"–1/4" from the tube end, square to the tube.
    5. Center the jaws over the ring, square to it, and close the tool all the way.
    6. Gauge it. Go slides over, no-go doesn't. If the no-go slips on, cut the joint out. Never crimp it twice.

    Expansion (PEX-A), step by step

    1. Cut square. Slide the ring on flush with the tube end, or up to its stop if it has one.
    2. Expand in short strokes, turning the tool a little between strokes (auto-rotate heads do this for you) until the fitting just slides in.
    3. Push the fitting in right away, all the way to the shoulder, and hold it a few seconds.
    4. Wait out the shrink time before pressure testing. It's much longer in the cold. The maker's chart gives the times.
    Tools drift

    A crimp tool that's out of adjustment makes joints that look fine and leak in a month. Gauge every joint, and check the tool against the gauge at the start of every day.

    Push fittings

    They're good for repairs and tight spots. Deburr the tube, mark the insertion depth, and use the tube stiffener if the maker supplies one. Some jurisdictions and some jobs don't allow them concealed in walls. Ask first.

    Same idea as copper: centers minus what the fittings take. The tube stops at the fitting's shoulder, so that's the point you measure to.

    CUT = C-TO-C − (CENTER TO SHOULDER)A − (CENTER TO SHOULDER)B

    PEX fittings aren't made to one standard size. Measure the one in your hand from its center to the shoulder the tube butts against, and write it on the box.

    Worked 1/2" PEX between two tees, 18" center to center
    Center to shoulder on your tee (measure it): 7/8"
    18 − 7/8 − 7/8 = 16-1/4" cut

    Leave it slack

    PEX grows about 1.1" per 100 ft for every 10°F it warms up. That's around ten times what copper does. So you don't pull it tight between straps:

    • Leave about 1/8" of slack per foot on long, loose runs so it has room to grow. Many makers ask for this.
    • Where it's clipped rigid, use a loop or an offset to take up the movement instead of letting it shove a fitting.
    • Long straight hot runs get continuous support channel. It keeps the line straight and the growth even.
    Worked — how much it grows 60 ft hot line, installed at 60°F, runs at 140°F → 80°F rise
    1.1 × (60 ÷ 100) × (80 ÷ 10) = about 5-1/4"
    Copper, same run: about 1/2"

    Bend radius

    The usual minimum is 6 × the OD. Some makers allow tighter with a bend support, and some ask for more. The maker's number wins.

    NominalOD6 × OD radius
    3/8".5003"
    1/2".6253-3/4"
    3/4".8755-1/4"
    1"1.1256-3/4"
    • Bend supports (the plastic or metal 90° guides) make a tight, clean turn out of a floor or wall without a fitting.
    • Kinked PEX-A can be heated back to shape with a heat gun if the maker allows it. Kinked PEX-B or C gets cut out and coupled.

    Supports

    Horizontal
    32" max at 1" and smaller, 4 ft at 1-1/4" and up (IPC Table 308.5). See 9.1 for how that compares with the other materials.
    Vertical
    At the base and every floor, with a mid-story guide on 1" and smaller.
    Straps
    Plastic or plastic-coated, loose enough for the tube to slide as it grows.
    Nail plates

    Where the pipe sits closer than 1-1/4" to the face of a stud or joist, a steel nail plate goes over it (16 ga or heavier). PEX stops nothing. A drywall screw goes straight through it, and the leak shows up after the paint's dry.

    Holes through framing

    Drill oversize so the tube slides and doesn't squeak as it grows. Run it through the middle of the member. Bored-hole limits for studs and joists are in the building code, and cutting a notch is the framer's call, not ours.

    Trunk & branch
    A main line with tees off to each fixture, like copper. Least tubing, most fittings.
    Home-run
    A manifold with one line to each fixture. No fittings in the walls, hot water arrives quicker at small fixtures, and every fixture can be shut off on its own at the manifold. Uses the most tubing.
    Hybrid
    A trunk out to a small manifold in each bathroom group or area. Usually the best balance.

    Rules of thumb

    • Feed the manifold one size larger than the biggest line off it. 3/4" or 1" in, 3/8" or 1/2" out is typical.
    • Put the manifold where someone can reach it later, and label every port: "MASTER BATH LAV H". The next person will thank you.
    • Keep 3/8" for single low-flow fixtures and short runs only. Tub fillers, showers on long runs and hose bibs get 1/2" or bigger. Check the flow with the sizing method in 23.10.
    • Run hot and cold apart. Where they cross, make it square, not alongside each other.
    Why home-run feels faster Kitchen 40 ft from the heater
    Trunk: 25 ft of 3/4" + 15 ft of 1/2" ≈ 0.47 + 0.14 = 0.61 gal
    Home-run: 40 ft of 1/2" ≈ 0.38 gal
    At 1.5 GPM: about 24 s vs 15 s of waiting for hot
    • Crimping without gauging. It's the number one PEX leak. Gauge every joint.
    • Pulled tight between straps. It grows and pulls out a fitting, or it ticks and bangs in the wall.
    • Left in the sun. A pallet that sat out a few weeks may already be past its UV limit.
    • Mixing systems. One maker's rings on another maker's fittings, or expansion fittings on PEX-B, voids both warranties and may not seal.
    • Too close to heat. Water heater connections, flue pipes, recessed can lights.
    • No nail plates where it runs near the face of the framing.
    • Sharp bends at stub-outs. Use a bend support or a drop-ear elbow, not a kink with a strap over it.
    • Testing an expansion system too soon in cold weather. Wait out the shrink time.
    • Testing with air. Most PEX makers and codes want water. See 23.11.

    Drain, waste and vent. Water runs downhill by gravity, the trap holds a plug of water that keeps sewer gas out of the room, and the vent lets air in behind the water so it doesn't suck that plug out on its way past.

    FLOOD RIM TRAP SEAL WEIR TRAP ARM (sloped to the stack) VENT to open air SAN TEE DRAIN
    The trap seal is the water between the trap's weir and its dip, 2" to 4" deep. The trap arm runs from the weir to the vent. Keep it short and at a steady grade so the vent opening never ends up below the weir. The vent keeps the pressure in the pipe equal to the air in the room.

    The parts, by name

    Fixture drain
    Trap outlet to where it joins another drain. The trap arm is the part of it between the weir and the vent.
    Branch
    A horizontal drain collecting several fixtures.
    Stack
    A vertical drain running through one or more floors. Soil stack takes toilets; a waste stack takes everything else.
    Building drain
    The lowest horizontal drain inside the building. Everything ends up here.
    Building sewer
    From the building drain (usually 30" to 3 ft or more outside the wall, by code) to the public sewer or septic.
    Stack vent
    The drain stack carried on up through the roof above the highest fixture.
    Vent stack
    A separate vertical vent run beside a drain stack. It relieves pressure on tall buildings.

    What goes wrong without a vent

    • Siphonage. A slug of water rushing past pulls a vacuum behind it and sucks the trap dry. The room smells like sewer.
    • Back-pressure. Water falling down a stack pushes air ahead of it, which blows through traps lower down as bubbles and gurgling.
    • Slow drains. The water has to push air out of its way. Glugging sinks are almost always venting.
    Your code

    This section teaches the International Plumbing Code (IPC) and the Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) and says where they differ. Ohio and West Virginia both build on the IPC; much of the western US uses the UPC. Every state and city amends its code. The code adopted where you're working, and the inspector, govern over anything in this book.

    Water has to turn gently where it's moving fast and lying down. That one idea picks nearly every DWV fitting.

    ChangeUseDon't use
    Horizontal
    → vertical
    Sanitary tee, wye, combo (wye + 1/8), 1/8 bend, 1/4 bend— (most fittings work here: the water is falling)
    Vertical
    → horizontal
    Long sweep, combo, wye + 1/8 bend, two 1/8 bendsSanitary tee. Short sweep in small sizes.
    Horizontal
    → horizontal
    Wye, combo, long sweep, 1/8 bendsSanitary tee. Short 1/4 bend.

    The pattern both codes follow (IPC Table 706.3, UPC 706). Each code has size limits and exceptions in its own table. The short sweep, for instance, is allowed vertical-to-horizontal from 3" up under the IPC.

    San tee
    The branch comes in with a short curve. It's for a horizontal line dropping into a vertical one, and it's what the trap arm hits on the stack. Never lay one on its back.
    Wye
    A 45° branch. With a 1/8 bend on the branch it makes the turn in two easy steps.
    Combo
    A wye and 1/8 bend cast as one fitting (a "combination wye and 1/8 bend" or "tee-wye"). Shorter than the two pieces.
    Long sweep
    A 90 with a long radius. It's the go-to for turning a stack to horizontal.
    Closet bend
    A 90 under a toilet. It turns the floor flange into the horizontal drain.
    Back-to-back fixtures

    Two fixtures on opposite sides of a wall, into one vertical: a double sanitary tee can't take back-to-back toilets, or fixtures with pumped discharge like washers and dishwashers (IPC 706.3). Use a double fixture fitting or a double combo. Check the table for the fitting in your hand.

    The pitch is built in

    Most DWV sanitary tees, wyes and 1/4 bends are made with 1/4" per foot of grade built into the branch, so the fitting isn't a true 90. Set the fitting square and the branch runs out at grade. It's why a line at 1/8" per foot fights the fittings a little, and why you roll them slightly to match.

    No two makers make a DWV fitting the same size, so there's no chart that's right for yours. Measure the fitting in your hand once and write it on the box.

    NET = CENTER OF FITTING TO THE BOTTOM OF THE SOCKET
    CUT = C-TO-C − NETA − NETB
    1. Stand the fitting on a flat surface with a square against it.
    2. Find its center: where the centerlines of its two openings cross.
    3. Measure from that center to the bottom of the socket, where the pipe stops. That's the net. The pipe disappears into the rest.
    4. On no-hub cast iron the fitting has no socket, so measure center to the end of the fitting. The coupling's center stop adds nothing. That's the laying length in 6.1.

    A 45° offset in a drain line

    Same constants as every other pipe: travel = offset × 1.414. See 8.2.

    Worked — 3" PVC DWV, 14" offset, two 1/8 bends Travel: 14 × 1.414 = 19.80 → 19-13/16"
    Net on your 1/8 bend (measure it): 1-1/2"
    Cut: 19-13/16 − 1-1/2 − 1-1/2 = 16-13/16"
    Offsets on a graded line

    An offset in a horizontal drain runs at grade too. The drop across a short offset is tiny, so work the offset flat and then set the whole run to grade. Keep the grade steady through the fittings. A dip holds water and solids, and a hump holds air.

    Offsets in a stack

    An offset in a vertical stack can change what the codes call it and what size it has to be, and it may need its own vent. Check before you fit it.

    Every horizontal drain runs downhill at a set grade. Work out the fall, check it fits between the two ends you're stuck with, then set it.

    FALL (in) = GRADE (in/ft) × RUN (ft)

    Fall at a glance

    Run1/16" / ft1/8" / ft1/4" / ft
    5 ft5/16"5/8"1-1/4"
    10 ft5/8"1-1/4"2-1/2"
    15 ft15/16"1-7/8"3-3/4"
    20 ft1-1/4"2-1/2"5"
    25 ft1-9/16"3-1/8"6-1/4"
    30 ft1-7/8"3-3/4"7-1/2"
    40 ft2-1/2"5"10"
    50 ft3-1/8"6-1/4"12-1/2"
    60 ft3-3/4"7-1/2"15"
    75 ft4-11/16"9-3/8"18-3/4"
    100 ft6-1/4"12-1/2"25"

    Minimums in both codes: 1/4" per ft for 2-1/2" and smaller, 1/8" per ft for 3" to 6", 1/16" per ft for 8" and up (IPC Table 704.1; the UPC is similar). Local code governs.

    Will it make it? Checking a sewer tie-in

    1. Get both inverts: the invert is the elevation of the inside bottom of the pipe. One is where you start, the other where you have to end up.
    2. Subtract them. That's the fall you have.
    3. Work the fall you need: run × grade.
    4. Have ≥ need, and it works. If you have a lot more, ask the engineer or inspector where to take the extra.
    Worked — 4" building sewer, 85 ft run Building drain leaves the wall at invert 97.50 ft
    Sewer tap invert: 95.60 ft
    Fall you have: 97.50 − 95.60 = 1.90 ft × 12 = 22.8"
    Need at 1/8": 85 × 0.125 = 10.6"  ✓
    Need at 1/4": 85 × 0.25 = 21.3"  ✓ (1-1/2" to spare)

    Elevations on civil prints are in decimal feet. 17.2 and 17.3 convert them both ways.

    Setting it in the field

    Level + shim
    1/4" per ft: a 1" block under the low end of a 4 ft level, or 1/2" under a 2 ft level. 1/8" per ft: half that. Center the bubble.
    Grade level
    A level with vials marked for 1/8" and 1/4" per foot. Check it against a shim once. They get dropped.
    Laser
    Read the rod at the start, then the rod reading has to go up by the fall as you move down the line.
    String line
    On a long underground run, pull a string between the two inverts and measure down to it at every joint.
    Worked — laser rod readings Rod on the invert at the start: 4'-2"
    40 ft down the line at 1/4": fall = 10"
    Rod must read 4'-2" + 10" = 5'-0"
    Start at the low end

    Underground, lay from the sewer or the lowest point back up toward the building, hub or bell end uphill. You always know you'll make the tie-in, and the headroom problem shows up at the start instead of the end.

    Every fixture gets a trap, one trap only, as close to the fixture as it can be. The trap arm then has to reach a vent before the water in it can pull the trap dry.

    Rules both codes agree on

    • Trap seal 2" minimum, 4" maximum.
    • No S-traps, drum traps, bell traps, or traps that depend on moving parts. An S-trap siphons itself dry.
    • No double trapping. One trap per fixture. Two traps in series trap air between them and the drain slows to a crawl.
    • Trap arm at a steady grade. Its total fall can't be more than one pipe diameter, so the vent opening never sits below the trap weir (toilets aside).
    • Traps set level. A cocked trap holds less seal.
    • Traps that don't see water (floor drains, rarely used fixtures) get a trap primer or a barrier device so they don't dry out.

    Maximum trap arm length at 1/4" per ft

    Trap armIPCUPC
    1-1/4"5 ft2'-6"
    1-1/2"6 ft3'-6"
    2"8 ft5 ft
    3"12 ft6 ft
    4"16 ft10 ft

    IPC Table 909.1 and UPC Table 1002.2. The UPC also wants at least 2 pipe diameters from the weir to the vent. Measured along the pipe, weir to vent. Check the edition and local amendments where you're working. The two codes are far apart here, which is exactly why you check.

    Trap arms and grade

    A long trap arm has to fall at grade the whole way, and its total fall can't be more than one pipe diameter. On 1-1/2" pipe at 1/4" per ft, that caps it at 6 ft of run no matter what the table says. The arm and the grade limit each other.

    Every trap gets vented. The code only argues about how. Get the idea first; the sizing and distances come from the code table.

    Individual
    One vent for one trap. The simplest and always allowed.
    Common
    One vent serving two traps on the same floor, often back to back.
    Wet vent
    A pipe that's a drain for one fixture and the vent for another. Tightly limited by fixture, size and arrangement. Classic in bathroom groups.
    Circuit
    One vent for a row of floor-outlet fixtures on a horizontal branch. Commercial toilet rooms.
    Island / loop
    For a sink with no wall to run a vent up. The vent loops as high as it can under the counter, then drops and runs to a vent elsewhere, with a cleanout.
    AAV
    Air admittance valve. A one-way valve that lets air in and never lets gas out. The IPC allows them with limits: accessible, in a ventilated space, at least 4" above the branch or fixture drain it serves, and with at least one vent in the building still going to open air. The UPC mostly does not allow them.

    Laying out vents

    • Take a vent off the top half of the drain, above its centerline, so it can't fill with water and turn into a drain.
    • A dry vent rises vertically to at least 6" above the flood rim of the highest fixture it serves before it can run horizontal (IPC 905.4). Below that line, it could fill up and act as a drain.
    • Grade dry vents so they drain back to the drain system. No sags or bellies that hold water.
    • Vent pipe is at least 1-1/4" and at least half the size of the drain it serves (IPC 916.2).

    Through the roof

    • At least 6" above the roof, more where snow piles up (local code sets this). At least 7 ft where the roof is walked on or used (IPC 903).
    • At least 10 ft sideways from any window, door, or air intake, or at least 3 ft above the top of it.
    • Where it freezes hard, the vent is increased in size before it goes through the roof so frost can't close it. The local code gives the size.
    Listen to it

    Gurgling at a fixture when another one drains, a toilet bowl whose water level bounces in the wind, or a smell that comes and goes: all three are venting problems before they're anything else.

    Every drain clogs eventually. A cleanout is where the drain cleaner puts the cable in, so put them where a cable can reach every foot of pipe.

    Where they go (IPC 708)

    • At the base of every stack.
    • At changes of direction over 45° in horizontal drains. Where there are several close together, one per 40 ft of run.
    • At least every 100 ft on long horizontal drains.
    • Near where the building drain meets the building sewer, inside or just outside the wall.
    • Opening in the direction of flow, so the cable goes downstream.

    Getting to them

    • Clear space in front: 18" for 3" and larger, 12" for smaller pipe.
    • Same size as the pipe up to 4". 4" is enough on anything bigger.
    • Never behind a cabinet, tiled over, or under a slab without an access cover.

    The UPC (section 707) differs on spacing and on which changes of direction need a cleanout. Use the one on the permit.

    Every fixture is given a drainage fixture unit (DFU) value, a weight for how much it drains and how often. Add up what a pipe carries, then read the code table for the smallest pipe that can take that load at your grade.

    The method

    1. List every fixture on the section of pipe you're sizing.
    2. Look up each one's DFU in your code's fixture table and add them.
    3. Decide which kind of pipe it is: horizontal branch, stack, or building drain. Each has its own table or column.
    4. For building drains and sewers, pick the column for your grade.
    5. Go down the column to the first capacity at or above your total. That row's pipe size is the smallest allowed.
    6. Check the minimums. A toilet needs at least a 3" drain, and a drain never gets smaller in the direction of flow.
    7. Work downstream section by section. Each one carries everything above it.
    Example numbers — not code values

    The numbers below are made up to show the steps. Always read the real ones from the code on your permit.

    Worked — the method only Branch carries: 2 lavs, 1 tub, 1 toilet
    Your table says: lav 1, tub 2, toilet 3 (example)
    Total: 1 + 1 + 2 + 3 = 7 DFU
    Horizontal branch column: 2" takes 6, 3" takes 20 (example)
    7 > 6, so the branch is 3". It has a toilet on it anyway.
    Bathroom groups

    Both codes give a whole bathroom (toilet, lav, tub or shower) a single DFU value that's less than the sum of the parts. Nobody uses all three at once. Use it when the table allows.

    Typical rough-in heights and centers. The fixture's spec sheet and the plans beat this page every time. Get the sheets before you rough.

    12" to flange 15" MIN 15" MIN SUPPLY
    The 12" is measured from the finished wall, not the stud or the block. Allow for drywall and tile. 10" and 14" bowls exist, so check which one is on the job. The 15" to each side is a code minimum in both the IPC and the UPC.
    FixtureTypical rough-in
    ToiletFlange center 12" from finished wall. Supply about 6" left of center, 6"–8" above floor. 15" min from center to any side wall; 30" center to center between toilets. Clear space in front: 21" (IPC), 24" (UPC).
    LavDrain 18"–20" above floor. Supplies about 21" above floor, 4" each side of center. Rim about 31"–34".
    Kitchen sinkDrain 16"–18" above floor, lower with a disposer. Supplies 18"–22", 4" each side of center.
    TubSpout about 4" above the tub rim. Valve about 28"–33" above floor. Drain per the tub.
    ShowerValve 38"–48" above floor. Head 72"–80" above floor.
    WasherBox about 42" above floor. Standpipe rises 18"–42" above its trap weir (IPC), 18"–30" (UPC).
    Hose bibAbout 18"–24" above grade. Frost-free where it freezes, with a vacuum breaker (23.12).

    Accessible (ADA) fixtures

    Toilet
    Centerline 16"–18" from the side wall. Seat 17"–19" high. Flush handle on the open side.
    Lav
    Rim 34" max. Knee space under it, and the trap and supplies insulated or shielded.
    Urinal
    Rim 17" max above floor.

    ADA Standards 604, 605, 606. Some states and jobs use ICC A117.1 instead, which has small differences.

    Mark from finished floor

    Ask what the finished floor will be (tile over a mud bed can add 1-1/2") and mark heights from there. Rough-ins measured off a bare slab end up short.

    You have a pressure at the meter. Height, the meter, the backflow device and the pipe itself all eat into it. Whatever's left has to be enough at the farthest, highest fixture.

    The friction method

    1. Demand. Add up the water supply fixture units (WSFU) the pipe serves and convert the total to GPM with the code's demand table. It's based on Hunter's curve, so not everything runs at once.
    2. Pressure you start with. The lowest static pressure at the meter. Ask the water utility.
    3. Subtract height. 0.433 psi for every foot the highest fixture sits above the meter.
    4. Subtract devices. The meter, backflow preventer, softener and filters all take a loss. It's on their data sheets.
    5. Subtract what the fixture needs flowing, from its spec sheet or the code table.
    6. Divide what's left by the length. Developed length to the farthest fixture, plus about 50% for fittings. That gives the friction you can afford per 100 ft.
    7. Pick the pipe. On the friction chart for your pipe, the smallest size that carries your GPM at or under that friction and under the velocity limit.
    Worked Static at the meter: 60 psi
    Highest fixture 25 ft up: 25 × 0.433 = −10.8
    Meter −5, backflow preventer −10 (data sheets)
    Fixture needs 15 psi flowing (its spec sheet): −15
    Left for friction: 60 − 10.8 − 5 − 10 − 15 = 19.2 psi
    Farthest fixture 120 ft away × 1.5 = 180 ft
    19.2 ÷ 180 × 100 = 10.7 psi per 100 ft to spend

    Check the velocity

    V (ft/s) = 0.4085 × GPM ÷ ID² (in)
    Worked — 12 GPM on type L copper 3/4" (ID .785): 0.4085 × 12 ÷ .616 = 7.96 ft/s  too fast for hot
    1" (ID 1.025): 0.4085 × 12 ÷ 1.051 = 4.66 ft/s  ✓
    Copper cold
    8 ft/s max
    Copper hot
    5 ft/s max to 140°F; slower above. Fast hot water erodes copper from the inside, at the elbows first.
    Plastic
    The maker's limit, often 5–8 ft/s.

    Velocity limits are the Copper Development Association's recommendations. See 7.11 for more on GPM and velocity.

    Too much pressure

    Over 80 psi static, both codes want a pressure-reducing valve (IPC 604.8, UPC 608.2). A PRV turns the house into a closed system, so it needs an expansion tank at the water heater (23.14).

    The demand tables, WSFU values and friction charts are in the code (IPC Appendix E, UPC Appendix A) and the pipe makers' data. Use the ones for the code on your permit.

    The inspector sees it under test before it's covered. Plan the test when you plan the job: where the plugs go, where you'll fill it and where you'll read it.

    SystemTestHold
    DWV roughWater: fill to 10 ft of head above the highest joint in the section. Or air at 5 psi.15 min, no drop
    DWV finalSmoke at 1" of water column, or peppermint, after fixtures are set. Where the inspector calls for it.—
    Water supplyWater at no less than working pressure. Many inspectors want 100 psi or more.15 min
    Fuel gasAir or inert gas at 1-1/2 times working pressure, never less than 3 psi.10 min min. in a house, longer on bigger systems

    IPC 312, UPC 609 and 712, IFGC 406. Local inspectors often set their own numbers. What's on the permit card, or what the inspector says, is the test.

    No air on plastic

    Most plastic pipe makers forbid air or gas testing of their pipe, and many codes do too. A plastic fitting that lets go under air comes apart like a bomb. Test plastic with water unless the maker says otherwise, in writing.

    Water-testing a DWV system

    1. Plug every opening: test tees, test balls in cleanouts, caps on stub-outs.
    2. Fill from the top of the section until the water stands at least 10 ft above the highest joint (a stack filled up to the roof usually does it).
    3. Let it settle, mark the level, and hold 15 minutes. Walk every joint while you wait.
    4. Drain slowly from the bottom. The pressure behind a test ball is real: stand to the side, never in front of it.

    The mechanical-piping side of testing is in 11.1 and 11.2. Disinfecting potable water before turnover is in 11.3.

    Keep what's in the building's pipes from flowing back into the drinking water. It happens two ways: backsiphonage (the supply loses pressure and sucks) and backpressure (something downstream pushes harder than the supply).

    Pick the device by the hazard and the direction

    DeviceStopsHazardNotes
    Air gapBothHighThe best there is. Open space of 2× the outlet's diameter, 1" minimum, between the outlet and the flood rim.
    RP / RPZ
    ASSE 1013
    BothHighTwo checks with a relief valve that dumps water between them. Install above grade, never in a pit, with a drain that can take the full discharge.
    Double check
    ASSE 1015
    BothLowTwo checks. Fire lines and low-hazard services.
    PVB
    ASSE 1020
    Siphon onlyHighCan stay under pressure. 12" above the highest outlet it protects. May spit water, so keep it outdoors or over a drain.
    SVB
    ASSE 1056
    Siphon onlyHighA PVB that doesn't spill. OK indoors.
    AVB
    ASSE 1001
    Siphon onlyHighNo valve after it, so it's never under constant pressure. 6" above the highest outlet.
    Hose bib VB
    ASSE 1011
    Siphon only—Screws onto the hose thread. Every hose bib gets one.
    Dual check
    ASSE 1024
    BothLowAt the meter on houses. Makes the house a closed system (23.14).

    "High" hazard means a health hazard: something that could make people sick (chemicals, boilers with additives, irrigation, medical). "Low" means it would only spoil the taste or look. Your water utility and code decide which device a connection needs.

    Testable means tested

    RP, double check, PVB and SVB assemblies get tested when they're installed and then every year, by a certified tester. Leave room to get test kit hoses on the test cocks, and a union or flange to take it out.

    Gas is sized like water: a load, a length, a table. But the loss you're allowed is tiny (often half an inch of water column), and a mistake here is a fire or an explosion, not a drip.

    The longest-length method

    1. Add up the load. BTU/h from each appliance's rating plate.
    2. Convert to cubic feet per hour. Natural gas: BTU ÷ about 1,000. Propane: BTU ÷ about 2,500. The utility can give the exact heating value.
    3. Measure the longest run, from the meter or regulator out to the farthest appliance.
    4. Use that one length for every section. In the table for your pressure and pipe, use the column at or just past that length.
    5. Size each section by the load it carries. Work outward from the meter. Each section only carries the appliances downstream of it.
    Example numbers — not code values

    Only the math here is real. Read capacities from the table in the IFGC (Chapter 4) or NFPA 54 for your pressure, pressure drop and pipe.

    Worked — natural gas, low pressure Furnace 100,000 + water heater 40,000 + range 65,000 + dryer 25,000
    = 230,000 BTU/h ÷ 1,000 = 230 CFH at the meter
    Longest run, meter to range: 72 ft → use the 80 ft column for everything
    Meter to first tee carries all 230 CFH. The range branch carries 65.
    Read each size off the 80 ft column (example: 1" for the main, 1/2" for the range).

    Piping it

    • Sediment trap (drip leg) at each appliance, as close to the inlet as it can be: a tee with a capped nipple on the bottom, where the gas turns (IFGC 408.4).
    • Shutoff valve in the same room, within 6 ft of the appliance, and where you can reach it (IFGC 409.5).
    • CSST gets bonded: a 6 AWG copper jumper to the grounding electrode system, unless the maker's listing says otherwise (IFGC 310.1.1).
    • Underground plastic (PE) is for outdoors, underground only, with a tracer wire.
    • Gas pipe is never used as a grounding electrode.
    Finding leaks

    Soap solution or a gas detector. Never a flame. If you smell gas in a building, get out, then call the gas company from outside. Don't flip switches on the way out.

    The gas test is in 23.11. Most states and cities license gas work separately. Know what your card lets you do.

    The one plumbing appliance that can hurt somebody badly if it's piped wrong. Two things protect people: the relief valve, and the temperature at the tap.

    Relief valve discharge (T&P)

    • Full size of the valve outlet the whole way. No reducing.
    • No valve and no cap anywhere on it.
    • Drains by gravity. Runs downhill, with no trap and nowhere to sit full of water.
    • Ends where someone would see it running but not get scalded: no more than 6" above the floor or over a drain. The end can't be threaded.

    IPC 504.6, UPC 608.5.

    Everything else

    Expansion tank
    Needed whenever a check valve, dual check or PRV makes the building a closed system (IPC 607.3.2). Set its air charge to the building's water pressure before you fill it.
    Pan
    Where a leak would do damage, a pan with a drain of at least 3/4" to somewhere it'll be seen (IPC 504.7).
    Garages
    Gas heaters with a flame or other ignition source sit 18" off the floor so they don't light gasoline vapor.
    Connections
    Dielectric fittings or unions between copper and steel. Most makers, and some codes, want the first 18" metal before PEX or CPVC (22.1).

    Scald protection

    • Shower and tub-shower valves limit to 120°F max (ASSE 1016 or 1070 valves).
    • Public lavs get a mixing valve (ASSE 1070) holding them to 110°F (IPC 416.5).
    • At 120°F a full scald takes several minutes. At 140°F it takes about 5 seconds.

    What fails a rough-in

    • A sanitary tee on its back, or on a vertical-to-horizontal turn.
    • Trap arm too long or falling more than its diameter.
    • Drains with no grade, back grade, or a belly.
    • A dry vent going flat below the flood rim.
    • A cleanout missing at the base of a stack, or buried with no access.
    • No nail plates where pipe is closer than 1-1/4" to the face of the framing.
    • No test on it, or a gauge that won't hold.
    • Pipe with no listing marks on it, or the wrong material for the use.
    • Supports missing, too far apart, or not the right type for the pipe.
    • Holes through fire-rated walls and floors with no firestop.

    Walk it before you call it in

    1. Test is on and holding. Gauge in plain sight, or water up the stack.
    2. Every trap arm: length, grade, vent opening above the weir.
    3. Every fitting change of direction, against 23.2.
    4. Every cleanout: there, facing downstream, room to get at it.
    5. Rough-in heights and centers, against the fixture sheets.
    6. Nail plates, straps, firestop.
    7. Permit card posted and the approved plans on the job.
    Be there

    Meet the inspector if you can. Walk it with them. Most of them will tell you what they'd like to see next time, and that's free advice from the person who decides whether you pass.

    A tankless heater only heats water while it's flowing. It never runs out, but it can only heat so many gallons a minute. Size it by flow and temperature rise, not by gallons stored.

    Sizing it

    GPM = BTU/h output ÷ (500 × temperature rise °F)

    500 is 8.33 lb per gallon × 60 minutes. Output is input × the unit's efficiency.

    1. Temperature rise. Hot you want (usually 120°F) minus the coldest incoming water. In Ohio and West Virginia, figure 45–50°F in winter. That's a 70°F rise.
    2. Flow you need. Add up what can run at once. Shower heads are usually 1.8–2.5 GPM, a lav 0.5–1.5, a kitchen sink 1.5–2.2 (check the fixtures).
    3. Pick the unit that delivers that GPM at your rise, off the maker's flow chart.
    Worked — 199,000 BTU gas, 95% efficient Output: 199,000 × 0.95 = 189,050 BTU/h
    Rise: 120 − 50 = 70°F
    189,050 ÷ (500 × 70) = 189,050 ÷ 35,000 = 5.4 GPM
    Two 2.0 GPM showers and a lav at once. Not three showers.

    Gas

    • A big unit burns 150,000–199,000 BTU/h. The 1/2" line that fed a 40,000 BTU tank won't carry it. Resize from the meter with the whole house load (23.13).
    • Check the maker's minimum inlet pressure, running, with everything else in the house firing.

    Venting

    Condensing
    90%+ efficient. Vents in PVC, CPVC or polypropylene, only what the maker lists. Makes acidic condensate that needs a drain, and usually a neutralizer.
    Non-condensing
    Hotter exhaust. Stainless Category III vent from the maker's list. Never PVC, never an old B-vent.

    Clearances to windows, doors, grade and air intakes are in the install manual and the code. They're checked at inspection.

    Piping it

    • Isolation (service) valves on hot and cold, with hose ports, so you can flush out scale with a pump and descaler. In hard water, flush once a year.
    • A relief valve still goes on it, piped like any other (23.14).
    • Scald limits at the fixtures still apply (23.14).
    • Recirculation: built-in pump, or a crossover valve under the farthest sink. Set up the way the maker says.
    What customers call about

    Doesn't fire at a trickle: most units need about 0.4–0.5 GPM to turn on. Cold burst mid-shower ("cold water sandwich"): hot in the pipe, then cold while it fires, then hot. Normal. Recirculation helps. Runs out of heat in winter: colder incoming water means a bigger rise and less flow.

    Electric tankless is a big electrical load

    Amps = watts ÷ volts. A 27 kW whole-house unit at 240 V: 27,000 ÷ 240 = 112.5 A, usually on several breakers. Many houses don't have the service for it. That's the electrician's call before you sell it.

    Water moving in a pipe is heavy. When a valve slams shut, all that water stops at once and the pressure spikes. That bang is the spike hitting the pipe, and it wears out valves, joints and supports every time.

    Spike ≈ 60 psi for every ft/s the water was moving
    Worked Water moving 6 ft/s when a washer solenoid shuts:
    6 × 60 = about 360 psi on top of the 60 psi already in the line.

    A rule of thumb for water in metal pipe with a valve closing fast. It's why the velocity limits in 23.10 matter.

    Where hammer comes from

    Quick-closing valves: solenoids in washers, dishwashers and ice makers, single-lever faucets, flushometers, and some irrigation valves.

    What the code wants

    • A water hammer arrestor wherever a quick-closing valve is used, installed per the maker, meeting ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201 (IPC 604.9). The UPC has the same requirement.
    • Put it as close to the quick-closing valve as you can, on both hot and cold.
    • For a battery of fixtures, size and place them by the maker's table (PDI sizes A through F, by fixture units and branch length).
    • Washer boxes come with arrestors built in. Worth the few dollars more.
    A capped stub is not an arrestor

    The old air chamber (a capped pipe standing up) fills with water within months and stops working. It doesn't meet ASSE 1010. Draining the house brings it back for a while, but the fix is a real arrestor.

    Tracking down a noise

    NoiseUsuallyFix
    Bang when a valve shutsWater hammerArrestor at that valve. Check the pressure.
    Bangs everywherePressure too highGauge on a hose bib. Over 80 psi, a PRV (or a new one).
    Rattle while water runsLoose pipeStrap it. Isolate it where it rubs framing.
    Ticking as hot water runsExpansion in a tight holeOversize the hole or sleeve it. Isolators on the straps.
    Whistle or humA valve partly closed, a worn washer, or a PRVOpen the valve fully. Rebuild or replace.

    Start with what the customer tells you, then check the cheap, likely thing first. Most service calls are one of these.

    Drains

    SymptomCheck firstThen
    One fixture slowThe trap and the tailpiece. Hair on a lav pop-up, grease in a kitchen trap.Snake from the trap arm, not through the trap.
    Several fixtures slow, or the lowest one backs upThe building drain or sewer. Water coming up the basement floor drain or tub when the toilet flushes.Cable from the main cleanout. Camera it if it comes back: roots, a belly or a broken pipe.
    Gurgling, or a trap drains outVenting. A blocked vent at the roof (nests, leaves, frost), a stuck AAV, or a trap arm too long (23.5).Run water down the vent from the roof. Check the fall on the trap arm.
    Sewer smellA dry trap: a floor drain or shower nobody uses. Pour water in it.Wax ring under a toilet, an AAV stuck open, a cracked vent or loose joint in a wall. Smoke test finds it (23.11).
    Opening a backed-up cleanout

    The pipe behind it is full of sewage with the whole stack pushing on it. Crack the plug slowly and stand to the side. If anyone poured drain chemicals in, find out before you open anything or run a cable: it burns skin and eyes.

    Water supply

    SymptomCheck firstThen
    Low pressure, whole houseGauge on a hose bib. The main valve all the way open. A clogged filter or softener.A failing or low-set PRV. Old galvanized pipe closed up with scale.
    Low pressure, one fixtureThe aerator or cartridge, especially right after work on the water. The stop valve all the way open.A kinked supply line.
    Banging pipesWater hammer (23.17).Pressure over 80 psi.
    Toilet runsThe flapper and chain. Water level over the overflow tube.Fill valve. Adjust or replace.
    Hose bib burst after winterFrost-free sillcock left with a hose on, or installed without pitch to the outside.Replace it with a slight fall to the outside. Tell them to take hoses off in fall.

    Hot water

    SymptomCheck firstThen
    No hot water, gasGas on? Pilot or igniter lit? Error code or status light?Thermocouple or flame sensor, gas valve, venting safety switch.
    No hot water, electricBreaker and the high-limit reset button.Elements and thermostats, tested with the power off.
    Runs out fast or lukewarmThermostat setting. Size against the household.Broken dip tube, a failed lower element, sediment. A mixing valve or single-lever faucet letting cold cross into hot.
    Relief valve dripsPressure over 80. No expansion tank, or its air charge is gone (tap it: waterlogged sounds solid all the way up).A worn relief valve. Never plug or cap it.
    Rotten-egg smell, hot onlyThe anode rod reacting with bacteria in the water. Common on wells.Aluminum-zinc or powered anode. Chlorinate the tank.
    Tankless problemsThe error code in the manual. Scale (23.16).Minimum flow, gas pressure, vent.
    Carry a gauge

    A $15 pressure gauge on a hose bib answers half the water calls in 30 seconds. One with a red lag needle also shows the highest spike overnight, which is how you prove thermal expansion or a bad PRV.

    Every card in this trade sits behind a test. This section tells you what's on each one, how it's scored, what books you can bring, and then lets you practice until the answers come without thinking.

    TestWho runs itWhat it's like
    Union apprenticeship entranceYour local's JATC (training committee)Aptitude test: math, mechanical reasoning, spatial and sometimes reading. Usually no calculator, no books. Scores are ranked. Read 24.5.
    NCCER PipefittingTrade schools, open-shop contractors, assessment centersA written test after every module (70% to pass) plus hands-on performance checks. A 125-question journey-level assessment. Read 24.9.
    Ohio contractor licenseOhio Construction Industry Licensing Board (OCILB), tested by PSIA trade exam (plumbing, HVAC, hydronics or refrigeration) plus Business & Law. Open book, 70% to pass. Read 24.2.
    West Virginia contractor licenseWV Contractor Licensing Board, tested by ProvA trade exam (piping, plumbing, HVAC and others) plus Business & Law. Open book, 70% to pass. Read 24.3.
    WV journeyman or master plumberWest Virginia, by hours of experienceCard by hours: 8,000 for journeyman, 12,000 for master. Read 24.3.

    How to work this section

    1. Read the page for your test. Get the current candidate bulletin from whoever gives the exam. The bulletin is the rulebook, and it changes.
    2. Get the reference books it lists. Buy the edition it names, especially for code books.
    3. Take the practice quiz for your test cold, before studying. What you miss is your study list.
    4. Follow the plan in 24.10. Retake the quizzes until you clear 85%, because the real test is harder than practice.
    5. A week out, take the timed mixed test (24.16) to practice working against the clock.
    Check before you schedule

    Question counts, time limits, fees and book lists here come from the candidate bulletins as they read in September 2026 (Ohio: PSI bulletin updated February 2024; West Virginia: Prov bulletin of September 2024). Boards change vendors, books and code editions. If the bulletin you're sent says something different, the bulletin wins.

    About the practice questions

    Every practice question in this book was written for Field Fitter. None of them are copied from a real exam. Sharing real exam questions breaks your agreement with the test vendor and can cost you your license. These questions teach the same material, with the reasoning shown after each one.

    Ohio licenses commercial plumbing, HVAC, hydronics, refrigeration and electrical contractors through the OCILB. To get one you pass two exams: your trade and Business & Law.

    Before you can sit

    • At least 18 years old.
    • Five years working in that trade right before you apply. The application asks for proof: tax records, permits pulled under a licensed contractor, or your journeyman card.
    • After the board approves you, a BCI and FBI background check, then you schedule with PSI. The approval is good for one year.

    The exams

    ExamQuestionsTimePass
    Business & Law502 hr70%
    Plumbing1004 hr70%
    HVAC1004 hr70%
    Hydronics502.5 hr70%
    Refrigeration603 hr70%

    Plus up to 10 unscored "pretest" questions that count against your time. You can't tell which ones they are, so answer everything.

    What's on them

    Plumbing
    General knowledge 8 · General regulations 20 · Fixtures 6 · Water supply 10 · Drainage, waste & vents 24 · Indirect wastes 3 · Roof drains 4 · Specialty 5 · Isometric analysis 20
    HVAC
    General 10 · Warm air heating & air distribution 25 · Ventilation & exhaust 15 · Air conditioning 10 · Piping 10 · Equipment & appliances 20 · Testing 10
    Hydronics
    General knowledge 16 · Heating equipment 10 · Piping, pumps, valves 10 · Fuel gas & oil 1 · Venting 5 · Controls 5 · Tests 3
    Refrigeration
    General 18 · Refrigeration piping 12 · Refrigerants 6 · Systems & controls 15 · Testing 9
    Business & Law
    Business organization 2 · Licensing 3 · Estimating & bidding 8 · Contracts 5 · Project management 4 · Insurance & bonding 5 · OSHA record keeping & safety 5 · Personnel 5 · Financial management 6 · Tax 5 · Lien law 2

    Books you can bring

    Plumbing
    Ohio Plumbing Code 2024 · International Fuel Gas Code 2024 · Mathematics for Plumbers and Pipefitters, 8th ed. · Modern Plumbing, 9th ed.
    HVAC
    Ohio Mechanical Code 2024 · International Fuel Gas Code 2021 · Modern Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, 22nd ed.
    Hydronics
    Ohio Admin. Code 4101:4 (boiler rules) · Ohio Mechanical Code 2024 · Boiler Operator's Guide, 4th or 5th ed.
    Refrigeration
    Ohio Mechanical Code 2024 · Modern Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, 22nd ed.
    Business & Law
    NASCLA Contractor's Guide to Business, Law and Project Management – Ohio. The test center provides this one.

    You can highlight, underline and tab your own books ahead of time. You can't write notes in them or bring loose papers. PSI gives you an on-screen calculator, and it's the only one allowed.

    Where the points are

    On the plumbing exam, 44 of 100 questions are DWV and isometrics. If you can size a drain and read an iso, you're close to halfway there already. Isometrics are practice, not memorizing: work every iso problem in the math book. Section 23 of this book covers the DWV side.

    Money, retakes, locations

    • $69 per exam, each time you take it.
    • Fail a part and you wait 60 days to retake it. Up to 5 tries a year.
    • Pass Business & Law and it covers any other trade license you add within three years.
    • PSI sites in Ohio include Cambridge, Groveport (Columbus South), Dublin (Columbus North), Akron, Cleveland, Hamilton, Macedonia, Maumee, Troy and Wadsworth.
    Journeyman cards in Ohio

    Ohio has no statewide journeyman plumber or fitter card. Some cities license journeymen themselves; Columbus is one. Ask the building department where you work.

    West Virginia licenses the business (a contractor license) and, for plumbers, the person (plumber cards by hours). Fitters doing process, power, steam and boiler work usually need the Piping contractor classification.

    Contractor license

    Contracting work over $2,500 needs a WV contractor license. The person testing has to be an owner, partner, officer or full-time employee of the company. You pass a trade exam and Business & Law. Not sure which classification you need? Call the board before you pay for a test: (304) 558-7890.

    ExamQuestionsTimePass
    Business & Law503 hr70%
    Piping503 hr70%
    Plumbing1003 hr70%
    HVAC803 hr70%

    What's on them, and where it comes from

    Piping
    General regulations 20 · Weld pipe fabrication 10 · Underground piping 8 · Safety 6 · Piping systems 6.
    Books: NCCER Pipefitting Level Two (10%), Level Three (42%), Level Four (32%), Basic Safety (10%).
    Plumbing
    General 10 · Fixtures 6 · Storm 5 · Fuel gas 10 · Safety 7 · Isometrics 13 · Water supply 14 · Water heaters 7 · DWV 14 · Plumbing math 9 · Tools 5.
    Books: International Plumbing Code 2018 (53%), IFGC 2018 (10%), Plumbing Basics for Contractors (37%).
    HVAC
    General 30 · Load calcs 6 · Code 4 · Controls 10 · Ducting & insulation 10 · Piping 6 · Safety 4 · Equipment 10.
    Books: International Mechanical Code 2021 (70%), HVAC Basics for Contractors (14%), SMACNA residential standards (14%).
    Business & Law
    Business org 2 · Contracts 8 · Estimating 4 · Financial 5 · Labor law 8 · Licensing 4 · Lien law 2 · Project management 6 · Risk 3 · OSHA 3 · Tax 5.
    Book: West Virginia Business and Law Study Guide for Contractors, 6th ed. (100%).
    For fitters

    84% of the Piping exam comes out of NCCER Pipefitting Levels 2 through 4. If you came up through NCCER, you've already read the test. If you came up through the union, borrow Level 3 and read it with a highlighter. The NCCER quiz in 24.12 covers the same ground.

    Test-day rules (Prov)

    • $59.95 per exam. Fail one and you can retake it as soon as there's an open seat. No waiting period.
    • Test centers in Charleston, Martinsburg, Morgantown and Wheeling, or at home on your own computer through Examroom (webcam and a steady connection required).
    • Simple 4-function calculator only. No scientific calculators, no phones. Practice your offsets with a plain calculator and a trig table.
    • Books: highlight and underline ahead of time, permanent tabs only. No sticky notes, no handwritten notes, no photocopies, no study guides.
    • Older or newer editions of a listed book are allowed, but questions are scored on the edition in the bulletin.
    • No penalty for a wrong answer. Never leave one blank.

    Plumber cards

    Plumber in training
    Working under a licensed journeyman or master.
    Journeyman
    8,000 hours of plumbing or related experience, plus an exam.
    Master
    12,000 hours, plus an exam. Can design systems and supervise.

    Question counts published for the journeyman and master exams don't agree across sources. Get the current bulletin when you apply.

    Open book doesn't mean easy. There isn't time to look everything up. The people who pass know which answers they know and can find the rest in under a minute.

    Getting the books ready

    1. Tab the chapters, not the pages. On the plumbing code: definitions, general regulations, fixtures, water heaters, water supply, sanitary drainage, indirect waste, vents, traps, storm drains. That's about ten tabs.
    2. Tab the tables you'll live in: drain slope, DFU values, horizontal and stack sizing, vent sizing, water supply fixture units, gas pipe sizing. Most exam lookups end in a table.
    3. Highlight the numbers in the sections you use most: minimums, maximums, distances. On exam day your eye should go straight to the number.
    4. Learn the index. Think like the index: "cleanout" is under C, but "trap arm length" is under trap. Practice finding ten things at random, against a clock.

    On test day: two passes

    1. First pass: answer everything you know cold. If a question needs the book, flag it and move on.
    2. Second pass: work the flagged ones with the book.
    3. Last five minutes: fill in every blank. A guess has a 1-in-4 chance. A blank has none.
    Minutes per question = minutes allowed ÷ questions
    Your paceOhio plumbing: 240 ÷ 100 = 2.4 min each
    Ohio hydronics: 150 ÷ 50 = 3.0 min each
    WV piping: 180 ÷ 50 = 3.6 min each
    WV plumbing: 180 ÷ 100 = 1.8 min each. Tight. Know most of it without the book.

    How the questions try to catch you

    • Minimum vs. maximum. Read the question twice. "What is the maximum..." catches people looking at a minimum in the table.
    • Which edition. Code questions are graded on the edition in the bulletin. On Ohio's exams, the state code beats the national one if they disagree.
    • EXCEPT and NOT. "All of the following are required EXCEPT" flips the question. Circle it on the scratch paper.
    • Units. Feet vs. inches, psi vs. feet of head, gallons vs. cubic feet. Write the units down with every number.

    Isometric questions

    Isometric analysis is 20% of Ohio's plumbing exam. They hand you a drawing and ask for fitting counts, developed length, sizes or code violations.

    • Developed length is measured along the centerline of the pipe, through the fittings: add up every run, including the verticals.
    • Count fittings by walking the pipe from one end, one fitting at a time. Make a tally by type on scratch paper.
    • On an iso, lines at 30° are horizontal runs and straight-up lines are vertical. Section 7 covers reading isos.

    The entrance test doesn't check what you know about pipe. It checks whether you can learn it: math in your head, how machines behave, and whether you can see a shape turned around. Most locals rank everyone by score and take them from the top.

    What's usually on it

    PartWhat it asksStudy
    MathFractions, decimals, percent, ratios, simple equations, area and volume, word problems. Usually no calculator.24.6, then section 18
    Number seriesFind the next number: 3, 6, 12, 24, ...24.6
    Mechanical reasoningGears, levers, pulleys, belts, water pressure and flow. Which way does it turn? Which is easier to lift?24.7
    Spatial / abstractFolding a flat pattern into a box, rotating a shape, finding the pattern in a row of figures.24.8
    ReadingA short passage, then questions answered only from the passage.24.8

    Every local runs its own

    There's no single national union test. Some examples:

    • Local 495, Cambridge, Ohio uses the Differential Aptitude Test (abstract reasoning, spatial relations and mechanical reasoning) plus the Ramsay math test.
    • Many big-city locals use a GAN battery: numerical computation, numerical reasoning, spatial, reading and mechanical, each section on its own clock.
    • Some use a short math-and-mechanical test followed by an interview.

    Call the training center and ask: what test, how many sections, is a calculator allowed, what score gets an interview, and do you give points for experience or a pre-apprenticeship? They will usually tell you.

    Getting ranked higher

    • Passing isn't the goal; ranking high is. Locals often take the top of the list. An 85 beats a 72 even though both pass.
    • Math is the biggest section and the most improvable. Thirty minutes a day of math by hand for six weeks moves scores more than anything else.
    • The interview counts. Show up early, clean, with your documents. Say why this trade, and name anyone who'll vouch for you.
    • Bring what the packet asks for: diploma or GED, transcripts (some locals want algebra), driver's license, birth certificate, DD-214 if you served. Missing paperwork can drop you from the list.
    Practice

    The apprentice quiz is 24.11. Put your phone calculator away and do it with a pencil, the same way the test will make you.

    Here's the math entrance tests use most, done by hand. The long lessons are in section 18. This is the short version to run through before a test.

    Fractions

    Add / subtract
    Change them to the same bottom number, then add or subtract the tops.
    Multiply
    Top times top, bottom times bottom. Reduce.
    Divide
    Flip the second one and multiply.
    Mixed numbers
    Turn 2-3/8 into 19/8 (2 × 8 + 3) before multiplying or dividing.
    Worked3/4 + 5/8 = 6/8 + 5/8 = 11/8 = 1-3/8
    7-1/4 − 2-5/8 = 7-2/8 − 2-5/8 = 6-10/8 − 2-5/8 = 4-5/8
    2/3 × 3/8 = 6/24 = 1/4
    3/4 ÷ 1/8 = 3/4 × 8/1 = 24/4 = 6

    Decimals and percent

    • Move the point two places: 15% = .15, and .375 = 37.5%.
    • Percent of: 15% of 240 = 10% (24) + 5% (12) = 36. Break it into 10% and 5% pieces in your head.
    • Know these fraction-to-decimal pairs cold: 1/8 = .125 · 1/4 = .25 · 3/8 = .375 · 1/2 = .5 · 5/8 = .625 · 3/4 = .75 · 7/8 = .875 · 1/3 = .333 · 2/3 = .667.

    Ratio and proportion

    Worked3 fitters hang 45 hangers a day. How many would 5 hang?
    45 ÷ 3 = 15 per fitter → 15 × 5 = 75

    Solving for x

    Do the same thing to both sides until x is alone. Undo adding and subtracting first, then multiplying and dividing.

    Worked4x − 7 = 21
    4x = 28  (add 7 to both sides)
    x = 7  (divide both sides by 4)

    Shapes

    Rectangle area
    length × width
    Circle area
    3.14 × radius × radius
    Circumference
    3.14 × diameter
    Box volume
    length × width × height
    Cylinder volume
    circle area × length
    Gallons
    cubic feet × 7.48

    Number series

    Find how each number becomes the next. Try in this order: add the same amount, multiply by the same amount, the difference growing, or two steps like "double and add one."

    Worked3, 6, 12, 24, ?  → each doubles → 48
    2, 5, 11, 23, ?  → double and add 1 → 47
    1, 4, 9, 16, ?  → 1², 2², 3², 4² → 25
    Word problems

    Write down the one thing they're asking for before you touch a number. Then check your answer against common sense: a 20-foot pipe doesn't cut into 30-foot pieces.

    Every mechanical question comes down to a handful of rules. Learn these and most of the drawings answer themselves.

    Gears

    • Meshed gears turn opposite ways. Count the gears in the chain: odd-numbered gears (1st, 3rd, 5th) turn the same way as the first; even ones turn the other way.
    • An idler gear between two gears doesn't change the speed ratio, only the direction.
    • Small drives big: slower, stronger. Speed is inversely proportional to tooth count.
    RPMdriven = RPMdriver × teethdriver ÷ teethdriven
    Worked20-tooth gear at 100 rpm drives a 40-tooth gear.
    100 × 20 ÷ 40 = 50 rpm, turning the opposite way

    Belts and chains

    • An open belt: both pulleys turn the same way. A crossed belt: opposite ways.
    • Speed works the same as gears, with diameter in place of teeth.

    Levers

    effort × effort arm = load × load arm
    Worked100 lb load 2 ft from the fulcrum. You push 4 ft from the fulcrum.
    effort × 4 = 100 × 2 → effort = 50 lb

    The longer your side of the bar, the less you push. That's why a cheater bar on a pipe wrench works, and why it breaks jaws.

    Pulleys

    • A single fixed pulley only changes direction. Pull 100 lb to lift 100 lb.
    • Count the rope parts holding up the moving block. That's the mechanical advantage. Four parts: lift 400 lb with 100 lb of pull (ignoring friction), but you pull four feet of rope for every foot it rises.

    Water

    • Pressure depends on depth, not on the shape of the tank. A skinny pipe of water 10 ft tall pushes on its bottom just as hard as a swimming pool 10 ft deep: 4.33 psi.
    • Same flow through a smaller pipe moves faster. Cut the diameter in half and the water goes 4 times as fast (area goes by the square).
    • Water finds its own level: connected tanks settle at the same height.

    Everything else

    • Ramp: a longer, gentler ramp takes less push but more distance. The work is the same.
    • Balance and tipping: a load tips when its center of gravity goes past its base. A low, wide load is harder to tip.
    • Heat: metal grows when it's heated. A hot ring slips over a shaft; a hot lid comes off a jar.
    • Springs: two springs side by side (parallel) are stiffer. End to end (series) is softer.

    These parts reward method over talent. People who score well aren't picturing it better. They're checking one detail at a time.

    Folding a flat pattern into a box

    1. Pick one face with a mark on it. Find the face that folds up opposite it. On a cross-shaped pattern, opposite faces are the ones with exactly one square between them in a straight line.
    2. Throw out every answer showing those two faces touching. Opposite faces never touch.
    3. Then check which way the marks point on the faces that do touch. Most wrong answers have one mark turned.

    You've done this already: it's the same thinking as wrapping a pattern around pipe for a miter or a saddle (section 15).

    Turned or flipped?

    A shape that's been rotated can be turned back to match. A mirror image never can. Pick one corner feature, like a notch or a dot, and follow it around. If it ends up on the wrong side, it's flipped.

    Pattern rows (abstract reasoning)

    Look for one change at a time: something turning a set amount each step, something being added or taken away, shading alternating, or two changes happening at once on different parts. Name the rule out loud before you look at the answers.

    Reading passages

    • Answer from the passage only, even if you know better from the field. The question is what the passage says.
    • Read the questions first, then the passage, so you know what you're looking for.
    • Be careful with answers that say always, never, all or only. They're usually wrong unless the passage says exactly that.

    NCCER is the national open-shop curriculum. You take a written test after every module and a hands-on check signed off by a certified instructor. Pass the full journey-level assessment and your credential goes into NCCER's national registry, where any contractor can look it up.

    How it's built

    • Core comes first: safety, construction math, hand and power tools, drawings, rigging basics and job skills. You can't earn a level credential without it.
    • Pipefitting Levels 1–4 (4th edition, 2019), taken in order.
    • Module tests: 70% or better on the written. Performance verifications are pass/fail.
    Level 1
    Orientation to the craft · Hand tools · Power tools · Oxyfuel cutting · Ladders & scaffolds · Motorized equipment
    Level 2
    Piping systems · Drawings & detail sheets · Valves · Trade math · Threaded, socket-weld and butt-weld fabrication · Underground pipe
    Levels 3–4
    Advanced trade math, rigging, hangers and supports, specialty piping, advanced fabrication, stress relieving and alignment, testing

    The Industrial Pipefitter assessment

    This is the journey-level written test. Contractors use it to check an experienced hand's knowledge, and it's how someone who learned on the job gets a national credential without doing all four levels in a classroom.

    Questions
    125
    Time
    3 hours, closed book
    Pass
    75%
    Allowed
    A non-programmable calculator (basic, scientific or pipe-specific) and The Pipefitters Blue Book by W.V. Graves. Nothing else.
    AreaQuestions
    Fabrication20
    Safety15
    Math15
    Pipefitting fundamentals15
    Pipefitting specialties15
    Valves, hangers & supports14
    Construction drawings13
    Cutting10
    Rigging8

    NCCER specification PFT08_03, updated November 2024. A hands-on performance verification is offered separately.

    Where to study in this book

    Fabrication and math, the biggest blocks: sections 1, 8, 15 and 18. Rigging: 9. Valves and supports: 9 and 10. Drawings: 7. Safety: 12. The Blue Book is the only reference you get in the room, so practice finding take-outs and offset constants in it until it's fast.

    Forty-five minutes a day for eight weeks beats three all-nighters. You work days. This plan fits after them.

    WeekDo this
    1Get the bulletin and the books. Take your practice quiz cold. Write down every topic you missed.
    2–3Your weakest area first. For apprentices that's usually fractions and word problems; for license tests, the biggest block on the outline (DWV, isos, fabrication).
    4–5The next two areas. License tests: tab and highlight your books as you go, so the studying and the prep are the same work.
    6Everything else on the outline. Retake every quiz. Anything under 85% goes back on the list.
    7Timed mixed tests (24.16). License tests: find 20 random things in the code book against a clock.
    8Only the missed-question lists. Light the last two days. Sleep the night before; it's worth more than one more hour of study.

    Every session

    1. 10 minutes: redo yesterday's misses.
    2. 25 minutes: new material. Work the examples with a pencil; don't just read them.
    3. 10 minutes: a quiz on today's topic.
    Test day

    Arrive 30 minutes early with your photo ID (the name has to match your registration exactly) and your books. Leave the phone in the truck. Late usually means you lose the seat and the fee.

    Math, mechanical reasoning and reading, the way entrance tests ask them. No calculator. Keep a pencil and scratch paper handy.

    Fabrication, math, rigging, valves and safety, the ground the NCCER assessment and West Virginia's Piping exam cover. You can use a calculator on this one.

    DWV, water supply, testing and backflow, based on the International Plumbing Code that Ohio and West Virginia both build on. Every state amends the code, so check your answers against the edition on your bulletin.

    Boilers, heat-transfer math, pumping and air control, for the Ohio hydronics and HVAC exams.

    Both states make every contractor pass Business & Law. These questions follow federal rules (OSHA, IRS, I-9), which apply everywhere. State lien and licensing law are in your state's study guide.

    Twenty-five questions drawn at random from every quiz in this section, with a 50-minute clock. No answers until the end, same as the real thing. Every run is different.

    A refrigeration system moves heat. It boils refrigerant where you want heat taken out and condenses it where you want heat dumped. Four parts do the work: compressor, condenser, metering device, evaporator.

    HIGH SIDE: hot gas and liquid CONDENSER - heat out EVAPORATOR - heat in COMP COMPRESSOR METERING DEVICE DISCHARGE LIQUID LINE SUCTION LOW SIDE: cold liquid-vapor mix, suction gas
    The basic loop. Copper = high side (compressor out to metering device). Black = low side (metering device out to compressor in).

    The four parts

    Compressor
    Pulls low-pressure vapor off the evaporator and squeezes it into hot, high-pressure gas. It is a vapor pump. Liquid coming back to it (floodback or slugging) breaks valves and scrolls.
    Condenser
    Hot gas gives up heat to outdoor air or water. It desuperheats, condenses to liquid, then subcools a little before leaving.
    Metering device
    Fixed orifice (piston, cap tube) or valve (TXV, EEV). Drops the pressure so the liquid can boil cold in the evaporator. This is the dividing line between high side and low side.
    Evaporator
    Cold liquid boils as it picks up heat from the air or load. By the outlet it should be all vapor and a few degrees superheated.

    Saturation is the key idea

    Where liquid and vapor are both present (inside the coils), pressure and temperature are locked together. Know one and the PT chart gives you the other. That is why a gauge reading tells you the boiling temperature in the evaporator and the condensing temperature in the condenser.

    • Raise the pressure and the boiling point goes up. That is how the condenser can dump heat to hot outdoor air.
    • Drop the pressure and the boiling point goes down. That is how the evaporator gets colder than the room air.
    • Vapor warmer than saturation is superheated. Liquid colder than saturation is subcooled. Those two numbers are how you judge the charge (26.4).

    Line names in the field

    Discharge line
    Compressor to condenser. Hot gas. On a split system it is usually inside the outdoor unit.
    Liquid line
    Condenser to metering device. The small line of a line set. Warm to the touch in cooling.
    Suction line
    Evaporator to compressor. The big line of a line set. Cool and sweating in cooling. Insulate it.
    Heat pumps

    A heat pump runs the same loop backward in heating. The reversing valve swaps which coil is the condenser. The indoor coil condenses and the outdoor coil evaporates. The big line carries hot gas in heating mode.

    A PT chart gives the saturation temperature for a gauge pressure. It only applies where liquid and vapor are both present: inside the evaporator and condenser, not in superheated vapor or subcooled liquid.

    How to read it

    1. Confirm the refrigerant from the unit data plate. Never go by the color of a jug or a guess.
    2. Read the gauge in psig. Most charts are psig at sea level. Readings below 0 psig are vacuum, shown in inches of mercury ("Hg).
    3. Find the pressure in the refrigerant's column and read the temperature on that row. Digital manifolds do this for you if you set the right refrigerant.
    4. For a blend with glide, pick the right column: dew for the suction side, bubble for the liquid side.

    Dew, bubble and glide

    Single component
    R-22, R-32, R-134a. One temperature for each pressure.
    Near-azeotropic blend
    R-410A, R-404A. Glide is small. R-410A is normally printed as one column.
    Zeotropic blend (glide)
    R-454B, R-407C and others. At the same pressure the blend starts to boil (bubble point) cooler than it finishes boiling (dew point). The difference is the glide.
    Dew point
    Temperature where the last drop of liquid boils off (100% vapor). Use it for superheat.
    Bubble point
    Temperature where the first bubble forms (100% liquid). Use it for subcooling.

    Why: superheat is measured on vapor leaving the evaporator, so compare it to where the refrigerant just finished boiling (dew). Subcooling is measured on liquid leaving the condenser, so compare it to where it just finished condensing (bubble).

    Worked — same temperature, two pressuresR-454B at 40°F on the table in 26.3:
    Dew = 107.0 psig. Bubble = 112.0 psig.
    Use the wrong column and your superheat or subcooling is off by a couple of degrees. Suction side: dew. Liquid side: bubble.
    Chart limits

    Charts are for sea-level atmosphere. At high elevation a gauge reads lower for the same absolute pressure; use an elevation-corrected chart or a gauge that corrects. Also check the chart edition from the refrigerant or equipment manufacturer when numbers matter.

    Gauge check

    With a system off and fully equalized in steady weather, the pressure should match the PT value for the ambient temperature. A reading well above that points to non-condensables or the wrong refrigerant.

    Saturation pressure in psig at sea level, -20°F to 130°F. Vacuum shown in inches of mercury ("Hg). R-454B shows dew (use for superheat) and bubble (use for subcooling). R-404A column is dew.

    °FR-22R-410AR-32R-454B dewR-454B bubbleR-134aR-404A
    -2010.226.426.822.624.33.7"Hg16.3
    -1513.231.331.727.028.90.1"Hg19.9
    -1016.536.537.131.833.91.923.9
    -520.142.242.937.039.44.128.2
    024.048.449.342.745.36.532.8
    528.355.156.148.851.79.137.9
    1032.862.463.555.458.511.943.3
    1537.870.271.562.666.015.049.2
    2043.178.580.070.373.918.455.5
    2548.887.589.278.582.522.162.2
    3055.097.299.187.491.726.169.5
    3561.5107.5109.796.9101.530.477.2
    4068.6118.5121.0107.0112.035.185.5
    4576.1130.2133.0117.8123.140.194.3
    5084.1142.7145.8129.3135.045.5103.7
    5592.6156.0159.5141.6147.751.3113.7
    60101.6170.1174.1154.6161.157.5124.3
    65111.3185.1189.5168.5175.464.1135.6
    70121.4201.0205.8183.1190.571.2147.5
    75132.2217.8223.2198.7206.578.8160.2
    80143.6235.6241.5215.2223.486.8173.5
    85155.7254.4260.9232.6241.295.4187.6
    90168.4274.3281.3251.0260.0104.4202.5
    95181.8295.3302.9270.4279.9114.1218.2
    100195.9317.3325.7290.9300.8124.3234.7
    105210.8340.6349.6312.5322.8135.1252.1
    110226.4365.1374.9335.2345.9146.5270.3
    115242.8390.9401.4359.1370.2158.6289.5
    120260.0418.0429.3384.3395.7171.3309.7
    125278.0446.5458.7410.8422.4184.7330.8
    130296.9476.5489.5438.7450.5198.9353.0

    R-454B: Chemours Opteon™ XL41 thermodynamic property tables (ENG), psia minus 14.696. R-134a: Chemours Freon™ 134a ENG tables. R-404A: Chemours Freon™ 404A ENG tables, saturated vapor (dew) column. R-410A: National Refrigerants R-410A reference guide table. R-22 and R-32: REFPROP-type equation-of-state values (CoolProp), matched to the Daikin/Goodman A2L PT chart (PM-A2LPTC, 2024) within 0.1 psi at every shared row. Spot checks against Honeywell R-454B and R-404A charts agree within about 0.3 psi. Sea level; round-off can differ by 0.1–0.5 psi between manufacturers.

    Using it

    • 40°F row is highlighted: a common evaporator saturation temperature in comfort cooling.
    • For odd readings, use your digital manifold or the manufacturer's 1°F chart rather than guessing between rows.
    • R-410A and R-32 run far higher than R-22 at the same temperature. Gauges, hoses and recovery cylinders must be rated for them.
    • R-404A column is dew. For subcooling on R-404A use its bubble (liquid) values from the manufacturer's chart.

    Superheat and subcooling math with these numbers, and a calculator that reads this table for you: 26.4.

    Superheat tells you how much refrigerant the evaporator has. Subcooling tells you how much liquid is stacked in the condenser. Together they show charge, metering and airflow problems.

    SUPERHEAT = SUCTION LINE TEMP − SATURATION (DEW) TEMP AT SUCTION PRESSURE
    SUBCOOLING = SATURATION (BUBBLE) TEMP AT LIQUID PRESSURE − LIQUID LINE TEMP
    Saturation (dew)
    —
    Superheat
    —

    Uses the PT table in 26.3, read between its 5°F rows. Compare the answer with the manufacturer's target, not a rule of thumb.

    How to measure

    1. Run the system at least 10–15 minutes, or what the manufacturer says, with doors and panels closed and a clean filter.
    2. Superheat: read suction pressure at the service valve. Clamp a pipe thermometer on clean bare suction line within about 6 in. of the valve. Insulate over the clamp.
    3. Subcooling: read liquid pressure at the liquid service valve. Clamp on the liquid line next to it.
    4. Convert each pressure to saturation temperature (dew for suction, bubble for liquid). Do the math.
    5. Compare with the target from the manufacturer, not a rule of thumb.

    Which one sets the charge

    Fixed orifice (piston, cap tube)
    Charge by superheat. The target changes with indoor wet bulb and outdoor dry bulb; read it from the manufacturer's superheat chart.
    TXV or EEV
    The valve holds superheat roughly steady, so superheat doesn't tell you the charge. Charge by subcooling to the target on the data plate or in the install manual.
    Worked — R-410A superheatSuction pressure 118.5 psig → 40°F saturation (26.3).
    Suction line temp 51°F.
    Superheat = 51 − 40 = 11°F
    Worked — R-454B subcooling (bubble)Liquid pressure 300.8 psig → 100°F bubble.
    Liquid line temp 91°F.
    Subcooling = 100 − 91 = 9°F
    Worked — R-454B superheat (dew)Suction pressure 107.0 psig → 40°F dew.
    Suction line temp 50°F.
    Superheat = 50 − 40 = 10°F. Using the bubble column here would give the wrong answer.

    What high and low values point to

    • High superheat: starved evaporator. Undercharge, restriction, metering device underfeeding.
    • Low superheat: flooded evaporator. Overcharge (fixed orifice), low indoor airflow, TXV overfeeding. Risk of liquid back to the compressor.
    • High subcooling: liquid stacked in the condenser. Overcharge or restriction after the condenser.
    • Low subcooling: not enough liquid in the condenser. Undercharge or flash gas.

    Full symptom chart: 26.12.

    Don't chase the charge

    Check airflow, filter and coils first (26.10). A dirty filter or slow blower makes superheat look like an overcharge. Adding or pulling refrigerant to fix an airflow problem makes a second problem.

    Refrigerant piping has to stay clean, dry and tight, and it has to bring oil back to the compressor. Most failures on new installs come from scale, moisture or poor oil return.

    ACR tube

    • ACR copper is cleaned, dried and capped or charged with nitrogen at the mill. Keep the caps on until you make the joint.
    • ACR is sized by actual outside diameter. A 7/8 ACR tube is 7/8 in. OD. Plumbing (nominal) sizes are 1/8 in. smaller than OD.
    • Cut with a tube cutter, ream the burr, keep chips out. Never use a hacksaw on refrigerant lines.

    General copper joint prep and brazing technique: section 3.

    Flow nitrogen while brazing

    Heat plus oxygen makes black copper oxide scale inside the tube. It flakes off and plugs screens, metering devices and oil passages. A low flow of dry nitrogen pushes the air out and prevents it.

    1. Purge the line with nitrogen first to push out the air.
    2. Turn the flow down to a whisper before you heat. Common trade guidance is about 2–5 SCFH through a flowmeter.
    3. Leave an open path for the nitrogen to escape. Don't pressurize the pipe while brazing; pressure blows out the molten alloy.
    4. Keep flowing until the joint cools below the point where it discolors.

    Filler metal

    Copper to copper
    Phos-copper (BCuP) alloys, often 15% silver (BCuP-5). No flux needed on copper-to-copper.
    Copper to brass or bronze
    Needs flux with BCuP, or use a silver brazing (BAg) alloy with flux.
    Copper to steel
    Use a silver (BAg) alloy with flux. Never phos-copper on steel; the phosphorus makes a brittle joint.

    Wrap valve bodies with a wet rag or heat-block paste and point the flame away. Service valves and TXVs have seals that heat ruins. Remove Schrader cores before brazing near them.

    Line set sizing and oil return

    • Size line sets from the manufacturer's piping tables for that model, length and lift. Too big a suction line won't carry oil. Too small loses capacity.
    • Long lines and big lifts often need a different line size, a charge adjustment, or accessories. The install manual sets the limits.
    • Slope horizontal suction lines toward the compressor so oil drains the right way.
    • Suction risers need enough velocity to lift oil. Manufacturers may call for a trap at the bottom of a riser or a smaller riser size; follow their detail.
    • Insulate the full suction line (and liquid line on heat pumps where the manufacturer calls for it). Sweating wastes capacity and drips.
    No torch on a charged system

    Recover the refrigerant before brazing on a system. Heating a line with refrigerant and oil in it can make toxic gases, and with A2L refrigerants it is a fire hazard. See 26.9.

    Prove the piping is tight with dry nitrogen before you evacuate or charge. Finding a leak now is far cheaper than a callback.

    Nitrogen only

    Never use oxygen to pressure test. Oxygen and compressor oil can explode. Don't use compressed air either; it adds moisture and oxygen. Always use a regulator on the nitrogen bottle; a full cylinder is over 2,000 psi. See 12.1.

    Test pressure

    • Use the test pressure in the manufacturer's install instructions.
    • Don't exceed the lowest rated part in the circuit. On most split systems that is the low-side test pressure on the nameplate.
    • Keep the outdoor unit service valves closed if the instructions say to test only the line set and indoor coil.
    • Local mechanical code may also set a test for field piping. Check the edition your AHJ adopted.

    Standing test

    1. Pressurize slowly with the regulator. Stop partway and check for gross leaks.
    2. Bring it up to test pressure. Close the bottle, then disconnect or valve it off so the bottle can't hold the pressure up.
    3. Note pressure and air temperature. Hold for the time the manufacturer or spec requires.
    4. Pressure changes with temperature. A line in the sun will climb; a drop at steady temperature means a leak.

    Finding the leak

    Bubble solution
    Brush or spray on joints, flares and valve cores. Watch for foam or growing bubbles. Cheap and precise.
    Electronic detector
    Heated diode, infrared or other sensor types sniff refrigerant. Needs refrigerant in the system (a small trace charge with nitrogen, if allowed, or the operating charge). Check it's rated for the refrigerant.
    Ultrasonic
    Hears gas escaping under pressure. Works with nitrogen alone.

    Usual suspects: flare nuts, Schrader cores and caps, brazed joints at the coil, service valve packing, vibration rub points.

    Release test nitrogen outdoors. Pressure testing in general: section 11.

    Evacuation pulls out air and moisture. Moisture mixes with POE oil to make acid; air raises head pressure. A micron gauge is the only way to know it's done.

    Set up for speed

    • Use core removal tools and pull the Schrader cores. The cores are the biggest restriction.
    • Use short, large-diameter vacuum hoses (3/8 in. or 1/2 in. are common) rather than standard charging hoses.
    • Put the micron gauge at the system, away from the pump, so you read the system, not the hose.
    • Change the vacuum pump oil often. Wet, dirty oil can't pull a deep vacuum.

    Target and decay test

    Most equipment manufacturers and common industry practice call for pulling down to 500 microns or lower, then a decay test. The install manual governs.

    1. Pull down below the target.
    2. Valve off the pump from the system (core tool valves or a ball valve).
    3. Watch the micron gauge for at least 10 minutes or the time the manufacturer gives.
    4. Read the result below.
    Rises, then levels off
    Some moisture still boiling off. Keep pulling, then test again.
    Keeps climbing toward atmosphere
    Leak. Go back to the nitrogen test (26.6).
    Stays under the manufacturer's limit
    Dry and tight. Release refrigerant into the system while still under vacuum.
    Triple evacuation

    On a wet system, pull a vacuum, break it with dry nitrogen to a few psig, then pull down again, two or three times. The dry nitrogen picks up moisture and carries it out.

    Never run the compressor in a vacuum

    Running a compressor in deep vacuum can damage the motor windings and terminals. Don't use it to pull a system down.

    Weigh the charge in first, then fine-tune with superheat or subcooling at the conditions the manufacturer says.

    By weight

    1. Read the factory charge on the data plate and the line length it covers in the install manual.
    2. Add or subtract for your actual line set per the manual's rate (usually given as ounces per foot of liquid line).
    3. On a new install with a pre-charged outdoor unit, you weigh in only the line-set adjustment.
    4. On an empty system, weigh the full charge in with a refrigerant scale. Break the vacuum with refrigerant.

    By superheat or subcooling

    • Fixed orifice: superheat, with the target from the manufacturer's chart (indoor wet bulb, outdoor dry bulb).
    • TXV or EEV: subcooling, to the data plate or manual target.
    • Let the system settle after each adjustment before you read again.
    • Outdoor temperature too low? Many manufacturers require weigh-in only below a certain outdoor temperature. Follow the manual.

    Math and worked examples: 26.4.

    Blends: charge as liquid

    Zeotropic and near-azeotropic blends (400 series, like R-410A, R-404A, R-454B) must leave the cylinder as liquid. Vapor off the top has a different mix than what is in the jug.

    • Check the cylinder: some have a dip tube for liquid upright, others must be turned over. Read the label.
    • Meter liquid into the suction side slowly (throttle through the manifold or a charging valve) so liquid doesn't slug the compressor.
    • Single-component refrigerants (R-22, R-32, R-134a) can be charged as vapor.
    A2L charging

    Use gauges, hoses, scale and recovery gear rated for A2L. Keep ignition sources away, keep the work area ventilated, and never exceed the charge the manufacturer allows. A2L cylinders have left-hand threads; don't force an adapter that doesn't fit. See 26.9.

    R-454B and R-32 are the new residential and light commercial AC refrigerants. They are A2L: lower toxicity, lower flammability. They burn if conditions are right, so handling practice changes.

    What A2L means

    A
    Lower toxicity (ASHRAE 34 safety group).
    1
    No flame propagation (R-22, R-410A, R-134a, R-404A).
    2L
    Lower flammability with a slow burning velocity (10 cm/s or less). Hard to ignite, but it can burn in the right mix with an ignition source.
    2 and 3
    Flammable and highly flammable (propane R-290 is A3).

    Why equipment changed

    • The AIM Act (2020) directs EPA to phase down HFCs. EPA's Technology Transitions rule (2023) sets a GWP limit of 700 for new residential and light commercial AC and heat pump systems.
    • R-410A (GWP about 2,090) is over the limit. R-454B (about 470) and R-32 (about 675) are under it.
    • Systems manufactured or imported from January 1, 2025 must meet the limit. EPA's May 2026 rule removed the January 1, 2026 installation deadline for R-410A systems built or imported before 2025, so that inventory can still be installed.
    • These rules are still changing. Check EPA's Technology Transitions pages before you rely on a date.

    What's different on the job

    • Only in equipment designed for it. Never put an A2L into an R-22 or R-410A system.
    • Equipment is built to UL 60335-2-40. Many indoor units carry a refrigerant leak detection sensor that runs the blower and shuts off the compressor if it senses a leak. Don't disable or bypass it; wire and test it per the manual.
    • Service ports are marked red, with flammable-refrigerant warning labels.
    • Cylinders are gray with a red band. Their valves have left-hand threads. Recovery cylinders for flammable refrigerant also use left-hand threaded outlets and must be rated and labeled for the gas.
    • Use recovery machines, vacuum pumps and leak detectors rated for A2L by their maker.
    • No open flame, sparks or smoking near an opened system. Ventilate. Check the space with a leak detector before you start work.
    • Recover the charge and purge with nitrogen before any brazing. Leave the circuit open so it doesn't hold pressure.
    • Charge limits depend on room size and installation height. Follow the manual's minimum room area tables.
    Training

    Handling A2Ls safely takes more than this page. Get manufacturer or union A2L training before you work on these systems, and follow the install manual line by line.

    Most "refrigerant problems" start on the air side. Check airflow before you touch the charge.

    Tons and BTU

    1 TON = 12,000 BTU/h

    A 3-ton unit is 36,000 BTU/h nominal. Model numbers often show it in thousands: a "036" is usually 3 tons. Confirm on the data plate.

    Airflow per ton

    • Most comfort cooling runs roughly 350–450 CFM per ton; 400 is the usual starting point.
    • Lower airflow removes more moisture but drops coil temperature (freeze risk). Higher airflow adds capacity but removes less moisture.
    • Set blower speed from the manufacturer's blower table and the external static you measure.

    Temperature split (delta T)

    Return air temp minus supply air temp. Many techs use about 18–22°F as a rough guide, but it is not a target. High indoor humidity pulls the split down because the coil is removing moisture instead. Use it as one clue, together with superheat, subcooling and static pressure.

    Static pressure

    • Measure total external static with a manometer: return side before the blower, supply side after the coil. Add the two readings (ignore the signs).
    • Compare with the maximum on the equipment data or blower table. High static means restricted duct, dirty filter or dirty coil, and low airflow.
    • Measuring pressure drop across the filter and coil shows which one is loading up.

    Quick air-side checklist

    • Filter clean and the right size, arrow toward the blower.
    • Evaporator coil and blower wheel clean.
    • Condenser coil clean, fan running, no recirculation of hot air.
    • Registers open, return not blocked, duct not crushed.

    To open a system under Section 608 of the Clean Air Act you need EPA Section 608 certification. Venting refrigerant on purpose is illegal.

    Certification types

    TypeCovers
    CoreRequired with every type. Rules, ozone and climate, recovery, safety, shipping.
    Type ISmall appliances (factory-sealed, like refrigerators, window units, dehumidifiers).
    Type IIHigh- and very-high-pressure appliances, except small appliances and MVAC. Most split systems, rooftops and commercial refrigeration.
    Type IIILow-pressure appliances, like low-pressure centrifugal chillers.
    UniversalCore plus Types I, II and III.

    EPA, Section 608 Technician Certification Requirements; 40 CFR 82.161 and Appendix D to Subpart F. Car AC (MVAC) is under Section 609, a separate certification.

    The test

    • At least 25 questions from Core and 25 from each type.
    • Type II, Type III and Universal are closed-book and proctored. Passing score is 70%.
    • Type I may be taken in a mail-in (open-book) format; passing score then is 84%. An open-book Core can't be used toward Universal.
    • Certification does not expire. Keep a copy of your certificate at your place of business.
    • Apprentices are exempt only while closely and continually supervised by a certified tech.

    Service rules

    • No intentional venting of refrigerant. De minimis releases during good-faith recovery (like hose connections) are not a violation.
    • Recover to the evacuation level EPA sets for that appliance, using certified recovery equipment.
    • Refrigerant sales are restricted to certified technicians.
    • Leak repair (ODS appliances 50 lb and up): repair within 30 days once the annual leak rate passes 10% comfort cooling, 20% commercial refrigeration, 30% industrial process.

    Newer HFC rules (AIM Act)

    • EPA's Emissions Reduction and Reclamation rule (October 2024) extends leak repair to appliances with 15 lb or more of HFC or certain HFC substitutes with GWP above 53, starting January 1, 2026. Residential and light commercial AC and heat pumps are excluded from that leak repair.
    • It also adds automatic leak detection for very large systems, a reclaimed-refrigerant servicing requirement for some sectors from 2029, and recovery of the heel from disposable cylinders.
    • Technology Transitions sets GWP limits for new equipment (26.9).
    Rules keep moving

    EPA amended both HFC rules in 2025–2026 and more changes are proposed. States (California and others) can be stricter. Check epa.gov/section608 and epa.gov/hfcs before relying on a date.

    Common patterns of pressures, superheat and subcooling. Use them as a starting point, then prove the cause. More than one fault can show at once.

    Likely causeSuctionHeadSHSCCheck next
    UnderchargeLowLowHighLowLeak search before adding refrigerant.
    OverchargeHighHighLowHighRecover down to the correct charge; confirm airflow first.
    Liquid line or metering restrictionLowNormal to lowHighHighTemperature drop across the filter drier or a kinked line; stuck or plugged metering device.
    Low indoor airflowLowLow to normalLow (fixed orifice)Normal to highFilter, blower speed, dirty evaporator, iced coil, static pressure.
    Poor condenser airflowHighHighNormal to lowVariesDirty coil, dead fan or capacitor, recirculating hot air.
    TXV overfeedingHighNormalLowLow to normalSensing bulb loose or uninsulated; valve stuck open.
    Inefficient compressorHighLowHighLowAmp draw well below rated; confirm charge and metering first.
    Non-condensables (air)Normal to highHighVariesVariesStanding pressure above PT value for ambient; recover, evacuate, weigh in.

    Standard trade diagnostic patterns. "High" and "low" mean compared with the manufacturer's expected values at the current indoor and outdoor conditions.

    • Check the easy things first: power, thermostat, filter, coils, fans.
    • Take readings after the system has run long enough to settle.
    • Frost on the suction line or an iced evaporator usually means low airflow or low charge, not "too much cold".

    Test yourself on the refrigeration cycle, PT charts, superheat and subcooling, piping, evacuation, A2Ls and EPA 608.

    A sprinkler system is a grid or tree of pipe full of water (or air) with heat-operated heads. Know which type you are on before you open a valve or cut a pipe.

    Each head opens on its own

    A standard head has a glass bulb or fusible link holding a cap over the orifice. Heat breaks the bulb or melts the link. Only the heads over the fire open. The rest stay shut.

    That is why a leaky head or a bumped head floods one spot, not the whole building. It is also why a busted head on a wet system flows until someone shuts the control valve.

    The four main types

    TypePipe holdsHow it tripsWhere you see it
    Wet pipeWater under pressureHead fuses, water flows at onceHeated buildings. Most common and simplest.
    Dry pipeAir or nitrogen under pressureHead fuses, air bleeds off, dry valve opens, water fills pipeUnheated areas: parking decks, loading docks, attics, freezers.
    PreactionAir (often supervised)Detection system opens the valve first; heads still must fuseData rooms, museums, freezers: places where accidental water is costly.
    DelugeNothing; heads are openDetection opens the valve; every head flowsHigh-hazard spaces: aircraft hangars, some chemical and power plant areas.

    NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. The 2022 edition is widely adopted; a 2025 edition is out. The edition your AHJ adopted, plus local amendments, is the one that governs.

    13, 13R, 13D

    NFPA 13
    Full commercial standard. Property and life protection. Everything in this section is based on 13 unless noted.
    NFPA 13R
    Low-rise residential (apartments, dorms). Life-safety focused. Lets some spaces go unsprinklered. The building code sets the height limit.
    NFPA 13D
    One- and two-family dwellings and manufactured homes. Simplest rules. Often run in CPVC or PEX by plumbers or fitters.
    Dry and preaction pipe is not empty

    A dry system holds compressed air or nitrogen. A tripped dry system is full of water. Before you break a joint, confirm the valve is shut, the system is drained, and the air is bled to zero on the gauge.

    Impairments

    Shutting a control valve takes the building's protection out. Follow the owner's impairment procedure: notify the owner, the monitoring company and usually the fire department. Put it back in service the same day if you can.

    The riser is where the water supply enters the system. Every riser has the same jobs: shut off, stop backflow, signal flow, drain, and let the fire department pump in.

    TO CROSS MAIN & HEADS INSPECTOR'S TEST (REMOTE END) FLOW SWITCH CHECK FDC MAIN DRAIN TO OUTSIDE SYSTEM GAUGE ALARM CHECK VALVE (WET) SUPPLY GAUGE CONTROL VALVE + TAMPER SWITCH FROM UNDERGROUND
    Typical wet riser, supply at the bottom. Trim layout varies by valve maker: follow the valve's data sheet.

    What each part does

    Control valve
    Indicating valve (OS&Y gate, butterfly, or PIV outside). Must show open or shut at a glance. Keep it open, and supervised, locked, or sealed.
    Tamper switch
    Supervisory switch on the control valve. Sends a trouble signal when the valve is moved off full open.
    Alarm check valve
    Check valve with an alarm port. Stops water flowing back to the supply. On a wet riser it can also drive a water motor gong or pressure switch.
    Flow switch
    Vane in the pipe. Water movement pushes the vane and sends the waterflow alarm. Has a built-in delay (retard) so pressure surges do not false alarm.
    Gauges
    Supply gauge below the clapper, system gauge above. The system reading is usually higher, because the check traps surge pressure.
    Main drain
    Drains the system and is used for the main drain test (see 27.11). Pipe it to a place that can take full flow.
    FDC
    Fire department connection. Lets the pumper boost the system. Ties in on the system side of the riser check or alarm valve, through its own check valve. No shutoff valve in the FDC line.
    Inspector's test
    Valve and orifice at the far end of the system that flows like one head. Used to prove the waterflow alarm works.

    Main drain size

    Riser or main sizeMain drain size
    Up to 2 in3/4 in or larger
    2-1/2 in to 3-1/2 in1-1/4 in or larger
    4 in and larger2 in

    NFPA 13 (2022) Table 16.10.4.2. Auxiliary drains for trapped sections: see 16.10.5.

    Trapped sections

    Wet pipe does not need pitch, but every trapped low spot still needs a way to drain. On a wet system: over 50 gal trapped, a 1 in valve; 5 to 50 gal, a 3/4 in valve; under 5 gal, a 1/2 in plugged nipple. On dry pipe in cold areas, a trapped section of 5 gal or more gets a drum drip: two 1 in valves with a 2 in × 12 in condensate nipple between them.

    The hazard class drives everything: head spacing, pipe size, water density. The engineer picks it. You need to know it so you can spot a head layout that does not match the room.

    ClassWhat it meansTypical examples
    Light (LH)Low amount and low combustibility of contents. Low heat release.Offices, churches, schools, hospitals, hotel rooms, museums, restaurant seating
    Ordinary Group 1 (OH1)Low combustibility, moderate amount. Stockpiles not over 8 ft.Parking garages, laundries, electronics plants, restaurant kitchens, canneries
    Ordinary Group 2 (OH2)Moderate to high amount. Stockpiles up to 12 ft (8 ft for high heat release goods).Machine shops, retail stores, repair garages, stages, dry cleaners, library stack rooms, printing
    Extra Group 1 (EH1)Very high fire load, dust or lint. Little or no flammable liquid.Sawmills, die casting, rubber reclaiming, upholstering with plastic foam
    Extra Group 2 (EH2)Moderate to large amounts of flammable or combustible liquids.Flammable liquid spraying, solvent cleaning, paint dipping, plastics processing
    StorageGoods stored high: racks, palletized, solid piles.Warehouses. Design depends on commodity class, height and storage method.

    NFPA 13 Chapter 4 (hazard definitions) and Annex A examples. Examples are guides only; the designer classifies each space.

    Density and area, in one line

    A hydraulic design says: deliver so many gpm per square foot over the most remote design area. Common starting points: light hazard 0.10 gpm/ft², OH1 0.15, OH2 0.20, each over 1,500 ft². The designer may use other points on the curve.

    Use changes, system doesn't

    An office turned into a warehouse is no longer light hazard. If you see racks, tall stock or flammables under a light hazard layout, tell your foreman. That is how systems get overrun.

    The head is the only part of the system that fights fire. Right type, right K-factor, right temperature, right orientation. Every head has a model and a SIN stamped on it; match it to the submittal.

    Orientation

    Upright
    Sits on top of the pipe, deflector up. Exposed pipe in warehouses and mechanical rooms. Never install upside down.
    Pendent
    Hangs below the pipe, through the ceiling. Recessed and concealed versions sit flush with a cover plate.
    Sidewall
    Mounted on the wall, throws water out into the room. Hotel rooms, corridors, small rooms.
    Dry pendent / dry sidewall
    Sealed barrel keeps water back in the heated space. Used to reach into freezers or through unheated soffits. Barrel length is ordered to fit; measure carefully.

    Head families

    Standard spray
    The everyday head. Spacing from the tables on 27.5.
    Extended coverage (EC)
    Covers more area per head. Spacing comes from its listing and data sheet, not the standard tables.
    ESFR
    Early suppression fast response. Big K-factor, fast bulb, knocks down warehouse fires. Very strict rules on obstructions and deflector distance. Follow the data sheet to the letter.
    Residential
    Listed for dwelling units. Fast response, sprays high on the walls.

    K-factor

    Q = K × √P    (Q in gpm, P in psi)

    K is stamped on the head. K5.6 is the common 1/2 in standard head. Bigger K means more water at the same pressure. NFPA 13 requires at least 7 psi at any operating sprinkler.

    Worked — flow from one headK5.6 head at 7 psi
    Q = 5.6 × √7 = 5.6 × 2.65
    Q = 14.8 gpm

    Response

    Response speed is set by the bulb or link's RTI (response time index). Quick response (QR): RTI 50 (m·s)1/2 or less, usually a thin 3 mm bulb. Standard response (SR): RTI 80 or more, usually a 5 mm bulb. Light hazard systems generally require QR heads.

    Temperature ratings

    ClassRating °FMax ceiling °FBulb colorFrame color
    Ordinary135–170100Orange or redUncolored or black
    Intermediate175–225150Yellow or greenWhite
    High250–300225BlueBlue
    Extra high325–375300PurpleRed
    Very extra high400–475375BlackGreen
    Ultra high500–575475BlackOrange
    Ultra high650625BlackOrange

    NFPA 13 (2022) Table 7.2.4.1. Common bulbs: 135 orange, 155 red, 175 yellow, 200 green, 286 blue (per manufacturer data sheets).

    Spare heads

    Heads in the systemSpares required (minimum)
    Fewer than 3006
    300 to 1,00012
    Over 1,00024

    NFPA 13 (2022) 16.2.7. Spares must match the types and temperature ratings installed. Keep them in a cabinet with a wrench for each type and a posted list of the heads in the building. Cabinet must stay below the max ceiling temperature for the heads in it.

    Handle heads like glass

    Never install a head with a cracked bulb, a lost drop of fluid, or a bent frame. Tighten only with the manufacturer's head wrench, on the wrench bosses, never on the frame or deflector. Never paint, tape or overspray a head; replace it.

    For standard spray upright and pendent heads, three numbers rule the layout: max area per head, max distance between heads, and max distance to the wall.

    A = S × L L ≤ S/2 S ≤ 15 ft (LH, OH) PLAN VIEW — BRANCH LINES L APART
    Heads S apart on the line, lines L apart. Each head covers S × L. Wall distance max S/2, min 4 in.

    Max area and spacing, standard spray upright and pendent

    HazardConditionMax area per headMax spacing
    LightHydraulically calculated225 ft²15 ft
    LightPipe schedule200 ft²15 ft
    LightSome combustible construction168 or 130 ft²15 ft
    OrdinaryAll130 ft²15 ft
    ExtraPipe schedule90 ft²12 ft
    ExtraHydraulic, density ≥ 0.25100 ft²12 ft
    ExtraHydraulic, density < 0.25130 ft²15 ft

    NFPA 13 (2022) Tables 10.2.4.2.1(a) light, (b) ordinary, (c) extra hazard. The light hazard table has more rows for exposed wood members and combustible concealed spaces: read the table for those. Sidewall, EC, ESFR and residential heads have their own rules.

    Distances that apply to all standard spray heads

    To the wall, max
    Half the allowed head-to-head distance. 15 ft spacing = 7 ft 6 in to the wall.
    To the wall, min
    4 in.
    Between heads, min
    6 ft center to center, so a fused head does not wet and cool the next one (cold soldering). Baffles allow less.
    Deflector below ceiling
    Smooth, unobstructed ceiling: 1 in min, 12 in max. Obstructed construction has its own rules.

    NFPA 13 (2022) 10.2.5.2 (wall max), 10.2.5.3 (wall min), 10.2.5.4 (min between heads), 10.2.6.1 (deflector).

    Worked — check a layoutOffice (light, hydraulic). Lines 14 ft apart, heads 15 ft on the line.
    Area = 14 × 15 = 210 ft² ≤ 225. Spacing 15 ft ≤ 15.
    Room wall 8 ft from last head: over 7 ft 6 in. Fails — move the head or add one.
    When measuring for S and L

    For end heads, use the larger of the distance to the next head or twice the distance to the wall. That is how the coverage area is figured on the plans.

    A head that can't throw water where the fire is does nothing. Obstructions are the most common thing an inspector writes up in the field.

    The three-times rule

    For standard spray upright and pendent heads, keep the head away from a narrow obstruction (column, pipe, light, truss web) by at least three times the obstruction's biggest dimension. The clear distance never has to be more than 24 in.

    Worked — 3× rule6 in duct riser next to a pendent head
    3 × 6 in = 18 in
    Keep the head at least 18 in from the duct

    Wide obstructions

    Ducts, platforms or decks wider than 4 ft need heads under them. The water from above cannot get past.

    Beam rule, in concept

    When a beam or duct is near the head at or above the deflector, the closer the head is to it, the higher the deflector must sit above the bottom of the obstruction. NFPA 13 has a table for it. Check it before you set drops next to beams or ducts.

    Clearance below the deflector

    Keep at least 18 in clear below standard spray deflectors to the top of stored goods. Storage and ESFR designs often need more; check the plans.

    NFPA 13 (2022) Chapter 10, standard pendent and upright spray sprinklers, obstruction rules (10.2.7). Rules differ for sidewall, EC, ESFR and CMSA heads.

    Other trades move in after you

    Ducts, lights and cable tray often land after the sprinkler rough-in. Walk the space before the ceiling closes. A new obstruction is cheaper to fix now than after the tile is in.

    Sprinkler pipe must hold its own weight full of water, stay put when a head discharges, and in seismic areas, ride out an earthquake. Hangers carry weight. Braces and restraints stop movement.

    Max distance between hangers (ft-in)

    Pipe3/411-1/41-1/222-1/233-1/2–8
    Steel (not threaded lightwall)NA12-012-015-015-015-015-015-0
    Threaded lightwall steelNA12-012-012-012-012-012-0NA
    Copper tube8-08-010-010-012-012-012-015-0
    CPVC5-66-06-67-08-09-010-0NA
    Ductile ironNANANANANANA15-015-0 (4, 6, 8)

    NFPA 13 (2022) Table 17.4.2.1(a). CPVC values match the BlazeMaster installation manual for water-filled pipe. Follow the CPVC maker's instructions for support near heads.

    Hanger location rules

    • At least one hanger for each section of pipe (some short sections are exempt; check the code).
    • Hanger to the centerline of an upright head: 3 in minimum, so the hanger doesn't block the spray.
    • Unsupported length from the last hanger to the end head, steel: 36 in for 1 in pipe, 48 in for 1-1/4 in, 60 in for 1-1/2 in and larger. Copper: 18, 24, 30 in.
    • Unsupported armover to a head: max 24 in steel, 12 in copper. Longer armovers need their own hanger. Lower limits apply at high pressure.
    • Each hanger assembly must hold 5 times the weight of the water-filled pipe plus 250 lb at each point of support.

    NFPA 13 (2022) 17.4.3 (branch line hanger location), 17.1 (hanger strength).

    Seismic bracing basics

    Lateral brace
    Stops side-to-side movement. On mains, max 40 ft on center, and the last one within 6 ft of the end of the pipe. Load tables may require closer spacing.
    Longitudinal brace
    Stops movement along the pipe. Feed and cross mains, max 80 ft on center, and within 40 ft of the end.
    Four-way brace
    At the top of a riser, within 3 ft of the top. Max 25 ft between four-way braces on a riser.
    Restraint
    Lighter than a brace. Keeps branch lines and sprigs from swinging and punching through ceilings. Wraparound U-hooks and listed restraint straps are common.

    NFPA 13 (2019) 18.5.5 lateral, 18.5.6 longitudinal, 18.5.8 risers; same chapter in 2022. Brace spacing also depends on load calcs from the seismic design; follow the stamped bracing plan.

    No hanging from sprinkler pipe

    Never hang other trades' work, or your own lift, from sprinkler pipe. Never use the pipe as a ladder rung or a rigging point. See 25.1.

    Two ways to size pipe: the old pipe schedule (count heads, read the table) or hydraulic calculation (prove the water gets there). Almost all new commercial work is hydraulically calculated.

    Pipe schedule, max heads per pipe size

    SizeLight, steelLight, copperOrdinary, steelOrdinary, copper
    1 in2222
    1-1/4 in3333
    1-1/2 in5555
    2 in10121012
    2-1/2 in30402025
    3 in60654045
    3-1/2 in1001156575
    4 in——100115

    NFPA 13 (2019) 28.5.2 (light) and 28.5.3 (ordinary) pipe schedule tables; table numbers shift between editions. Pipe schedule has limits on system size and water supply; extra hazard and storage use hydraulic design. Light hazard branch lines are limited to 8 heads on either side of a cross main.

    Worked — pipe scheduleLight hazard, steel. A 2 in line feeds how many heads?
    Table: 2 in steel, light = 10 heads max
    An 11th head means the next size up: 2-1/2 in

    Hydraulic basics

    The designer starts at the most remote head, figures the flow it needs, and works back to the source, adding friction and elevation. The supply (city or fire pump) must beat the demand.

    HEAD PRESSURE: P = (Q ÷ K)²
    Worked — pressure at a headLight hazard, 0.10 gpm/ft², head covers 225 ft², K5.6
    Q = 0.10 × 225 = 22.5 gpm
    P = (22.5 ÷ 5.6)² = 4.02² = 16.1 psi

    Friction loss

    p = 4.52 × Q1.85 ÷ (C1.85 × d4.87)   psi per ft

    Q in gpm, d = actual inside diameter in inches, C = Hazen-Williams roughness. Lower C means rougher pipe and more loss.

    PipeC value
    Black or galvanized steel, wet (incl. deluge)120
    Black or galvanized steel, dry (incl. preaction)100
    Copper, brass, stainless150
    Listed plastic (CPVC)150
    Cement-lined cast or ductile iron140

    NFPA 13 hydraulic calculation chapter, Hazen-Williams C value table (2019 and 2022). The 2025 edition adds C values for some newer dry system methods.

    Worked — why dry pipe runs bigger100 gpm through 2 in sch 10 (ID 2.157 in)
    C = 120 (wet): 0.076 psi/ft → 7.6 psi per 100 ft
    C = 100 (dry): 0.107 psi/ft → 10.7 psi per 100 ft

    Use the calculators on 13.1 for the rest. Never change pipe size, route or head type in the field without the designer's OK. It breaks the calc.

    Fire protection pipe is mostly black steel, joined threaded, grooved or welded. The wall thickness decides which joints you are allowed to use.

    Steel pipe and joints

    • Schedule 40: can be threaded or cut-grooved. Common on small branch lines (threaded) and dry systems.
    • Schedule 10: too thin to thread or cut-groove. Roll groove it or weld it. Common on mains 2-1/2 in and up.
    • Steel thinner than schedule 40 (under 8 in) or schedule 30 (8 in and up) may not be threaded or cut-grooved, unless the pipe is specifically listed for it (threaded lightwall).
    • Grooved joints use a listed combination of coupling, gasket and groove. Use the maker's groove specs and lube, and torque or pad-to-pad per their instructions.

    NFPA 13 (2022) Chapter 7, piping and joining requirements. Owner specs often go stricter (for example, schedule 40 on all dry pipe).

    CPVC and copper

    • CPVC (for example BlazeMaster) is listed for light hazard, residential (13R/13D) and wet systems only. Some listings allow small ordinary hazard rooms. Follow the listing and the maker's install manual to the letter, including solvent cement cure times before testing.
    • Keep CPVC away from incompatible products: some firestop, caulk, cutting oils, and thread sealants attack it. Use only products the maker lists as compatible.
    • Copper is allowed (types K, L, M in fire protection). Brazed or listed press or grooved joints; check the spec.

    Dry and preaction pitch

    LocationBranch linesMains
    Not refrigerated1/2 in per 10 ft1/4 in per 10 ft
    Refrigerated area1/2 in per 10 ft1/2 in per 10 ft

    NFPA 13 (2019/2022) system drainage requirements (16.10). Wet systems need no pitch, but trapped sections need drains (27.2).

    Water left in dry pipe

    Water trapped in a dry system freezes, splits pipe and fittings, and eats the pipe from inside. Pitch every line to a drain. After a trip test, drain every low point before you reset the valve.

    Corrosion and MIC

    Dry and preaction pipe rusts fast where air, moisture and oxygen meet. Microbiologically influenced corrosion (MIC) causes pinhole leaks and tubercles in wet and dry pipe. Many dry systems now use nitrogen instead of air. If you cut into old pipe full of scale or nodules, save a sample and tell your foreman.

    A standpipe is a riser with hose outlets, usually in the stairs, so firefighters can hook up close to the fire instead of stretching hose from the street.

    Classes

    ClassOutletFor whom
    Class I2-1/2 in hose connectionFire department
    Class II1-1/2 in hose stationTrained occupants, or fire department first attack
    Class IIIBoth 2-1/2 in and 1-1/2 inBoth

    Pressure and flow

    Residual pressure
    Hydraulically most remote outlet: 100 psi at a 2-1/2 in outlet, 65 psi at a 1-1/2 in outlet, at design flow.
    Flow
    Class I and III: 500 gpm for the first standpipe, plus 250 gpm for each added standpipe. Max total 1,000 gpm in a sprinklered building, 1,250 gpm unsprinklered.
    High pressure
    Where static pressure at a 2-1/2 in outlet is over 175 psi, a pressure-regulating device is required.

    NFPA 14, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems, 7.8 (pressure) and 7.10 (flow). Check the edition your AHJ adopted.

    Where the outlets go

    • In every required exit stair, a 2-1/2 in hose connection at each floor level, normally at the main floor landing (some AHJs want intermediate landings; follow the plans).
    • Hose valve center 3 ft to 5 ft above the floor.
    • Other locations the building code or AHJ adds: roof, horizontal exits, large open floors.

    NFPA 14 and IBC 905.4.

    Hose valve install

    Face the outlet so a firefighter can connect a hose with the door or rail out of the way. Caps on, threads match the local fire department, handwheel free to turn.

    A new system is not done until it passes its tests in front of the AHJ and the paperwork is signed. After that, NFPA 25 keeps it tested for life.

    Acceptance tests (new work)

    TestRequirement
    Hydrostatic200 psi for 2 hours, no loss. If working pressure is over 150 psi, test at 50 psi over working pressure. Read the gauge at the low point of the system.
    Dry pipe air testIn addition to the hydro: 40 psi air for 24 hours. Fix any leak that loses more than 1-1/2 psi in 24 hours.
    Underground flushFlush the underground and lead-in before connecting to the riser. Rocks and debris plug heads.
    Waterflow alarmFlow the inspector's test. Alarm must come in within 90 seconds of flow starting (NFPA 72).
    Main drainFull-open the main drain, record static and residual pressure. This is the baseline for future tests.
    Dry valve tripTrip the dry or preaction valve and record trip time and water delivery.

    NFPA 13 (2019/2022) 29.2 system acceptance. Results go on the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate (aboveground, and a separate one for underground), signed by the installer and witnessed as the AHJ requires.

    Air is not water

    Never pressure test with air in place of the hydro. Compressed air stores a huge amount of energy and a failed fitting becomes a projectile. Vent all air out of the high points before the hydro. See 12.1.

    Main drain test, what it tells you

    Write down the static pressure, open the drain full, wait for the gauge to settle, write down the residual. Compare with last year. A big drop in residual means something is closed or plugged upstream: a partly shut valve, a blocked backflow, or a supply problem.

    NFPA 25 basics (existing systems)

    Weekly
    Sealed control valves inspected. Locked or electrically supervised valves on a longer interval.
    Monthly
    Gauges on wet and dry systems checked.
    Quarterly
    Mechanical waterflow alarms (water motor gong) tested. FDCs inspected.
    Semiannually
    Vane and pressure switch waterflow alarms tested.
    Annually
    Heads inspected from the floor. Main drain test at each riser (quarterly where the supply goes through a backflow preventer or PRV). Dry valve partial trip test.
    3 years
    Dry valve full-flow trip test.
    5 years
    Gauges replaced or tested against a calibrated gauge. Internal pipe assessment for obstructions.
    50 years
    Standard response heads: sample sent to a lab, or replaced.

    NFPA 25, Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems. Intervals change between editions; use the AHJ's edition.

    Most sprinkler field math is simple: where does the head land, how long is the drop, and does the layout still meet spacing.

    Drops and sprigs

    1. Get the finished ceiling height from the reflected ceiling plan, not the architectural sections.
    2. Measure from the branch line centerline down to the ceiling line.
    3. Subtract the fitting make-up at the top and the head's make-up for its escutcheon or cup. Use the head's data sheet for the recessed or concealed setting range.
    4. Cut the drop long enough that the head lands inside its escutcheon adjustment range, not at the end of it. Ceiling grids move.
    5. Center heads in tiles unless the plans say otherwise. Check the head is still inside max spacing and at least 4 in from walls and 6 ft from other heads.

    Armovers

    Keep the unsupported armover to a head within 24 in on steel and 12 in on copper, or add a hanger (27.7). Short armovers also move less when the head discharges.

    Worked — coverage of one headOrdinary hazard warehouse, lines 12 ft apart, heads 10 ft on the line
    12 × 10 = 120 ft² ≤ 130 ft² OK. Both distances ≤ 15 ft OK
    Wall distance max = 15 ÷ 2 = 7 ft 6 in
    Worked — flow at a headOH1 density 0.15 gpm/ft², head covers 130 ft², K5.6
    Q = 0.15 × 130 = 19.5 gpm
    P = (19.5 ÷ 5.6)² = 3.48² = 12.1 psi (above the 7 psi minimum)
    Worked — pipe scheduleOrdinary hazard pipe schedule, steel. 18 heads on a cross main section.
    2 in max 10, 2-1/2 in max 20
    Answer: 2-1/2 in
    Worked — moving a headHead 15 ft from its neighbor, light hazard. Moved 2 ft away for a light fixture.
    New spacing 17 ft > 15 ft max
    Not allowed — re-lay out or ask the designer
    Field changes

    Any head move, added head or pipe size change goes back to the designer. Mark it on your as-builts the same day. The AHJ checks the as-built against the calc.

    Test yourself on sprinkler system types, heads, spacing, hangers, pipe and testing. Answers are explained after each question.

    The test position decides where you're allowed to weld in production. Pass the wrong position and you're qualified, but not for the job in front of you.

    1G rolled 2G axis vertical 5G flat, fixed 6G 45°, fixed
    The four pipe groove test positions. The copper band is the weld. Only 1G gets rolled; 5G and 6G stay fixed and you go round them.

    What each pipe test covers

    TestHow the pipe sitsGroove positions qualified
    1GAxis horizontal, rolled, weld on topFlat
    2GAxis vertical, weld runs level around itFlat, horizontal
    5GAxis horizontal, fixedFlat, vertical, overhead
    6GAxis at 45°, fixedAll
    2G + 5GTwo coupons, both passedAll

    ASME Section IX Table QW-461.9, pipe groove tests. A groove test also qualifies fillet welds (QW-303.1). The table has more columns — plate, pipe over 24" OD, fillets — so read it for anything outside plain pipe butt welds.

    • 5G alone is not all-position. It misses horizontal. Add a 2G, or take the 6G.
    • A plate test does little for small pipe. Plate groove tests mostly qualify plate and very large pipe. Check QW-461.9 before you assume a plate cert covers a pipe rack.
    • Fillet tests qualify fillets only. A 2F or 4F plate test never qualifies you for a groove weld.
    • 6GR is a 6G with a restriction ring set close to the joint. It's an AWS D1.1 structural test for tubular T-, Y- and K-connections — not the usual mechanical-piping test.

    Fillet positions

    1F
    Flat. The fillet is laid in the trough, weld axis level.
    2F
    Horizontal. One plate flat, one standing up, weld runs level.
    3F
    Vertical. Weld runs up (or down) the joint.
    4F
    Overhead.
    2FR / 5F
    Pipe fillets — rolled horizontal, and fixed horizontal.
    Uphill or downhill is its own variable

    On 5G and 6G, which way you travel in the vertical matters. A test run uphill doesn't qualify you to run downhill, and the reverse. Pipeline work is the usual downhill case — see section 29.

    One code tells you how to qualify. Another tells you how to build the pipe. The paperwork ties you, the procedure and the job together.

    Which code does what

    CodeWhat it coversWhere you meet it
    ASME Section IXHow welders and procedures get qualifiedYour pipe test, almost every mechanical job
    ASME B31.1Power piping — design, fabrication, inspectionBoiler external piping, power plants, steam
    ASME B31.3Process pipingRefineries, chemical, pharma, many industrial plants
    ASME B31.9Building services pipingCommercial HVAC, chilled and heating water, steam in buildings
    AWS D1.1Structural steel — its own welder testsSupports, structural steel, tubular frames
    API 1104Pipelines and related facilitiesCross-country and distribution lines — see section 29

    The B31 piping codes set how the system is built and inspected, and they send you to Section IX for welder and procedure qualification. Check which edition the job spec and the AHJ adopted.

    The three papers

    WPS
    Welding Procedure Specification. The recipe you weld to. It gives ranges — rod, amps, preheat, thickness, material — and you have to stay inside them.
    PQR
    Procedure Qualification Record. The proof the recipe works. It records what was actually used on a test weld and the lab results. You rarely see it, but the WPS must reference one.
    WPQ
    Welder Performance Qualification. Your record. It shows what you welded, how it was tested, and the ranges you're now qualified for. Also called a WQR or "your cert".
    • The WPS qualifies the procedure. The WPQ qualifies you. You need both, and they have to line up with each other and with the joint.
    • Your WPQ belongs to the organization that tested you. Under Section IX the employer is responsible for its welders' qualifications. A new employer can accept a previous one's test only where the code and the owner allow it.
    • Position isn't a WPS variable. A procedure qualified in 1G can be written for all positions. Position is a welder variable — it lives on your WPQ.
    Get a copy

    Ask for a copy of every WPQ you sign and keep them together with your continuity records. When a job asks "what are you certed for?", the answer is on that paper, not in your memory.

    A WPS is a list of limits. Read it top to bottom before you strike an arc, and stay inside every range on it.

    The numbers that group the metal

    P-number
    Groups base metals that weld alike. P-1 carbon steel (A106 B, A53 B, A516-70). P-3 carbon-moly. P-4 1-1/4 Cr – 1/2 Mo (P11). P-5A 2-1/4 Cr – 1 Mo (P22). P-8 austenitic stainless (304, 316). P-15E 9 Cr creep-strength steels (P91, P92).
    F-number
    Groups filler metals by how they handle. F-3 is cellulosic rod (6010), F-4 is low-hydrogen rod (7018), F-6 is bare wire and rod (TIG and MIG). See 28.7.
    A-number
    Groups weld deposits by chemistry. A-1 is carbon steel deposit. Chrome-moly and stainless have their own A-numbers.

    P-numbers: ASME Section IX QW/QB-422. F-numbers: QW-432. A-numbers: QW-442.

    What you must not change

    Essential variables are the ones that, if changed, need a new PQR. For stick (SMAW) procedures they include:

    • Base metal P-number and the thickness range the PQR supports.
    • Filler F-number and A-number. You can't swap a 7018 for a 6010 fill because both are "70 series".
    • Preheat. A big drop below what the PQR used is an essential change.
    • PWHT — adding it, deleting it, or changing its range.

    Supplementary essential variables only kick in when the job needs impact (toughness) testing. Heat input and uphill-versus-downhill are the ones you'll run into. Nonessential variables — groove angle, technique, rod size in most cases — can be revised on the WPS without a new PQR. You still follow what's written.

    Example layout — not a real procedure

    BlockWhat an SMAW carbon-steel WPS looks like
    WPS no. / PQR no.EXAMPLE-01 / supported by PQR ___ (a real WPS names it)
    ProcessSMAW, manual
    JointSingle-V butt, open root, no backing. Bevel, land and gap given here
    Base metalP-No. 1 to P-No. 1. Thickness range from the PQR
    Filler, rootE6010, F-No. 3, A-No. 1, DCEP, amps range stated
    Filler, fill and capE7018, F-No. 4, A-No. 1, DCEP, amps range stated
    Position / progressionAll / uphill
    Preheat / interpassMinimum preheat and maximum interpass, in °F
    PWHTNone, or temperature and time range
    GasNone for SMAW. A TIG WPS lists shielding and backing gas and flow
    TechniqueStringer or weave, interpass cleaning, back-grinding if any

    Layout for learning only. Weld to the WPS your employer issues for that joint.

    No WPS, no weld

    On code work, "I've always run it this way" doesn't count. If the joint isn't covered by a WPS you've been given, stop and ask your foreman before you tack it.

    Your test coupon sets two limits on your cert: the smallest pipe you can weld and the thickest weld metal you can deposit.

    Diameter

    Coupon ODMinimum OD qualifiedMaximum
    Under 1"Size weldedUnlimited
    1" to 2-7/8"1"Unlimited
    Over 2-7/8"2-7/8"Unlimited

    ASME Section IX Table QW-452.3, groove welds. Tack welds aren't limited by diameter when their total length is 25% of the circumference or less.

    Thickness — of the weld metal you put in

    Weld metal thickness t in the couponMax qualified
    Any t, as a rule2t
    1/2" or more, with at least 3 layersMax to be welded

    ASME Section IX Table QW-452.1(b). "Max to be welded" still stays inside whatever range the WPS allows.

    • It's per process. On a TIG root with stick fill, each process is qualified for the thickness of what that process deposited.
    • Lower limit. There's no minimum thickness on a welder's groove qual, but the diameter floor still applies.

    Why the common test pair works

    The test is set by your employer, local or test center. A common pair is 2" Sch 80 and 6" Sch 120:

    Worked — 2" Sch 80, 6G, stick all the wayOD 2.375" → in the 1" to 2-7/8" row → qualified 1" OD and up
    Wall 0.218" → about 0.218" deposited → 2t = 0.436" max
    Worked — 6" Sch 120, 6G, stick all the wayOD 6.625" → over 2-7/8" → qualified 2-7/8" OD and up
    Wall 0.562" → over 1/2" with 3+ layers → max to be welded

    Together they give you small bore from 1" and unlimited thickness on bigger pipe. A 6" Sch 80 coupon (0.432" wall) is under 1/2", so it only gets you 2t — about 0.864".

    Read your WPQ ranges

    The ranges are written on your WPQ. If you took one 6" test only, you are not qualified on 2" pipe, however good you are on it.

    First it has to pass a visual. Then it's either cut into straps and bent, or shot with X-ray or UT. Either way, the whole weld is on trial.

    Visual first

    The coupon has to show complete joint penetration with complete fusion to the base metal before it goes further. Cracks, cold lap and an unfused root end the test here.

    Bend tests

    Coupon weld thicknessSpecimens
    Under 3/8"Face and root bends
    3/8" and overSide bends
    5G or 6G pipe4 specimens total

    ASME Section IX Table QW-452.1(a) and QW-302.3. The test shop picks the strap locations from the code figures (QW-463.2) — they come from around the whole circumference, including the overhead.

    Face bend
    The cap is stretched on the outside of the bend. Finds lack of sidewall fusion near the top and cap problems.
    Root bend
    The root is stretched. Finds lack of penetration, root fusion defects, suck-back.
    Side bend
    A slice through the full thickness, bent sideways. Finds fusion and inclusions anywhere through the wall.

    Pass or fail

    • No open discontinuity over 1/8" in any direction on the stretched (convex) surface.
    • Cracks at the corners of the strap don't count unless there's clear evidence they came from slag, lack of fusion or another internal defect.

    ASME Section IX QW-163.

    RT or UT instead of bends

    • Allowed for most steel pipe tests — stick and TIG on carbon steel and stainless are routinely qualified this way (QW-304).
    • The whole circumference of a pipe coupon is examined, not a sample.
    • Not allowed for some materials — aluminum, titanium and some others must be bend tested. GMAW short-circuit transfer has its own limits on RT. Check QW-304 for your process and metal.
    Why bends are harder on some welds

    RT is good at slag and porosity but can miss a tight lack of sidewall fusion. A bend opens it right up. Weld every test like it's being bent.

    The 6G isn't passed on test day. It's passed in the weeks of practice before it — but test day is where people throw it away.

    Before you strike

    1. Ask the rules out loud. What grinding is allowed, and on which passes? Can you grind tacks? Can you touch the cap? Can you re-position the booth or the coupon once it's set? Every test shop is different.
    2. Read the test WPS. Process, rod, polarity, progression, preheat. You are welding to it just like on the job.
    3. Check your bevel, land and gap with a gauge, all the way around. Section 1 covers the numbers — section 1.
    4. Kill the hi-lo. Line the ID up before tacking. A step at the root is a root you can't fuse on one side.
    5. Tack small and feather them. Grind the tack ends to a taper so the root ties in, where the rules allow.
    6. Set the coupon at a height you can reach all the way round — including the 6 o'clock — without twisting yourself into a bad angle.
    7. Get your rod out of the oven or a fresh can. Damp 7018 is porosity waiting to happen (28.8).

    Pass by pass

    Root
    6010 or TIG. Keyhole even all the way round. Watch the 6 o'clock: that's where concavity (suck-back) and lack of fusion hide. Tie your restarts in by grinding the crater and feathering it first.
    Hot pass
    Burns out the wagon tracks — the slag lines along each toe of a 6010 root. Hot enough to melt them out, not so hot you burn through.
    Fill
    Clean every pass. Chip, brush, grind out high spots and slag traps. Keep the groove even so the cap has a level bed.
    Cap
    Fill the toes to stop undercut, keep the crown low, fill every crater. The upper side of a 6G cap sags — stack it so gravity doesn't pull it over the edge.

    What fails people

    • Root concavity and lack of fusion at the bottom — too hot overhead, or too little rod pushed in.
    • Lack of sidewall fusion in the fill — bead riding over the bevel instead of melting into it. Bends find it.
    • Undercut at the cap toes, most often on the top side of the 6G.
    • Slag left in a restart or between beads.
    • Porosity from damp low-hydrogen rod, a long arc, or wind through the booth.
    • Arc strikes outside the groove — they count against you at most test shops.
    • Rushing the clean-up to beat the clock.
    Don't doctor the coupon

    Grinding past the allowed passes, moving a fixed coupon, or switching rod the WPS doesn't list is a failed test, whatever the weld looks like. It's also how people lose the chance to retest that day.

    Every rod and wire is stamped with its AWS class. Read it, match it to the WPS, and you won't weld the wrong filler into a line.

    Decoding a stick electrode

    E 70 1 8 — ELECTRODE / 70 KSI MIN TENSILE / 1 = ALL POSITION / 8 = COATING AND CURRENT
    E7018
    70 ksi, all position, low-hydrogen iron-powder coating. AC or DCEP. The fill-and-cap rod on most carbon steel pipe.
    E6010
    60 ksi, all position, cellulosic coating. DCEP. Digs hard — the open-root rod.
    -H4 / -H8
    Diffusible hydrogen limit: 4 or 8 mL per 100 g of weld metal. Lower is better for crack-prone steel.
    R
    Moisture-resistant coating. Allowed longer out of the oven.
    ER70S-6
    ER = electrode or rod (MIG wire or TIG rod), 70 ksi, S = solid, 6 = chemistry with more manganese and silicon to handle mill scale.

    F-numbers you'll see

    F-No.What's in itExamples
    F-3Cellulosic stickE6010, E6011
    F-4Low-hydrogen stickE7018, E8018-B2, E9018-B3
    F-5Stainless stickE308L-16, E309L-16, E316L-16
    F-6Bare wire and rod, all steelsER70S-6, ER80S-B2, ER308L

    ASME Section IX Table QW-432. An F-4 test also qualifies F-1 to F-3 with backing (QW-433). An F-6 test qualifies all F-6 filler.

    With and without backing matters. Running a 6010 open root qualifies you on F-3 without backing. The 7018 laid on top of it is welding with backing. So a 6010/7018 test doesn't qualify you to put an open root in with 7018.

    Common matches

    PipeStickTIG rod
    Carbon steel (P-1)E6010 root, E7018 fill and capER70S-2 / ER70S-6
    1-1/4 Cr – 1/2 Mo (P11, P-4)E8018-B2ER80S-B2
    2-1/4 Cr – 1 Mo (P22, P-5A)E9018-B3ER90S-B3
    304/304L stainlessE308LER308L
    316/316L stainlessE316LER316L
    Carbon steel to stainlessE309LER309L

    Typical choices; chrome-moly stick matches per Hobart, 309L for dissimilar joints per Lincoln. The WPS governs — some specs call for L-grade or different filler.

    Mixed-up rod is a cut-out

    Chrome-moly and carbon steel rod look alike in a pouch. One wrong rod in a P22 line means PMI finds it and the weld comes out. Keep alloy rod in its own marked caddy.

    Low-hydrogen rod only stays low-hydrogen while it's dry. Out of the oven, the clock is running.

    Exposure limits

    Rod strengthMax time out of can or oven
    E70XX (7018)4 hours
    E80XX (8018-B2)2 hours
    E90XX (9018-B3)1 hour
    E100XX, E110XX1/2 hour

    AWS D1.1 Table 7.1 (clause 5 in editions before 2020). ASME work follows the WPS and the maker's instructions, and many specs use these same limits. "R" moisture-resistant rod can be allowed longer — Lincoln rates its EXX18 R rod for up to 9 hours.

    • Holding oven: at least 250°F under D1.1. Lincoln recommends 250–300°F for opened low-hydrogen rod.
    • Past the limit, it gets re-dried or scrapped. D1.1 allows re-drying once. Lincoln's re-dry for E7018 is 650–750°F; for E8018 through E11018, 700–800°F. Follow the maker of the rod you have.
    • Wet rod is scrap. Rod that got rained on or dropped in water needs the maker's special procedure, if any. Most jobs just throw it out.
    • Never bake 6010 or 6011. Cellulosic rod needs some moisture in its coating to run. Lincoln doesn't recommend re-baking it.
    Take out what you'll use

    Pull a handful at a time into a portable oven or caddy, not a pocketful. Put the time on the caddy lid with a paint pen so you know when the four hours are up.

    Heat before, heat between, and sometimes heat after. All of it is on the WPS, and all of it is there to stop cracks.

    Why preheat

    • Slows the cooling. The steel ends up softer and tougher, less likely to crack.
    • Lets hydrogen get out before it can cause a delayed crack.
    • Cuts shrinkage stress on heavy, stiff joints.

    Checking it

    • Temperature crayon (Tempilstik) — melts at its rated temperature. Mark the base metal, not the groove.
    • Contact pyrometer — a surface probe. More exact, and it tells you how far over you are.
    • Where to measure. AWS D1.1: at least the thickness of the thickest part, but not less than 3", in all directions from the point of welding. ASME B31.3: the preheat zone runs at least 1" past each edge of the weld. Your WPS or spec may be stricter.
    • Interpass is checked the same way before every pass. The WPS gives a minimum (never drop below preheat) and often a maximum. Too hot is a problem on stainless and on impact-tested jobs.

    AWS D1.1 preheat measurement, as quoted in Lincoln Electric's Welding Innovation (AWS). B31.3 para. 330.1.3.

    Code preheat tables

    B31.1 and B31.3 both list minimum preheat by P-number and wall thickness, and since the 2014 editions the two tables line up. Thin carbon steel needs little. Heavy carbon steel and every chrome-moly grade need a real preheat. Check the edition your job runs to — your WPS carries the number.

    PWHT

    PWHT (stress relief) is set by the code, the material, the wall thickness and the spec. It's a heat-treating job with thermocouples, heating pads and a chart. As one example, B31.3 holds P-1 carbon steel at 1100–1200°F, 1 hour per inch of thickness, 15 minutes minimum.

    ASME B31.3 Table 331.1.1. Other P-numbers and codes differ.

    Heat input

    HEAT INPUT (kJ/in) = VOLTS × AMPS × 60 ÷ (TRAVEL SPEED in/min × 1000)
    Worked — example numbers23 V, 115 A, travel 5 in/min
    23 × 115 × 60 = 158,700
    5 × 1000 = 5,000
    158,700 ÷ 5,000 = 31.7 kJ/in

    Heat input matters when the WPS sets a limit — usually impact-tested jobs. Weaving wide or crawling slow drives it up. A weave that's twice as slow puts in twice the heat.

    Don't let it go cold

    If preheat is required, it has to be there for tacks and for every pass. On chrome-moly, stopping halfway and letting the joint cool without the WPS allowing it can crack the root before you come back.

    The inspector measures against the job code's table, not against how the weld looks to you. Know the few numbers that fail most welds.

    ItemB31.3 normal fluid serviceB31.1
    CracksNoneNone
    Undercut depth1/32" (1 mm) max, and not over 1/4 of wall1/32" max, and not into the minimum required wall
    Surface lack of fusionNot acceptableNot acceptable
    Incomplete penetration (where the ID can be seen)Limited by the tableNot acceptable
    Root concavity (suck-back)Total joint thickness, cap included, at least the wallMust not leave less than required wall
    ReinforcementSet by wall thickness. See section 1Set by wall thickness and design temperature

    ASME B31.3 Table 341.3.2 and B31.1 para. 136.4.2, summarized. Severe cyclic service under B31.3 is tighter. Check the edition and any client spec — they can be stricter than the code.

    • Your test coupon has its own rule — complete penetration and complete fusion, no cracks. See 28.5.
    • Arc strikes outside the groove are rejected under B31.1 and removed on most jobs.
    • 1/32" is less than you think. It's about the thickness of a credit card. Run a fingernail across the toe — if it catches, get a gauge on it.
    Carry a gauge

    A cheap undercut and reinforcement gauge in your pocket lets you check your own cap before the inspector does. Fix it while the rod's still in your hand.

    A cert isn't forever. It lives as long as you keep welding with the process and someone keeps the record.

    Continuity — the 6-month rule

    • Go 6 months or more without welding with a process and your ASME qualification for that process expires (QW-322).
    • Each time you weld with the process under the organization that qualified you, it's extended another 6 months.
    • It's by process, not by position or pipe size. Running stick on plate keeps your stick qualification alive.
    • It can also be revoked any time there's a specific reason to question your welding.
    • Renewal after it expires is by a new test coupon, or by production welds that pass volumetric examination, as QW-322.2 allows.

    If you fail

    • Immediate retest: you weld two consecutive coupons for each position you failed, and both must pass.
    • Fail the retest and you're expected to go back for more training or practice before you test again.

    ASME Section IX QW-321 (as summarized by TWI).

    NCPWB and the UA

    The National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau (set up by MCAA) qualifies standard WPSs for its member contractors. It runs tests with the UA at UA Authorized Test Facilities. It keeps a national welder database so a signatory contractor can accept a qualification made by a previous employer, with the owner's approval. Continuity records have to be kept for that to work.

    Log it every job

    When you finish a job, make sure your continuity is logged with the contractor or the local. A welder who has been welding every week but has no record of it is an expired welder on paper.

    Test yourself on positions, ranges, bend tests, filler metal and the paperwork before you sit the real thing.

    A spread is a moving factory. Each crew does one job, then the next crew comes behind. If one crew falls behind or does sloppy work, every crew behind it pays for it.

    The order of work

    1. Survey and staking. Centerline, ROW edges, foreign line crossings and bends get staked.
    2. Clearing and grading. ROW cleared and leveled so equipment can travel. Topsoil is often stripped and kept separate for restoration.
    3. Ditching. Trencher or excavators dig to the depth the drawings call for. Foreign lines are located and exposed by hand or vac.
    4. Stringing. Joints are hauled out and laid end to end along the ditch on skids.
    5. Bending. Bending crew makes field cold bends to match the survey at sags, overbends and side bends.
    6. Line-up and root. Front-end crew lines up joints with a side boom and clamp. Stringer bead (root) and hot pass go in.
    7. Firing line. Fill and cap welders finish the welds behind the front end.
    8. NDT. Welds are X-rayed or UT'd. Rejects are repaired or cut out.
    9. Field joint coating. Bare weld areas are blasted and coated. Whole pipe is holiday tested ("jeeped").
    10. Lowering in. Side booms lift the string off the skids and set it in the padded ditch.
    11. Tie-ins. Tie-in crew welds the sections together at road bores, crossings and gaps.
    12. Backfill. Padding first around the pipe, then the rest of the spoil.
    13. Hydrotest. Sections are cleaned, gauged, filled, pressured and held. Then dewatered and dried.
    14. Cleanup and restoration. Topsoil back, grade restored, fences and drainage fixed.

    Who does what

    Union pipeline work in the U.S. runs under the National Pipe Line Agreements. Four crafts are party to them.

    CraftTypical work on the spread
    UA (pipeliners)Welders and welder helpers, line-up, fitting, tie-ins.
    Operating Engineers (IUOE)Side booms, excavators, dozers, trenchers, bending machine.
    Laborers (LIUNA)Skids, coating, swamping, grade work, general labor.
    TeamstersPipe haul, stringing trucks, fuel and water trucks.

    Craft split varies by agreement, job and region. Your steward and the job's pre-job conference settle who does what.

    Front end sets the pace

    The front end (line-up, stringer, hot pass) sets how many welds get made each day. The firing line and every crew after it are sized to keep up with them.

    Pipelines in the U.S. are regulated by the federal DOT through PHMSA. The CFR rules are law. The ASME and API standards are the technical rulebooks those laws point to.

    DocumentWhat it covers
    49 CFR Part 192Federal rules for natural gas and other gas pipelines: design, welding, construction, testing, operation.
    49 CFR Part 195Federal rules for hazardous liquid pipelines (crude, refined products, etc.) and CO2.
    ASME B31.8Industry code for gas transmission and distribution piping.
    ASME B31.4Industry code for liquid and slurry pipelines.
    API 1104Welding of pipelines: procedures, welder tests, inspection, and weld acceptance standards.
    API 5LLine pipe: grades, chemistry, strength, dimensions, testing.

    49 CFR 192.7 incorporates API 1104 21st ed. (2013, with errata and addenda), API 5L 46th ed. (2018) and ASME B31.8-2018. API published the 22nd ed. of API 1104 in 2021. Your operator's spec names the edition for your job.

    How they fit together

    • 192.225 says weld procedures must be qualified under API 1104 or ASME Section IX.
    • 192.241 says weld acceptability is judged by API 1104 section 9 (or Appendix A).
    • The operator (pipeline owner) writes specs that are often stricter than code. On the job, the operator's spec wins as long as it meets code.

    Operator Qualification (OQ)

    OQ rules are in 192 Subpart N (gas) and 195 Subpart G (liquids). They make sure people doing certain tasks on an operating pipeline have been evaluated.

    Covered task
    Meets all four: done on a pipeline facility, is an operations or maintenance task, is required by the regs, and affects the operation or integrity of the pipeline.
    Evaluation
    How the operator checks you can do it: written or oral test, work performance history, observation, or simulation.
    Qualified
    You can do the task and can recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions (AOCs).
    AOC
    A condition that may mean equipment is failing or the system is outside design limits, or is a hazard to people or property.
    • An unqualified person may do a covered task only if directed and observed by a qualified person.
    • PHMSA says OQ does not cover new construction. But the tie-in of a new line to an existing one is an O&M task, and so is work on that segment after tie-in.

    49 CFR 192.801–192.809; 195.501–195.509; PHMSA OQ FAQs.

    Carry your OQ cards

    If you are not qualified on a covered task, do not do it unless a qualified person is directing and watching you. Operators audit this.

    Line pipe is sold by grade. The X number is the minimum yield strength in thousands of psi. That number, the wall and the OD set how much pressure the pipe can carry.

    API 5L grades

    GradeSMYS (psi, nominal)API 5L PSL1 min yieldAPI 5L PSL1 min tensile
    B35,00035,500 psi (245 MPa)60,200 psi
    X4242,00042,100 psi (290 MPa)60,200 psi
    X4646,00046,400 psi (320 MPa)63,100 psi
    X5252,00052,200 psi (360 MPa)66,700 psi
    X5656,00056,600 psi (390 MPa)71,100 psi
    X6060,00060,200 psi (415 MPa)75,400 psi
    X6565,00065,300 psi (450 MPa)77,500 psi
    X7070,00070,300 psi (485 MPa)82,700 psi
    X8080,00080,500 psi (555 MPa), PSL2 only—

    API 5L states strength in MPa with psi in parentheses, so its psi values run slightly above the round X number. Designers commonly use the round number. X80 is a PSL2 grade.

    PSL1
    Standard quality level. Minimum yield only. No required impact (Charpy) test.
    PSL2
    Tighter chemistry, a maximum yield as well as a minimum, required Charpy tests, and full traceability. Most modern transmission pipe is PSL2.
    D/t
    OD divided by wall. High D/t pipe (thin for its size) dents, ovals and buckles easier. Handle it gently.

    Barlow design formula

    P = (2 × S × t ÷ D) × F × E × T
    P
    Design pressure, psig.
    S
    SMYS, psi.
    t
    Nominal wall, in.
    D
    Nominal OD, in.
    F
    Design factor. Gas: by class location (29.4). Liquids: 0.72 onshore.
    E
    Longitudinal seam joint factor. 1.0 for seamless and most modern API 5L welded pipe.
    T
    Temperature derating factor. 1.0 at normal operating temperatures.

    49 CFR 192.105 (gas), 195.106 (liquids). 195.106 uses 0.60 for offshore/inland-water platform pipe. Check E and T in 192.113, 192.115 before relying on 1.0.

    Worked — NPS 24 X65 gas lineOD 24.000 in, wall 0.375 in, X65, Class 1, E = 1, T = 1
    2 × 65,000 × 0.375 ÷ 24 = 2,031 psi (100% SMYS)
    × 0.72 = 1,462 psig design pressure
    Same pipe in Class 3 (F = 0.50): 1,016 psig
    Why the fitter cares

    Grade and wall are stenciled on each joint. Check them against the drawings and heat numbers. Heavy-wall joints go at crossings and in higher class areas. Swap one by mistake and you have a weak spot in the line.

    Gas lines are designed by class location. More people nearby means a lower design factor, which means thicker wall or lower pressure.

    Class location unit

    An area 220 yards either side of the centerline along any continuous 1 mile of pipeline. Count the buildings intended for human occupancy inside it.

    ClassBuildings in the unitDesign factor F
    110 or fewer0.72
    211 to 450.60
    346 or more (or near certain places of public assembly)0.50
    4Buildings of 4 or more stories above ground are prevalent0.40

    49 CFR 192.5 (class locations) and 192.111 (design factors). ASME B31.8 splits Class 1 into Division 1 (F above 0.72 up to 0.80) and Division 2 (0.72). Federal rules allow 0.80 only under extra requirements.

    Minimum cover — gas transmission

    LocationNormal soilConsolidated rock
    Class 130 in18 in
    Class 2, 3, 436 in24 in
    Drainage ditch of public road or railroad crossing36 in24 in

    49 CFR 192.327. Gas mains: 24 in minimum. Liquid lines have their own table in 195.248. Operator specs and permits often call for more.

    • Transmission lines need at least 12 in of clearance from any other underground structure (192.325). If you cannot get it, the line must be protected from damage.
    • The pipe must fit the ditch so it is not stressed, and the coating must be protected (192.319).

    Cross-country girth welds are made to a qualified API 1104 procedure. The WPS sets the rod, amps, passes, preheat and timing. Your job is to follow it every weld.

    Classic downhill stick

    • Root (stringer): commonly E6010 cellulosic, run vertical down.
    • Hot pass: E6010 or a higher-strength cellulosic rod, run soon after the root to burn out wagon tracks and support the root.
    • Fill and cap: cellulosic rods such as E8010-P1 are made for vertical-down fill work on X56 to X70 pipe.
    • Many jobs now use mechanized GMAW or low-hydrogen processes, especially on higher grades. The WPS decides.

    Line-up clamps

    ClampWhen it may come off
    InternalRoot bead completed before clamp tension is released.
    ExternalRoot bead segments, uniformly spaced around the pipe, totaling at least 50% of the circumference.

    API 1104 line-up clamp clause (minimum). Operator specs often require more root before an external clamp comes off, for example 70% or 80%.

    • High-low (offset) should not exceed 1/8 in on pipe ends of the same nominal wall, per API 1104. Spread any unavoidable offset evenly around the joint.
    • Do not move or jar the joint between root and hot pass beyond what the procedure allows. A cracked root is a cut-out.
    • The WPS sets the maximum time between the root and the hot pass. Watch it.
    • Preheat and interpass temperatures come from the WPS. Heat the whole joint area, not a spot.
    OD ID t BEVEL 30° +5°/−0° WELD CENTERLINE LAND 1/16 ± 1/32 GAP 1/16 ± 1/32
    A typical downhill V-bevel (not to scale). These are common WPS values, not API 1104 mandates. Your WPS sets the real numbers.

    Welder qualification and staying current

    Single qualification
    One test weld (butt or fillet) in the position and range you will weld. Limits on diameter, wall, direction and process apply.
    Multiple qualification
    A butt weld on pipe at least NPS 6 (6.625 in OD) with at least 0.250 in wall, plus a full-size branch connection. Done on NPS 12 (12.750 in OD) or larger, it covers all positions, walls, joint designs and diameters.
    • You may not weld on a DOT gas line unless you have welded with that process in the last 6 calendar months (192.229).
    • For pipe to run at 20% SMYS or more, you need a weld tested and passed at least twice each calendar year, no more than 7½ months apart (192.229).

    API 1104 section 6 (welder qualification); 49 CFR 192.225, 192.227, 192.229. Operators may add their own tests.

    API 1104 section 9 says how big a flaw can be before the weld is rejected. Cracks are almost never OK. Most other flaws are judged by length in any 12 in of weld.

    FlawRejected when (pipe 2.375 in OD and larger)
    Crack (9.3.10)Any crack, except a shallow crater or star crack no longer than 5/32 in.
    IP — incomplete penetration, no high-low (9.3.1)Any one over 1 in, or more than 1 in total in any 12 in, or over 8% of weld length on welds shorter than 12 in.
    IPD — incomplete penetration due to high-low (9.3.2)Any one over 2 in, or more than 3 in total in any 12 in.
    IF — incomplete fusion (9.3.4)Any one over 1 in, or more than 1 in total in any 12 in, or over 8% of weld length.
    Burn-through (9.3.7)Over 1/4 in and darker than the thinnest adjacent pipe, or more than 1/2 in total in any 12 in.
    Elongated slag (9.3.8)Any one over 2 in long or over 1/16 in wide, or more than 2 in total in any 12 in.
    Isolated slag (9.3.8)More than 1/2 in total in any 12 in (plus width limits).
    Porosity (9.3.9)Any pore over 1/8 in or over 25% of the thinner wall. A cluster in the cap over 1/2 in across.
    Undercut on film (9.3.11)More than 2 in total in any 12 in, or more than 1/6 of the weld length.
    Accumulation (9.3.12)All listed flaws together more than 2 in in any 12 in, or more than 8% of weld length.

    API 1104 section 9.3 radiographic acceptance standards, clause numbers as in the 19th–21st editions. Summary only; the standard has more conditions (density, widths, small-diameter rules). Confirm against the edition on your job. The operator's spec can be stricter.

    Visual undercut at the cap

    Depth (use the smaller)Length allowed
    Over 1/32 in or over 12.5% of wallNot acceptable
    Over 1/64 in up to 1/32 in, or over 6% up to 12.5% of wall2 in in any 12 in, or 1/6 of weld length, whichever is smaller
    1/64 in or less, or 6% of wall or lessAcceptable at any length

    API 1104 visual undercut table (9.7).

    How many welds get shot (gas)

    LocationMinimum share of each day's field butt welds
    Class 110%
    Class 215%
    Class 3, Class 4, and certain crossings100% (90% if impracticable)

    49 CFR 192.243 applies to lines at 20% SMYS or more. Many operators shoot 100% everywhere. Liquid lines: see 195.234.

    Repairs need a procedure

    A rejected weld is repaired or cut out. Repairs must be made with a qualified repair procedure (192.245). Do not grind and re-weld on your own.

    Field bends make straight pipe follow the ground. Bend too hard and you wrinkle, oval or crack the pipe. The codes set a minimum bend radius by pipe size.

    Minimum radius of field cold bends

    Pipe sizeMin radius (pipe diameters)Max deflection per 1 diameter of arc
    NPS 12 and smaller18D3.2°
    NPS 1421D2.7°
    NPS 1624D2.4°
    NPS 1827D2.1°
    NPS 20 and larger30D1.9°

    Radii: ASME B31.8 para. 841.2.3; B31.4 has the same radii (clause number varies by edition). Degrees column is the math (57.3 ÷ radius in D), shown for field checks. The codes allow tighter bends in some cases if the bend meets their conditions. Operator specs often require larger radii.

    Bend rules to live by

    • Bends must be free of buckling, cracks and other mechanical damage (192.313).
    • On welded pipe, keep the long seam as near the neutral axis of the bend as practical. Exceptions: bends made with an internal mandrel, or pipe NPS 12 and smaller (192.313).
    • No wrinkle bends on steel pipe that will run at 20% SMYS or more (192.313).
    • Leave straight tangent at the ends of each joint so it can be lined up and welded. Your spec sets how much.
    • Ovality from bending is checked by the gauge pig during testing. A bend that stops the pig gets cut out.

    Fit-up checks

    • Bevels clean and free of damage, paint, rust and moisture (192.235).
    • High-low within 1/8 in (29.5). Rotate joints to match the best fit.
    • Long seams: follow the spec on how far to offset seams of adjacent joints and where to put them on the clock.
    • Joint heat numbers and wall match the tally and drawings.

    Lowering in

    • Use enough side booms spaced to keep the bend of the string gentle. Too few booms overstress the welds.
    • Use padded slings or cradles. Never let a chain or cable ride on coating.
    • Ditch bottom free of rock. Pad with sand, screened fill or sandbags as the spec calls for.
    • Coating must be inspected just before lowering in and backfill. Any damage is repaired first (192.461).
    Stay out from under

    Nobody under a suspended string or between the string and the ditch wall while booms are working. See 29.10 and 25.1.

    Coating keeps water off the steel. Cathodic protection (CP) protects the steel wherever the coating has a hole. Both fail if the crew is careless.

    Coatings you will see

    FBE
    Fusion-bonded epoxy. Applied at the mill. Thin and hard (NACE SP0490 covers FBE of 10–30 mils), but chips if dropped or dragged.
    Field joint coating
    Covers the bare cutback at each weld. Common types are heat-shrink sleeves and two-part liquid epoxy. Blast and heat per the manufacturer's sheet.
    ARO
    Abrasion-resistant overlay over FBE for bores and rough crossings.

    Holiday testing (jeeping)

    A holiday detector puts a high voltage on the coating surface. A spark to the steel means a hole. Mark it, repair it, retest it.

    THIN FILM (FBE): V = 525 × √t (mils)
    THICK (OVER ABOUT 40 MILS): V = 1,250 × √t (mils)
    Coating thicknessVoltage
    12 mils FBEabout 1,820 V
    14 mils FBEabout 1,960 V
    16 mils FBE2,100 V
    60 mils thick coatingabout 9,680 V

    525√t is the NACE (now AMPP) formula for thin-film epoxy (SP0490 covers FBE 10–30 mils). 1,250√t is the common formula for thicker coatings. SP0490 also has you check the setting in the field against a known holiday. The operator's coating spec sets the voltage.

    • Too much voltage can punch through good coating. Too little misses holidays.
    • Keep the electrode moving. Do not park the spring on one spot.
    • Ground the detector to the pipe properly or it will not find anything.

    Protect the coating

    • Pipe on padded skids or sandbags, never on rocks or bare timbers that have nails.
    • Nylon slings or padded hooks for handling. No chains on coated pipe.
    • Padding around the pipe before rocky spoil goes in.

    Cathodic protection basics

    • CP must be installed and working within 1 year after construction is done on buried gas lines (192.455).
    • Test leads are welded or brazed to the pipe (per the operator's method) and run to test stations so CP can be measured (192.469).
    • Coat over every lead attachment. Do not damage leads during backfill.
    • On onshore gas transmission repair or replacement jobs with 1,000 ft or more of backfill, the operator must survey the coating (DCVG, ACVG or similar) no later than 6 months after backfill (192.461). Your coating damage shows up on that survey.

    A hydrotest proves the new line is strong and tight before it carries product. The test pressure and hold time come from the regs, and the test pressure limits the line's MAOP.

    Gas lines (Part 192)

    • Steel line to run at 30% SMYS or more: strength test held at or above test pressure for at least 8 hours (192.505).
    • Pre-tested fabricated units and short sections: at least 4 hours (192.505).
    • Lines at 100 psig or more but under 30% SMYS: hold at least 1 hour (192.507).
    Class locationTest pressure ÷ this = MAOP (installed on/after July 1, 2020)
    11.25
    21.25
    31.5
    41.5

    49 CFR 192.619(a)(2)(ii), steel pipe at 100 psig or more. Lines installed before July 1, 2020 use 1.1 for Class 1. Read it backwards: to get a Class 3 MAOP of 1,000 psig you must test to at least 1,500 psig.

    Liquid lines (Part 195)

    • Hold at least 125% of MOP for 4 continuous hours.
    • If the line is not visually inspected for leaks during the test, hold another 4 continuous hours at 110% of MOP or more.

    49 CFR 195.304. B31.8 and B31.4 have their own test tables; the operator's test spec combines code and regs.

    Pigging

    Cleaning pig
    Pushes out dirt, rocks, rods and trash left in the line.
    Gauging pig
    Carries a thin aluminum plate sized under the smallest ID. A bent plate means a dent, a buckle or a tight bend somewhere.
    Drying
    After dewatering, foam pigs and dry air or other methods bring the line to the dryness the operator specs. Water left in a gas line causes corrosion and hydrates.

    Tie-ins after the test

    Welds that tie tested sections together are excepted from the test (192.503). Non-welded tie-in joints must be leak tested at operating pressure or more. Because they skip the hydro, tie-in welds usually get 100% NDT and extra scrutiny under operator specs.

    Test water

    • Taking water from a stream and discharging it both usually need permits. Discharge often falls under a state or EPA NPDES hydrostatic test permit.
    • Discharge through energy dissipaters and filters as the permit says. Do not dump on bare ground or into a creek.
    • The operator must dispose of the test medium in a way that minimizes environmental damage (192.515).
    Exclusion zone

    A pressurized pipe stores energy. Keep everyone not needed out of the test area. Stay clear of test heads, caps and pig traps. Never tighten, weld or hammer on a line under test pressure.

    The ditch, the side booms and the product in existing lines are what kill pipeliners. The rules below are minimums.

    Trench and excavation (OSHA 1926 Subpart P)

    RuleNumber
    Protective system required (slope, shore, shield) unless in stable rock5 ft and deeper
    Under 5 ft: still required if the competent person sees signs of cave-in—
    Ladder, ramp or stairs required in trenches4 ft and deeper
    Max lateral travel to a way out25 ft
    Spoil and equipment kept back from edgeat least 2 ft
    Atmosphere testing where a hazard could existdeeper than 4 ft
    Oxygen-deficient atmospherebelow 19.5% O2
    Flammable gas limit (controls required above)20% of LEL

    29 CFR 1926.651 and 1926.652. A competent person inspects the excavation daily before work, as needed during the shift, and after rain or anything that raises the hazard.

    Side booms and suspended pipe

    • Side booms fall under OSHA's crane standard with some sections excluded (1926.1440). The load rating and operating rules of ASME B30.14 apply.
    • Never stand under a load or between the pipe and the ditch.
    • Watch overhead power lines. OSHA's power line rules still apply to side booms.
    • One signal person. Agree on signals before the lift. More in 25.1.

    One-call and locates

    • Call 811 before digging. The ticket must be active and the marks visible.
    • The tolerance zone is the marked width of the facility plus a set distance each side. It varies by state. Most states use 18 in or 24 in.
    • Inside the tolerance zone, expose by hand or vacuum excavation as your state law and the operator require.
    • Foreign pipelines in the ROW often need the other operator's inspector present before you dig near them.

    Tie-ins to live or recently live lines

    • Test the air before and during work: O2, LEL, H2S, CO. Keep monitoring; conditions change when a line is cut.
    • Sour (H2S) service needs its own plan: training, monitors, escape and supplied air. H2S can deaden your sense of smell. Do not trust your nose.
    • Hot taps must be done by a crew qualified to make hot taps (192.627).
    • Purging air with gas (or gas with air) uses a moderately rapid, continuous flow. If the flow cannot be kept up, an inert gas slug goes in first (192.629).
    • Lock out and verify isolation before cutting. Bond across any cut to control static and CP current.

    General site safety: 12.1.

    The numbers you use most on a spread: pipe weight for rigging, water volume for the test, joint counts for the tally, and bend degrees for the bending crew.

    Pipe weight (plain end steel)

    LB/FT = 10.69 × (OD − t) × t
    Worked — NPS 24 × 0.375 in10.69 × (24 − 0.375) × 0.375 = 94.7 lb/ft
    40 ft joint = 94.7 × 40 = 3,788 lb (bare, no coating)

    Same formula as ASME B36.10 plain-end weights. Add coating and concrete weight if present.

    Hoop stress and % SMYS

    HOOP STRESS = P × D ÷ (2 × t)
    Worked — test pressure as % SMYSNPS 24 × 0.375 X65, test at 1,828 psig
    1,828 × 24 ÷ 0.75 = 58,500 psi
    58,500 ÷ 65,000 = 90% SMYS at the low point
    Low spots see more pressure than the gauge up high. The test plan accounts for elevation.

    Hydrotest water volume

    GALLONS PER FOOT = 0.0408 × ID² (ID in inches)
    Worked — 1 mile of NPS 24 × 0.375ID = 24 − (2 × 0.375) = 23.25 in
    0.0408 × 23.25² = 22.05 gal/ft
    × 5,280 ft = about 116,000 gallons per mile

    Joint count

    Worked — 10 miles, 40 ft joints10 × 5,280 = 52,800 ft
    52,800 ÷ 40 = 1,320 joints, and about 1,320 girth welds
    Real joints vary in length. Use the pipe tally, not a round number.

    Bend degrees per diameter

    DEG PER DIAMETER OF ARC = 57.3 ÷ RADIUS (IN DIAMETERS)
    Worked — 12° sag on NPS 24Min radius 30D (29.7) → 57.3 ÷ 30 = 1.91° per diameter
    12 ÷ 1.91 = 6.3 diameters of arc
    6.3 × 2 ft (24 in OD) = about 12.6 ft of bent pipe, minimum
    Spread it over more pipe if you can. Keep tangents at the ends.

    More calculators: 13.1. Always check design and test numbers against the operator's approved documents.

    Check yourself on spread order, codes, line pipe, API 1104, bending, coating, testing and safety.

    New to the book, or can't find something? Start with the tour. Each tutorial below walks you through the real screens one step at a time. Tap Next to move on, or Done to stop.

    Answers by topic

    • Moving around the book: 30.2
    • Searching: 30.3
    • Saved pages and recently viewed: 30.4
    • Tables, drawings and walkthroughs: 30.5
    • Calculators and the cut list: 30.6
    • Your trade, settings and working offline: 30.7
    • Practice quizzes and test prep: 30.8
    • Your plan, billing and cancelling: 30.9
    • Common questions: 30.10
    • Something wrong, or still stuck: 30.11

    The book is split into numbered sections, and each section into numbered pages. 1.3 is page 3 of section 1. Every link in the book uses those numbers.

    The bar along the bottom

    Home
    Your materials, then your sections on short shelves. Tap Home any time to start over.
    Charts
    Every table in the book on one page (0.1). The fastest way to a take-out or a trig constant.
    Calc
    Thirteen calculators and your cut list (13.1).
    Search
    Jumps to the search box on Home.
    Saved
    Pages you saved, then the pages you opened lately.

    The Back button

    Top left of every page. It always takes you to the page you were on before, and back to the same spot on it. Keep tapping to walk back through where you've been. Home on the bottom bar starts fresh.

    Inside a section

    • Open a section and you get its list of pages. Pages marked "inside" hold more pages under them, such as the advanced fab pages under 1.15.
    • At the bottom of every page, Previous and Next step through the section in order.
    • A blue number in the text, like 13.1, is a link. Tap it to go there, and Back to come back.

    The search box on Home searches every page title, keyword and paragraph in the book. Type what you'd say out loud.

    What works

    TypeFinds
    A size: 6", 6 inch, 6inAll the same to search.
    Trade words: rolling, fishmouth, sil-fosThe page that covers it.
    A number: 1.414, B31.3, R-410AConstants, codes and refrigerants.
    Two or three words: copper 90 take outEvery word has to land somewhere on the page, so more words narrow it down.
    A typo: rigidngSearch forgives one wrong letter in longer words.

    Nothing came up?

    • Try fewer words, or the plain name of the fitting or job.
    • Try the Charts page for tables, or the section list on Home.
    • Still missing? Tell us what you searched for (30.11). A search that finds nothing is how we learn what to add.

    Tap ★ Save at the top of any page and it goes on your Saved list. Tap it again to take it off.

    • Saved on the bottom bar shows your saved pages first, then the pages you opened lately, newest first.
    • On the Saved list, the ↑ moves a page to the top and the × removes it.
    • Up to 24 saved pages and the last 15 you opened are kept.
    • Saved pages are kept on this phone. A new phone, or clearing the browser's data, starts the list over.

    Most answers in the book are a table, a drawing or a step-through walkthrough. Each one can be opened up bigger.

    Wide tables
    Swipe sideways to see the rest of the columns, or open the table full screen with the header row held at the top.
    Highlighted cells
    The key number in a table is shaded, such as the 40°F row of the PT chart or the limit you can't go past.
    Take-out tables
    In the fitting tables (1.11), tap a size and the cut length calculator opens on that fitting.
    Drawings
    Tap any drawing to see it full screen, then close it to go back to the page.
    Walkthroughs
    Pages marked GUIDE in a section list have a step-through walkthrough built in. Step forward and back at your own speed. They work with no signal.
    Jump buttons
    Long pages open with a row of buttons under the title. Tap one to go straight to that part of the page.

    Calc on the bottom bar opens all thirteen calculators on one page. Tap along the top to switch. Every one shows its math underneath, so you can check it by hand.

    Typing measurements

    • Type it the way you say it: 18 1/2, 18-1/2 and 18.5 all work.
    • Where a box asks for feet and inches, use both boxes. Leave feet blank for a short piece.
    • Conversions (tab 4) takes a fraction, a decimal, feet and inches, decimal feet or metric, and gives you all of them.

    The cut list

    1. Work out a piece in the cut length or offset calculator.
    2. Tap + Add to cut list. It gets the next piece mark.
    3. Open the Cut list tab to see every piece. The tab shows how many pieces are on it.
    4. Send it to the saw as a text or a link. Whoever opens the link sees the same list.
    5. Clear it when the spool is done. It stays on this phone until you do.
    Check the first one

    Calculators use the book's standard take-outs. Fittings vary by maker and in the box, so check the first fitting out of each box against the number you're using.

    The book is set up for the trade you picked the first time you opened it. You can change that, and the look of the book, any time.

    Your trade

    Tap Change on the bar at the top of Home, or use Your trade in Settings (20.2). Your materials and sections move to the top. Nothing is taken out of the book, and "Whole book" puts it back the way it was.

    Settings worth knowing

    Theme
    Auto, light or dark. Dark is easier at night, light in direct sun.
    Text size
    Follows your phone's size, then scales up from there.
    Gloves mode
    Makes every button and list row big enough to hit with a glove on.
    Keep the screen awake
    Stops the screen going dark halfway through a cut list.

    No signal

    Every table, calculator and walkthrough runs on your phone and works with no signal. Only sending a message to us or a cut list link needs a connection.

    Scored practice quizzes are at the end of the Test Prep section (24) and the HVACR, Sprinkler Fitting, Welding and Pipeline sections (26 to 29).

    • Tap Start. Pick an answer and you see right away whether it's right, and why.
    • 70% passes. Aim for 85% before the real test.
    • The timed mixed test (24) pulls questions from all the licensing and apprenticeship quizzes, against the clock, like the real thing.
    • Section 24 also covers what's on each exam and gives an eight-week study plan. Start there if you're preparing for a license or an entrance test.

    Open Test Prep

    Some pages are free for everyone. The rest of the book opens with a subscription.

    • Free for everyone: the Charts index, Tools & Measuring (19), From the Trade (21), the account pages (20), this Help section, the rigging and job safety pages, and a sample page from most sections.
    • A locked page shows the plans when you open it. Nothing is charged until you choose one.
    • Billing, pausing and cancelling are all in 20.4, step by step.
    • A subscription through the App Store is cancelled in your phone's Settings, under your name, then Subscriptions. You keep access until the end of the period you already paid for.

    The questions people ask most, with short answers.

    Is this a code book?
    No. It's a field reference. Your job spec, the code your area adopted, your drawings and the maker's data always win (20.8).
    My fitting doesn't match the take-out in the book.
    Fittings vary by maker, and grooved, press and PVC take-outs come from maker catalogs. Measure your fitting and type it into the calculator yourself. If a standard fitting is off, report it (30.11).
    Does it cover my state's code?
    The plumbing pages cover the IPC and UPC side by side, and the license prep covers Ohio and West Virginia so far. Local amendments change things, so check what your area adopted.
    Where do the numbers come from?
    Published standards and maker data, named under each table and listed in 20.9.
    How do I know what changed?
    Every version is listed on the What changed page, including every corrected number. A banner on Home tells you when there's a new one.
    Is it in Spanish?
    Spanish is being written by Spanish-speaking fitters, not machine translated. Sign up for word when it's ready in Language (20.3).
    Can I use it for rigging?
    As a reference only. Rigging is done by trained, qualified people under the site's lift plan. Read 25.1.
    Can I share a page with my crew?
    You can send a cut list as a link. For anything else, see what you may and may not copy in 20.7.

    If a number looks wrong, a page is missing, or something in the app doesn't work, tell us. Every message gets read.

    • A wrong number: open the page and tap Report a wrong number on this page near the bottom. The page number goes in for you.
    • An idea, a missing topic, or a question this section didn't answer: tap Suggest something for this page, or use Your say (20.12).
    • Billing or account trouble: see Contact (20.11).
    Help us help you

    Say what page you were on, what you tapped, and what you expected to happen. A screenshot is even better.